Sport-Thieme 2009-2010 by mediapard

5,-

2009-2010 International 2009-2010 School Sports • Club Sports • Fitness • Therapy

Since 1949 60 years experience

Made in Germany We manufacture many products ourselves

Huge selection over 10,000 products

School Sports · Club Sports · Fitness · Therapy Your customer no.

Phone: (+49) 5357 181 543 · www.sport-thieme.com

Dear sports friend,

Your committed and reliable partner in sport since 1949.

The new Sport-Thieme catalogue for 2009-2010 is here. This catalogue offers the most comprehensive range ever of sports articles for schools, clubs and leisure use. Sport-Thieme me Thie . Dr. H.-R has 60 years experience in this high quality area and is committed to a policy of ds. dar stan products that meet safety e and be Flick through the pages of the catalogu ghted to deli be convinced! The export team will ice. offer you more information and adv to you. We look forward to being of service

Sport-Thieme metal workshop

Sport-Thieme timber workshop

Maintenance and repair service for sports equipment

Warehouse at Heidwinkel (Grasleben)

Sport-Thieme GmbH Dr. Hans-Rudolf Thieme discover the P.S. Contact us now for an offer and rt-Thieme. wonderful world of sports with Spo

Grasleben

Hamburg

Berlin

Frankfurt Munich

Warehouse at Heidwinkel (Grasleben)

School Sports · Club Sports · Fitness · Therapy Sport-Thieme GmbH · Helmsteder Straße 40 · D-38367 Grasleben · Germany Phone: (+49) 5357 181 543 · Fax: (+49) 5357 181 921 ·

info@sport-thieme.com · www.sport-thieme.com

s for t c u d o r p ort 10,000 p s f o s e p ty over 100

SERVICES • Simple, quick and easy to order • Immediate delivery information • SSL encoded • Online order form • Partner programme

DOWNLOADS • Video and audio sequences: have a look at the videos of many products • PDF catalogue – The whole catalogue on your screen!

SPECIAL OFFERS • Over 200 products are constantly significantly reduced • Big price reductions on remaining stocks!

www.sport-thieme.com

Index A – B School sports · Club sports · Fitness · Therapy Sport-Thieme GmbH · Helmstedter Straße 40 38367 Grasleben · GERMANY Phone: (+49) 5357 181 543 · Fax: (+49) 5357 181 921

info@sport-thieme.com · www.sport-thieme.com 7 Mile Boots 304 ABS Power Balls 22,170 Accessories for boundary poles 117 Accessories for equipment cupboards 125 Additional crossbar 50 Aero Step 160,236 Air hockey 298 Air pumps 9,32-33,146 Air Tramps 32,148,293 Airgo 237 All Trainer 138,159 Anti: - Aggressions bats 306 - Slip underlay 218,221,245-246 Aqua 130,132,137-138,141-142 Aqua: - Pedalo 142,255 - Sport, All Trainer 138 - Sport, Aqua Disc 138 - Sport, Aqua Feet 140 - Sport, Aqua Fins 140 - Sport, Aqua Paddle 140 - Sport, Aqua Rings 142 - Sport, Aqua Stepper 140 - Sport, Aqua Twin 140 - Sport, Aquatic Walking Stick 138 - Sport, Comfy Floats 138-139,142 - Sport, Disc 137-138 - Sport, Fitness Band 163 - Sport, Fun Board 137 - Sport, Gymnastics Ball 138 - Sport, Hedgehog Rings 241 - Sport, Hydro Noodle 142 - Sport, Swimming boards 131 - Sport, Swimming hoops 143 - Sport, Swimming Rolls 135 - Sport, Tennis Rings 18,92,135,285,287 - Sport, Water Jogging 140-141 - Weights 138,140,142 Arm trainers 240,242 Aroma balls 27 Asymmetric bars 199 Attaching bar for wall bars 204 Badminton: - Balls 70-71,288 - Display boards 72,113,116 - Floor marking band 70,116 - Handle tape 70 - Multi Games Posts 63 - Nets 63,72 - Posts 72 - Racquets 70-71 - School sport, BISI concept 71 - Teaching systems 70,287-288

1l 23

- Tensioning Mechanisms 72 Back care 236 Back stretcher 188 Back trainers 188 Badminton 70-71,287 Balance: - Balls 257 - Beams 168 - Board 250,276 - Boards 202,246,276,292 - Children's carousel 292 - Cushions 236-237 - Disc 292 - Games 248,250,257,266,292 - Half balls 248 - Hedgehog 242 - Pads 166,168,236,238 - Paths 202,242,248-249,266 - Rolls 246 - Rope 249 - Seesaw 168 - Shells 292 - Steps 249 - Stones 248,266 - Stools 249 - tops 100,245 - Training 160,166,168 - Trike 278 - Walls 266 Balance training 100-101,160,247 Balancing boards 190,197,199, 201-202,205 Balanco 250 Ball: - Carrier 34,122 - Pool cleaner 270 Ball bases 25 Ball bucket 74 Ball carrying nets 18,25,34 Ball compressors 32 Ball cushion 237 Ball mountain 146 Ball nipple 33 Ball pools 270 Ball pump 32 Ball pumps 9,32-33,146 Ball repair tools 33 Ball return games 287-288 Ball shells 26 Ball throwing machines 76 Ball trolley 121 Ballet bars 233 Balloon shells 26,30 Balloons 26,30

Export Service

Dispatch Service

is only a phone call, fax or e-mail away. If you need any information or assistance, just contact your experienced Sport-Thieme Export Team, we will gladly answer your questions!

If you have a question concerning deliveries, dial the following lines quoting your customer number and order number. They are to be found on all Sport-Thieme documents.

Just dial

+49 5357 181543

+49 5357 181307

or fax us on

+49 5357 181921 or e-mail to

+49 5357 181915

info@sport-thieme.com Balls: - ABS Power Balls 22 - Active Ball 154 - Aroma balls 27 - Bags 68 - Ball Mountains 146 - Baseballs 43 - Basketballs 9-11 - Bathing balls 144 - Beach footballs 6 - Beach handballs 13 - Beach volleyballs 14 - Bell balls 24,261 - Catch Ball 31,288 - Colibri balls 13,21 - Cuddle Ball 31 - Ele balls 6,13,16-17,20 - Foam balls 21 - Footbags 31 - Footballs 17 - Fun Ball 27-29 - Futsal balls 7 - Goal balls 24 - Gymnastics balls 23,25,138 - Gymnic balls 24 - Handballs 12-13,20-21,27,52 - Hedgehog balls 22,24,241 - Hockey balls 64-65,75 - Hopping balls 24 - Hopping+Kneading+Balls 30 - Indoor footballs 6-7 - Intercrosse 42 - Japanese Paper Balls 26 - Koosh balls 29,258,285 - Medicine balls 18-20 - Mega Ball 27 - Multi Balls 23 - Neon Rainbow balls 27,144 - Nerf Vortex 31,92,285 - Over Ball 26 - Pezzi balls 25 - Physio balls 25,28-29 - Playground TORAN 23 - Playing balls 20,27-28,30,258,287 - Rainbow balls 27,144 - Redondo Ball 22,31 - Rubber balls 26 - Rugby balls 17 - Sala footballs 7 - Senso Ball 24 - Sitting balls 24-25 - Sling balls 18 - Slo-mo balls 26 - Soccer balls 4-7,20-21,27,31,144

Your committed and reliable partner in sport since 1949.

- Soft balls 20,43,74,285,288 - Soft foam balls 13,20 - Soft Play balls 30 - Space Ball 288 - Spiky ball 29 - Sport ball set 21 - Street basketballs 10 - Tennis balls 20,74-75,288 - Therapy balls 26,28 - Throwing balls 18,28,30,288 - Touch ball 22,135 - Unball 31 - Völker ball 18 - Vollball 19,27 - Volley soft balls 16,20 - Volleyballs 9,14-16,20-21,31 - Water polo balls 151 - Wiggly Giggly Ball 28 Bandages 105,172 Bar swings 208 Barbell stands 158 Barbells 158,175-176 Bars 199 Bars: - Asymmetric bars 199 - Competition bars 198-199 - Hand protection 198 - Mat sets 198 - Multi-purpose bars 198 - Parallel bars 198-199 - Pedalo 254 - Pull up bars 170, 204 - School gymnastics bars 198 - Training bars 198 - Transport 199 Basal stimulation 22,236,241-243,249 Baseball: - Balls 42-43 - Bats 43 - Gloves 42-43 Basketball: - Accessories 35,41,63 - Back boards 36-37 - Basketballs 9-11 - Baskets 36,40 - Games 282 - Ladder 36 - Multi Games Posts 63 - Nets 36 - Sets 35,38-41,63,279 - Street basketball sets 38-40,279 - Street basketballs 10 - Teaching boards 102 - Test packages 8

Index B – F - Wall frames 35 Bathing balls 144 Bathing caps 149 Bathing fun products: - Ball mountains 146 - Film slide 145,280 - Float with Holes 145 - Jive Board 146 - Swimming and diving hoops 128 - Swimming floats 145-146 - Swimming islands 143,148 - Water Game Park 144 - Water play bricks 146,272 - Water rings 143 - Water slide 143 Bathing mats 127,149 Bats and Racquets: - Intercrosse 42 - Tennis 74 - Table tennis 78,84,86 - Unihoc 66 Bavarian Ice Curling 282 Beach ball: - Balls 287 - Ground sockets 59 - Handballs 13,21 - Volleyball sets, accessories 58-60,279 Beach soccer balls 6 Beach volleyball 279 Beach volleyball: - Balls 9,14 - Posts 59,62 - Sets 58-59,279 Beaded Rope 229 Beams 199 Bean bags 231,241,264,284-286 Bell balls 24,261 Belly Bumper 306 Belt band 98 Benches 126-127 Bicycles 276 Billiard tables 300,302 Billiards 300-301 Boccia 283 Body protection 171-172 Body pump 158 Bodylastic 164 Boßel balls 302 Boßeln 282,302 Bottle holder 104 Boules 302 Bounce ball 287 Bounce board 294 Bouncing ball 24,29 Bouncing castles 263,293 Bouncy ball 24 Bouncy mats 273 Boundary flags 117 Bowflex 175 Bowling 54,115,284-285 Bowling: - Balls 283 - Games 283 Boxing 171-173 Boxing - Arm 171 - Bandages 172 - Dummy 173 - Gloves 172-173 - Head protection 172 - Punch bags 171,174

- Punch pad 171-172 Covers for sitting cushions 237,273 - Skipping ropes 171,229 Crawl Tadpoles 130 - Mouth protection 171 Crawling Tunnel 274 Boxing dummy 173 Crawling Walzer 273 Boxing gloves 172 Croquet 283 Braig bars 233 Cross: Breaking down aggression 173,306 - Skaters 304 Building brick set 272 - Trainers 183 Building bricks 95,272 Cross bars 63,90-91 Buntings 152 Cubes 272,284 Caged shelved trolley 120,147 Cuddle bags 273 Care set 185 Cuddle corners 273 Carousel 100,250,292 Cupboards 123-125 Carpet tiles 266 Curling 282 Cases 105 Cushions 236,243-244 Catch Ball 31,288 Cushions for jumping 263,293 Catching gloves 42 Cylinder locks 124-125 Caterpillars 145,263 Dance cloths 228,231,259,262 CDs 112 Dancing sacks 264 CDs: Dani Sandbox 242 - Fitness 155 Darts 299 - Flexi Bar 155 Deuserband 53,164 Changing benches 126-127 Devil Sticks 258 Chess game 302 Diabolo 258 Children's: Dice Stacking 281 - Carousel 292 Digi: - Exercise mats 271 - PC interface set 110 - Gymnastics mats 225 - Sports event timer 112 - Hurdles 282 - Stopwatches 110 - Slide 143 Disc Boccia 286 - Vehicles 276-278 Discs, Discus 96-97 Children's gymnastics 263,271 Disk Catcher 289 Children's tennis set 75 Display systems 61,72,78,113,116 Circle Jump 288 Distance measures 115 Circus 259 Diving accessories 128-129,132-133,286 Circus products 257-259,276 Diving boards, accessories 150 Climbing: Diving masks 129,132 - Arc 274 Dominos 281 - Bars 207 Door bar 170 - Frames 202 Door Gym 170 - Houses 206 Double skipping rope, Double Dutch 229 - Ladders 190,205 Draughts 302 - Nets 200,207 Drinks holder 104 - Rope clamp system 208 Dumbbells and barbells 157,159,177 - Ropes 209 Dynamed 240 - Running board 190,205 Earth balls 27,32 - Walls 205,207 Egg flips 135 Climbing cube 202 Elastic bands 72,98,134,162,165,239 Climbing house 206 Elé balls 13,16-17,20 Climbing ropes 209 Equipment cupboards 124-125 Climbing wall 206 Equipment trolleys 34,120-122,147,287 Clothes hangers 149 Ergometers 179-181 Cluster swings 268 Expander 164,169 CM Band 134,165 Exercise gymnastics: Coin operated billiards 300 - Balls 23-25,31,34,138,237 Colibri Balls 21 - Band hangers 231 Colour squares 262 - Bands 163-164,231,262 Comfy: - Bean bags 231,264 - Connection pieces 139 - Comfy Floats 139 - Floats 131 - Dancing sacks 264 - Mats 139 - Equipment 228 Compresses 104-105 - Gymnastics bars 230 Compressors 32 - Gymnastics clubs 230 Cool bandages 104 - Hoops 228,275 Cooperation games 262 - Mats 167-168,200,214,216,224-227,271 Coordination ladders 53,76,89 - Pezzi balls 25 CorpoMed health cushions 244 - Redondo balls 22 Cotton cloths 262 - Rhythm cloths 228,231,259,262 Counting bags 284 - Rolls 24 Court markings 58-59,117,119 - Rope 264 Covers 85,90,295 - Rytmo bands 231

Phone +49 53 57 - 181 543 · Fax +49 53 57 - 181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

- Sand bags - Skipping ropes - Stool - Swing bands - Test packages - Yoga blocks Eye covers Fat boards Feather football Figure Former Film slide Finger trainers First Aid: - Cases - Compresses - Cool bandage - Refills - Sanitary products - Sports cases - Tape bands First aid products Fitness: - ABS Power Ball - Accessories

242 229,264 232 231 8 167 261 75 31 169 145,280 239 105 104-105 104-105 105 104-105 105 104-105 104-105

22,170 106-107,154,157, 163,166,185 - Aero Step 160-161,236 - All Trainer 138,159 - Altitude /heart rate monitors 107,182 - Aqua Fitness 137-138,141-142 - Back trainers 188 - Bands 53,163-166,231 - Barbell set 158 - CDs 155 - Centre 181,183,188 - CM band 165 - Cross Trainer 182-184 - Deuserband 53,164 - Door bar 170 - Ergometer 179-181 - Expander 164 - Figure Former 169 - Finger weights 159 - Flat benches 188 - Grip master 159,241 - Gymnastics mats 224,226-227 - Hand trainers 22,159,238,241 - Hanging shoes 170 - Hanging Stretching Gravity Trainer 188 - Heart rate monitors 106-107 - Home trainers 178,182,185 - Impander 159 - Indoor Cycling 187 - Pezzi balls 25 - Physio Basic Pro 162,164,239 - Pilates 166 - Pull-up bars 170 - Push-up handles 159 - Reivo rubber bands 165 - Rowing machines 187 - Skipping ropes 229 - Speed Rope 229 - Step counters 108 - Steps 140,160-162,236 - Stomach muscle trainer 188 - Stonies weight balls 159 - Sweat mats 183 - Thera+Band weight balls 238 - Thera-Band 162,238-239 - Toner 163 - Training machines/legs 242 - Training ropes 164,169

1l 23

Index F– L - Trampolines 169,234 - Treadmills 185-186 - Tubes 161-165 - Weight bands 134,157 - Weight lifter's belt 175 - Weight vests 156 - Weights 157-159,175-177 - Weights benches 188 - Weights stands 176-177 - Weights storage stands 157,176-177 - Whole body trainers 154-155 Fitness DVDs 170 Fitness studio equipment 181 Fix point 117 Flag Football 17 Flags 117 Flexi: - Bars 155 - Bar, accessories 155 - Rolls 222 Flipcharts 102 Flippers 133 Float with holes 145 Floor cover padding 271,273 Floor coverings 222 Floor fixing 207,296 Floor seesaws 274 Floor ball 64,66-68 Foam blocks 146,272 Folding mats 226,271 Foot batons 231,264 Foot seesaw 242 Foot bags 31 Football 45 Football: - Accessories 55 - Balls 4-7,20-21,27,144 - Beach footballs 6 - Footballs 4,7,31 - Goal net hangers 48 - Goal wall 56 - Goals 44-49,56-57,291 - Ground frames 48 - Indoor football goals 47 - Leisure area goals 56-57 - Mini-goals 57,69 - Reivo football target bands 53,98 - Slalom bars 53 - Street soccer football goals 47-48 - Table football 296-297 - Teaching aids 55 - Teaching boards 102 - Training 55 - Training aids 53-54 - Training hurdles 54,95 Football training 55 Footballs 17,20 Free kick training wall 55 Frisbees 286,289 Fun badminton 287 Fun cushions 273 Fun dice 284 Fun Noodles 139 Games: - and net posts 41,60,62-63,305 - Collections 280 - Obstacle courses 275 - Sets 290-291 Games balls 20,27-28,30 Games bin 291 Games elements 272

1l 23

Games nets 62 Games post systems 61-63,72,305 Games posts, accessories 41 Games products 143,146,265 Games systems 31 Giant: - Balloons 26 - Sitting bags 273 Giant top 292 Go Karts 278 Goals: - Football 44-47,56,291 - Goal nets 49 - Handball 49-52 - Hockey 57,64-65,69 - Indoor football 47 - Leisure area goals 56-57 - Mini goals 57,69,279,291 - Small goals 48,57,69,279,291 - Water polo goals 144,151 Goal anchors 48,50,293 Goal ball 24 Goal hangings 50 Goalie: - Jerseys 68 - Masks 68-69 - Trousers 68 Goal nets, accessories 48-49,293 Goal wall 56,290-291 Goal weights 48 Gong tops 292 Grass Skis 265 Gravity Boots 170 Grip paste 12 Grip master 159,241 Groin protection 171 Ground anchors 48,50 Ground frames 48,88 Ground markings 70,99,116 Ground padding 273 Ground sockets 44,60,62,117 Ground sockets and sleeves 40,59-60 Ground supports 117 Gym wheels 274 Gymnastics: - Asymmetric bars 199 - Balance beams 197,199,201-202,205 - Bar mat set 198 - Bar swing 208 - Bars 198-199 - Climbing bar 207 - Climbing net 200,207 - Climbing slide 205 - Climbing wall 205 - Clubs 230 - Combination gymnastics walls 206-207 - Floor gymnastics mats 214,222-223 - Games and gymnastics mats 207, 214,226 - Gymnastics bars 230 - Gymnastics benches 201 - Gymnastics horses 197 - Gymnastics landscapes190-191,193,202 - Gymnastics stools 190-191 - Gymnastics Turtle 280 - Jumping and gymnastics stools 203 - Kombi gymnastics mats 222 - Ladder 202 - Landing mats 221 - Lüne Combinato 267 - Lüneburger Stegel 203

- Magnesia 198 - Mats 200,214-216 - Mini bar 208 - Pull up bars 170,204 - Skipping ropes 253 - Sloping boards 204-205 - Soft floor mats 218,221 - Springboards, accessories 196 - Trapeze spring boxes 197 - Varianta gymnastics equipment 202 - Vaulting boxes 192-193,195,202 - Vaulting horses 197 - Wall bars 170,204-207 Gymnastics bars 275 Gymnastics benches 201 Gymnastics blocks 275 Gymnastics box: - Moving wheels 194 - Safety moving device 194 Gymnastics box seesaw 194 Gymnastics boxes 192-195,202-203 Gymnastics horses 197 Gymnastics kits 191 Gymnastics mats 215-216,271 Gymnic balls 22,24-25 Gymstick™ 154 Half ball stilts 256 Half hoops 275 Half rolls 244 Hammer 96 Hammer throwing 96 Hammock seat 269 Hammocks 269 Hamster wheel 274 Hand counters 111 Hand pumps 33, 146, 293 Hand trainers 22,159,238,240-242 Handball: - Beach handballs 13,21 - Goal hanging 50 - Goal nets 49 - Goals 50-52 - Grip paste 12 - Handballs 9,12-13,20-21,27,52 - Mini handball goals 50,52 - Nets 49,52 - Pyramids 52 - Target triangle 52 - Teaching boards 102 Handballs 12 Hand-eye coordination 240,281 Hangers 227,230,234 Hangers, clothes 149 Hanging Shoes 170 Hanging stretching machines 188 Head protection 172 Health cushions 244 Heart rate monitoring equipment 106-107 Heart rate monitors 106-108,182 Hedgehog balls 22,24, 30, 135 Hedgehog rings 22,241 High bike 277 High Jump 63,90-92 High jump crossbar 91 Hildesheim Swing Bar 209 Hockey: - Balls 64-65,68-69,75 - Goals 57,64-65,68-69 - Masks 69 - Nets 64-65,68-69 - Playing borders 65

Your committed and reliable partner in sport since 1949.

- Pucks 64,68-69 - Replacement heads 64 - Sticks 64-65,69 - Transport containers 65 Hologram foil 228 Home trainers 178,181-182,185 Hook rail 127 Hopping cushions 263,293 Hopping games 282 Hopping sacks 265 Howling tube 280 Hula-Hoops 279 Hurdle accessories 94-95,103,275,282 Hurdle trolley 94 Identification vests 33,114 Impanders 159 Indiaca 287 Indoor: - Boßeln 302 - Footballs 6 Indoor footballs 7 Indoor handball goals 50 Indoor hockey rink boards 65 Insulated containers 104 Intercrosse 42 Japanese paper balls 26 Javelins 93 Javelins, accessories 92-93 Jive Board 146 Jog Ball 259,287 Judo mats 145,303 Juggling 258-259,262 Juggling bars 258 Jump ropes 91 Jumping: - and gymnastics stool 203 - bars 92 Jumping boots 304 Jumping equipment 90 Jumping shoes 304 Jumping and action sheets 260-261, 268 Just for Kids 208 Karts 278 Kett Car 278 Kettle bells 175 Key bands 149 Kids athletics 287 Kilometre counters 108 KiwiDo 231 Knautsch Ball 31 Knead balls 28 Knotted rope 209 Kombi: - Gymnastics construction kits 191 - Gymnastics stools 190-191 Koosh balls 29,258,285 Ladders 202 Landing mats 218,221 Lane dividers, accessories 152-153 Large building blocks 272 Learning aids 68 Learning toys 28,284 Leg floats 140 Leg trainer 242 Leisure area goals 56-57

Leisure games

9,18,28-29,31,92, 229,256-257,265,274,276, 278-291,296,298-302,305 Life saving equipment 153 Light gymnastics mats 216

Index L– S Locker and key bands 149 Lockers 123 Long jump 88 Loopies 29,288 Lordosis cushions 236,244 Lumbar cushions 236 Lüne Combinato 267 Lüneburger Stegel boards 203 Lüneburger “Stegel” set 203 Lying down 271,273 Magic cord 264 Magnesia 198 Marking: - Aids 115 - /Border cones 54,115,284 - Cones 103 Marking bands 63,70,116,293,305 Marking carts 118 Marking carts, paint 118-119 Marking cones 54,115 Marking paint 118-119 Marking paint, replacements 118 Marking plates 115 Marking saucers 54,115 Massage: - Cushions 243 - Equipment 22,236,243 - Mats 236,243 - Oil 105 Mats: - Anti-slip underlay 218,221,246 - Bar mat set 198 - Gymnastics mats 167-168,224-227 - Floor gymnastics mat 223,303 - Folding mats 271 - for climbing hexagon 206 - Games and gymnastics mats 207,226,273 - Gymnastics mats 200,214-216,271 - Judo mats 145,303 - Kombi gymnastics mats 216,222 - Kombi landing mats 220 - Kombi soft mats 219 - Landing mats 218,221 - Light gymnastics mats 216 - Massage 236,243 - Mini mats 271 - Soft mats 218 - Training mats 222 - Transport trolleys 216,218,223,227 Mat protection 218 Material trolleys 120,139,147 Maxi swing 268 Measuring aids 117 Measuring products 108 Measuring tapes 115 Medicine balls 18-20 Megaphones 116,149 MFT Discs 246 Micro-cellular rubber balls 26 Mini: - Bike 304 - Trampoline 235 Mini badminton 288 Mini golf 305 Mirrors 232 Moon hopper 278 Monitors for heart rate 106-108,182 Multi: - Balls 23 - Games posts 63

Multi child swing 268 Neck supports 244 Needle valves 32-33 Neon rainbow balls 27,144 Nerf Vortex ball 31,92,285 Nets: - Accessories 49 - Badminton 63,72 - Balls 25,34 - Football 44,48-49,57,293 - Games nets 62 - Handball 49 - Hockey 57,64-65,69 - Table tennis 78,80,82 - Tennis 63,76 - Transport nets 140 - Volleyball 58-61,63 Net ball 305 Net rolling 61 Nock balls 92,97 Nordic Blading 304 Nordic Skater 304 Nordic Walking 154 Obstacle system 275 Outdoor trampolines 294 Outdoor: - Table football 296 - Volleyball 62 Padlocks 121 Parachutes 260-261,268 Pedal Trainer 242 Pedalos 101,142,252,254-255,257,290 Pedasan walking drum 257 Pedo-Bike 276 Pétanque 302 Pezzi balls 22,24-25 Physio ball 22 Physio Flip 240,242 Pilates 166-168,244 Plates for marking 115 Platform swing 269 Play barrels 265,273 Player's cabins, accessories 114 Playground TORAN 23 Plifix 117 Pogo stick 278 Polar 107-108,182 Pole vault 90,92 Pool Noodles 139,142 Post protection padding 59-60,62 Posts 60,62,72 Power Pogo 278 Proprioceptive training 100-101,169,236, 245-247 Protective shoe covers 149 Pucks 64 Pull buoy, accessories 130,132 Pull up bars 170,204 Pulling ropes 264 Pumps 32,293 Pumps 33,118,146,255,293 Punch cylinders 173,306 Punch pads 171-172 Push bike 276 Push-up handles 159 Pyramido 269 Quick ball 285 Radar 55,108 Radio-controlled clocks 113 Rainbow balls 27,144 Recumbent trike 278

Redondo ball 22,31 Reel Trolleys 152-153 Referee's accessories 116-117 Referee's whistles 116 Reflective vests 114 Reflex boxing trainers 173 Rehabilitation 244,246,254 Reivo: - Accessories 98 - Elastic bands 53,72,98,163 - Fitness bands 98,163 - Fitness tubes, toners 161-163 - Ground markings 99 - Gymnastics mats 214,216 - Hurdles 94 - Kombi convertible mats 217 - Kombi landing mats 220 - Landing mats 221 - Rubber bands 165 - Training mats 222 - Trapeze boxes 197 - Volleyball smash aid 61 Relay batons 97 Replacement parts for compressors 32 Resistance trainers 53,98 Reversible vests 114 Rhythm cloths 228,259,262 Ring throwing games 282,285 Rings 18,135,287 River stones 266 Rocking board 100,246-247 Rocking products 100,247 Rola-Bola 246,276 Roll stilts 256 Roller board: - Flags 253 - Paddles 251 - Tracks 200 Roller boards 194,200,251-253,290 Roller slide 200,202 Roller track 200,202 Rondo round sheet 261 Rope ladders 209 Rope plates 209 Rope skipping 171,229,253,264 Rope swings 209 Ropes 208,264 Round rope 264 Rounders and throwing balls 18 Rowing machines 187 Rowing products 187 Rubber: - cables 211 - Twist 282 Rugby balls 17 Running Cans 256 Sand boxes 242 Sand snake 249 Sandbags 242 Saturn rings 54,103,115 Scoop game 287 Scooters 276-277 Senso ball 24 Sensory integration 200,202,208,269 Shelved trolley accessories 120 Shot puts 96-97 Shuttle balls 288 SI systems 200,202,269 Silicon spray 185 Sitting bags 273 Sitting balls 24-25,236-237

Phone +49 53 57 - 181 543 · Fax +49 53 57 - 181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Sitting cushions 237 Sitting elements 273 Skate Bike 276 Skateboards 304 Skates 304 Skating shoes 304 Skating/Roller blading 304 Skipping ropes 171,229,253,264 Slalom bars 53,55 Slide 205 Slide Walker 245 Slides 143,145,200,202,280 Sliding tracks 200,202 Sling balls 18 Slo-mo balls 26 Small parachutes 260-261 Snorkels 129 Social games 143 Soft: - Play 270,272-273,284 - Tramps 263 Soft balls 13,20-21,74,285,288 Soft floor mats 218 Soft foam balls 13,17,20-21 Soft mats 218 Summer Ski 265 Sound Belt 139 Space Ball 288 Speed Ropes 229,264 Speeders 73 Speedminton 73 Spider balls 29 Spinning bikes 187 Sport stacking 281 Sport tops 100,245-246 Sports tiles 266 Springboard 101,247 Springboard, accessories 150,196 Squeezies 28 Stabiliser 101,247 Stacking 281 Stacking aids 25 Start Numbers 116 Starting blocks for athletics 89 Starting blocks, starting aids 89 Starting clapboard 89,116 Step counters 108 Steps 140,160-162,169 Steps, accessories 161 Stilts 256 Stomach muscle: - Bench 188 - Trainer 170 - Trainer 188 Stonies, weight balls 129,159 Stools 232,248-249 Stopwatches 109-112 Storage boxes 34,122,287 Storage for: - Balls 34,120,122,287 - Badminton racquets 70 - Comfy Floats 139 - Games pieces 302 - Gymnastics balls 25 - Gymnastics bars 230 - Gymnastics clubs 230 - Gymnastics equipment 228 - Roller boards 252 - Skipping ropes 229 Storage stands 157-158,177 Street:

1l 23

Index Sâ&#x20AC;&#x201C; Z - Basketball 10,38-40,279 - Hockey 69 - Soccer 47-48,69 Strength training 154,157-160,164 Sumo Wrestlers 280 Supporting aids 244 Suspended swing 208,263,268 Sweat mat 183 Swimming: - Aqua cycling 137 - Aqua disc 137-138 - Aqua Feet 140 - Aqua pull band 134 - Aqua Rings 142 - Aqua step 140 - Aquatic Walking Stick 138 - Arm pull training aid 130,132,134 - Bathing caps 149,151 - Comfy Floats 138-139,142 - Crawl Tadpoles 130 - Diving games 128-129 - Diving obstacles 128 - Egg flips 135 - Flippers 130,133 - Hand paddle 135 - Hydro Noodle 142 - Jive Board 146 - Lane dividers, accessories 152-153 - Lane markers, accessories 134,152-153 - Loopies 288 - Pool Noodles 139 - Pull Buoy, accessories 130,132 - Reel trolleys 152-153 - Snorkels 129,135 - Sport and therapy tops 245 - Stabilisation trainers 137 - Swim vests 130,142 - Swimming aids 130-131,134-135, 138,142 - Swimming and diving hoops 128 - Swimming bars 144 - Swimming belts 141 - Swimming boards 131,142,146 - Swimming collars 130 - Swimming floats 144-147 - Swimming goggles 129,132 - Swimming islands 143,148 - Swimming rolls 135 - Swimming+toys 128,143,146 - Swimsuits 151 - Toys 143,146,148 - Training accessories 130,132,135 - Training ropes 134 - Water game park 144 - Water jogging belt 141 Swimming boards 131-132,135 Swing accessories 268 Swing bands 231 Swing bars 209 Swing boards 208,245 Swing shells 268,292 Swings 209,263,268-269 Swivel wheels 193 Table football 296-297 Tables for billiards 300-302 Table tennis 80 Table tennis: - Accessories 77,84 - Balls 77,79 - Bats 77-79,84,86,287 - Counting machines 78,113,116

1l 23

- Cover 84-85 - Methodical bats 77 - Mini tables 83 - Nets, 78,80,82,86-87 - Plates 82,86-87 - Sets 79 - Tables 80-87 - Transport trolleys 80 - Under frame 86-87 Table tennis concrete tables 86 Tactics boards 68,102 Tactile games 266 Take off boards, accessories 88 Tape band 104 Target boards 36 Target carpets 284,286 Target throwing walls 286 Tactics folders 102 Teaching boards 102 Team sashes 114 Tennis: - Balls, racquets 20,74-75,288 - Ball buckets 74 - Ball basket 75 - Children's tennis sets 75 - MFT Multi Function Disc 246 - Nets, accessories 76,305 - Racquets 74-75 - Training aids 76,89,245 - Throwing machines 76 Tennis rings 18,92,135,285,287 Tensioning mechanisms 62 Test packages 8,21 Thera: - Band 162,238-239 Thera-Band books 239 Therapy: - Balls 22,24,26,28,135,241,261 - Bean bags 231,241,264 - Finger weights 159 - Games 306 - Goal ball 24 - Gymnastics turtle 280 - Hagemed cube 244 - Hammocks 269 - Hand trainers 159,238,241 - Hedgehog balls 241 - Hedgehog rings 22,241 - Modelling clay 241 - Mirror balls 270 - Physio balls 25 - Physio rolls 24 - Rolls 24,244 - Senso-Ball 24 - Stonies weight balls 129,159 - Tops 100,169,245-246,250,292 - Touch ball 22,135 - Walking bars 244 Thermal printers 109-110 Throwing balls 18 Throwing bars 18,92,97 Throwing discs 27,96,286,289 Throwing games 285 Throwing plates 289 Throwing stones 97 Time Timer 112 Tops 100,169,245-246,250,268,292 Touch ball 22,135 Trainer's cabins, accessories 114 Training accessories 151 Training aids 53-55,95,98,103,115,134

Training Cuboid 248 Training ropes 134,164 Training vests 134,156 Trampoline accessories 210,294 Trampolines 101,169,210-211, 234-235,247,263,293-295 Trampolino 286 Transport nets 140 Transport trolleys 34,121,158,230 Transport trolleys: - for balls 25,34,120-122,147,287 - for court borders 65 - for equipment 121 - for gymnastics boxes 195 - for indoor goals 50 - for mats 216,218,222-223,303 - for mini tramps 211 - for posts 122 - Hook rails 120 Transportation castors 201 Trapeze bars 208-209 Trapeze boxes 197 Treadmills 185-186 Tricycle 277-278 Trikes 278 Trimilin 235,295 Tripez 209 Trolley for gymnastics mats 215 Tschouk ball 52,279 Tubes 161-162,164-165 Tunnels 274 Tyre swing 263 Unicycles 257 Unihockey 64,66-69 Varianta gymnastics equipment 202 Vario: - Elastic bands 72,98 - Gymnastics boxes 195 Varussell 250 Vaulting horses 197 Vein trainers 236,242 Vehicle, recumbent 278 Vestibular trainer 169,246-247 Viking vehicles 277 VĂślkerball 18 Vollball 19 Volleyball: - Bags 14 - Balls 15-16 - Beach volleyballs 14 - Nets, accessories 58-59,61-63 - Posts, accessories 59-60,62-63 - Set 9,61 - Sets 9, 59-62 - Smash device 61 - Tensioning mechanism 60 - Umpire's chair 60 - Volleyballs 9,14-16,20-21,27,31 Volley soft balls 20 Wall: - Impact protection 270 - Storage 25 Walking bars 142,244 Walking drums 265, 257 Wall bar Combinations 206 Wall bars 170,204-207 Wall console 122 Wall fastening 50,218 Wall storage 34,157 Watches and clocks 106-108,110, 112-113,151

Your committed and reliable partner in sport since 1949.

Water: - Basketball 144 - Bike 148 - Gymnastics 137,141-142 - Jogging 140-141 - Play blocks 146 - Slides 143 - Springboards 150 - Therapy 142,146 - Toys 143,146-148 - Volleyball 144 Water Game Park 144 Water jogging: - Equipment 140-141 - Gloves 141 - Shoes 140 - Weights 140-141 Water sports equipment 137-138,141-142 Water gymnastics 137,140-142 Wawago 101,254 Wedge cushions 237 Wedges 244,248 Weights: - Bars 175-176 - Benches 188 - Discs 158,175-176 - Storage stands 157-158,176-177 Weight bands 134,157 Weight bars 158,175,230 Weight discs 176 Weight lifter's belt 175 Weight training 157,159-160,188 Weight training products 175,188 Weights 157-159,175-177 Weights bags 48 Weights vests 134,156 Weight disc 176 Wet marking carts 118 Weykick 281 Whistles 116 Whole body trainers 154 Wiggly Giggly Ball 28 Wooden blocks 275 Wooden stools 232 Writing boards 102 XCO trainer 156 Yoga 167 Yoga mats 167 Zip Play 285

XYZ

General Terms and Conditions Sport-Thieme GmbH, Helmstedter Str.40, 38368 Grasleben, Germany represented by the Managing Director Dr. Hans-Rudolf Thieme, shall implement your order on the basis of the following terms and conditions. 1. Prices and Completion of Contract Legal value added tax is contained in the prices to the consumer. Prices are quoted in Euro. In so far as no contract exists between you and us, the prices listed in the price list are subject to alteration and an interim sale of the product mentioned in the catalogue remains reserved. You will find information on the duration of the validity of each of our limited offers where they are offered in the Internet shop. The sales contract for the article selected by you becomes valid when we accept your order. This comes into effect through “confirmation of contract” in text form, the notification of the delivery or the handing over of goods. If the price supplied for the order no longer applies, e.g. as a result of interim changes to our price list and/or catalogue prices or should the product not be available for delivery anymore, we shall inform you after inputting the order, so that you can choose if you wish to continue with the order under the changed conditions or abandon the order altogether. 2. Return If you wish to return goods outside of the conditions of guarantee please contact us at: info@sport-thieme.com or telephone: +49 5357 181 305. Please note that there is no right of return on: a) CD’s, videos/DVDs, cassettes or software where the seal is broken, b) Products that are prepared to your specifications or are clearly tailored to meet your personal needs or cannot be returned because of their composition. Costs of Return by Commercial Organisations If you are a corporate body or if you acquire the goods for a purpose that can be considered to be part of your commercial or self employed occupation, the standard costs of return must be paid by you unless the goods delivered are not in accordance with those ordered or there is a valid complaint about the goods. 3. Defects and Guarantees If despite comprehensive controls you receive goods with defects, our customer service team will help you. This also applies for example to technical defects on videos, CDs and other recording media. a) If the goods are defective at the time of transfer of risk to you, you have the legal right to make a claim. b) The guarantee does not effect your legal rights and is valid for the time from transfer of goods to the consumer to the end of the period of guarantee. In regard to the guarantee, the consumer can return the goods right up to the end of the validity of guarantee at our costs to Sport-Thieme GmbH (the guarantor), address stated under no. 3. e) The consumer shall receive repair or replacement of goods at our discretion. The guarantee is only valid for natural use and consumer damages. The guarantee also does not cover purchasing contracts

where the purchaser is practising his/her commercial business or their self employed occupation. c) There is no right to claim against us for damages or faults arising from incorrect operation or usage, or for use of force or natural wear and tear after transferral of risk. d) Small deviations in the shape and colour of models, especially in subsequent deliveries and arising from technical changes undertaken in the course of further development are not defects. e) Your partner in this contract is: Sport-Thieme GmbH Helmstedter Straße 40 38368 Grasleben / Germany Managing director: Dr. Hans-Rudolf Thieme Telephone: + 49 53 57 / 1 81 81 Telephone: +49 53 57 / 1 81 305 (Customer service) Fax: +49 53 57 / 1 81 90 www.sport-thieme.com or www.sport-thieme.de Registered with Braunschweig district court HRB 100876 Tax registration number DE 811446390 Complaints can be made to the above address. 4. Our Service in Cases of Transport Damage Sport-Thieme insures all deliveries. Please inform us of damage within 24 hours. Our customer service will be glad to help, telephone: +49 53 57 / 18 1 305. 5. Shipping and Shipping Costs a) If it is advantageous and economical to speed up deliveries we will make part deliveries. This is particularly the case when the delivery dates for certain products differ greatly from one another, in order that you can receive the products as quickly as possible. b) Overseas deliveries are ex works. We will inform you of the delivery costs on request. 6. Easy Payment It is easy and convenient to pay for your orders: a) Transfer: Purchasers known to us may pay for their orders by invoice. Partial or full deliveries will be paid in the remittance transfer and payment must be received in full within 14 days. If payment is delayed we are entitled to charge you a reminder fee and 5% late payment interest over the base rate of the European Central Bank, in so far as no lesser damage can be proven. b) Credit Cards: Your credit card will be debited with the amount of the invoice when the goods are sent. As we do not save any credit card data we must request that you supply the information with every new order. c) Advance Transfer / Prepayment: You can transfer the sum on the confirmation of order to the following account. Once we receive the payment the goods ordered will be dispatched without delay according to their availability. The banking details are: Sport-Thieme GmbH Account number: 5 456 629

Sort code: 250 500 00 IBAN DE65 2505 0000 0005 4566 29 SWIFT BIC: NOLA DE 2H NORD/LB Helmstedt, Germany. 7. Reservation of Title The product remains our property until complete payment is received. The customer is not permitted to sell on the product in question until he/she has fully discharged their obligations arising from the purchase. If, under reservation of title, the customer is practising a commercial business or is self employed and purchased the goods in the practising of their business, then he/she has the right to further sell the goods in accordance with normal sales practise. He/she transfers over existing claims onto us upon selling on the product in the amount of the value of the invoice. We hereby accept this transfer 8. Trademark Rights We reserve the copyright, trademark, intellectual property and design rights for all products, illustrations and other documents delivered by us. Any reproduction by third parties requires our express permission. 9. Data protection/System Safety/ Electronic Orders a) We save and process your order and data only in so far as this information is necessary to conduct our business and do so in a manner permissible under data protection law. In this framework, we use your data for our own commercial purposes and pass the information within legally permitted restrictions to selected companies for advertising purposes, within the legal restrictions. You will receive all contents of contracts, i.e. the content of your order and also the general terms and conditions that have become part of the contract, along with the information about the delivery. When ordering on the Internet you also have the option to print out the page containing your order. We save the contract text once the contract is closed. You do not have access to the text of the contract on the Internet. Should you lose the documentation about your order, please e-mail, telephone or fax us and we will be happy to send you a copy of the data on your order.

b) For the purposes of a credit check, in so far as we have credibly presented our legitimate interest, we can approach Bürgel Wirtschaftsinformationen GmbH & Co. KG, Postfach 50 01 66, 22701 Hamburg, Germany, or Dun & Bradstreet Europe, to gain access from their data base for information about your personal address and creditworthiness including those based on mathematical statistical procedures that have been investigated and that are available under data law. 10. Export Orders The minimum order is ¤80.00. Orders valued under ¤750.00 carry a processing charge of ¤20.00. Additional shipping costs will be calculated and we will inform you of these charges upon request. In certain countries we will forward your order to our trading partners, who will immediately send you a quotation with prices and conditions. For deliveries to ultimate consumers in the countries of the European Union (EU) the value added tax that is currently valid in the Federal Republic of Germany shall pertain unless exemptions (under § 4, 1b § 6 a of German value added tax law) apply. For orders outside of the EU we will remove the German VAT from the price. The customer should then pay the import value added tax due in their country. We will gladly supply trade prices on request. Contact us at info@sportthieme.com / phone +49 5357 / 181 543. Shipping to outside of Germany is normally ex works. Please ask our customer service for current prices: Tel. +49 5357 / 181-543. 11. Assembly Once assembly has been agreed, the customer must ensure that the construction area is ready for the assembly within the agreed timetable. If working conditions are impeded, the extra costs arising will be invoiced on to the customer separately. We reserve the right to engage subcontractors. Once received, invoices for assembly services are to be paid in full, without any deductions. 12. Other Terms and Conditions If one of the above trading conditions should be rendered invalid, all other conditions remain valid. All other agreements must be in written form. We hereby reject customer general terms and conditions.

There is more information in our Internet shop www.sport-thieme.com based on German law: § 3 BGB-InfoV (German Civil Code on data protection).

Place of jurisdiction is Helmstedt, Germany, if the customer is a businessperson, corporate entity under public law or a public separate estate.

You have the right at any time to reject this use and transfer of your data mentioned in. 9 a) sentence 2 (under German law: § 28 paragraph 4 sentence 1 of German data protection law). Send your objections to Sport-Thieme GmbH, 38368 Grasleben, Germany. We will bar the address details supplied as soon and as completely as possible.

If the consumer is not domicile in the European Union, our business address is the place of jurisdiction.

Our Online-Shop has encoding technology and a safe server (SSL) to protect the privacy of users.

Fax: + 49 5357181921 · www.Sport-Thieme.com · 24 hour hotline + 49 5357181543

German law is applicable with the exception of UN sales law. In dealings with customers within the European Union, the right to the residence of the consumer is applicable provided that consumer clauses are the subject of the proceedings. - Sport-Thieme GmbH -

1l 23

Contact Form

... by fax:

My address:

Delivery address (if not to my address):

Company

Name

Designation

Street

Postal code, city

Phone

Fax

E-mail

Phone

1 +49 5357 181 92

Fax

E-mail My customer number

Yes,

please contact me by phone:

Yes,

please contact me by fax/e-mail:

Yes,

please send me another catalogue to:

my address

the delivery address above

please send international price list to:

my address

the delivery address above

please send an offer for the following products to:

my address

the delivery address above

Yes, Yes,

GB-2009-2010

Item no.

Description

Quantity

: ... or by phone

Stamp

Date

Signature

3 +49 5357 181 54

Helmstedter Str. 40 . 38367 Grasleben, Germany . www.Sport-Thieme.com . info@Sport-Thieme.com

Catalogue Contents From Page Balls

Ball Accessories..............30-34 Footballs, Rugby Balls......17 Ball Sets .............................8-9 Fun and Therapy Balls 26-30 Basketballs.....................10-11 Gymnastics Balls..............23

Handballs ..................12-13 Hedgehog Balls ...............22 Medicine Balls.................19

Pezzi Balls .......................24-25 Soccer Footballs...................4-7 Soft Foam Balls ...............20-21

Volleyballs ....................14-16

Badminton ..................70-72 Baseball......................42-43 Basketball...................35-41

Football ..........44-49, 53-57 Goal Nets.........................49 Handball ....................50-52

Hockey .............................64-65 Street hockey.........................69 Tennis ..............................74-76

Uni-hockey....................66-69 Volleyball ......................58-63

Ball Games Equipment Table Tennis

Athletics

Teaching and Learning Aids

Health in Sport

First Aid...............104-105 Taping.........................104

104

Starting, Measuring and Marking

106

Sport Centre Outfitting and Accessories

120

Swimming, Swimming Requirements, Swim Shop

128

Fitness, Weights, Boxing

Boxing........................171-174 Cross trainers............182-184 Fitness Machines.......178-188 FLEXI-BAR® .......................155

Gymnastics, Children's Gymnastics, Trampolines

Latex Bands..................161-165 Weights ......157-159,175-177 Step, Step boards .........160-161 Treadmills.....................185-186 Yoga and Pilates...........166-167

154

Bars .............................198-199 Children’s Gymnastics ....201-211 Floor Gymnastics Mats....222-223 Gymnastics Bench System ..201

189

Gymnastics, Aerobics, Ballet

Gymnastics Boxes.....189-195 Trampolines ...................234-235 Gymnastics Stools, Trapeze..................................208 Gymnastics Mats......212-221 Wall Bars .......................204-207 Springboards....................196

224

Exercise Mats ...........224-227

Therapy, Psychomotor Ability

Balancing.................245-250 Balancing aids .........245-246 Juggling....................258-259

Pedalos.........................254-255 Roll Boards...................251-253

238

Leisure Games

Anti-Aggression................306 Vehicles ........................276-278 Playground Games ...............287,290-291

276

adidas Top Footballs b

New

a b adidas “Terrapass” “Terrapass” Football a adidas The successor to the official football for the European Championship 2008. An ingenious ball with seamless Thermal Bonded Technology. It offers the best ball control, precision and acceleration. • Revolutionary panels • Power Balance Technology • Metallic white/black/chrome • Size 5, 420 g. 71 212 1606

Replique Football

• Durable training ball in the design of the “Terrapass” ball • New design which ensures it is soft to touch and yet has the best shooting attributes • Reliable playing characteristics • Very stable shape • Metallic white/black/chrome • 420 g 71 212 1619 Size 5 71 212 1622 Size 4

f 290 g

g 350 g

Football Sets

= Set of 7 Football Set c Men's The set consists of:

= Set of 7 d Youth's Football Set

The set consists of: • 2 adidas “Terra” competition • 2 “Terra” Junior 350 g footballs g footballs e • 5 “Training” footballs, size 5, page 5 e • 5 Training footballs, size 4, page 5 e Set 71 191 5206 Set 71 191 5307

“Terrapass” g adidas Junior 350 Football “Terrapass” e adidas Competition Football An ingenious ball with Thermal Bonded Technology at an absolutely sensational price. • Seamless surface thanks to Thermal Bonded Technology • Very good playing characteristics • Very precise • 100% waterproof • Size 5, 420 g 71 212 1635

“Terrapass” f adidas Junior 290 Football • Youth's training ball, 290 g, size 5 • Reliable playing characteristics • Very stable shape 71 212 1651

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

• Youth's training ball, 350 g, size 5 • Reliable playing characteristics • Very stable shape 71 212 1648

Finale 8 Competition h adidas Football FIFA approved. Official ball for the UEFA Champions League 2008-2009. With a seamless surface manufactured to new Thermal Bonded Technology. This surface structure ensures lightening quick back passes after contact. Finale optimally adopts the energy in the shot and therefore guarantees an extremely high rate of acceleration while following an exact flight path. 100% waterproof and extremely durable. Running white/jupiter metallic/metallic silver, size 5. 71 188 4685 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

t Footballs ®

e a

Test 2005

on all guarantee Two years alls me Footb Sport-Thie

Micro foam

b Special micro foam structure between the polyester layers!

Football “Super 2000 Air Matress”

Sport-Thieme competition football for all weather conditions and types of surface. The sealed hems make this ball resistant to water even on the inside, while the special micro foam structure between the polyester layers conserves the characteristics of the ball. There is no shaking, more flexibility, liveliness, perfect flight path and it is pleasant when practising headers. Men's size 5, 420 g, white/blue. 71 106 9307

f Top Rated

c Collins” Football d “M. The ball for a new generation

Football b “Premium” High quality top competition ball that c “King Light” Youth's Football The high quality workmanship guarmeets the toughest demands. Five layers of material with the Air Tress System; a special micro foam with excellent flight characteristics, more precision, appreciable energy return and sensitive ball contact. This ball has great durability thanks to its seam sealing system and special valve. Suitable for all weather conditions. Top quality design in honeycomb look, white/blue/grey. Size 5, 420 g. 2 year guarantee on roundness and seams. 71 107 8233

antees a long working life for this ball. It will not absorb any water and the synthetic leather holds its shape well. Its great flight makes it a perfect training and competition ball for youths. Suitable for all types of surfaces. Made in men's size 5 in order for the youths to get used to the adult size. King Light 350, Size 5, 350 g 71 186 4612 King Light 290, Size 5, 290 g 71 186 4625

Balls-

“Long term football tests have shown:”

test Test:

Your ball must • be absolutely Your ball specialist weatherproof • hold its shape and weight even under wet conditions • guarantee a good grip in any weather and much more.

Ulrich Brodowski

That is why you will only find top quality balls from Adidas to WV in this catalogue. Our specialists go even further: they develop balls based on their experience. The balls carry the Sport-Theime name and are of very high quality, e.g. two year guarantee on sewing and a double laminated and particularly durable Butyl rubber bladder.

www.sport-thieme.com

Men's Size, but weighs only 290 g / 350 g

And there's more: Ball pumps on page 33

ball, size and weight complies with FIFA and DFB guidelines, synthetic leather, jap. clarino, 4 layers, 32 panels, white/blue. Clarino is 8 times more durable than real leather and does not absorb water, suitable for all conditions. Because of bulk buying and large inventory, we can offer this ball at a very special price. 71 107 7722 Boys, size 3 71 107 7719 Youth's, size 4 71 107 7706 Men size 5

Football f “Soccer” Ideal Sport-Thieme training football, official size and weight complies with regulations. Synthetic leather, double knotted seams, laminated 4 times with corex clear coating, 2 year guarantee on shape and seams. Recommended for all weather pitches and areas. 71 107 8204 Men size 5 71 107 8217 Youth's, size 4 71 107 8220 Boys, size 3

The testing and research institute Pirmasens has carried out individual tests on Sport-Thieme footballs based on the FIFA certification and international standards. Among the tests was a continuous stress test during which every ball was crushed 10,000 times by a steel plate. Sport-Thieme footballs received a “very good” and “good” mark.

Super 2000 No. a

Demands:

Weight (in g) Circumference (in cm) Loss of shape (in %) Pressure loss (in %) Water absorption (in %) Rebound at 20 °C (in cm) Rebound at 5 °C (in cm) Difference between highest and lowest rebound value At 20 °C (in cm) At 5 °C (in cm) Continuous stress test 10.000x distortion of 25% Visual examination: Distortion (in %)

Size and weight comply with FIFA and DFB guidelines. A specially developed material makes this ball more durable than other footballs. Porvair is shiny, with 2 layers of polyester and cotton. It has the same characteristics as other top footballs and is suitable for any surface and weather conditions. This ball will not absorb water. 32 panels, white-blue. Size 5, 420 g. 71 107 8002

Football e “Training” Sport-Thieme leisure and training

Result

Met demands? yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

Result

yes no

410 - 450 68.0 - 70.0 max. 2 25% 15 115 - 165 110

430.3 69.3 1.1 5% 5.2 147.1 127.8

max. 10 max. 10

8.5 10 Some seams slightly bulged

yes yes yes

6 13 Some seams slightly bulged

1.3

yes

1.6

2.5

Soccer, size 5 No. f

M.Collins, size 5 No. d

445.8 69.6 1.8 18 % 11.6 155.9 140.7

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Met demands? yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

Result

426.2 68.4 1.2 23 % 4.5 147.2 126.2

Met demands? yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes

yes

10 10 Some seams slightly bulged

yes

0.5

yes

A Wide Variety of Footballs … New

Indoor Footballs Football c Indoor With reduced bounce for a quicker indoor game. The yellow colour makes the ball easier to see. Hand sewn, smooth synthetic suede with the best playing characteristics. 71 107 8510 Men size 5 71 107 8523 Youth's, size 4

Price Tip

Buy now !

d Sport-Thieme Indoor Football • weatherproof

Top Quality indoor football! The bounce and speed of the ball have been reduced to the ideal level. The yellow covering makes it easy to see. Outer covering nylon wool, the original English outer material, 32 panels. 71 107 8611 Size 4 youth 71 107 8608 Size 5 men

• fluorescent colours Soft Soccer h Beach In luminous yellow/orange, 32 hand sewn panels, latex bladder. Weatherproof, robust and holds shape well. Size 5, 400g. 71 107 4013

“Europass” e adidas SHS Indoor Football

Price Tip

Buy now !

“Supreme” a Sport-Thieme Football

The bounce is specially adjusted for use indoors. The soft surface ensures it slides and yet is very abrasion resistant. Lemon Peel/Macaw/Cobalt. 71 107 8666

New e

Special high gloss coating, 1.5 mm silver/black. 4 polyester layers, laminated to hold the shape well. Suitable for all playing areas and weather conditions. With Butyl bladder. Size 5, 420 g. 71 107 8930

Volley Elé Balls f Original Football with elephant skin coating, a very strong sealed PU shell. This makes the foam ball washable and disinfectable. Nontoxic in strong yellow football design, ø 21 cm, 255 g. 71 107 1304-1

b Sport-Thieme Football “Super 403”

Abrasion proof PU material, 4 layers of 1.5 mm thick polyester, laminated. Brilliant shine as a result of special surface treatment. This inexpensive training football is suitable for all playing areas and weather conditions, white/black, 32 panels with Butyl bladder, size 5, 420g. 71 107 8927

g Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

Foam Football g PU Yellow/black. This ball has all the advantages of foam balls without coating (skin) thanks to the PU foam. Very strong and robust. ø 20 cm, 330 g. Can also be used in water. 71 191 9208

• weatherproof • easy to detect even in snow and bad weather conditions

“Floodlight” i Football Made of fluorescent orange cordley material. Extremely durable, the ball stays soft even in sub-zero temperatures. Ideally suited for all surface and weather conditions, especially in snow and fog. Size 5, 420 g. 71 107 5306

Football Test Package

Test Packages To feel, hold and examine. You can have the product in your hand and be won over by its quality with our test package. If the design does not meet your

expectations, the products can be returned within 31 days. Used items and products that have been played with cannot be returned, we must invoice you for these items.

Indoor Football Test Package

Football Test Package Set

Football Test Package Set j Indoor Consisting of:

• 1 adidas indoor football, e • 1 Sport-Thieme indoor football, size 5, d • 1 Sport-Thieme Futsal indoor football, page 7 h 71 191 5222 Test package price

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Consisting of: • 1 adidas “Terra” Replique football, size 5, page 4 b • 1 Sport-Thieme “Super 2000 Airmatress” football, size 5, page 5 a • 1 Sport-Thieme Soccer football, size 5, page 5 f • 1 Sport-Thieme Supreme football, size 5, a 71 191 5235 Test package price

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

… Presented by t “Chicago TT” c Derbystar Football

“Brilliant a Derbystar APS” Football

A durable training ball with good playing characteristics IMS Approved • finely grained high tech PU material • very robust and long lasting • water resistant • particularly suitable for hard asphalt pitches and artificial turf • size 5, 420 g 71 107 7490

Ball used by the German Masters and the DFB cup winners 2004. Top quality competition ball. FIFA approved. Hightech PU micro fibre material. Extremely water resistant. No flapping latex bladder a world exclusive. Completely hand sewn and individually tested. White, size 5, 420 g. 71 107 7487

“Brillant d Derbystar S-light” Football

Derbystar b Football “Magic APS”

A new youths ball in an attractive design with top playing characteristics and reduced weight. • gloss PU material • very durable and water resistant • size 5, 300 g for F youths and bambini 71 106 9873

White, PVC free, very good gloss covered competition ball especially good on grass pitches. Due to its new strong PU material also suitable for asphalt pitches. Size 5, 420 g. 71 107 7432

Futsal and Sala Footballs

uhlsport®

New i h

f “PT5 THEMIS f uhlsport® VERSO” Football

“PT5 THEMIS PRO” e uhlsport® Football FIFA certified This ball is for ambitious teams and players. • Patented uhlsport PT5 ball field construction • Very strong TPU outer material with 3 D micro-structure and hinterglas design print • Good flight and return bounce • ACS ball bladder with optimal seals and low loss of pressure • White/ red metallic/ silver • Size 5, 420 g 71 106 9857

An excellent competition and training ball with the new PT5 print design • very abrasion resistant PU surface material with nylon/PES backing material • 4 PES/CO laminated layers • ACS ball bladder for minimal loss of pressure and perfect return of bounce • white/navy/gold • size 5, 420 g 71 106 9860

uhlsport® Footballs uhlsport footballs must meet with the quality demands of every type of weather and every surface. These footballs can more than withstand the challenges on the playing field such as a high rate of wear, which is especially frequent on hard courts. Even in the worst of weather and on the worst of surfaces, uhlsport footballs have excellent bounce and flight.

to grip g Easy material

Football g “Mini-Play” Football, 32 panels, easy grip material. In an attractive colourful design. Circumference 42 cm. Size 2. 71 106 9600

And there's more: • Mini training goals page 57

New

“Indoor h Futsal Professional” Indoor Football This version complies with FIFA indoor football rules. This sport has grown a lot over the last few years and has enormous future potential. The great success of this sport was the 3rd FIFA Futsal world championships in Spain in 1996. The game was played into 3x2 m goals without any borders. This ball is specially developed for this sport with greatly reduced bounce. It “sticks” to the foot and is therefore very suitable for halls. Futsal demands technical skill. The special rules also encourage fair play. Circumference 61-63 cm, approx. 400 g. 71 107 8624

Futsal i DalPonte “Top 800” Ball DalPonte is a long term supplier and partner of the Brazilian national football team and it is now the FIFA official indoor football. The ball is made from Microfibra, 410-430g, circumference 61-63cm with a Butyl bladder. 71 107 8653

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

j Sala “TG II TB” j adidas Football Futsal is the FIFA official indoor football. The reduced bounce Euro 08 Sala meets the highest quality demands and thanks to the latest technology, allows a quick and technical indoor game. • Thermal Bonded Technology for the best ball control, precision and acceleration • Power Balance Technology Size 4, circumference 61-63 cm, 400 g 71 107 8679

Balls: Test and Save! Soft Balls Test Package Test Package To feel, hold and examine. You can have the product in your hand and be won over by its quality with our test package. If the design does not meet your expectations, the products can be returned within 31 days. Used items and products that have been played with cannot be returned, we must invoice you for these items.

Volleyball Test Package

Test Package a Softball Consisting of:

1 Football made from PU foam, page 21 i 1 Volley® Softi, ø 160 mm, page 20 a 1 Volley® Super, ø 70 mm, page 20 b 1 Volley® Super, ø 90 mm, page 20 c 1 Volley® Allround, ø 180 mm, page 20 e 1 Volley® Mini Handball, ø 160 mm, page 20 f 1 Volley® Volleyball, ø 210 mm, page 20 g 1 Volley® Football, ø 210 mm, page 20 i 71 191 5248 Test package price

Basketball Test Package

Test Package b Volleyball Consisting of: 1 Sport-Thieme Beach Volleyball: Soft, page 14 f 1 Conti Super Soft, Volleyball page 15 i 1 Sport-Thieme Volleyball: Light, page 16 c 1 Sport-Thieme Volleyball: Trainer Super Light, page 16 a 1 Sport-Thieme Volleyball: School, page 16 e 71 191 5251 Test package price

Gymnastics Balls Test Package

d Gymnastics Balls Test Package

Test Package c Basketball Consisting of:

1 “Rainbow” basketball, size 7, page 10 a 1 “Rainbow 2000” basketball, size 7, page 10 c 1 US design basketball, size 7, page 10 g 1 “Young” mini basketball, size 5, page 10 d 1 “SP-Champion” basketball, size 7, page 10 b 71 191 5293 Test package price

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Consisting of: 1 high gloss gymnastics ball, ø 16 cm, red, page 23 a 1 high gloss gymnastics ball, ø 16 cm, blue, page 23 a 1 high gloss gymnastics ball, ø 19 cm, red, page 23 a 1 high gloss gymnastics ball, ø 19 cm, yellow, page 23 a 1 WV rubber gymnastics ball, ø 16 cm, blue, page 23 b 1 WV rubber gymnastics ball, ø 16 cm, yellow, page 23 b 1 WV rubber gymnastics ball, ø 16 cm, red, page 23 b 1 WV rubber gymnastics ball, ø 19 cm, yellow, page 23 b 71 191 5280 Test package price

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Ball Sets … Start Saving! Ball Sets Specially selected for economically minded customers, this method is much cheaper than buying individually. The sets contain competition as well as training balls and

Volleyball Set

therefore will cover all needs for different types of ball games. The balls are also available individually for a set price.

Break Time Ball Sets Break Time Set 2

Break Time Set 1

Set c Volleyball Consists of:

Set of 6

• 2 DVV I Conti Super Soft volleyballs, page 15 l • 2 DVV I Conti volleyballs, page 15 k • 2 DVV II volleyballs, page 16 b 71 191 5105 Set

Set 2, b Break-Time Balls in a Carrying Bag

Set 1, a Break-Time Balls in a Carrying Bag The primary school set for active breaks that develop an interest in movement. The products have been chosen with children over 5 years of age in mind. Consisting of: • 1x Ball bag for transport and storage • 3x Playground basketballs size 2 • 3x Mini Play footballs ø 42 cm • 3x footballs made from PE foam ø 20 cm • 3x Neon Rainbow balls ø 23 cm • 2x Yellow Line beach volleyballs 71 134 7555 Set

A school set for active breaks. These products have been chosen with children over 12 years of age in mind. The set consists of • 1x Ball bag for transport and storage • 2x King 350 footballs, size 5 • 2x Rainbow basketballs, size 7 • 2x Super beach volleyballs • 2x footballs made from PE foam ø 20 cm • 2x Multi balls ø 21 cm • 1x Footbag pack (containing 5) • 1x FB7 Football 71 134 7568 Set

Beach Volleyball Set

See also: More information and volleyballs from page 14-16

Basketball Sets Set of 8

Approved for German national and regional leagues

Set f Basketball Consisting of:

• 2 Super K78 basketballs page 11 m • 2 Rainbow 2003 basketballs page 10 c • 2 Molten B982 basketballs page 11 c • 2 basketballs in US design page 10 g 71 191 4900 Set

Set of 7 Volleyball Set d Beach Consisting of: • 1 Mikasa VLS 200 micro beach volleyball • 1 Mikasa VXL 20 beach volleyball • 1 Mikasa Soft Sand beach volleyball • 2 Beach Soft beach volleyballs • 2 Beach Super beach volleyballs 71 191 5118 Set

Accessories Set Pump Set e Ball To make sure you always pump

Now! Order

with the right valve. You will easily find the replacement nipple, as they are carefully divided in a strong wooden box. The set consists of: • 2 nickel plated 28x270 mm ball pumps page 33 a+ b • 3 replacement nipples for each page 33 Buy now ! e+ f • 1 flexible hose to protect the valve needle 71 110 0408-1 • 1 strong storage box.

Set of 10

Price Tip

Set g Basketball Consisting of:

• 5 Rainbow basketballs Size 5 page 10 a • 5 Young basketballs Size 5 page 10 d 71 191 5004 Set

Each

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

See also: More information and basketballs on page 10-11

Basketballs …

b a

16 colours

a Very grippy surface. In 3 sizes “Rainbow” Basketball

for our “minis” up to official competition size. Size 3, approx. 300 g, circumference approx. 56 cm 71 108 5105 Size 5, approx. 520 g, circumference approx. 68 cm 71 108 5118

Now also in size 6 for women. Size 6, approx. 520 g, circumference approx. 72 cm 71 108 5134 Size 7, approx. 600 g, circumference approx. 75 cm 71 108 5121

Champion” b “SP Basketball for Beginners

2000” Basketball c “Rainbow These basketballs are traditional for

Ideal ball for beginners, easily gripped nylon surface. Size 7, circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 108 4102

use in halls and on the street. The special rubber mixture makes them very robust and gives a very good grip. An excellent rainbow coloured basketball. 16 panels in 16 different colours. Size 7, circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 108 3705

Size 6 Size 7 Size 5

Women's Basketball f Spalding “TF 250” Basketball e “Women” The indoor outdoor ball used in Ideal beginner's ball, very easy to hold

Mini Basketball d “Young” High quality mini basketball made of nylon, circumference 68 cm, 520 g. Size 5. 71 108 4900

surface material. Size complies with the new women's basketball regulations for competitions since the 2004/2005 season. Circumference approx. 72 cm, approx. 520 g, size 6. 71 108 4115

schools thanks to its great characteristic. All Surface Composite Leather. 71 108 5479 Size 5 71 108 5264 Size 6 71 108 5466 Size 7

Very easily gripped surface in US design g Basketball Size and weight comply with international regulations, super-grippy surface, blue-white-red. Size 7, circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 108 4809

New Very easily gripped surface

Basketball h “Playground” Stand out due to strong contrast to Size 2

And there's more: Basketball equipment pag. 35-41

background. The size is ideal for training beginners. Very easily gripped surface material. Circumference 44 cm, 160 g, size 2. 71 109 2442 Yellow 71 109 2455 Green 71 109 2471 Red

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

i Basketball Made from closed cell PU foam which works like a coating (skin). No damage when stocked, good bounce thanks to the thick foam. Can also be used for therapy or handicapped sport. ø 200 mm, ca. 300 g. 71 212 1811-1 Orange 71 212 1824-1 Rainbow Prices available on request. Please contact us.

… for Indoors and Outdoors Size 6 specially for women

g WNBA All Star Pro” Spalding f “Official Basketball

a Molten “GL7” Basketball Official playing ball for the World and European championships. An exclusive top class competition ball. Leather, excellent gripping qualities. It offers optimal ball control when catching, on the rebound and in other ball situations as a result of its Dual Cushion Technology. This great ball will allow every player achieve their potential. Orange/cream, size 7, DBB approved. 71 108 4346

“GG7” b Molten Basketball

Women's size 6 basketball. This is a new ball with the well known Spalding quality, which combines the excellent grip from NBA Tack Soft with the quality of WNBA Gameball. This is the indoor ball that can also be used outdoors. Exclusive composite synthetic leather. DBB approved. Circumference 66 cm, 560 g. 71 108 5222

“BBL TF 1000 ZK Pro” g Spalding Basketball Official Spalding BBL Platinum ZK Pro Indoor und Outdoor. Official ball for the German Basketball Bundesliga League. The successor to the legendary Ultimate ZK. The no. 1 ball round the world and the ball for many official games. • ZK Micro fibre composite leather • Deep Channel Design Circumference 75 cm, 600 g, size 7. 71 108 5495

Official NBA Platinum h Spalding “Street Game Ball” Basketball

Synthetic leather basketball, easily gripped, Dual Cushion Technology. Suitable for indoors and outdoors. 12 panels instead of 8, optimal ball control, orange/cream, size 7. DBB approved. 71 108 4333

Official NBA street game ball, made from very strong double rubber surface, easily gripped with deep wide grooves. Perfect for street basketball thanks to its resistance. Size 7. Circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 108 5424

Official NBA i Spalding “Tack-Soft Pro” Basketball Multi-purpose ball for indoors and outdoors. New composite leather (synthetic) surface, very good grip and handling, with wide groves, size 7. DBB approved. Size 7, circumference approx. 75 cm, approx. 600 g 71 108 5206 Size 6, circumference approx. 72 cm, approx. 520 g 71 108 5248 Size 5, circumference approx. 69 cm, approx. 480 g 71 108 5251

i Top Rated

www.sport-thieme.com

New

10 times longer life thanks to the air and gas mixture

j Flat Spalding Basketball j Never • The NitroFlate™ Technology prevents the ball from going flat prematurely • 10 times longer playing time thanks to the mixture of air and gas • Long lasting, optimal handling without need to re-inflate • Can also be used with a standard ball pump (but without the NitroFlate™effect) • High quality ball construction using premium composite synthetic leather which provides excellent grip and ball control • Suitable for use indoors and outdoors • Size 7, circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 108 5235

m l

e Size 6 d

specially for women

Seamco “K98” Basketball The ball for professionals k A well loved youths basketball. Mini basketball, DBB approved. Made of five layered Molten “B982 D” Basketball bonded nylon AA carcass, butyl rubber bladder, natural

c High quality nylon competition ball, especially

easy to grip, DBB certified. Ball flies true thanks to the surface structure. Size 7. 71 107 6602

d Mini basketball, size 5, particularly easy to grip, Molten “B985” Basketball

rubber surface. 69 cm circumference, 480 g. Size 5. 71 108 5004

Size 7

“Super K74” Basketball l Seamco For competition and training, durable structure,

very popular school basketball with DBB test certificate. 71 186 1219

nylon AA bonded. Perfect grip thanks to the natural rubber surface. Suitable for all playing surfaces. Size 7, circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 108 4001

“DX6” Basketball e Molten Synthetic leather basketball for indoor or outdoor

“Super K78” Basketball m Seamco This competition ball is recognised world-wide and is

use. Official ball for the women's Bundes League in Germany as well as in many other European countries. Approved by the German Basketball Association, size 6, orange/white. Circumference 72 cm, 520 g. 71 108 4317

For all playing areas

suitable for all types of court and certified by the DBB (German basketball Assoc.). Made of 5 layers of AAA bonded nylon. Natural rubber surface. Size 7. Circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 108 4607

n “Permalast 1500” Basketball DBB approved, elastic bounce, very grippy, natural rubber cover over a nylon carcass, double laminated butyl rubber bladder. Size 7, circumference 75 cm, 600 g. 71 108 4203

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 11

Official Competition Handballs e

a “Stabil II Team ” Handball a adidas • a very good handball with fantastic bounce and flight • neoprene foam cover • revolutionary surface for perfect ball handling • synthetic leather • 32 panels • White/Collegiate/Red 71 108 6977 Men, size 3 71 108 6980 Ladies, size 2 71 108 6993 School children, size 1

“Stabil II Champ” Handball b adidas • a top quality ball, 32 panels • meets IHF standards • used as official ball internationally • official ball of the EHF European championships 2010 • White/Collegiate/Red 71 225 1309 Men, size 3 71 225 1312 Women

Kempa “Nucleus Team Pro” Handball

c • Playing and training ball with excellent playing and flight characteristics • PU surface with excellent grip • Extremely soft and compact ball feel with special foam laminate • IHF certification • White / red / black 71 212 1909 Men, size 3 71 212 1912 Ladies, size 2

“Nucleus d Kempa Training Profile” Handball • newly developed ball • innovative 14 ball panel construction • excellent bounce and excellent rebound and grip • soft to hand thanks to special foam • IHF seal • white/navy/Cyan blue 71 225 1325 Men, size 3 71 225 1338 Ladies, size 2 71 225 1341 School children, size 1

Kempa “Nucleus” Handball The innovative, new panel construction in these Kempa Handballs combines the best playing characteristics with a new unusual design. The new panel shape has enabled the number of panels to be reduced to 24 without losing the advantages of a 32 panel ball. New 24 Panel Design What are the advantages of this new 24 panel design? • Longer seams and a reduction on the numbers of corners make this ball softer • Larger panels improve the handling of this ball (even without any adhesive) • The organisation of the panels mean that (despite the reduction) the fingers have enough seams and the seams are evenly spaced to better control the ball.

“HXV” Handball e Molten A competition ball made from soft PU material, “X” design, easy to grip surface, good playing characteristics. Orange/blue/silver. HXV 3, Men's size 3, with IHF certification 71 212 1967 HXV 2, Women's size 2, with IHF certification 71 212 1970 HXV, schoolchildren size 1 71 212 1983

“HXA 3” Handball f Molten A very easy to grip handball made from synthetic leather, “X” design. Very good bounce and flight, soft ball contact. IHF certification, yellow/blue, men's, size 3. 71 212 1941

“HXA 2” Handball g Molten A very easy to grip handball made from synthetic leather, “X” design. Very good bounce and flight, soft ball contact. IHF certification, yellow/blue, women's, size 2. Official ball for the German women's handball league. 71 212 1954

Grip Paste h Clear A real innovative product for handball. There is finally and clear and clean way to improve ball handling in handball. A great advantage of this product over resins/glue balsams is the adhesiveness and it also has the following advantages: • no colour and as clear as glass • does not contain colophony (resin) • will not cause allergies • very economical to use • provides a perfect grip for the whole game Clear Grip Paste will not build up on the shoes, you will avoid dirt on your hall floor and cleaning costs will be reduced. 71 212 2931 100 ml 71 212 2944 500 ml

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

New

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Handballs from afrom

Extremely easy to grip

For Schools and Clubs

guarantee Two years rt-Thieme on all Spo Footballs

New

dfrom Double Knot System

Handball c “Juwel” Ideal for competition and training in

Handballs: Handballs for men and male youths A: circumference 58-60 cm, 425-475 g, size 3. Handballs for women, young males B, and girls A and B: circumference 54-56 cm, 325-400 g, size 2.

Youth Handballs: • for men's youth's D and E, • for women's youth's C and D.

See also:

“American” Football d Conti Official size and weight. Competi-

Gilbert 5x

• Team identification page 114

Made from premium composite leather for the best playing conditions. Patented ACL lacing system with easy to hold surface. Size 9, official size. 71 107 2323

Football

Now Even Better! • • • •

h Training ball

i Competition ball

“XT 400” Rugby h Gilbert Training Ball A high quality training ball, easy to grip due to rubber surface. White/red/black. 71 108 8423 Size 4 (8-13 years old) 71 108 8436 Size 5 (from 14 years old)

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

“Dimension” Rugby i Gilbert Competition Ball Excellent grip due to the special “Gilbert Grip” surface. The patented Truflight bladder ensures a perfect flight. Blue/silver, size 5. 71 108 8449

t 17

Sling Balls, Throwing Balls and More Sling Balls

Throwing Balls DLV conditions: Throwing balls are made from leather or rubber. Weight: 200g, ø 7.5-8.5 cm.

g d

strong loop and top quality filling. 800 g, ø approx. 16 cm 71 108 8524 1,000 g, ø approx. 18 cm 71 108 8511 1,500 g, ø approx. 20 cm 71 108 8508

Ball d Throwing For use as a training ball, doesn't

Balls a Sling Made of leather, hand stitched, Each Each Each

bounce, made from plastic, ø 7.5 cm, pink, 200 g. 71 108 0403

Sling Balls b WV Made from thick, waterproof rubber material, in blue, with sewn-on leather loop. Advantage: very durable, 2 year durability guarantee. 71 108 8902 800 g, ø 18 cm Each 71 108 8915 1,000 g, ø 18 cm Each 71 108 8928 1,500 g, ø 20 cm Each

Völkerball c Effet Made from chrome suede, yellow complying with the DTB (German Tennis Federation) regulations. In tennis ball design, regulation size and weight, circumference 62-68 cm, 320-380 g. 71 107 2903

Ball e Throwing A throwing ball made from porous rubber, ø 6.5 cm, red, 80 g. 71 108 0504

Throwing Ball f Training ball made from rubber,

i Throwing Ball i Competition Competition Throwing Ball made from Leather ø 7.6 cm, non-bouncing, 200 g. 71 108 0618

doesn't bounce, with filling, ø 6.5 cm, orange, 80 g. 71 108 0302

Throwing Ball g Competition Made from rubber, ø 7.6 cm, pink, 200 g. 71 108 0201

and Throwing Ball h Hitting Competition throwing ball made from leather, white, ø 6.5 cm, 80 g. Does not bounce. 71 108 0605

Net for Balls j Carrying Tightly meshed, for approx. 30 throwing balls. 2 mm thick polypropylene. Mesh width approx. 3 cm. Hemp colour. Balls not included. 71 110 1023

Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

Official DTB competition ring

l Tournament Tennis k DTB Ring Official DTB competition ring. Excellent flight characteristics, no fluttering, solid micro-cellular rubber. Yellow, regulation size and weight. Inner diameter 10.5 cm, outer diameter 17 cm. 71 135 3509

l Rings Air filled, in blue and red. 71 135 3802-4 Blue 71 135 3815-4 Red

Each Each

29 cm

Bar m Throwing For throwing training, rubber, 300 g, 29 cm long, grey. 71 124 8207-2

Gel filling

• easy to grip • small diameter • with structured surface Tennis Rings n Tournament Microcellular rubber, ø inner 10.5 cm, outer 17 cm. 71 135 3512-1 Blue 71 135 3525-1 Red 71 135 3538-1 White

Med o Heavy Small compact plastic medicine ball. As the size is small this ball is suitable for handball and basketball for children and for training. Long life span, strong, hygienic, washable, gel filled with good bounce.

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

1,000 g, ø 12 cm, red 71 107 3515 2,000 g, ø 15 cm, yellow 71 107 3528 3,000 g, ø 17 cm, blue 71 107 3531

Each Each Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Medicine Balls Synthetic leather Real Leather

Buy now ! Balls b Medicine Synthetic leather, 1.4mm thick,

Leather, hand sewn Ball – The Classic! a Medicine Made of durable cow hide, hand stitched, with a top quality cork granulate filling. No problems with valves!

71 108 9240 71 108 9237 71 108 9224 71 108 9208 71 108 9253 71 108 9211

double laminated. Cork-granulate filling for increased strength. 8 panels, brown, machine sewn. 71 196 6709 1 kg, ø 16 cm 71 196 6712 1.5 kg, ø 17 cm 71 196 6725 2 kg, ø 18 cm 71 196 6738 3 kg, ø 22 cm 71 196 6741 4 kg, ø 24 cm 71 196 6754 5 kg, ø 26 cm

1 kg, ø 18 cm 1.5 kg, ø 22 cm 2 kg, ø 24 cm 3 kg, ø 28 cm 4 kg, ø 30 cm 5 kg, ø 32 cm

Ruton:

New

• • • • •

Original medicine ball size

Washable Easy care Holds its shape Anti-static Good gripping qualities

With needle valve for adjusting the bounce Medicine Balls c Power Easy to grip, bouncy, rubber medicine ball. Grained surface, hygienic and washable. With needle valve for adjusting the bounce. Very strong and long lasting. Excellent resistance to scratches.

71 217 2008 71 217 2011 71 217 2024 71 217 2037 71 217 2040 71 217 2053 71 217 2066

0.8 kg, ø 19.5 cm, black 1 kg, ø 19.5 cm, turquoise 1.5 kg, ø 19.5 cm, orange 2 kg, ø 23 cm, blue 3 kg, ø 23 cm, yellow 4 kg, ø 27 cm, red 5 kg, ø 27 cm, lilac

Medicine Balls d Ruton® Extremely resistant to abrasion, hold their shape well, washable, easy to maintain, with valve (rubber-like plastic). The balls have a needle valve and can be pumped up and bounce well.

with special hair filling

e Vollball A rounders and throwing ball

71 109 6604 71 109 6617 71 109 6620 71 109 6633 71 109 6646 71 109 6659 71 109 6662

0.8 kg, ø 21 cm, blue Each 1 kg, ø 21 cm, red Each 1.5 kg, ø 28cm, brown Each 2 kg, ø 28 cm, brown Each 3 kg, ø 28 cm, blue Each 4 kg, ø 34 cm, green Each 5 kg, ø 34 cm, red Each

5 year durability guarantee on the material in WV medicine balls

that can also be used for strengthening arm muscles. High quality, made of leather, hand stitched making it stronger, with special hair filling. 800 g, ø 18 cm. 71 107 6413 Each

f g WV Medicine Ball The Original!

Medicine Balls

f Hand stitched, made from leather, 8 panels, with special hair filling. 71 107 6048 1 kg, ø 19 cm 71 107 6006 1.5 kg, ø 25 cm 71 107 6019 2 kg, ø 28 cm 71 107 6022 3 kg, ø 33 cm 71 107 6035 4 kg, ø 37 cm

Real Leather

With thick rubber covering, particularly grippy and comfortable to use. Washable, with valve. Advantage: extremely durable. 0.8 kg, ø 18 cm, brown 71 108 9703 Each 1 kg, ø 20 cm, green 71 108 9716 Each

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

1.5 kg, ø 22cm, red 71 108 9729 2 kg, ø 27 cm, brown 71 108 9732 3 kg, ø 27 cm, blue 71 108 9745

Each Each Each

t 19

Elé Balls & Soft Foam Balls Hold the ball better: The new easy grip Elé-Elephant skin from Volley® with very good ball control!

k l i a

Elé Football k Volley® American football can be made really

simple with the Volley Elé football, as it is made for children's hands. It has excellent flight. The strong sealed PE cover means the Volley Elé football can be washed and disinfected, it is non-toxic and has a long lifespan. L: 26 cm, circumference 47 cm. 71 107 2701-1

e • • • •

New

washable can be disinfected c CFC free for outdoor and indoor use

f Elé Mini Football l Volley Length 20 cm, circumference 40 cm,

Top Rated

www.sport-thieme.com

112 g. 71 107 2714-1

Original Volley® Elé Balls Covered with (imitation) elephant skin. A very hard-wearing sealed PE coating means that these foam balls can be washed and disinfected. They are non-toxic and extremely durable. These balls are provided in a number of different foams meaning they are suitable for all conditions, both for indoors and outdoors. Characteristic: • bouncy, •• good bounce, ••• very good bounce

Advice and ordering: Tel. +49 53 57-181543

No.

Art. No.

Article Name

71 108 3503 71 108 3516 71 108 3529 71 108 3532 71 108 3617 71 108 3604 71 108 2311 71 108 2308 71 108 2409 71 108 2207 71 109 7708 71 107 1506 71 107 1304 71 107 1607

Volley® Softi Volley® Softi Volley® Softi Volley® Softi Volley® Super Volley® Super Volley® Play Ball Volley® All Round Volley® Mini Handball Volley® Special Volley® Volleyball Volley® Volleyball Volley® Football Volley® Medicine ball

b c d e f g h i j

Size ø mm 160 160 160 160 70 90 160 180 160 210 210 210 210 300

Weight Characteristic g. l 65 l 65 l 65 l 65 lll 16 l 32 ll 115 ll 130 lll 150 ll 235 lll 220 lll 315 ll 255 l 350

s p

Colour blue yellow green red red, blue, pink, yellow, green, orange assortment red blue white white white no. pic. white yellow red

}

t 300 g

n 900 g

• slow motion effect • no risk of injury • suitable as a training ball for all sports

q Soft Foam Balls

Soft balls with a high bounce, made from foam for safe and successful play. These balls have a slow motion effect, which make them particularly suitable for beginners. Children immediately feel much safer with these soft balls. Teachers and coaches can use these balls for football and other games, but they are particularly popular for sport therapy and handicapped sports. We recommend the volleyball or gymnastic and handball sizes for training. These balls are particularly bouncy. 70 and 90 mm diameter in a tennis ball design.

Weight Characteristic Size g ø mm lll m 71 109 8105 Tennis practise ball yellow 70 12 lll yellow n 71 109 8118 Tennis practise ball 90 29 lll o 71 109 7506 Handball yellow 180 180 lll yellow p 71 109 7405 Volleyball 210 280 l q 71 109 8206 Play ball orange 120 34 l orange r 71 109 8219 Play ball 150 65 l s 71 109 8222 Play ball orange 200 160 ll t 71 109 7825 Medicine ball yellow 300 300 lll yellow 71 109 7809 Medicine ball 300 900 Characteristic: • bouncy, •• good bounce, ••• very good bounce

Ill.

Art. No.

Article name:

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Colour

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Pleasant, Soft, Easy to Hold • • • •

closed celled PU foam no damage to the fittings very good bounce ideal for therapy

Test Package

For feeling, gripping and examining. This is an opportunity to hold the product in your hands and be won over by the quality. If you are not satisfied, just send the balls you have not played with back.

f h

Test Package for PU Foam Balls Consisting of: 1 Tennis Ball a 1 Tennis Ball b 1 Playing Ball c 1 Mini Handball d 1 Volleyball e 1 Football j 71 107 1580

j i

e PU Foam Balls

The special thick foam (volumetric weight) coating on this ball makes it very easy to grip its surface, as well as giving it great rebound and bounce. Thanks to the ball’s special characteristics, there is very little chance of injuries or damage. These balls have all the essential ingredients for success in therapy, handicapped sport or training. Balls in different sport type designs. CE certified. Characteristic: • bouncy, •• good bounce, ••• very good bounce

k Colibri Super Soft Balls Super soft and super easy to hold, super safe! An extra fine foam material as well as a special surface treatment make the new Colibri Supersoft balls from Togu the perfect ball series for pre-schools, schools, rehabilitation centres and in therapy. The balls are really easy to grip and abrasion resistant. The super soft make up removes the fear when catching and also poses a tactile stimulus. It cuts out painful ball contact. It is strong, has a long lifespan

Ill.

Art. No.

Article name:

a b c d e f g h i j

71 107 1519 71 107 1522 71 107 1535 71 107 1548 71 107 1551 71 212 1808 71 212 1811 71 212 1824 71 107 1577 71 107 1564

Tennis ball Tennis ball Playing ball Mini handball Volleyball Volleyball Basketball Basketball Football Football

Size ø mm 70 90 120 160 200 200 200 200 200 200

Weight Characteristic g 30 •• ••• 40 •• 80 •• 160 ••• 305 ••• 290 ••• 290 ••• 300 •• 300 ••• 300

Colour Yellow Red Green Red Yellow Red/Yellow/White Orange Rainbow White/Black Orange/Black

and can always be regulated to suit different uses using the needle valve e.g. made softer, more bounce etc. There is no static build-up. All balls are pink.

Easily gripped surface

Colibri Volleyball 220 g, Size 5, ø 22 cm. 71 107 2004

Colibri Handball for Men 400 g, ø 19 cm 71 107 2020

Colibri Handball for Women 300 g, ø 17 cm. 71 107 2017

Colibri AERO Ball 300g, ø 16cm universal ball for all occasions. 71 107 2033

New

m l

Ball Set from PU Foam l Sport In the design of sports balls such as volleyballs, footballs, rugby balls and basketballs. Good bounce. 12 balls in a net with a pull cord. There is no

risk of injury or damage to objects. ø 10 cm, basketball ø 12 cm. 71 212 1837 Set

Foam Balls in Nets m PU In different colours and sports ball

Foam Football n PE Yellow/black. This ball has the

designs. The 12 small balls are 6.3 cm in diameter and are very pleasant for holding exercises or simply for playing with. There is no risk of injury or damage to other objects. 71 212 1840

advantages of soft foam balls with coating (skin) thanks to the closed cell PU foam it is made from. Very strong and robust. ø 20 cm, 300 g. Can also be used in water. 71 191 9208-1

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 21

Balls for Therapy and Gymnastics Hedgehog Balls Top Rated b

www.sport-thieme.com

g h c

Extra soft

d New ABS® Powerball®

The “Foldable” Ball • Inflatable with the plastic tubes (included) • very soft and supple ball

Balls a Hedgehog Now you can relax at any time or in any place: after partaking in sport, in the office, whenever you feel tension take up your plastic hedgehog ball. For finger massage and gripping exercises. 71 109 3735 Green, ø 6 cm 71 109 3706 Yellow, ø 7 cm 71 109 3719 Red, ø 9 cm 71 109 3722 Blue, ø 10 cm

Ball g Redondo® The “foldable” ball for many exer-

Hedgehog Balls c Inflatable Inflatable, bouncing balls with Hedgehog Balls b Soft 71 109 4103 Purple, ø 6 cm 71 109 4116 Mint, ø 7 cm 71 109 4129 Bright blue, ø 9 cm 71 109 4132 Pink, ø 10 cm

needle valve. You can therefore control the size and hardness of the ball. Available in a range of colours. Balls are delivered deflated, ø 10 cm, approx. 50 g. Extra soft. 71 109 4321 Each

Balls, Large d Hedgehog Inflatable, with needle valve.

See also:

Rounded nobbles, made of Ruton®, ø 23 cm, 420 g. 71 109 4318 Red 71 109 4305 Blue

Each Each

cises. As it is space saving, it can therefore be brought along anywhere. Makes body sculpting and relaxing simple no matter where you are. Very soft and smooth, foam material. The ball is inflated using the enclosed attachment, ø 22 cm, 215 g, sealed with a stopper. In presentation box with exercise instructions. Exercises for: • strengthening stomach muscles • relaxing the spine • strengthening throat muscles • strengthening leg and bottom muscles • relaxation and deep relaxation ø 18 cm, 150 g, anthracite 71 176 0053 Each ø 22 cm, 150 g, blue 71 176 0037 Each ø 26 cm, 160 g, red 71 176 0040-1 Each

Guaranteed not to burst due to the Anti Burst System

Powerball® h ABS® The guarantee of safe training. A professional product from B.co: Body Intelligence Concept. The ball meets the highest demands in safety and in use. Guaranteed not to burst if the ball is damaged during use. Patented material. Silver. 71 107 4563 ø 45 cm, 900 g Each 71 107 4576 ø 55 cm, 900 g Each 71 107 4547 ø 65 cm, 1250 g Each 71 107 4589 ø 75 cm, 1600 g Each

Hedgehog sound balls on page 24

e f

Walking Trainer Plus f Senso® Walking Trainer Light e Senso® The handy companion. Small, The small muli-tool. Simultaneous training for hands, underarm and upper arm muscles. This increases energy usage, which in turn leads to valuable fat burning. Ergonomic shape, soft, handy, easy to grip and can be hygienically washed. 11x5 cm, each 250 g, blue. 71 147 2615 Pair

pleasant and easy to hold. Ensures increased bloodflow through the hands. They are hygienic as they are washable and can easily be taken anywhere. Whether out in the open air or on the treadmill, you cannot do without the Walker. Approx. 7.5 x 4 cm, 17 g, red. 71 147 2602 Pair

Ring i Hedgehog For gymnastics and massage, made from soft, hygienic plastic. Easy to hold, for water exercises. Suitable for small children's hands and motor exercises in blue, red, yellow, ø 11cm, outer ø 17 cm. 71 127 3205 Blue Each 71 127 3218 Yellow Each 71 127 3221 Red Each

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Touchball j Ruton Completely new surface, with pleasant rounded knobbles. Suitable for handicapped gymnastics, for people who have problems with catching, throwing and hitting the ball, as well as for use in the water. Feeling the ball stimulates the senses. 71 176 0011 ø 10 cm, blue Each 71 176 0008-01 ø 16 cm, blue Each 71 176 0008-02 ø 16 cm, red Each Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Gymnastics Balls … Jump About!

Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

WV Rubber Gymnastics Balls • Ideal for school and general sport • Good bounce • Hand friendly • Basic elastomer natural rubber • Special rubber valve • Holds its shape well • Robust, therefore comes with 5 year durability guarantee • Proven quality over 40 years at economical prices.

Ruton®: • Secure grip • Anti-static • Holds shape well • Easy to clean • Washable

a Made from high quality Ruton®, very Glossy Gymnastic Balls

good bounce, grippy and anti-static. Extremely bouncy and super elastic. The balls have lip valves. Gymnastic balls 6“, ø 16 cm, 300 g, 7 1/2”, ø 19 cm, 420 g. The 7 1/2” ball is recognised as a competition ball, with F.I.G logo, the result of years of cooperation with gymnastic experts. Sizes: ø 16 cm 71 109 2107-0 Blue 71 109 2110-0 Red 71 109 2165-0 Yellow 71 109 2149-0 Pink 71 109 2152-0 Turquoise 71 109 2178-0 Green

Sizes: ø 19 cm 71 109 2107-1 71 109 2110-1 71 109 2165-1 71 109 2149-1 71 109 2152-1 71 109 2178-1

Rubber Gymnastic Balls b WV The ball covering is manufactured to

Blue Red Yellow Pink Turquoise Green

Glossy Gymnastic Balls (FIG approved) 71 109 0606 71 109 0619 71 109 0664 71 109 0635 71 109 0648 71 109 0677

Blue Red Yellow Pink Turquoise Green

Gymnastic Balls Gymnastics balls 6’’: ø 16 cm = 50 cm circumference, approx. 300-340 g Gymnastics balls 7 1/2’’: ø 19 cm = 59.5 cm circumference, approx. 420 g, competition size All gymnastics balls can also be used in water!

a special process and is non-porous, making storage for long periods of time possible. The balls provide a very good grip, the level of which can be controlled by rubbing with 400 grade sandpaper. This product has WV certification and is made from rubber, with a patented vulcanised rubber valve. 6'', ø 16 cm, 320 g 71 109 8613-0 Blue 71 109 8626-0 Yellow 71 109 8639-0 Green 71 109 8642-0 Red 71 109 8655-0 Colourful 7.5'', ø 19 cm, 420 g 71 109 8613-1 Blue 71 109 8626-1 Yellow 71 109 8639-1 Green 71 109 8642-1 Red 71 109 8655-1 Colourful

c Playground Universal playing ball which is extremely strong, in basketball design. Size and weight 5 1/2” (ø 14 cm), 160 g, especially suitable for children. As a training ball, basketball, handball, gymnastics ball or as a playing ball. Can also be used in water. Nylon shell with rubber surface material make it extremely easy to grip. 71 109 2400-1 Yellow 71 109 2413-1 Green 71 109 2439-1 Red

Ball d Multi Multi functional and extremely robust. Rubber outer material on a nylon carcass, easily gripped moulded surface. Can be used as a training ball for volleyball, basketball, football, handball, gymnastics and in the water. Extremely good bounce, ø 21 cm, 400 g, in yellow, green, lilac and red, with needle valve. 71 109 2400-0 Yellow 71 109 2413-0 Green 71 109 2426-0 Purple 71 109 2439-0 Red

Multi Ball

• Multi-functional • Very easy to grip surface Our Tip For You: Do not pump multiballs too hard, they will lose their shape. You will get full bounce from pumping to normal pressure.

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 23

Therapy Balls e a

c Rolls f Therapy Transparent and light, colours and sounds are connected to changing sensory and physical experiences, therefore excellent for use in physiotherapy, rehabilitation, pre-schools and schools. Made from extremely strong, non-tear, transparent covered Trevira weave, with coloured sides. Filled with coloured balls. Max. weight 150 kg, length 140 cm. ø 45 cm, length approx. 140 cm 71 127 5403 ø 65 cm, length approx. 140 cm 71 127 5416

• Rolling • Balancing • Rocking

Gymnic Balls The large gymnastic ball, which can support up to 300 kg. A universal gymnastic ball with stopper seal, comes in a gift box with exercise instructions. Yellow, ø 45 cm, 700 g 71 109 5500 Each Red, ø 55 cm, 1,000 g 71 109 5513 Each Blue, ø 65 cm, 1,400 g 71 109 5526 Each Blue, ø 95 cm, 2,500 g 71 109 5539 Each Red, ø 120 cm, 4,000 g 71 109 5542 Each

a b c d e

Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

Bell Balls for Visually Impaired People

New

j h h

Bell Balls Exercise balls with bells, 7 1/2” (ø 19 cm) 420 g, for youths and adults. 71 109 8903-1 Blue Each 71 109 8929-1 Red Each

Ball i Goal This ball has been specially developed for the blind and visually impaired. It is a team game, rubber ball ø 25 cm, 1,250 g, blue, with bells and sound holes. 71 109 9108 Each

can carry up to 300 kg, many different variations of play and exercising are possible: roll on it, jump on to it, balance, lying on the back or stomach on it, vaulting and rocking etc. With stopper seal. ø 40 cm, red, 65 cm long 71 109 1700 ø 55 cm, yellow, 90 cm long 71 109 1713 ø 70 cm, blue, 115 cm long 71 109 1726

New Ball k l Hopper Children love this ball for hopping

Bell Balls

Special rubber balls for the blind and visually impaired. These balls are also fun for those with good vision: play with closed eyes, follow the ball with your ears, roll ball (a game with rules), differentiate between noises. Material: rubber. Exercise balls with bells 6” (ø 16 cm) 340 g, for children. 71 109 8903-0 Blue Each 71 109 8916-0 Yellow Each 71 109 8929-0 Red Each

Roll g Physio New equipment for play and therapy,

j Bell Ball

Special foam, pleasant to hold and good firmness. With 20 sound holes. ø 15 cm, ca. 200 g. Material thickness 15 mm. Orange. 71 109 9111

Sound Ball k Hedgehog A small easily gripped hedgehog ball

and jumping. It requires a high level of coordination. The built-in handle makes it easier to use. For children over 3 years of age up to 145 cm in height: ø 45 cm; over 155 cm tall: ø 55 cm; over 156 cm: ø 65 cm. Comes in a gift box. 71 108 6603 Yellow, ø 45 cm 71 108 6616 Red, ø 55 cm 71 108 6629 Blue, ø 65 cm

with bells on the inside and holes to let the sound out. The long pimples on the surface of the ball are used to stimulate tactile awareness, in therapy and in games with visually impaired as well as with people with hearing damage. Blue, ø 10 cm, 180 g. 71 109 3748 Each

And there's more: Dark glasses for blind ball and “blind cow” on page 261

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Rider” Bouncy Ball m “Super Bouncy ball made of Ruton®. With 2 built-in handles, ø 60 cm, TÜV certified. Supports up to 75kg. 71 109 6200

Ball n Senso Made of Ruton®, with stopper seal. For targeted use in rehabilitation, gymnastics and massage. The massage pimples relieve tense muscles and stimulate the acupuncture pressure points. Hygienic and washable. ø 100 cm, red. 71 109 5311 Each Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Gymnastics Balls Pezzi Ball® a Original A universal gymnastics ball, which has many uses from gymnastics to rehabilitation, fitness to aerobics. It can be used for dancing, sport and therapy or indeed as a sitting ball. Made from resistant plastic. Can support up to 400 kg. Individually packed in plastic bags. Yellow, ø 42 cm, 800 g 71 109 4709 Each Orange, ø 53 cm, 1,100 g 71 109 4712 Each Green, ø 65 cm, 1,400 g 71 109 4725 Each Red, ø 75 cm, 1,700 g 71 109 4738 Each

Pezzi Balls

Physio Balls

Ideal for gymnastics, rehabilitation, fitness and therapy

Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

Physio Ball® b Original Cast from soft plastic with stopper, packed in plastic bags. Blue, ø 85 cm, 1,900 g 71 109 4741 Red, ø 95 cm, 2,000 g 71 109 4754 Orange, ø 120 cm, 4,900 g 71 109 4767

Each Each Each

And there's more: • Hand pumps page 33 • Sitting balls page 236

Non-bursting Physio Ball Original Pezzi Physioball®

c MAXAFE® Flexton Silpower (patented) silver, in polythene bag. This ball gives the user great security as it will not burst but the air will slowly escape when damaged. Wide range of uses in rehabilitation,

fitness, aerobic, sport or as sitting ball. Pleasant soft velvety surface. 71 196 8242 ø 85 cm 71 196 8255 ø 95 cm 71 196 8271 ø 120 cm

• Non bursting gymnastics ball • meets the highest safety standards

Pezzi d Original Gymnastics ball® MAXAFE® Flexton Silpower (patented), in polythene bag. This ball gives the user great security as, if damaged the air escapes slowly. The ball has a wide range of uses: rehabilitation, fitness,

aerobics, sport or as a sitting ball. Soft velvety surface. 71 196 8200 ø 42 cm 71 196 8213 ø 53 cm 71 196 8226 ø 65 cm 71 196 8239 ø 75 cm

Accessories

New

j i

Base e Ball Made of high quality recyclable polyethylene. An extremely robust synthetic material with a high carrying capacity, easy to clean. Even with the base the ball will still be very flexible and you will feel safer on it. Suitable for all big gymnastic balls. The ball won't roll away when you stand up. Price does not include ball. 71 109 7304

h g g

Stopper Remover

Facilitates the deflation of large balls with stoppers. Insert lever under the stopper and simply lift it out. Suitable for all stopper sizes. 71 150 7007

Mobile Stands for Gymnastics Balls

For storage and transport. Suitable for holding 9 gymnastics balls from 42-75 cm. ø 100 cm, H: 192 cm. Holding rings can be individually adjusted. Delivery does not include balls. 71 106 9929

See also:

The universal box for tidy storage of equipment for sport, games, leisure, household, workshop and storage. • Space saving • Lockable • Holds up to 150 kg

Ball Storage System page 122

d l 30 cm

Litre Storage Boxes c 90 Made of high quality polypropylene, LxWxH: 72x42x30 cm. Delivery does not include lid. 71 186 4700-3 Red 71 186 4713-3 Yellow 71 186 4726-3 Blue 71 186 4739-3 Green

Cover d Clip-On For Storage Box. Made from polypropylene. 71 186 4742-1 71 186 4755-1 71 186 4768-1 71 186 4771-1

Storage i Wall System for Gymnastics Balls

Ball Carrying Net

cm 42

72 cm

Red Yellow Blue Green

e f

Bag g Ball Large bag for storage and transportation of approx. 10-12 footballs, size 5. With carrying straps so can also be carried on back. Very strong 100% nylon material with pull cord. Height 80 cm, ø 40 cm. 71 106 9701

New Set

For large gymnastic balls ø 45-100 cm, holds 3-5 balls. Horizontal design, length 240 cm, depth 57 cm, complete with fixing material. Balls not included. Galvanized. 71 106 9903-1

Particularly strong, made from polyethylene. A practical carrying net for approx. 10-12 balls of ø 25 cm. for 10-12 footballs 71 110 1010 Each for 1 ball 71 110 1007 Price for 3

Storage Box - Set of 4 Consisting of: • 4 x 90 litre boxes • 4 lids in green, blue, yellow and red. 71 186 4784

cm 60

100 c m

62 cm

• • • • •

New Stands for h Mobile Gymnastic Balls For storage and transporting. Suitable for 9 gymnastic balls from 42-75 cm. ø 100 cm, height: 192 cm. Each storage ring can be adjusted individually. Balls not included. 71 106 9929

Net Bag j Ball for Large Gymnastics Suitable for storing and transporting k Net five x size 5 footballs or volleyballs. The Balls sides are sealed and the middle section is 100% nylon with 100% nylon net material. Comes with carrying handle and shoulder strap and zip. ø 23 cm, L: 100 cm. 71 106 9714

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Ball carrier and storage net for gymnastics balls such as Pezzi or Gymnic that have a diameter up to 120 cm. Nylon material with 2 pull cords. Delivery does not include ball. 71 109 7317-1 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Basketball Sets

Systems d Basketball For outside wall installation. This set can be fixed on the wall wherever you want to play basketball: in schoolyards, clubs, playgrounds, swimming pools or at home. It can be quickly and easily fixed to every wall

using dowels. The backboard is 80 cm from the wall. The new “street” backboards (size: 100x75cm) give these units a modern feel, complete with basket and net. 71 116 4800 With white board Each 71 116 4901 With blue/white board Each

b 90 cm

• Height adjustable • Simple to store (folding frame)

Wall Frame, Fixed a Basketball Design Distance from wall 1.70 m, ready to take basketball board and basket. The unit is made from steel tubing. 71 205 7604

Wall Frame, b Basketball Swivel Design Distance from wall 1.70 m, ready to take basketball board and basket. The unit is made from steel tubing. 71 205 7617

Rotating Basketball Wall Frame Extends out 1.70 m, height adjustable. Ready to be connected to the basketball backboard and basket. Steel tubing construction. 71 205 7200 not illustrated

Training Unit c Basketball Made from steel tubing and set up to

Rotating Basketball Wall Frame Extends out 2.25 m. Ready to be connected to the basketball backboard and basket. Steel tubing construction. 71 205 7620 not illustrated

Rotating Basketball Wall Frame Extends out 2.25 m. As above, but height adjustable. 71 205 7213 not illustrated

Crank Arm For adjusting the height. 71 205 7503

not illustrated

Operating Bar For rotating basketball wall units, swivels. 71 205 7705 not illustrated

60 cm

e Basketball System

Set for hanging on DIN Standard Wall Bars. Wall bars can be converted into a basketball set with the minimum of effort. The complete system is simply attached to the bars. The system is particularly useful for pre-school and for disabled sports. It is simple to adjust the height. The board is approx. 60 cm from the bars. Can be folded away, easy to move steel tube frame, with backboard made from wood, basket and net. 71 116 5005

Free planning service

hold a training basketball backboard. Board, basket and net not included. 71 205 8001 not illustrated

Basketball Training Unit As above, but height adjustable. 71 205 8014

Stay

Height adjustable ceiling attachment

And there's more: Wall bars are on page 204

Basketball Training Sets

Transparent backboard Edge protection padding Folding down basketball basket

In competition design, FIBA certified

Basketball Ceiling Mechanism It is possible to attach basketball sets to the ceiling in almost all halls after initial installation. Normally these competition sets are more economical than transportable sets. They need no additional storage room and do not damage the floor. Raisable basketball sets for ceiling assembly are available in many different designs and variations.

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Practice System f Basketball • wall mounting, distance from wall approx. 20 cm • wooden backboard 90x60 cm • basket and net 71 115 9501 Complete

And there's more: • basketball baskets on page 36 • backboards on page 37 • basketballs on page 10 and 11

t 35

Basketball Baskets and Accessories for c Bracket Basketball

450 mm

20 mm

Baskets A bracket for fixing to a wall or backboard, suitable for all basketball baskets with DIN boreholes. The minimum distance between the floor and the bottom of the bracket has to be 200 cm. It is easy to take the basket off the bracket if required for safety reasons so that you can also control the amount of time given to play. Galvanised, without basket. 71 116 1407

a b Basket a Basketball Complies to DIN EN 1270, ø 45 cm. Made from solid steel with 12 net eyelets. Suitable for use inside and outside (Net not included). 71 116 0909

• Complies with DIN EN1270 • solid material • Double welded net hooks

Net b Basketball 6 mm, nylon, white, internationally

Basketball Set Now you have more time to play, the basket can be removed from the holding mechanism without any tools. Consisting of: • 1 basketball basket a • 1 basketball net b • 1 bracket c 71 116 1902

recognised and recommended. 71 116 2501

Consisting of: • 1 basketball basket that complies with regulations • 1 basketball net • 1 basketball in rainbow colours • 1 ball pump with needle valve 71 116 0202

Complies with DIN standards

Basketball Ladder Set

New Folds in With Safety Net Hangers

Basketball Basket d Folding With new safety net hanger. The net is hung from a steel wire threaded through eyelets. Hinged for 105 kg. 71 116 4044

Basketball Basket i Folding Bent baskets and broken backboards

Basketball Set

Set e Basketball Indoor and outdoor set.

Folds in

are frequently casualties in basketball. By using our new invention, the folding basket, these problems belong to the past. When weight is applied the basket will tip at an angle of 30 degrees and then returns to its normal position. Without net. Design: folds down at 45 kg 71 116 4002 Design: folds down at 70 kg 71 116 4028 Design: folds down at 105 kg 71 116 4015

i j

Basket j Basketball Complies with the latest EU standard

Extra Strength

Top Rated

1270, loading capacity up to 240 kg. The ring has an additional flat iron brace and the angle pieces are strengthened on both sides. The boreholes correspond to DIN specifications. This basket can be added to all existing systems. Without net. 71 116 4507

www.sport-thieme.com

60 cm

• height adjustable • easily removed

Basketball Ladder

DBGM approved. This basketball ladder can set the basket height at any level. The basket can be raised, lowered or even completely removed without using any tools so that you can easily control the amount of play. It can be fixed directly to a wall, which acts as the backboard. Comes with basketball basket, net and mounting accessories. 71 117 4104 Complete

g Consisting of:

Basketball Ladder Set

• 1 basketball ladder with basket and net f • 1 backboard h 71 117 4133

for Basketball h Backboard Ladder

Vandalism proof k Basketball Basket

Hot dip galvanised ring with solid net holders. Please order net separately. 71 117 3909

Basketball Net Weather-proof backboard, 120x90 cm. The Made of galvanised chain with fixing basketball ladder is sunken into the board so hooks. that all balls react normally. 71 117 4003 71 117 4120

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

• quiet • vandalism proof Net m Basketball Cut and rip proof, made from 5mm thick Hercules rope. Suitable for all basketball baskets 71 116 2514 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Basketball Backboards Indoor and Outdoor Basketball Backboards

Basketball Backboards In many sizes and designs. All backboards comply with the prescribed rules. We deliver all backboards without holes so they can be attached to the frame and baskets on location. 180x105 cm, this new size complies with the latest DBB and FIBA regulations and is recommended for new purchases.

Top Rated

www.sport-thieme.com

Wooden

Safety glass and acrylic glass (transparent) The glass recess clearance means the force from the basket will not transfer onto the board.

Fibreglass reinforced plastic

Backboard made a Basketball from MDF plates A 22 mm thick backboard made from strong MDF plates. With solid wooden core, coated on both sides with melamine wood and sealed edges. All boards come unbored. Only for use in indoor halls. 71 116 1234 90x60 cm 71 116 1221 120x90 cm 71 116 1218 180x105 cm 71 116 1205 180x120 cm

Basketball b Fibreglass Backboard Weather-resistant plastic with fibre glass inserts, with solid wood core for boring at any point on the backboard. We deliver the board without any holes. The ideal backboard for outdoor courts. 71 116 1029 120x90 cm 71 116 1016 180x105 cm 71 116 1003 180x120 cm

Outdoor Basketball Backboards

c Transparent Basketball Backboard Made from 10 mm acrylic glass, mounted on an additional steel tube frame that supports the board weight. 71 116 2110 180x105 cm 71 116 2107 180x120 cm

Basketball Backboard made from safety glass Made from SCS safety glass with shatterproof cover and pre-bored fixing holes, transparent. The board for highest level competitions. Safety glass 71 116 2615 180x105 cm 71 116 2602 180x120 cm

Protector d Edge For basketball backboards made from

Now! Order

PE foam to reduce the risk of injury. Available in thicknesses of 12, 20 and 30 mm. 71 116 2804 12 mm 71 116 2817 20 mm 71 116 2820 30 mm

Street Basketball Backboards

New f • less noise • reduced wind load

h g

e Outdoor Basketball Backboards

With aluminium frame, completely weatherresistant, very strong and with additional frame reinforcement. 71 117 3707 120x90 cm 71 117 3710 180x105 cm

Mesh f Steel Basketball Backboard

Basketball Backboard g Street Original streetball design, made from

Made from galvanised steel mesh. The open cage design considerably reduces noise. 120x90 cm. 71 116 4608

weather-resistant plastic with fibre glass inserts and an eye-catching paint finish. Each board is unique. Size 100x75 cm. 71 116 4305 Each

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Basketball Backboard h Street in white, 110x73 cm 71 116 4318

Each

And there's more: • 24 second display (DBB approved) for basketballs page 113 • Basketballs page 10-11

t 37

Mobile Street and Beach Basketball Sets Height can be adjusted quickly

max. 305 cm

a 899,– height adjustable

Rear view min. 240 cm

Street Basketball a “Dunking” System

100 kg

Storage area for weight

Easy to “open out” and set up quickly. Adjustable to heights up to and including the official match height. The system must be counter balanced with 100 kg weight when playing. Comes complete with safety pad, fibreglass backboard, basket and net. Weight not included. 71 117 3303

Basketball System b Street This mobile system is quick and easy to assemble and can therefore be used anywhere at anytime. The base has castors and can be filled with sand or water, making the system particularly stable. The height can be adjusted from 305 cm to 287 cm, 270 cm, 255 cm or 240 cm, making it suitable for kids as well as adults. Comes complete with fibreglass backboard and basket with net. 71 117 1118

And there's more: Basketballs page 10 and 11

New

New • removable basket • acrylic backboard • easy to adjust height Street Basketball c “Orlando” Set With a transparent rectangular backboard made from acrylic glass, 116x76 cm. The mobile base can be filled with water or sand. The height of the basket can be easily adjusted using the adjusting mechanism to 305, 275 and 245 cm. The basket will hinge downwards at a weight of approx. 60 kg. 71 117 1163

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

• telescopic steel tubing • height adjustable: 210-260 cm Basketball Set d “Junior” This is an economical set for private use with telescopic square tubing. The board is plastic with a weatherproof nylon net. The base (93x61x17 cm), can be filled with water or sand approx. 65 kg, board 91x61x 3 cm. Height adjustable from 210-260 cm (floor ring), max. height: 308 cm (floor-upper edge-board), 17 kg. 71 134 1225 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

… Fast and Easy to Erect! Vario Street Basketball Set With rounded backboard

c Supports up to 240 kg • Easy to assemble and dismantle • Can be used anywhere

Advantages:

Height can be adjusted from 2.40 to 3.05 m

Ground sockets for concreting in.

Basketball Sets a Street Mobile sets with frame with castors, which can be filled with sand or water. The backboard is assembled directly onto the post, height adjustable from 240305 cm. Complete set with steel tubing post, moving frame, plastic backboard, basket and net. 71 117 1121

Basketball b Stationary Set in Ground Sockets Stationary basketball set with steel tubing post standing in ground sockets. The backboard is attached directly to the post, height adjustable from 240-305 cm. Complete set with standing post, ground sockets, plastic backboard, basket and net. 71 117 1134

Folds down easily

Vario Street Basketball System

Extremely practical folding mechanism means as well as being quick and easy to assemble, this set folds away for storage. With strong wheels. Delivery includes: • Fillable weight boxes • Basket ring and net • Padding Advantages: • Easy to transport • Stands very steady • Safety protective padding • Height adjustable backboard (to any point from 180-305 cm). • Suitable for pre-schools, primary schools and private use • Simple to set up and take down • Steel tubing • Fillable plastic base • Wheels for transportation • Also suitable for people in wheelchairs • Extends out 60 cm • Can be adjusted to any height from 180 to 305 cm • Will support up to 240 kg All basketball sets are constructed in accordance with CEN (European) standards. The baskets are screwed directly onto the frame in order to prevent damage to the backboard from overloading. 71 116 0505

II Street Basketball d Vario Set

Same as Vario Street Basketball set c. With a rectangular 120x90 cm backboard. 71 116 0534

With weight boxes

Vario II Street Basketball Set With square backboard More information and videos for products on this page

www.sport-thieme.com

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

With adjusting Handle

t 39

Stationary Basketball Sets

Rear

b Aluminium Basketball Frame For schoolyards and outdoor swimming pools. The aluminium posts (80x80mm) are firmly fixed (no shaking) into ground sockets and can be height adjusted from 1 to 3 m. Without backboard, basket and net. 71 115 9703 Each

• 5 year stability guarantee • Complete with backboard, basket and net • Extends 120 cm Set a Basketball Completely metal construction, standing column made from galvanised steel tubing ø 144 x 4.5

mm, extension 120 cm, plastic coated steel back board 135x90 cm, basket and net and ground socket. 71 117 0610 Complete unit

Basketball Sets for Private Use

Basketball Set

Easy to adjust height

This complete basketball system consists of: • 1 Basketball frame with ground sockets b • 1 Basketball backboard • 1 Basketball basket • 1 Basketball net 71 116 2006

Ground Sockets Single socket for basketball set b 71 115 9716

Basketball Set

New

Basketball e “Private” Set This economical set is suitable for private use. This set has a 112x73 cm plastic backboard and a strong basket with net. Rear view of wall model

Basketball Set

Height adjustable

Set f Basketball Suitable for indoors and out-

Adjustable c Height Basketball Set The attractively priced system for private customers. Powder-coated tubular steel posts for concreting or attaching to the ground sockets. Complete with fibreglass backboard 112x73 cm, basket and net. Height can be adjusted from 2.00-3.05 m. Comes unassembled in a box. 71 117 0607 Complete unit Ground Sockets For basketball set 71 117 0607. 71 117 0636

Comes with assembly instructions. 71 115 9527

Mounted Basketd Wall ball System Can be mounted to a house wall or to the garage. The wall fixtures are simply dowelled to the wall, distance from the wall approx. 22 cm. Including weatherresistant plastic backboard 112x73 cm, basket and net. Comes unassembled in a box. 71 117 0708 Complete unit

Complies with DIN standards

doors. The set consists of: • 1 regulation basketball basket 71 116 0909, page 36 a • 1 basketball net 71 116 2501 page 36 b • 1 basketball in rainbow colours 71 108 5121 page 10 a • 1 ball pump with needle valve 71 109 9818 page 33 a 71 116 0202-2

Basketball Sets All basketball Sets are constructed to CEN standards (European standards). The basket is screwed directly onto the frame

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

thus avoiding damage to the back board in cases of excess stress.

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Ideal for Public Sports and Leisure Areas Play” Basketball System a “Fair a „Fair Play“ An extremely robust system that has been

b “Fair Play” Silent

specifically designed for public sports grounds and playgrounds. It comes with a 5 year stability guarantee. Particularly suitable for places where there is high usage as the materials used are completely weather-proof and vandalism proof. This system's characteristics are: • the hot dip galvanised post has a solid welded profile of 15x15 cm, with a 165 cm boom. Basket height 305 cm • the backboard (120x90 cm) is made of strong aluminium with a reinforced rim. • the hot dip galvanised basket comes with a solid metal basket ring and strong solid metal net eyelets. • the net is made of fully galvanised chain and strong fixing hooks. The system comes complete with post, backboard, net and ground socket. 71 117 3505 Each

• vandalism-proof • 5 year stability guarantee • complete set including backboard, basket and net • extends out 165 cm • 15x15 cm square tubing

Play Silent” b “Fair • vandalismBasketball System With all the advantages of 71 117 3505 but with proof a particularly quiet hot dip galvanised board of steel wire netting. We recommend this system for • 5 year fun and games in residential areas. Delivery does stability not include post protection padding 71 116 1726-1, please order at the same time. guarantee 71 115 8104 Each • noise reducing

Accessories

Protection Padding for c Post Basketball Posts

Post Protective Padding

Indispensable for player's safety. The elastic padding material will greatly reduce the risk of injury. Weatherproof. 200 cm long, with durable cover and velcro fastenings. Cross section: 150x150 cm. 71 116 1726-1

And there's more: Basketballs are on page 10-11

New

Double the playing fun!

“Fair Play Duo”

Play Duo” d “Fair Basketball Set Fair Play 71 117 3505, our well known basketball set is now playable on both sides. 2 booms with 165 cm extension for playing heights of 305 cm and 260 cm. All materials used are absolutely waterproof and will withstand hard use. The hot-dip galvanised post is made from 15x15 cm square tubing. Both backboards are 120x90 cm. The net ring is solid with strong net eyelets, while the net is made of galvanised chains with fixing hooks.

Complete set with: • posts • 2 booms • ground sockets • 2 backboards • 2 baskets • 2 nets. 71 115 8117 Aluminium backboard 71 115 8120 Backboard of grid material

Height Adjusting “Fair-Play”

Play” Basketball Set e “Fair with Height Adjustment The well known basketball unit, “Fair Play”, now comes with basket height adjustment from 260-305 cm, extending out 165 cm. All materials are totally weatherproof and are safe for hard use. The galvanised posts are 15 x 15 cm square tubing. The backboard is 120 x 90 cm and the basket ring is made from solid material with strong net eyelets.The net is a galvanised chain with attaching hooks. The complete set includes the posts, ground sockets, backboard, basket and net. 71 117 3550 Aluminium Backboard 71 117 3563 Backboard of grid material

Adjustment f Height Mechanism for “Fair Play” Basketball Set All “Fair Play” units from Sport-Thieme can be re-kitted with this height adjusting mechanism. The basket is adjustable from 260 to 305 cm. A complete set of fixing materials are included in the order. 71 117 3576

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 41

Baseball, Intercrosse and Softball … Catcher Fielding Gloves

School Baseball Sets

School Set 1 a Baseball A set for beginners and improvers. Consisting of: • 10 teeballs page 43 c • 2 teeball bats page 43 g • 16 catcher's gloves, left c • 4 catcher's gloves, right c • 1 batting tee page 43 i • 1 base set page 43h • 1 storage bag 71 189 4703

Baseball School Set II

Right pitching hand = left catching glove Left pitching hand = right catching glove

Set for smaller groups. Consisting of: • 5 teeballs page 43 c • 1 teeball bat page 43 g • 8 catcher's gloves, left c • 2 catcher's gloves, right c • 1 batting tee page 43 i • 1 base set page 43 h • 1 storage bag 71 189 4716

Master, Baseball b Field Catching Glove

Master, Baseball c Field Catching Glove

Size 9.5”/24.1 cm the economical gloves for schools. 71 118 4105 Left catcher's glove Each 71 118 4118 Right catcher's glove Each

Size 11”/27.9 cm. The official glove of the German Baseball and Teeball Programme. 71 118 3900 Left catcher's glove Each 71 118 3913 Right catcher's glove Each

Intercrosse Sticks d Intercrosse For schools and clubs, total length

New

102cm, strong plastic heads with a 70cm long aluminium shaft. 71 116 8671 Red 71 116 8668 Blue

d e

Intercrosse

School Set Intercrosse

School Set f Intercrosse Consisting of: And there's more: Unihockey/Floorball goals on page 68

• 6 red sticks • 6 blue sticks • 3 balls 71 116 8684

Set

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Ball e Intercrosse Made from soft plastic, ø 65 mm. 71 116 8697

What is Intercrosse? Intercrosse is similar to Lacrosse: • it is a fast team game. • It is played to simple rules so that beginners can be adopted into the game immediately. • it is a game that helps to build relationships as only the team that gets on and works with one another wins. • it is a fair game because body contact and stick contact is forbidden. • it is an indoor and outdoor game with different playing combinations to choose from • it is an international game. • it is a game for schools in sports lessons. More information available on the Internet see: http://www.inter-crosse.com/ Prices available on request. Please contact us.

… Unbeatable for Quality Baseball Bats

Baseball Sets Baseball Set a “Junior” The set consists of

New

• 1 catcher's glove 9.5”/24.1 cm left for right handed people • 1 teeball bat • 1 ball 71 118 4453

a g

New e Baseball Set b “Senior” The set consists of • 1 catcher's glove 11”/27.9 cm left for right handed people • 1 teeball bat • 1 ball 71 118 4466

New designs! These bats are permitted for leagues

New Bats e Baseball Made of special aluminium, with optimal weight distribution and large sweet spot, handy size provides good power for the “jump” or “drive”. The right bat for a high batting average. This model has a special hardened layer of varnish and power cap precision weighting. 26''/66 cm, 17 oz./480 g 71 118 6114 Each 31''/79 cm, 26 oz./737 g 71 118 6101 Each

Baseballs

c Teeballs These balls have a soft, elastic surface, are lighter than the hard training and league balls. Ideally suited for beginners and indoor training purposes. ø 72 mm. 71 118 5300

d Baseball Attractively priced beginners ball for schools and youth training, with Syntex® outer covering and an inner core of rubber and cork. ø 72 mm. 71 118 5502

Baseball Bats f Made from strong ash, very

precise and has good balance 71 118 6130 30''/76 cm Panther model 71 118 6127 32''/81 cm Tiger model

Base Set

Bats g Teeball Teeball bat made of treated hard wood, Length 27’’/69cm. 71 118 5108

Soft Ball Set

i Baseball Batting Tee

Set h Base The official base set of the German Baseball and Teeball programme. Water-proof rubber bases. Consisting of: • 3 bases • 1 home plate and 1 pitching plate. 71 118 5209

The batting tee enables all players to hit the static ball perfectly. It is an essential piece of equipment for every training session. Robust hard rubber home plate with rotating steel rail. Stable steel flange with height adjustable hard rubber tube, adjustable height 60 - 90 cm. The official batting tee of the German Baseball and Teeball programme. 71 118 5007

The set consists of: • 1 bat • 1 ball Beginners will be able to practice and play • 1 catching plate 71 117 0304 safely with these softball bats and balls. Pitchers, batsmen and fielders can all play together. Advanced players The bat is made of virtually unbreakable can also plastic with a soft rubber covering. The use the fielding soft, supple ball sticks to the catching gloves b - c on plate which is covered with velcro. page 42.

j Softball Set

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Now! Order

t 43

Football Goals from t

Quality Goals from Sport-Thieme • Particularly weatherproof material • Very resilient even after years of use • Made from thick-walled special tubing • Corresponds to DFB and FIFA regulations as well as EN 748

Standing in Ground Sockets

“Corner Welded” Football Goal Set Consisting of: • 1 aluminium goal article no. 71 115 0706 e • 1 pair of goal nets, made of 3mm polypropylene, green, 71 116 0303, page 49. We provide a 3rd net in this set as a reserve. 71 115 0751 Set

e f Corner welded

a–d

Aluminium Football Goals, with Welded Corners

ef Goal nets page 49 Access. page 48 4

Football Goal Anodised matt silver, with integrated “Alu” Football Goal Set Aluminium Complies with FIFA and DFB (German Foot- c net fixing Consisting of: • 1 pair of aluminium goals that comply with FIFA regulations, article no. 71 115 0605 a • 3 nets, made of 3mm polypropylene. Many teams often find damaged nets just moments before a game. This is why we provide a 3rd net in this set as a reserve. 71 115 0302 Set

ball Association) regulations. Standing in ground sockets (depth 500 mm). Quick and easy to assemble and dismantle. Includes net frame, ground sockets and special hooks for net suspension. Inner size 7.32x2.44 m. Anodised in matt silver 71 115 0605 Each Enamelled in white 71 115 0618 Each

a b

71 115 0647 Each White stove enamel finished, with integrated net fixing 71 115 0650 Each

Net bars for goals c and d with integrated net fixing see info text

Very stable The joints between posts and laths on this goal are welded solidly together. They are screwed approximately 20 cm below the crossbar making the goal more stable. Standing in base sockets, with net frame. Inner goal size: 7.32x2.44 m. Anodised in matt silver 71 115 0706 Each Anodised matt silver, with integrated net fixing 71 115 0735 Each Ground socket with cover For football goals with oval tubing, 120x100mm. 50 m long. 71 115 5307 Each

e f

Transportable and Corner Welded Football Goal h Transportable 7.32x2.44 m. Particularly resistant design due to 200 cm deep base frame and reinforced net frame. The depth of the net can be smoothly adjusted from 150-200 cm. 71 115 0722 Each

h The net depth can be adjusted at any level

Corner welded

Goal nets page 49 Access. page 48

12 28J

Transportable “Transportable” Aluminium Football Goal The strong training goal. This goal has a base frame and net frame and can be used anywhere a goal is needed in a hurry. It can be quickly erected anywhere and is therefore perfect for training purposes. Anodised matt silver, inner goal size: 7.32x2.44 m. Goal depth 1.40 m 71 113 7503 Each Goal depth 2 m, making it steadier. 71 113 7516 Each

ij • 2 m deep • Very stable • Goal frame made of oval tubing

Goal nets page 49 Access. page 48

i j

“Transportable” Football Goal Set

12 38K

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

The set consists of: • 1 transportable goal article no. 71 113 7516 i • 1 pair of goal nets, made of 3mm polypropylene, green, 71 116 0316, page 49. We provide another net in this set as a reserve. 71 113 7545 Set Prices available on request. Please contact us.

… Top Quality That Lasts Sport-Thieme goals are top class! Made from an oval profile with multiple inner reinforcement and accurately finished, these goals have considerably more stability and are substantially more durable, important advantages for transportable goals. Goals made by Sport-Thieme fulfil the strictest requirements.

Fully Welded and Transportable

a–c • • • •

Goal nets page 49 Access. page 48

fully welded oval tubing in ground frame ground anchors included Net hangers welded to top and bottom

2 38K

Goal with Integrated Net Fixings The integrated net fixing attachments are the perfect way of attaching nets to goals without net hooks. • easy and quick to install and hang the net • no screwing in or pushing in net hooks • the net hooks do not break off and get lost • distance between hanging points exactly the same • the net sits better and more evenly • the net is guaranteed not to slip out

Fully Welded Aluminium Football Goal

Power Press Net Holder The edging cord of the net is simply laid in the aluminium tubing of the goal. A “Power Press” is locked in place at every 15 cm in the chamber by simply turning the “Power Press” using a pliers. • The lifespan of the net is longer thanks to the improved care and no rubbing • Nets are perfectly secured and cannot be ripped away when hit by the ball

The top class transportable training goal. Crossbar/posts and base frame made from proven 120x100 mm oval profile in accordance with DIN standards, the net frame is Welded on net made from super-stable round aluminium Carrying handle hangers pipe, ø 60 mm. Inner goal size 7.32x2.44 m. Extra charge for welded on carrying Stands securely as the goal is 2 m deep. The handles for a and b whole goal is fully welded and can therefore 71 115 1406 Set withstand the harshest treatment. Delivery includes an anti-tilt base anchoring device. The goals have the TÜV/GS certification. With net hooks 71 115 0908 Each With Power Press net holder The set consists of: 71 115 0908-PP Each • 1 aluminium fully welded football goal 71 115 0908 a Fully Welded • 1 pair of goal nets, 3 mm polypropylene, Aluminium Football Goal green 71 116 0316, page 49 With integrated net fixing and welded on You receive an extra goal net with this carrying handles Otherwise design the order as a reserve. same as article number 71 115 0908. Set 71 115 0995 Each 71 115 0764

a b c

Fully Welded Football Goal Set

Transportable with Fully Welded Sides Welded Aluminium Football Goal The sides of these goals are welded together in one piece. Crossbars and ground tubes are each attached to the welded super strong corner connections with 2 stainless steel screws. Complete frame made from oval tubing 120/100 mm, net hangers: round tubing 60x3 mm. 732x244 cm, goal depth 200 cm. With net hooks 71 206 1304 Each With Power Press net holder 71 206 1304-PP Each

e f

Goal nets page 49

New

e –h • very stable • strong special connections

Strong welded corner connections

“Welded” Football Goal Set The set consists of: • 1 aluminium football goal 71 206 1304 e • 1 pair of goal nets, 3 mm polypropylene, green 71 116 0316, page 49 You receive an extra goal net with this order as a reserve. 71 115 0777 Set

quick to assemble

Welded Youth's Football Goal

round tubing 60x3 mm. 500x200 cm, goal depth 150 cm. The sides are completely welded to the net With net hooks hangers. The crossbar and ground tubing are 71 206 1405 Each screwed on to very strong welded corner connectors. Made from oval tubing With Power Press net holder 120/100 mm, net hanger made from 71 206 1405-PP Each

g h

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Access. page 48

38K

t 45

Youth's Football Goals Youth's Football Goals Youth's Football Goal 5x2 m a Aluminium Freestanding in ground frames, posts/laths 80x 80 mm. Anodised, with reinforced aluminium net hangers ø 40 mm. Maintenance free strong design. Order includes net hooks. Moulded aluminium corner connections 71 113 5914 Each

Youth's Football Goal Set The set consists of: • 1 transportable youth's goal article no. 71 113 5914 a • 1 pair of goal nets, made of 3mm polypropylene, green, 71 115 3907, page 49. We provide another net in this set as a reserve. 71 113 5969 Set

With patented steel corner connections

a • fits well with corner connections • very stable

Youth's Football Goal 5x2 m b Aluminium Freestanding in ground frames, posts/laths 80x 80 mm. Anodised, with reinforced aluminium net hangers ø 40 mm. Maintenance free strong design. Order includes net hooks. 71 113 5914-PE Each

Youth's Football Goal 5x2 m d Aluminium Standing in ground sockets. Posts/lath tubing 80x80 mm. With sockets and covers. Not illustrated. 71 113 5901

Each

Youth's Football Goal 5x2m e Aluminium Laths/posts made from 120/100mm oval tubing. Goal stands in ground sockets, not illustrated. 71 115 7808

Each

Youth's Football Goal 5x2 m c Aluminium Free-standing, with reinforced base frame made from

With reinforced ground frame

80/40 tubing. Posts/laths 80x80 mm tubing. These goals are particularly stable. 71 113 5927 Each

Goal nets 5 page 54 Access. for de: page 485

Goal nets page 54 Access. for abc: page 48

5 9JM

Youth's Football Goal 5x2 m f Aluminium Oval tubing, corner welded. Design: anodised silver, 150 cm deep. The rear base frame can be adjusted to 100 cm deep. Comes with a full length aluminium net frame, ø 40 mm, net frame supports and net holder. Freestanding in ground frame. 71 115 0807 Each

f Youth's Football Set The set consists of: • 1 transportable youth's goal article no. 71 115 0807 f • 1 pair of goal nets, made of 3mm polypropylene, green, 71 115 3923-0, page 49. We provide another net in this set as a reserve. 71 113 5972 Set

The net depth can be adjusted at any level

Youth's Football Goal 5x2 m g Aluminium Corner welded oval tubing. Includes net frame, net holders and ground sockets. Standing in ground sockets. Not illustrated. 71 115 7811 Each

Goal nets for g: page 49 Access. for g: page 48 5

45 Goal nets for f: page 49 Accessories: page 46 9JM

Fully Welded Youth's Football Goals 5x2m Fully Welded Youth's Football Goal Oval tubing, 120x100 mm. Delivery includes net holder and an antitilt ground anchoring device. Freestanding, goal depth 150 cm. Ground frame made of oval tubing 71 115 0823 Each 75x40 mm ground frame tubing 71 115 0836 Each Extra charge for welded on carrying handles h and i 71 115 1406-1 Set

h i

j k With integrated net fixings

Goal nets for h + i: page 49

hi Includes non-tipping ground anchors

5x2m Fully Welded Youth's Football Goal With integrated net fixing. Posts, lath and ground frame made from oval tubing, 120x100 mm. Delivery includes net holder and an anti-tilt ground anchoring device. 71 115 0878 Goal depth 100 cm Each

j Welded on carrying handles Extra charge for welded-on carrying handles for j and k 71 115 1419

Goal nets for j: page 49

115 0881 k 71 Goal depth 150 cm Each

Goal nets for k: page 49

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Each

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Streetball … Indoor Football … Goal! Street Soccer and Indoor Football Goals

a Street Soccer Football Goals

• very precise on the corner connections • very stable

With improved patented corner connections. This robust set of goal posts are made of aluminium and are specially designed for the ever more popular sports of street soccer and football. The goals can be used anywhere: in the playground, in the street, in car parks and in parks. The strong rear frame can be easily dismantled. Goal 300x160 cm, 100 cm deep. 71 115 1608 Each

With patented steel corner connections

b Goal Net

Net for Street Soccer b Goal Made from 4 mm polyethylene 71 115 3718 Access. page 48

Each

Indoor Football Goal 5x2 m Since the introduction of the winter break, football is being played more indoors. These 5x2 m goals have been specially developed for indoor football and are made completely from aluminium. The net frames can be folded back and the goals can therefore be transported and stored very easily thus saving space. Felt protectors and base caps ensure that the hall floor is not damaged. 80x80 mm tubing 71 113 6119 Each Oval tubing 120x100 mm 71 113 6106 Each

c d

Indoor Football Goals • Protects the floor • Easy to store with the folding rear frame

Goal nets page 49

Small Goals

g ef

Small Aluminium Goal, 3x2 m 80mm tubing. Anodised silver. New improved design, even more hardwearing and robust. Complete with net hangers and hooks. Free standing with ground frame 71 113 5419 Each

Aluminium Small Area Goal, 3x2 m

Oval tubing Anodised silver. Standing in ground sockets (500 mm deep). Very stable and exact aluminium moulded corner joints. Reinforced aluminium net hangers ø 40 mm. Order includes ground sockets and special net hanging hooks. Not illustrated. 71 115 8801 Each

Goal nets page 49 Access. page 48 6

6 Goal nets page 49 Access. page 48 9JM Standing in ground sockets, with sleeve and cover. Not illustrated. 71 113 5406 Each

Goal nets page 49 Access. page 48 6

Small Goal h Aluminium Completely welded And there's more: • Leisure area goals page 56-57 • Goal walls page 56 • Goal nets page 49

Goal nets page 49 Access. page 48 L

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

3x2 m, very robust construction. Made from oval shaped tubing, ground frame made from special 80x40 mm tubing. Goal depth 150 cm. 71 203 3004 Each

t 47

t Goal Accessories ®

Goal Anchoring

Weights for Securing the Goals

8 3

27 cm

1 23 Bags 1 Weight For securing goals. DBGM approved.

Transportable Weights Made from aluminium with two fillable tanks. Ideal for hard courts where normal anchoring cannot be used. Weight when filled with quartz sand: approx. 160 kg. Comes in a set of 2 weights (not filled). Set 2 71 115 5466 For 80x80 tubing

3 71 115 5479 For oval tubing

Set

Spindle Goal Anchor

Fast and simple to attach The 30 cm long spindle is screwed into the ground and the velcro band is laid around the back of the ground frame on the goal. Assembly is simple and quick and the goals stand solidly. Set consists of 2 spindles for 1 goal. 71 115 2034 Set

Anchoring J Safety System For transportable goals with 80x80 mm ground frames, spiral shaped anchors, fixing loop with wing bolt. For use on grass. A set consists of 2 anchors for one goal. 71 115 5411 Set

Protection for your nets. For all goals sized 7.32x2.44 m. Makes taking care of your

can be adjusted between 1.50 and 2.00 m. Easy to assemble. 71 115 5509 Each

5 7

High Folding Aluminium Base Frame

For youth's football goals 5x2 m, for net depths 1 m, not adjustable. 71 115 5512 Each

For transportable goals with 120x100 mm oval ground frames. Set consists of 2 anchors for one goal. 71 115 5424

Flexi Goal Anchor

DBGM approved. Consisting of an abrasion and weather resistant belt band with 4 eyelets for adjusting to the different goal profiles. Comes as a set for one goal, with 4 belt bands and 4 ground pegs. Band 43 cm long, ground peg 27 cm long. 71 115 5437 Set 27 cm

Ground N Special Anchors for Goal Net Fastening Particularly robust design. The ground anchors can find grip in any ground and ensure that the net sits well. These ground anchors are a cheaper alternative to the base frame. 71 115 4607 Price for 10

Anchoring K Safety System High Folding Aluminium Base lawn easier and protects the nets and your lawnmower from damage. Depth of net Frame (for Football Goals)

80x80mm ground frame tubing Consisting of: • 4 anchoring hinges • 4 earth bolts as well as fixing material • 1 set sufficient for 1 goal. 71 115 5408 Set

JKL 45 F

Anchoring System 9 Ground For portable goals 5x2 m with

ca. 30 cm

The weight bags are used for stabilising freestanding goals. Simply fill the two chambers in bags with sand, close with the special sealing strip and lay on the ground frame. 6 bags are required per goal. Weight per filled bag approx. 20 kg. 50x39 cm, 6 bags per unit = 120 kg. 71 115 5440 Price for 6

Set

Important Safety Notice

Safety Anchoring System

Any mobile goals carrying the TÜV certification “GS” should only be used in conjunction with the safety ground frames or For goals with 80/40 ground safety anchoring systems. All mobile goals frame tubing. Set consisting of 2 anchors must be additionally secured against tipfor 1 goal. 71 115 8915 Set ping over.

High Folding Aluminium Ground Frames

For small area goals 3 x 2 m, for net depths 1.00 m, not adjustable. 71 115 5525 Each

High Folding O “Liga” Aluminium Ground Frame Net Suspension: “Super” 7 Goal Consisting of 1 “U” shaped net hanger set, 80cm deep, with crossbars. This ensures the durability and easy suspension of the nets. Wear is minimised. Complete set for 1 goal. 71 115 5004 Set

Protection for your nets. For goal size 7.32x2.44 m. A ground frame made from really strong 75x40 mm tubing. Net holders not included. Goal depth 150 cm 71 210 9709 Each Goal depth 200 cm 71 210 9712 Each

O See also: Goal nets page 49

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Goal Nets For Football & Handball Knot Free Nets for Football Goals Net width: 750 cm, net height: 250 cm with tensioning rope, all nets comply with DIN EN748. Mesh width 12 cm. Cord thickness For free net hanging Polypropylene cord Polyester cord See diagram Colours: Green White Green/White Blue/White Red/White Black/White Black/Yellow Black/Red Pair each

5 mm

3 mm

4 mm

•

Goal depth 200/200 cm 4 mm • •

71 116 0316

71 113 1505 71 113 1518 71 113 1563 71 113 1550 71 113 1576 71 113 1589 71 113 1534 71 113 1547 1 colour

71 115 3327 71 115 3330 71 115 3112 71 115 3109 71 115 3125 71 115 3167 71 115 3141 71 115 3154 1 colour

2 colour

Goal depth 80/150 cm 3 mm

4 mm

•

Knot Free Goal Nets

Goal depth 80/200 cm

4 mm •

71 116 0303

71 115 2715 71 115 2728

Net recommendation:

71 115 3402 71 115 3008 71 115 3011

Net recommendation:

Goal depth 100/100 cm 4 mm 4 mm • • a b

3 mm • a 71 115 3907

71 115 3910

5 mm • a 71 115 3936-0 71 115 3936-1

71 115 6108 71 115 6111 71 115 6124

Polypropylene (knot free)

Knot Free Nets for Youth's Football Goals Net width: 515 cm, net height: 205 cm with tensioning ropes that comply with DIN EN748. Mesh width 12 cm. Goal depth: top 80/bottom 150 cm 4 mm 4 mm Cord thickness • • Polypropylene cord a b See diagram Colours: 71 115 3923-0 Green 71 115 3923-1 White 71 115 4809 Green/White 71 115 4812 Blue/White Red/White 71 115 4825 Pair each

Offer the following advantages: 1. Easy to assemble The net's good shape and lightweight considerably reduces assembly problems 2. Pleasant to look at/long lifespan The nets are made from polypropylene and the knot-free mesh gives the nets their particular shape and prevents slipping at the mesh connection points.

2 colour nets in your club colours (example: green-white) Important: For handball goals and goals with net frames. Goal nets are hung freely inside the net frame.

Knot-Free Nets for Small Goals Net width: 300cm, net height: 200cm with tensioning rope in accordance with DIN EN 749. Mesh width 10 cm. Cord thickness Polypropylene cord Polyester cord complies with DIN EN749 additional lower tensioning cord quick tensioning lock see diagram Colours: Green White Net recommendation:

Includes: • Upper and lower tensioning cord • Elastic edge cord Goal depth 80/100 cm

Goal depth 80/80 cm 4 mm •

5 mm •

4 mm • • •

4 mm

Goal depth 80/150 cm 4 mm •

• • •

• a

71 115 3604

71 115 3806 71 115 3819

71 113 1420 71 113 1433

71 113 1417

71 206 0200 71 206 0213

• a

New Court Net g Small Net width: 310 cm, net height:

c Rhombus Shaped Net Holder

c With V2A metal hooks, 23x15.2x8 mm. 71 115 4304

210 cm. Net depth (top/bottom) 80/100 cm, polypropylene cord thickness 4.75 mm, knot free honeycomb shaped mesh, includes elastic edge cord, complies with DIN EN 749, yellow. 71 212 0704 Pair

Set of 10

Net Holder Made of high quality plastic. 28 x 28 x 24 mm d Black, 71 115 4405 14x10x32 mm e White, 71 115 4506

Set of 10 Set of 10

Press Net Holder f Power Made from high quality plastic. 25x10x17 mm. 71 210 5303

Set of 10

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

And there's more: • Football goals on page 44-47 • Handball goals on page 50-51 • Net holders on page 48

t 49

Indoor Handball Goals and Accessories Indoor Handball Goals: Special Variations

a Goal Frame Made to Measure For close distances to the walls • We recommend the wall anchoring equipment • When ordering it is important to state the upper and lower frame protrusions.

Handball b Indoor Goals without Net Frame

30 cm

Aluminium a Indoor Handball Goals With short net frame to measure For halls in which the distance from the goal line to the wall is not sufficient for normal goal depths. The goal

frame is made of 80x80 mm aluminium profile, with lowered net hooks and net frame made of tubular steel. Also available in red/white. These goals have to be anchored to the ground or the wall. 71 115 0924 Each

Nets are not included in the prices for the goals and must be ordered separately. See page 49

For insertion into ground sockets, for free net suspension using tensioning lines that attach to the hall wall. The ground sockets with sealing caps are included. Posts/laths: 80x80 mm. 71 113 6526 Each Recommended nets: page 49 6 7

Goal Accessories

Safety Notice DIN standards prescribe that goals must be secured against tipping over and that the horizontal cross bar should withstand 950 N. The owner is liable if the goals are not properly secured to the ground and therefore is open to being sued for damages.

Set of 2

Unit d Roller For handball goals, with 4 castors to

Cover f Goal For closing the gap between the crossbar and the additional crossbar at 1.60 m for mini handball. Made of thick, blue awning cloth, 8 fixing points of double sided velcro bands. 316x40 cm. 71 115 1305

• Simple to transport • Space saving storage

For reducing the size of the goals (from 3x2 m to 3x1.6 m), can be easily attached to existing goals, the connection between posts and crossbar is stable due to the fixing elements and handwheels. These Set enable quick and easy assembly and dismantling. The additional crossbar fits all Sport-Thieme handball goals. 71 113 3400 Each

Mini Handball Goal Set Consisting of: • 1 additional cross bar g • 1 goal cover f 71 113 3413

easily transport your goals. Two are necessary per goal. 71 122 4812-1 Pair

Ground Anchors for Goals Free-standing goals must be secured to avoid movement and tipping over during the game

c Goal Trolley

The space saving storage aid for your indoor handball goals. The majority of damage caused to indoor handball goals occurs during transportation from the equipment cupboard to place of use. Our trolleys prevent this damage because the goals are laid sideways in the support and can be transported easily and safely. 2 foldable goals can be transported and stored practically and safely on 1 trolley. When loaded with the goals the trolley only has a height of 214 cm and is 50cm wide. 71 131 1600

Crossbars for g Additional Mini Handball Games

Anchoring for h Floor Hall Floors Anchoring Equipment e Wall For indoor handball goals with shortened net frames. This method of anchoring ensures goals are securely fastened. Complete set for easy assembly of 1 goal. 71 115 1204 Each

The floor fixing plates are inserted in the upper surface and bolted down. The goals are safely fixed using star grip bolts. Plates with fastening bolts, dowels and 70 mm star grip bolt (2 per goal). 71 115 4900 Each

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Anchors for i Floor Outdoor Equipment The metal sockets with threaded inserts are cemented directly in the ground (Foundation size: 30x30x20 cm). Consists of metal socket and star grip bolt. Two are required per goal. 71 115 4913 Each Prices available on request. Please contact us.

All the Versions of Handball Goals Aluminium Handball Goals with Patented Corner Connections

Handball goals 3x2 m a Indoor Made from alloy with steel tubing net frame complying with EN749 and new patented corner joints Extra special handball goals. This indoor goal is freestanding with a folding down steel tubing net frame. The net frame and newly patented corner joints give the goal a level of strength that could not be dreamt of before. Goal depth on top 1.03 m, goal depth underneath 1.20 m. Other advantages: • very stable • easy to assemble as the parts for insertion and holes fit together well • strong patented steel corner connections 71 201 0902 Freestanding goal with folding down net hangers Each 71 201 0915 Freestanding goal with fixed net hangers Each 71 203 4502 Goal in ground sockets with fixed net hangers Each 71 203 4515 Goal in ground sockets with folding down net hangers Each 71 203 4528 Goal in ground sockets without net hangers Each

With patented steel corner connections

a a Goal in ground sockets with folding down net hangers

• • • •

Strong corner joints accurate fit steel net hangers two point ground anchoring

Indoor Aluminium Handball Goals

d Handball Goals 3x2 m b Indoor Made of a light alloy to EN 749 for insertion in ground sockets. These goals are particularly stable. Complete with net frame, base frame, post caps and net hooks. Goal depth at top 1.03, below 1.20 m, Sockets 80x80 mm with cover plates. Goal with fixed net hangers 71 113 6500 Each Goal with freestanding net hangers and welded corner connections 71 113 6539 Each Goal with folding down net hangers 71 113 6513 Each Goal with folding down net hangers and welded corner connections 71 113 6542 Each All transportable goals must be additionally secured against tipping over

Goal with folding down net hangers

Indoor Handball Goals 3x2 m Made from alloy, complies with EN 749, freestanding. Complete with net hangers and ground frames, post caps and net hooks. Goal depth on top 1.03 m, goal depth below 1.20 m. For indoor and outdoor use. Goal with fixed net hangers 71 115 0953 Each Goal with freestanding net hangers and welded corner connections 71 115 0937 Each Goal with folding down net hangers 71 115 0911 Each Goal with folding down net hangers and welded corner connections 71 115 0940 Each

All aluminium handball goals are also available in red/white

Goal with Fixed Net Hangers Recommended nets for all goals on this page: page 49 6 7

Nets are not included in the prices for the goals and must be ordered separately. See page 49

Wooden Handball Goals

point ground c Two fixing

3x2 m (Small Area Goals)

Special Indoor Handball Goal

Free-standing wooden indoor handball goals with foldable net supports, particularly stable. Posts and crossbar are additionally attached to a galvanised metal frame. The net support is connected at the top with a telescopic rod and can be folded up. Incl. welded on net hooks. Goal depth 1.25 m. 71 113 3703 Each

Standard Indoor Handball Goal Wooden goal frame, with rounded edges. Can be easily stored because it is easy to dismantle. Improved design with reinforced and galvanised net hooks, floor-protecting rubber buffers included. Goal depth 1.25 m. Not illustrated. 71 113 3905 Each

Space saving with foldable net frames Replacement Screw Hooks for fixing nets to the wooden handball goals 71 113 3905. 1 set of 50 screw hooks is needed for one goal. 71 115 4203 Unit = 50

And there's more: Handballs page 12-13

e • hot dip galvanised frame and net holders • Sport-Thieme high quality • strong wooden design • very stable metal frame • suitable for indoor and outdoor use

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 51

Handball Training and Training Aids Handball Pyramids • • • •

a Handball Pyramids Increase the effectiveness of your training. A new effective and attractive piece of equipment for use in training and leisure. The pyramid has been covered on 2 sides with nets and on 2 sides with tarpaulin which provide good rebounds. The rebound exercises are ideal for the teaching: • individual tactics • group tactics • ball technique • fitness • reaction Many of the variations can increase effectiveness because of the competitive struc-

Effective training instrument Can be played from 4 sides Space saving storage Will take advertising

ture - every player tries to outdo the last player. Younger players will also be attracted to handball by the many variations in play. Size when assembled: approx. 135x135x70 cm. Weight approx. 15 kg. 71 115 5105

Tchoukball • 100x100 cm • Net 80x80 cm • 55-65° adjustable angle

Angle adjustable from 55°-65°. 71 115 9309-1

Ball b Tschouk Training aid for handballers Whether in throwing training, goalie training or team games, this is the ideal aid in every situation. Very strong frame 100x100 cm with special 80x80 cm net that produces a very strong return of ball.

Each

And there's more: Reivo® ground markings are on page 99

Patented corner connections Pat.Nr. 10135056

Handball c Indoor Goal Wall Net

Recommended by the DHB for training children and youths

Optimise your throwing and goalie training. DBGM approved. The goal wall net is simply attached to an indoor handball goal Volley Mini Handball or between two posts. The corners of the Circumference 50 cm, white, canvas have a 30 cm gap, which will opti150 g, good bounce. mise throw training. Quick to set up with the 71 108 2409-1 tensioning lines supplied. The material is breathable. Caution: When fixing to freestanding goals, these goals must be See also: secured at all costs. 3x2 m. More Handballs page 12-13 71 206 6716 Each

Mini Handball Goal

Handball Goal 300x160 cm e Mini With new patented corner connections. The goal frame and net frame are aluminium and the new patented steel corner connections give the goal great stability. The net frame can be folded down therefore saving space in storage. 71 115 1637 Each

Goal Nets for Mini Goals WxH: 300x160 cm, made from knot-free green 4 mm polyethylene. 71 115 3705 Pair

Handball Goals for all Age Groups

Mini handball is specially designed for boys and girls between the ages of 6-9. The rules in mini handball have been simplified: having fun is more important than success; playing together as a team rather than winning at any cost; playing means fun, enjoyment, team-spirit but also learning technique.

Handball Target Triangles

Can be used in every goal corner

Target Triangle f Handball Improves accuracy of throw. DBGM approved. Strong product made from steel with 28 cm ø throwing hole. For hanging on the goal triangle or using on the posts. Attached using velcro bands, easy to handle as it only weighs 6.5 kg. 71 203 8807 Each

Pedalo and Springboard Develop skilfulness, balance, reactions, and coordination. While having fun you are also building up arm, leg and back muscles. g 71 129 6206-1 Double Pedalo h 71 128 5202-1 Springboard ø 32 cm

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

h Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Football Training Coordinated Football Training

Set

a Teaching coordination and fitness are a pivotal part Agility Coordination Ladder

of modern progressive football lessons. This new methodical aid will help you develop your legs, coordination as well as your speed, using different types of exercises. The co-ordination ladder is ideal for use in developing a sense of rhythm. Width approx. 42 cm extra flat bars, adjustable distances. Includes ground anchor for fixing to ground and suction cups for attaching to the floors of halls. The Coordination Ladder is supplied in a practical storage and transport bag. 71 137 3921-1 8 m 71 137 3934-1 4 m

a Delivered in a practical storage and transport bag

Includes ground pegs for fixing to sports grounds

See also: Reivo® Ground Markings on page 99

Coordination Ladder 8 m + Exercise Handbook 71 137 3950-1

Set

Fitness Fooball Training Belt b Reaction Belt with two large adjustable loops

New

with quick snap locks. The ends of the belt are joined and will separate when a certain level of pressure is exerted on them. An ideal training aid for developing agility and speed of reactions. One partner must follow the other without letting the belt separate. 100% nylon belt. Length 1.18 m. 71 210 1402 Each Ideal training aid to develop agility and

Body Band Ring®, Set of 10

price for 5

speed of reaction.

Resistance Belt c Reivo® Elastic Reivo® Band, 4 m long, with extra large Velcro loops. The long Velcro fastenings are very reliable for strength and speed training. Long Velcro straps will hold reliably 71 210 1301 Each during strength and resilience training

Deuserband d Original The classic training band with strong

tractive power, perfect for muscle strengthening exercises after an accident or illness. Endless approx. 35 mm wide and 100 cm long, instructions included. 71 148 5107-1

Individual parts for training aids:

Stand Base ø 20 cm, height 11 cm. 71 143 7401-1

Hinge Fitting i Rotating 71 143 7414-1 and Crossbar j Holder 150 cm long, ø 26 mm. 71 143 7427-1 Hung loosely:

Tightly secured:

Your personal fitness trainer! Use the Body Band Ring®: • as a mobile training aid for stretching and strengthening your muscles • for building up muscle tone and daily fitness training • as a training aid for rehabilitation and prevention This “endless band” is ideal for exercising the upper arm muscles, back and bottom muscles and the outer hips. Red, 12.5x40 cm. 71 211 0602-1 Set of 10

approx. 10 cm long, for sticking into the ground. Ideal for co-ordination and dribble training. Stick length approx. 170 cm, 3.2 cm. Comes in set of 5 in assorted colours. 71 144 7402 Set

The Sport-Thieme Training Aids Sport-Thieme Training Aids

The training aid for all types of sport. A combining system that offers endless variations with a minimum number of components for pre-schools, schools, general sport up to high performance training. A bar, a base and hinge are the basic elements, that can be assembled in any shape you wish. All parts are made from supple plastic and the weight of the base guarantees high stability. The hinge joint can be moved to any height on the 158 cm long bar. The horizontal bar can be fixed firmly into the hinge or can simply rest on it. The hinge can be turned 360 degrees into any position. One training kit consists of: • 2 bases with 2 holding bars, • 2 joint holders with 1 cross bar. 71 143 7212-1

Training Aid Set

Poles f Slalom Made of plastic with metal tips,

This set can be used in many ways and motivates because creativity is introduced to practising and training. The set consists of 5 complete training aids. 71 143 7209-1 Set of 5

h Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 53

Training Aids from t ® b

Marking and Border Cones

Marking Cones Set Simple and quick!

d a

30 cones Marking Cones

e Made from durable plastic, c

15 cm

with 4 moulded-in troughs that can be used as pole holders thus creating mini hurdles for training. 30 cones in 3 different colours with a practical carrying stand. Height 15 cm, dia. 30 cm. 71 130 0909-1 Price for 30

ø 30 cm

Marking and Border Cones mm a 130x130x230 71 130 0664-1 Red

71 130 0651-1 Yellow 205x205x380 mm 71 130 0680-1 Yellow 71 130 0677-1 Red

Each Each Each Each

Marking Cones With 2 cones each of orange, yellow, red, blue and green. LxWxH: 130x130x230 mm 71 130 0635 Set of 10 LxWxH: 205x205x370 mm 71 130 0622 Set of 10

c d

Marking Plates

New Easily takes up to 50 marking plates Champ” Training Aid f “Cone You can collect marking cones in a back friendly way with Cone Champ. This handy aid will hold up to 50 stacked marking cones. The telescopic carrying handle is made up of two parts. The top is shaped into a handle while the lower part has a return mechanism for holding the cones. Comes with 50 marking cones. 71 130 0938 Complete set

Sport-Thieme Saturn Ring

The versatile game and training aid! • Suitable for all cones • Ideal for health and speed training

Set of 40

h Hoops g Coordination Aid in training coordination, ø 50 cm, plastic. 71 135 5707-6 71 135 5710-6 71 135 5723-6 71 135 5736-6

Blue Yellow Green Red

Each Each Each Each

Set of 8 Coordination Hoops The set consists of: • 8 hoops, assorted colours 71 135 5808

Plate h Marking dia. 19 cm, 5 cm high, 40 plates Set of 8

Advice and ordering Tel. +49 53 57-181543

j Sport-Thieme Saturn Ring

Marking Plates / Saucers The practical aid for training in schools, clubs and for leisure sport. Made from shockproof plastic, easy to carry, no risk of injury, quick to set up and clear away.

in 4 different colours on 1 stack and transport holder. 71 130 0808-3 Price for 40

Saucers i Marking ø 20 cm, 8.5 cm high, 40 saucers in 4 saucers different colours on a carrying bar. 71 130 0811-2 Price for 40

Saturn Ring Set Consisting of: • 12 saturn rings • 12 marking cones 38 cm high • 12 gym bars 100 cm long 71 130 0518-3

And there's more: Gymnastics Bars page 230

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Versatile fun and training aid; perfect for inside and outside! Patent 19820022 This sports and fun aid will captivate young and old, big and small with its almost endless combinations. Do you want to train and play with new combinations and using your own ideas? With Saturn Ring this is no problem: You simply place the Saturn Rings on the floor or position them on the cones, quickly add the gymnastics bar and hey presto, you are ready. Use Saturn Rings for practising agility, skills and speed with the obstacles of your choice at different heights. Great fun. 71 130 0505-2 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Football Dummies

Price Tip

180 cm

New

160 cm

Buy now !

c Dummy Set of 5 5 dummys made from robust, UV-resistant plastic mounted on steel pins. The set consists of: • 2 Dummys, 1.60 m high, 71 144 7125 • 3 Dummys, 1.80 m high, 71 144 7112 71 144 7109 Set

New Football Dummies b Individual This dummy is made from strong UV

a Dummy Trolley a Football Strong steel construction onto which the football dummy can be safely placed and is versatile as can be placed outdoors or indoors. Trolley approx. 60 x 60 cm with four large light wheels. Approx. 12 kg. Dummies not included. 71 144 7239 Each

resistant plastic mounted on steel pins the can be safely and easily pushed into the ground. Many uses: freetaking, as an opponent, divided up individually, for ball and reaction training. A jersey should be draped on the dummy for better visibility. Available in two sizes 180 and 160 cm. Design: 180 cm, 3.5 kg. 71 144 7112 Each Design: 160 cm, 3 kg. 71 144 7125 Each

d Dummies and Free Kick Dummy Wall Set This complete set consists of: • 1 mobile free kick wall e • 1 dummy set c 71 144 8001

Size: WxH: 270x180 cm. 71 115 2409

New Each

h Kick Dummy Set h Free Dummies made from strong UV

Dummy g Foam Dummies for putting on the slalom bars page 54 f up to a diameter of 30 mm. You can adjust the dummies to

different heights. 95x41x6 cm. Delivered without slalom bars. 71 212 3208

Each

can be securely fixed is of a slimline, robust steel construction. This means that various walls can be formed and it can be used anywhere on the pitch. Easy to transport and dismantle. Trolley approx. 260 cm long with 2 large easy-spin wheels. 71 144 7200 Each

Trac” Sport Radar i “Speed Ideal for additional speed evaluation!

Kick Training Wall f Free Standard situations such as frees, often decide games. Frequent training and accurate shooting therefore are essential. A training aid that will simulate the behaviour of a human defender will help in this situation. Made from hot-dip galvanised steel tubing with 4 large wheels (ø approx. 10-12 cm), weatherproof. Figures with easy-clean textile covering 80% polyamide and 20% elastane. The wall can be changed by simply undoing the figures.

Kick Training Wall Trolley e Free The trolley on which the 5 dummys

resistant plastic, heat and cold resistant, in signal yellow with steel pins for sticking individually in to the ground. Five dummies made from polypropylene plates each approx. 150 x 45 cm, on 160 cm PE tubing, height adjustable from 150 cm to a maximum 190 cm. Set of five. 71 217 8602 Set

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Who has the fastest tennis serve, at what speed is the runner running, who has the strongest goal shot? With this product, speeds can be determined in seconds and are clearly displayed. It is an extremely reliable product and is very simple to use. Suitable for many sports. It can be used at every sporting level and is useful to check and control success in learning. It increases motivation during training. It is also a great idea for special events, fetes, anniversary celebrations or street festivals. Make goal shots or other sports competitions great fun for both young and old. Guaranteed to keep your attention. Product characteristics: • light yet strong frame LxWxH: 16.5x17.8x5.8 cm • simple to use • bright, 3 digit LED display visible from a long distance • mains connection or battery powered (6x 1.5 volt batteries) • multi adjustable stand • automatic shut off function after approx. 5 minutes thus saving batteries • wide angle detection (40° wide and 60° high) for oncoming balls • speed display up to 199 km/h 71 146 1132 Mains adapter for Speed Trac For 230 V mains connection 71 146 1145

t 55

Leisure Area and Training Goals

Super strong welded corner connections

Leisure Area Goal a “Special” With vandalism resistant net!

a “Special” Leisure

Goal made of oval tubing 120/100, sides are completely welded with only the crossbar and the ground bar screwed onto extra strong welded corner connections. Strong net hanger on ground ø 60 mm round tubing. The side welded flaps are for attaching to the ground. Includes special vandalism prevention net made from Hercules rope ø 5 mm with steel inlay and tensioning rope assembly set. Goal size: 300x200 cm, goal depth 100 cm. 71 206 9500 Each

Football Goal With vandalism resistant net made from Hercules rope work!

Leisure area goals must be anchored in concrete bases.

• completely welded • includes six ground anchors

Leisure Area Goals 3x2 m Standard design complies with DIN EN 1176. 11cm distance between the bars. 71 111 4502 Each

Area Goals 3x2 m b Leisure Fully welded aluminium. An extremely robust and vandalismproof construction. Ideal for leisure areas, parks and playgrounds. A fully welded aluminium design of thick walled tubes with an 80 x 80 mm frame all round and 35 x 3 mm round

• top of goal completely sealed with continuous bars • extremely stable • thick walled tubing

tubing at the rear making the goal very stable. The goal is sealed on top with continuous bracing. Six base plates are welded on for anchoring. Anchoring included in order. Size 300x200x60 cm.

Leisure Area Goals 3x2 m This disign complies with DIN EN 15312 standards for freely accessible multi sports equipment. 8cm distance between the bars. 71 111 4515 Each

Area Goal c Leisure Fully welded aluminium goal as for the leisure area goal 71 111 4502, but with basketball backboard, basket and net. Anchoring included in the order. The basketball net is set at 3.05m high. 300x200x60 cm. Design: Standard, 11 cm between the bars. 71 111 4603 Each Design: Complies with EN15312, 8 cm between the bars. 71 111 4616 Each

• includes catching net • easy to transport • can be fully dismantled into 4 wall elements and accessories

Hot dip galvanised Goal Wall d Football Simple to assemble and ideal for transporting. This goal wall is free standing, space saving and easy to transport. It is made up of four wall elements, (135x94 cm)two of which contain goal shot holes each 50 cm in size (distance from edge of goal wall 10 cm) and catch nets. Made from

weatherproof wooden plating. The plates are assembled in a u shaped iron frame, which is then screwed, to the stand. The stand must be secured using weights such as paving stones or sandbags to prevent tilting. Size 270x188 cm, depth approx. 60 cm. 71 115 1507 Each

Area Football Goal e Small Made from ø 42mm steel tubing, hot

anchoring included. Net not included. dip galvanised, with welded net hooks, 71 115 1103 5x2 m Each weather proof. Each goal consists of 2 side 71 113 4605 3x2 m Each sections and 1 crossbar. They are easy for children to transport and erect. The extended Net recommendation: goal frame and additional anchoring means 500x200 cm size on page 49 5 that these goals are now even more 300x200 cm size on page 49 6 secure. Post ø approx. 42 cm,

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Mini Goals Mesh width 10 cm

a More designs available on request

• now available in two sizes Now • low weight Even Better! • easy to transport • includes rubber padding for halls • suitable for indoor and outdoor use

Transportable Training a Mini Goal

Price Tip

Makes training fun Ideal for training: passes to the wing, partnership tactics, counter attacking, space awareness and flat passes. Very stable aluminium, welded goal frame, maintenance free and weatherproof.

Buy now ! “Sport-Thieme” c Foldable Mini-Goal

Mini Training Goal 1.20x0.80m Delivery includes net frame with ground tubing and net (10 cm mesh width). Goal frame thickness 75x40 mm. Rear goal bar ø 35mm. Net depth 0.65 m. 71 115 2207 Each Replacement Net 1.20x0.80x0.65 m 71 115 1800 Each

Mini Training Goal 1.80x1.20 m With foldable net frame. Net depth 0.70 m. Delivery includes net. 71 115 2500 Each Replacement Net 1.80x1.20x0.70 m 71 115 1901 Each With the mini training goal you can play in 4 goals at the same time

Mesh width 4.5 cm

b Mini Street Goal Strong aluminium goal with fully welded goal frame including net with 4.5 mesh width. Goal 1.20x0.80 m 71 115 2223 Each Goal 180x1.20 m, with folding net hangers 71 115 2526 Each Replacement net With mesh width of 4.5 cm 71 115 1813 Goal 1.20x0.80 m 71 115 1914 For goal 1.80x1.20 m

Easy to transport and tough for training. Can be used as a training goal for football, street hockey or fun sports like beach football and beach handball. Its special folding mechanism means that it is easy to transport and erect. This makes it ideal for different uses. When in use the folding mechanism can be locked securely in place. The net is permanently connected to the goal with a special net pole that covers the whole goal. The frame is made of powder coated steel tubing, net is made from poly-

• folds down • needs very little space ethylene. Design: 60x90x 70 cm, approx. 5 kg. 71 115 1712 Each Design: 135x100x110 cm, approx. 8 kg. 71 115 1738 Each

180 cm

Each Each

120 cm 120 cm

80 cm

• • • •

Complies with EN 15312 Vandalism proof Ideal for Streethockey Closed on top with lower bar distance • Completely welded • Includes ground anchors

120 cm

80 cm

And there's more:

Fully Welded

• Training hurdles page 50 117

Leisure Area Goal e Mini Completely welded aluminium construction 80x80 cm, free-standing, can be bolted to the ground. Ideal for schoolyards and open playgrounds. Bar ø 3 cm, distance between bars approx. 6 cm. Delivery includes fixing material. Inner size: 120x80x65 cm 71 115 2308 Each Inner size: 180x120x65 cm 71 115 2337 Each

dip galvanised, posts 60x40 mm. Rear construction made from a steel caging mat. Inner size: 120x80x54 cm. 71 115 2324 Each

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 57

Welded Mini d Fully Training Goal Fully welded aluminium training goal, including net with 4.5 cm mesh width. Goal frames made from 80x80 mm system tubing, ground frames made from 80x40 mm tubing.

Goal 1.20x0.80 m, goal depth 0.70 m 71 116 3807 Each Goal 1.80 x 1.20 m, goal depth 0.70 m 71 116 3810 Each

Leisure Area Goals f Mini Fully welded steel construction, hot

Beach Volleyball: The No. 1 Fun Sport

Outdoor & Beach Volleyball Sets

Court Lines a “Plus” Adjustable to suit 18x9 m or 16x8 m volleyball courts, made from 5 cm wide bordering ribbon, ready to lay, with ground anchors. 71 117 8803

Transportable & Weatherproof Outdoor Volleyball Systems, every detail will win you over: • the unique tensioning system guarantees perfect net tension. It is fast and simple to assemble and dismantle, even when working by yourself. • aluminium stands that can be dismantled • simple to adjust to all normal heights (2.10; 2.15; 2.24; 2.30; 2.43 m). • stand rope is easy to tighten and tensions well due to the Clamcleat® technology • normal net size- 9.50x1 m (except LC 600). mesh width 10 cm. • aluminium base plates prevent the stands sinking and slipping out • robust metal rings (no hassle with plastic rings!) • Carrying bag is only 1 m long, and is therefore suitable for carrying around in any car All the basic design systems are suitable for use on grass and can also be used on sand using the SUNVOLLEY® Sand kit.

For height adjustment, a click is all you need to reset at the normal height The proven Clamcleat® technique ensures you fix and loosen the rope easily and with confidence.

Kit” Beach Volleyb “Sand ball Additional Anchor Suitable for all SunVolley® systems. This additional anchoring makes your beach system even more secure when playing on the sand. 71 115 8508 Set

SunVolley® Beach Volleyball Sets

“Standard” e SunVolley® Beach Volleyball Set

c Beach Volleyball Set

SunVolley® Set d “LC” For hobby and leisure players Consisting of: • Posts: anodised aluminium tubes, ø 32 mm, polyethylene rope for side tensioning with ground anchors. • Net: 1.8 mm twisted polyethylene, 5 cm wide bordering band, continuous polypropylene rope at the top, net length 9.5 m. • Complete with storage bag. • Weight: 5.5 kg. 71 135 4704 “LC” SunVolley® System Set Same as “LC System”, but with court lines made from polyester rope for court sizes 9x18 m. 71 135 4805 “LC 600” SunVolley® System Same as described for the “LC” set, but with shorter net (6 m instead of 9.5 m). 71 135 4603

“Plus” Beach f SunVolley® Volleyball Set

For schools and teams. Consisting of: • Posts: anodised aluminium tubing, ø 40 mm, polypropylene rope for side tensioning with steel anchors, Clamcleat® tensioning system for the upper net rope. • Net: 9.50x1.00 m, 2 mm twisted polyethylene, 5 cm wide bordering ribbon • Practical carry bag with handles. • 9.5 kg. 71 117 8904 “Standard” SunVolley® Beach Volleyball Set As described for “Standard” set but with additional court lines made of poly rope for courts 9 x 18 m. 71 117 9008

For professionals and top level players. Consisting of: • Posts: anodised aluminium tubing, ø 50 mm, polyester rope for lateral tensioning device, with steel ground anchors, • Net: 9.50x1.00 m, 3 mm woven polyester, 8 cm wide bordering material on all 4 sides. • Robust carrying bag with shoulder strap. • 13 kg. 71 117 8500 Set “Plus” SunVolley® Set As described for “Plus” SunVolley® beach volleyball set but with additional court lines made from 5cm wide belt bands. 71 117 8601 Set “Plus” Beach Volleyball Net Beach Volleyball Net Size 9.50x1.00 m. Made from 2mm polyeth- 3mm woven polyester, 8cm wide bordering ylene, surrounded on the edges by a 50 mm material on all four sides, fibreglass baton sewn in on the sides, continuous kevlar yellow border with fibreglass and quick rope on top, continuous polyester rope on release fasteners on the sides and a polyester rope threaded though the top fold. Not the bottom, four point hanging with quick Clamcleat® fastening. illustrated. 71 117 8702 71 117 9109

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Beach Volleyball, Fun in the Sandpit

Price Tip

Beach Ground Sockets For use on every type of ground, which means you can have competitive sports facilities anywhere without using ground anchors (and digging!) to maintain tension. 1. Place the wooden edging along the lines of the playing field and through the socket foot. 2. Stick the wooden edging through the socket foot lengthways towards the net axis 3. Shake over with sand (the net posts will stand absolutely stable under the weight)

Buy now !

New

Can be set at any height from 198 to 245 cm

j f m

35 cm

i 70 cm

Plate for unscrewing

3. Simply and easily assembled

a b d

Volleyball Posts f Beach For permanent use, i.e. the posts are

Competition Posts for Beach Volleyball

Extremely stable aluminium posts ø 83 mm, yellow, powder coated, comply with DIN 7896. With tensioning and holding mechanisms which enable the net height to be adjusted at any level. Ground sockets not included. 71 117 8018 Pair

Beach Volleyball

Competition a “Masters” Posts Super stable special aluminium profile 80x80 mm, yellow plastic coated. New block and tackle type tensioner. Smooth net height adjustment with Easy lock. New DVV (German Volleyball Association) “Beach” certification. Comes without sockets or net. 71 118 2301 Pair

…is becoming more popular all the time. Clubs, communities and leisure centres are setting up permanent courts. 1996 was the first year this sport was in the Olympic Games in Atlanta as a discipline in itself. Indoor Beach volleyball courts that can be played on all year round are now becoming more prevalent. If you would like to know more: Beach Volleyball: www.fivb.org Beach Handball: http://www.beachhandball.org.uk/

Playing Area 5 m Complies with FIVB regulations Service Area Min. 3 m all round

Ground Sockets

c “City Beach” Ground Sockets

For 80x80 mm posts. For outdoor use on any type of ground, made from hot dip galvanised steel tubing. 71 118 2503

Anchor d Connection Made from A4 stainless steel for volleyball sockets (each post 4 anchors) The connection anchors must be specially ordered if required. 71 118 2705 Each

Wooden Edging For City Beach net poles. Made from bonded, threaded and impregnated wood. 2 edges 2.95 m long and 2 edges 1.45 m long. 71 118 2604

5m Complies with FIVB regulations “Pro Beach” Umpire's Rostrum

For 80x80 mm posts, screwed into a foundation. Made from hot dip galvanised steel tubing with screw on plate including lid. 71 118 2402

Playing Area

16 m

Volleyball Competition l Beach Posts

Volleyball Posts g Beach As above but for placing in ground

Volleyball Tournament m Beach Net

sockets. 2 ground sockets with lid are included in the delivery. 71 115 8045 Pair

For 18x9 m courts With polyester baton stitched on the sides. Size: 9.50x1 m, mesh width 10 cm. Made from black polyester, knotless design, with 11.7 m kevlar rope at the top, 4 mm thick tensioning line at the bottom. 4 point suspension with 2 tensioning lines and quick release lock on both sides. All round with reinforced coated border band, 75 mm wide, neon pink, with DVV beach certification. 71 117 8308

Volleyball Ground h Beach Socket (extra long) For cementing in sandy ground, made from galvanised steel tube, incl. cover, ø 83 mm. 71 117 8106 Each

Volleyball Ground i Beach Sockets For perfectly upright posts when the net is fully tensioned, to be fixed to a concrete base, robust galvanised tubular steel construction, including cover. 71 117 8119 Each

Protection j Post Pad

10 m

Beach Volleyball Playing Area: 16x8 m

0,50 -1m

Base Line

8m Service Area Free Zone Sand minimum 30 cm Ground Sockets for fixing, with screw on plate Concrete Foundations

Volleyball Posts g Beach including ground sockets

cemented in the ground, preventing theft wherever you want to play beach volleyball: • at school • on the beach • in the swimming pool • in the park • on sports fields • in playgrounds All the materials used are hot dip galvanised and therefore weather-resistant. The posts have a diameter of 83 mm, with eyelets for net installation. 71 115 8032 Pair

min. 22x14 m / 26x18 m (FIVB)

Side line

For volleyball posts. The strong padding material will greatly reduce the danger of injury. Padding approx. 200 cm high with a durable cover. Indispensable for the safety of your players. 71 116 1713 Each

Volleyball k Beach Antenna Set One-piece, with DVV certification., length 1.80 m, complete with new yellow carrying bag made of coated polyester material, including a marking band. 71 117 8409

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

For permanent use on specially prepared courts. Very stable posts made of anodised aluminium section, diameter 83 mm, anodised, complies with DIN 7896, with grooves on both sides. The tensioning device is designed to adjust the height of the net individually on each side as required, ground sockets not included. 71 117 8005 Pair

Beach Volleyball Net Size 9.50x1.00 m. Made from 2mm polyethylene, surrounded on the edges by a 50 mm yellow border with fibreglass and quick release fasteners on the sides and a polyester rope threaded though the top fold. Not illustrated. 71 117 9109-1

Tournament Net For 16x8m courts Net size 8.50x1m, otherwise the same as volleyball net 1178308 71 117 8311

Beach Volleyball n “Plus” Court Markings For volleyball courts, adjustable to 18x9 m or 16x8 m. Made from 5 cm wide belt band, ready to set up with ground anchors. 71 117 8803-1

t 59

Volleyball Sets for Competition Volleyball Sets

New

Hoist Block & Tackle

Aluminium volleyball posts with particularly thick walls. All operating elements such as tensioning devices, net hooks and guide pulleys are safely incorporated in the tubing - no protruding parts. The height of the net can be adjusted to whatever height you require. These sets are designed for use in schools and for general sports usage. Complies with DIN standard EN1271. Volleyball posts abc are supplied with two different net tensioning sytems. Either the spindle mechanism with buckle crank or the with hoist system. This system avoids problems with wear and tear on cranks, joints and spindles. The nets are also easy for schoolchildren to tension.

Umpire's Chair h Volleyball Strong, stable, steel tubing construc-

abce Including spindle tensioning mechanism or hoist pulley-block system tensioned e •• fully smooth adjustment • fine adjusting • extremely rigid

f Pulling rope

80 mm 80 mm

Square Posts a With 80x80 mm With spindle tensioning mechanism 71 115 8609 With hoist block and tackle system 71 115 8612

Pair Pair

For Competitions, with DVVII Certification With spindle tensioning mechanism 71 118 2008 Pair With hoist block and tackle system 71 118 2011 Pair ø 83 mm

With Round b Posts

Volleyball c Aluminium Posts

Made from thick walled round sections, ø 105 mm. All working parts, tensioning mechanism and sliders are integrated into the posts in accordance with regulations. No protruding parts. TÜV certified. Volleyball posts comply with DVV lI, EN 1271 With spindle tensioning mechanism 71 118 2213 Pair With hoist block and tackle system 71 118 2242 Pair Volleyball posts comply with DVV I, EN 1271 With spindle tensioning mechanism 71 118 2226 Pair With hoist block and tackle system 71 118 2255 Pair

ø 83 mm With spindle tensioning mechanism 71 115 8700 Pair With hoist block and tackle system 71 115 8713 Pair For Competitions, with DVVII Certification Volleyball Posts With spindle tensioning mechanism with tensioning lever, for 71 118 2109 Pair quick assembly and dismantling, With hoist block and tackle system complies with EN 1271. 71 118 2112 Pair 71 118 2239

Accessories l

Pair

Posts f Volleyball Made from galvanised steel

ø 83 mm

tubing. This economical unit has been developed for schools and general sport. The net can be set at any height. It is quick and easy to tension the net with the new belt tensioning system. The posts are 300 cm long and ø 83 mm. Ground sockets not included. 71 115 7244 Pair Tensioning Mechag Replacement nism With hoist block and tackle system as conversion set. Suitable for all volleyball units on this page. 71 115 8625 If you do not have ground sockets please order at the same time. See below.

Safety Tensioning Mechanism Suitable for all volleyball and games posts ø 83 mm. Weatherproof design with new belt tensioning system. 71 115 7231 Buckle Crank Square 8x8mm for volleyball posts (aluminium). 71 165 5605-16 Each

ø 105 mm

TOP DVVI, made from strong aluminium special 80x80 mm tubing, anodised silver. Inner chambers with steel filling. All necessary materials such as tensioning device, net hooks and roller are safely held in the pole to prevent accidents. This system makes it possible to adjust the net from 2.00-2.50 m even when fully tensioned, without having to make subsequent adjustments. 71 118 2200 Pair

for all volleyball posts on this page

New

ø 105 mm

80 mm 80 mm

System e Volleyball Certified by TÜV, type

tion with three heights, and anti-skid steps. • scratch-proof powder coating • adjustable in 5 cm stages from 125-155 cm • standing area with felt covering • swivelling writing board • movable back-rest • Post fixing attachment for round and square posts • 2 castors • total height 237 cm, 43 kg • with DVV I certification 71 115 6212

Adapter for Volleyl Additional ball Posts Made from aluminium. Additional adapters are suitable for posts 1, 2 and 5. Existing ground sockets in other sizes can be equipped with reducing adapters. Our volleyball posts are then available for any ground socket cross section size. Only available mounted in the posts. Minimum stacking depth in sockets 27 cm. Before ordering please request the sizing sheet. 71 115 9208 Pair

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Reduced risk of injury Volleyball Post i Beach Protection Pad For volleyball posts with a diameter of 80-100 mm. The strong padding material will greatly reduce the danger of injury. Padding approx. 200 cm high with a durable cover. Indispensable for the safety of your players. 71 116 1713-1 Each

Ground Sockets m Aluminium 350 mm long, with cover for 80x80 mm square posts and round posts ø 83 mm. Not illustrated. 71 115 9006 Sockets for Volleyball Posts n Ground ø 105 mm, Length 350 mm. 71 115 9019

Each

Ground Sockets With steel tubing cover for round posts ø 83mm, 350mm long. 71 151 5608

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Volleyball Nets and Accessories Accessory b

Tournament Nets

a Smash Shot f Volleyball Training Device Hangers a Net The protective and problem free solution for proper storage of volleyball, tennis and badminton nets. 71 115 7000

Wall Holders

b For hanging net hangers. Wound up nets are stored away compactly. 71 115 7013

Antennae c Volleyball Suitable for all nets, with carrying bag. Only one sided net antenna are allowed in games. Double unit 71 115 5701-2 Single unit, DVV approved 71 115 5701-1

Pair Pair

Carrying Bags for Volleyball Antenna with marking tape 71 151 5813

For learning, practising and improving attacking shots. Volleyball associations agree: this piece of equipment is easy and safe to use and therefore improves skill and technique. The ball support ring is filled with air and therefore offers almost no resistance and helps prevent the risk of injury. 71 115 6906

d Display Board For every kind of sport. This new display board in a ring binder displays points from 0-99 and sets from 0-7. The second page of the folder is for holdiing player's passes, game plans, rules and other documents. 71 115 6007-1

Permitted tournament net

Points competitions and tournaments: Only nets with certification I or II are allowed. Exact alignment possible while under tension

Kevlar Replacement Tensioning Rope As strong as steel rope, suitable for all nets, 11.70 m long with 2 loops. 71 115 5903

Kevlar Tensioning Rope For volleyball and badminton nets, 4 mm thick. 71 165 5605-3 con. m

Side Tensioning Cord Pair

2m long with quick release fastener 71 151 5800

New e

Guide Pulley

g Volleyball Tournament Net

New

(DVVI approved) Made from 3 mm polypropylene with 11.70 m long Kevlar tensioning rope, net length 9.50 m net height 1.00 m. 70 mm wide white upper band, 50 mm wide black band underneath, sides with fibreglass reinforcement with 6 point hanging and 6 tensioning cords. 71 115 8410

Volleyball Tournament Net (complies with DVV I) The guide pulley at both ends of the kevlar tensioning line ensures totally uniform tension over the whole surface of the net. You can also align the net exactly with the court markings even when fully tensioned. With fibre glass polyester reinforced borders, 6 point suspension with tensioning lines and quick release system. Net length 9.50 m, net height 1.00 m, made from 4 mm thick polypropylene. 71 115 8407

Roller e Net For volleyball and badminton nets. Ensures you can roll and unroll nets quickly and easily. Will hold 4 volleyball nets or long nets up to 25 m. Strong steel tubing construction with four wheels. 71 115 7026

Volleyball Tournament Net (complies with DVV) Made from 3 mm polypropylene with kevlar tensioning rope and without pulley blocks, with six point hanging and six tensioning cords. 71 115 8407-1

Tournament Net complies with DVV II Net length 9.50 m with border, net height 1.00m, 11.70 m long line and a mesh width of 10 cm, made from 3 mm thick black polypropylene with four point suspension and four tensioning ropes. 71 115 8205

Volleyball Set Discounted price, consisting of: • 1 pair of universal match posts pg. 62 g • 2 ground sockets pg. 62 h • 1 volleyball DVV II net g • 1 volleyball pg. 16 f 71 115 8306

Training Nets Every net length available!

Volleyball Training Net Made from 2 mm thick polyethylene, 9.50 m long, 1.00 m high, with plastic rope. Mesh width approx. 10 cm. No illustration 71 115 7404

Training Net i Volleyball Top training net, equipped with a 50 cm long rubber cord on all 4 corners to enable quick assembly, can be attached to any post in seconds. Made of 2.5 mm thick polyethylene, approx. 10 m long and 60 cm high. Mesh width approx. 3 cm. 71 115 7505

Long Net for h Volleyball training Made from knot free 3 mm thick polypropylene. Net height 100 cm, hemmed on top

Quick Assembly Volleyball Training Net 10x0.4 m, made from reinforced raschel weave fabric with upper net edging. The lateral stabilising supports and clamcleat with a polyester belt. The kevlar tensioning net tensioner ensure optimal net tension, rope is 2 m longer than the net. Please state rubber loops with carabiner hooks on required net length when ordering. both sides at the bottom. Not illustrated. 71 115 7518 con. m 71 115 7909

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 61

Volleyball Sets and Net Posts Beach a Vandal-proof Volleyball Post Extremely stable design with hot-dip galvanised steel tubing, 150x150x3 mm post profile, with welded on net eyelets for holding nets. Net height 224cm. Complete with 2 ground sockets. Foundation size 200x80x80 cm. No side tensioning ropes necessary for these posts. 71 115 6414 Pair

Vandalism-proof

b Vandalism-proof Volleyball Net Made from galvanised steel wire cables (Dralo®), approx. 2 mm thick, mesh width 100 mm. With 160 mm wide border band made from coated fabric. Steel tensioning ropes on both sides. The net size complies with international regulations 1x9.50 m. Can also be used with standard volleyball posts. 71 115 6427

c Post Protective Padding

Protection Pad c Post Indispensable for player's safety. The elastic padding material will greatly reduce the risk of injury. Weatherproof. 200 cm long, with durable cover and velcro fastenings. Cross section: 150x150 cm. 71 116 1726-2 Each

Hercules Rope Work Net

d Complete set with net

9,50 m 11,50 m

Space requirements 15m including the side tensioning ropes and foundations

“Fairplay” Volleyball System

d Ideally suited for playing beach volleyball on the beach. The net is made from 5.5 mm hercules rope with steel inserts and has a mesh width of approx. 10 cm. Net size: 1x 9.50 m. Comes with strong steel ropes and theft-proof

clamping locks. Posts are made from impregnated round logs, approx. ø 18 cm. These are cemented in the ground and laterally tensioned. Complete set. 71 115 6300 Complete

New

Volleyball Net e Individual 9.50 m long, 1.00 m high, from 5.5 mm super strong Hercules rope. 71 115 6401

Volleyball Sets and Accessories Socket Detail j h Ground With sealing cover, made from steel tubing for round posts ø 83mm. New 71 151 5608-1

Rails i Wall To be doweled or concreted onto an

k l

indoor wall. With adjustable eyelets. A practical product that is essential to all halls. Flat aluminium section 40x16 mm with rounded edges. 71 115 6704 Pair Tensioning Mechanism j Safety Suitable for all 83mm in ø volleyball

g Posts for Hanging f Volleyball Specially designed for reorganisation or replacement of posts. The advantages: These posts are easy to set up and then store in an equipment room after use. There is no need for expensive floor adaptations or holes. 71 167 8505-1 With tensioning device 71 167 8518-1 As contra-posts

Posts g Universal These posts enable the net to be adjusted for volleyball, tennis, fistball etc. Each post has 3 adjustable slides and is 3.00 m long, galvanised steel tubing, ø 83 mm. 71 115 6603 Pair

and games posts. Weatherproof design with new belt tensioning system. No problems with worn parts such as crank arms, joints and spindles. 71 115 7231 Safety Tensioning Device, (one) Galvanised, complies with the latest regulations. Suitable for all volleyball and playing posts of 83 mm in diameter. 71 115 7215-1 Set k Slide Height adjustable for round posts. ø 83 mm, 1 slide with pulley wheel, 2 slides with hooks for net fastening. 71 151 5709 Device for Wall Rails l Tensioning Simple, fast and safe way of tensioning nets. Fixed using pulley block. 71 115 7228

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Lockable Posts m Volleyball For unsupervised places on the beach, in outdoor pools, school yards and camp sites. Made from galvanised steel tubing, ø 83 mm, height adjustable from 150-250 cm. Comes with tensioning mechanism and several holding eyelets for the net. The tensioning mechanism is secured by a covering that can be locked. The lock in not included. 71 115 8029 Pair Ground Sockets for Volleyball Posts With steel tubing cover for round posts ø 83mm, 350mm long. 71 151 5608-2 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

t Get Them Moving: Multi Games ®

Multi Games Posts – for Indoors or Outdoors

Smooth adjustment! With scale With castors

New! Playing net now included! each post 120 kg = very stable And there's more: Volleyball long net on page 61 Court markings on page 116

Weights can be removed separately

Posts for a Games Mobile Combination Sets

Accessories

These new multi use posts can be used anywhere where games or net posts are required. They are suitable for indoor and outdoor use. Ground sockets are not necessary which means the posts can be used anywhere. Very stable because of the post's weight (120 kg each) and the well thought out design. The posts have fixing hooks and

Zacharias High Jump Crossbar 71 124 1118-1 Volleyball Training Net 71 115 7404-1 Badminton Net 71 116 6907-1

they can be telescopically extended from 1.55-2.45 m. The weights can also be individually removed. Ball-bearing rubber wheels ensure easy transport. A 6.10 m multi-purpose net is included in the delivery. Suitable for • tennis • bounce ball • indiaca • badminton • fistball

“Big Foot” Games Post System Leisure set suitable for: • Tennis • Netball • Badminton • Scoop • Volleyball • Indiaca • Beach volleyball • Indiaca tennis • High jump • Shuttleball • Fistball • Catchball As a freestanding system with fillable mobile plastic stand bases, which can be ready for playing in a very short time. Suitable for indoors and outdoors. Aluminium posts ø 40 mm in 2 different lengths, adjustable to different playing heights.

• Adjustable playing height: at 6 different heights! • Mobile

• ring tennis • volleyball • football tennis • high jump with Zacharias crossbar or Reivo® bands • beach volleyball 71 117 1411 Pair

Price Tip

Buy now !

Stand Base b Plastic Can be filled and is transportable. For holding 40 mm ø aluminium posts, 47x47x23 cm. Can be filled with water and sand - up to 40 kg. 71 197 2405-1 Each

Net

Suitable for all games, nylon, 1mm thick black cord, 600 x 76cm with tensioning lines. Mesh width 20mm. 71 197 2447-1 Each

posts ø 38/40 mm d Aluminium Two part, adjustable for playing height

Now! Order galvanised

e c

f Floor Marking Tape

of 107 and 155 cm. Ideal for tennis and badThis marking tape will stick to all minton. smooth floors so long as they are dry and d 71 197 2418-1 Each free from dust and grease. It is especially supple and facilitates curve marking Aluminium Posts ø 38/40mm without any folds. Approx. 150 m is necesThree part, adjustable for playing heights Very stable when b sary for marking tennis and games courts, from 155, 210, 215, 224, 236 and 243 cm. filled to 40 kg schools badminton requires approx. 100 m. Mobile Netball Ideal for badminton, high jump, fistball and The durable tape can be removed without volleyball (juniors, women and men). any problems leaving no sticky residue. Roll 13 types of games in one system Different ways of assembling (examples): 71 197 2421-1 Each length 33 m, 50 mm wide. Volleyball 71 130 1104-1 White Rolls Netball Net 71 130 1117-1 Red Rolls Galvanised, for placing on aluminium Badminton 71 130 1120-1 Yellow Rolls posts, with net. Without post and base. Badminton Rolls 71 197 2434-1 Each 71 130 1133-1 Black

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 63

Hockey Sticks for Beginners and Advanced Players Hockey Goal c Mini 100x100 cm, made of tubular steel.

Hockey Set c

The mini goals are quick and easy to transport and can be folded away for economical storage. An ideal goal for training games and other ball games both indoors and outdoors. Without nets. 71 118 2806 Pair

a Single

Round plastic shaft

Hockey Net For mini hockey goal 100x100 cm. 71 118 0103

Set contains • 12 sticks • 3 balls

Set

Hockey Balls For school sports and training

Buy now ! Set b Hockey Complete set of hockey equipment for schools and clubs. The supplied goals can also be used for a variety of other ball games.

Pair

This practical and attractively priced hockey set consists of: • 1 pair of mini hockey goals c • 1 pair of nets • 1 set of hockey sticks with 3 balls a 71 116 9108

With fibreglass insert Foam bonded

Ball d Hockey Made from soft, flexible plastic, does not bounce. These balls have been used for many years by the hockey associations for training. 71 116 3009

g j

Hockey Puck e Safety Made from a soft, flexible material ø 10 cm, 70 g. 71 116 2905

Ball with Holes f Safety Beginners can play with this ball with holes for safety reasons. ø approx. 70 mm. 71 116 8509-1 White Each 71 118 0002-1 Red Each

Can be played on both sides like competition sticks

Safe All-round Hockey Sticks for all Age Groups

“Cup” Hockey Stick

Sold separately, in red and blue. 71 116 9919 Red Each 71 116 9906 Blue Each

h • elastic and non-breakable • easily gripped stick thickness • head prevents injuries

Competition Hockey Sticks

Made of plastic, with an easily gripped stick thickness and therefore suitable for indoor and outdoor use. 15-piece set: 6 red sticks, 6 yellow sticks and 3 balls. 71 116 8307 Set

Plastic Hockey Sticks Sold separately, in red or yellow. 71 116 8411 Red 71 116 8408 Yellow

Each Each

Replacement Heads For the “Cup” hockey stick, to attach to the shaft. 71 116 9616 Red Each 71 116 9603 Blue Each

“Cup” Hockey Stick Set These robust hockey sticks will withstand even the toughest use. The shaft is 120 cm long and is reinforced with a fibreglass insert, which makes it virtually unbreakable. The standard head is well fitted to the shaft and suitable for ice hockey. The thickness of the stick provides a good grip. Hockey sticks, 14 piece set, 12 sticks in 2 different colours, 2 safety pucks. 71 116 9805 Set

Stick” Hockey Stick i “Junior Sold separately, in red and blue. 71 117 0102 Blue 71 117 0115 Red

Each Each

Heads j Replacement For the “Junior stick” hockey stick, to be attached to the shaft. 71 116 9704 Blue 71 116 9717 Red

Each Each

“Junior Stick” Hockey Stick Set This flexible stick is ideal for children (overall length 91 cm). The hollow shaft is reinforced in two places making it virtually unbreakable. The lightweight head is recessed in the shaft. Hockey sticks, 14-piece set, 12 sticks in 2 different colours, 2 safety pucks. 71 117 0001 Set

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Safety was number one when designing these new hockey sticks. The partially hollow shaft is made from polyethylene. Two parallel inner reinforcements running through the shaft ensure hardness and durability, without losing any flexibility.

Allround hockey sticks These hockey sticks are suitable for use both indoors and outdoors. The sticks are excellent for street hockey as well as ice hockey and indoor hockey. The robust design with fibreglass inserts make the shaft virtually unbreakable.

Safer end stoppers

Fibreglass inlay Crosswise ribbed

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Indoor and Field Hockey

Price Tip

Buy now ! All sizes in inches, 1” = 2.54 cm

Hockey Balls For competition and training

Professional a “Allround” Hockey Ball

English plastic ball with gloss surface, available as a field ball in white or as a hall ball in yellow. 71 118 1803 White Each 71 118 1816 Yellow Each

Transporter and d Mobile Container For hockey sticks. ø 250 mm, total height 95 cm, with metal handle and wheels. 71 116 9007 Contents not included

Cart b Transport To transport indoor hockey rink boards quickly and easily 71 131 0203

for Indoor Hockey c Rink Strong wooden rink boards, suitable for a field length of 40 m. Sloping inwards with rubber pads to protect the hall floor. Price/80 m: 71 118 3001

See also: Street hockey products page 69

“Classic” Hockey Stick

Hockey Goal e Field Strong aluminium design, width 3.66 m, height 2.14 m, depth at the bottom 1.20 m, at the top 0.90 m, dismantles completely including bands. Price does not include nets. 71 118 2907 Pair

Hockey Goal Net Made from approx. 2.5 mm thick polypropylene woven cord. Mesh width 2.5 cm. 71 118 8501 Indoor Pair 71 118 8400 Field Pair Hockey Goal Nets As 71 118 8501, but with 3 mm polypropylene. Mesh width 4.5 cm. 71 118 8501-1 Indoor 71 118 8400-1 Field

Pair Pair

The hockey stick for school sport The most popular model for school sport, also suitable for general sport training. Top quality sticks made of mulberry wood, with coated head and non-slip grip band. All sizes in inches (1 inch = 2.54 cm). Field 71 116 8600 33'' Each 71 116 8613 36.5'' Each Indoor 71 116 8802 33'' Each 71 116 8815 36.5'' Each

f Extra Charge for welded on castors

Castors

for 1 pair of field hockey goals. 71 118 2907-1

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Floorball … Floorball: the game for young and old

Tips for choosing the correct floorball sticks… Our Tip: Stand up straight and hold the stick against your body. The floorball stick that is the ideal height will reach your belly button exactly. The following overview will make your decision easier:

Height: 100 – 120 cm 121 – 140 cm 141 – 150 cm 151 – 160 cm 161 – 175 cm 176 – 190 cm 191 cm +

Stick length 60 cm 70 cm 80 cm 87 cm 92 cm 96 cm 100 cm

The Certified Floorball Stick Range

Un iho c®

Re ac tor

New 40 00

Un EV ihoc ® O 22 9

Un iho c®

AC E3 2

AC E2 9

Un EV ihoc ® O 3B am bo o Un Ni ihoc no ® 36

Competition floorball sticks, for professionals and experts!

As tro ng

“Reactor a Unihoc® 4000” Stick tra ini ng sti ck

Un wit ihoc h t 's m he o be st s u st sel cces lin g s sful s ho vel tick . As oft stic kt ha t is

sui tab le for all pla yer s

Tra a h ining ard an sha d m atc ft h

sti ck wit h

Lig fee htwe l fo igh r t t sh he ba aft w ll ith gre at

Ap sm erfe all ct s er pla tick yer for s

In chi ldr en' ss ize s!

Left Floorball Stick

There are right and left hand floorball sticks. The hand, that grips nearest the head of the shaft determines which stick is required.

Reactor series, a middle of the road group suitable for leisure players and juniors. Fibreglass shaft, soft Evo head. Length: 92 cm 71 183 4026 Right 71 183 4039 Left Length: 96 cm 71 183 4000 Right 71 183 4013 Left

Unihoc® “EVO 2 29” b Floorball Stick The biggest selling stick with the successful Evo 2 carbon composite shaft. Soft Evo 2 head. Length: 92 cm 71 212 1592 Right 71 212 1589 Left Length: 96 cm 71 183 4127 Right 71 183 4130 Left Length: 100 cm 71 183 4101 Right 71 183 4114 Left

“ACE 32” Stick c Unihoc® A soft stick for all players, carbon composite shaft with soft Ace composite head. Length: 96 cm 71 212 1576 Right 71 212 1563 Left Length: 92 cm 71 212 1550 Right 71 212 1547 Left

“ACE 29” Stick d Unihoc® A top stick with a slightly stiffer shaft for more precision, carbon composite shaft, medium Ace head. Length 96 cm. 71 183 4143 Right 71 183 4156 Left

“EVO 3 Bamboo” e Unihoc® Stick A newly developed stick, perfect for top level players. Inner shaft carbon composite, Evo 3 medium head. Length: 96 cm 71 212 1433 Right 71 212 1420 Left Length: 100 cm 71 212 1459 Right 71 212 1446 Left

“Nino 32” Stick f Unihoc® A perfect stick for smaller players, composite shaft, Nino soft head. Length: 60 cm 71 212 1518 Right 71 212 1505 Left Length: 70 cm 71 212 1534 Right 71 212 1521 Left

See the videos for products on this page

www.sport-thieme.com

Replacement Heads/Shovels Unihoc® EVO Replacement Head/Shovel The first double component shovel on the market. This consists of a stable nylon core with a polyethylene covering which guarantees good contact on any surface.

Right Floorball Stick

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

71 183 4303 71 183 4316 71 183 4329 71 183 4332

medium, right medium, left hard, right hard, left

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

The Winning Idea From t ® a Floorball Sets

Set Set of 18

Buy now !

Strong stick for youths and adults, shaft length 85 cm

Video

Complete Sets • 12 floorball sticks • 6 balls • 2 goals • 1 bag for sticks

Broschüre

Book

Floorball Stick b “Winner” The ideal stick for high demands, “Liga” Floorball Starter Set This complete set contains: • Set of 18 “Liga” sticks with 6 balls, article no. 71 117 4407 • 1 Floorball stick bag article no. 71 117 4801 • 2 Floorball 60x90 cm goals article no. 71 117 4609 Suitable for players up to a height of 150 cm. 71 117 5905 With video 71 117 9806 With booklet

“Champ” Floorball Starter Set

“Winner” Floorball Starter Set

This complete set contains: • Set of 18 Champ sticks with 6 balls, article no. 71 117 5501 • 1 Floorball stick bag, article no. 71 117 4801 • 2 Floorball 60x90 cm goals, article no. 71 117 4609 Suitable for people taller than 175 cm. 71 118 7205 Without video 71 118 7306 With booklet

This complete set contains: • Set of 18 Floorball “Winner” sticks with 6 balls, article no. 71 117 4508 • 1 Floorball stick bag, article no. 71 117 4801 • 2 Floorball 60x90 cm goals, article no. 71 117 4609 Suitable for players 150 cm high and taller. 71 117 6908 With video 71 117 9907 With booklet

allowing fast and accurate games. The strong shaft is made of polycarbonate, the head of polyethylene. 85 cm long shaft. One set contains: 6 black sticks, 6 white sticks and 6 training balls. 71 117 4508 Set of 18 71 117 9604 Set of 18 with booklet

“Winner” Floorball Stick 71 117 5309 71 117 5312 71 117 5400 71 117 5413

Set

Set of 18

Buy now !

Maxi” Floorball Stick c A“Kids soft and flexible stick that makes the

Floorball Stick d “Champ” This stick is designed for youths and

game really easy for beginners and children. The sticks are made of durable polyethylene. Shaft length: 80 cm. The set contains: 6 red and 6 yellow sticks, 6 balls. Suitable for both lefthanded and right-handed people. Set of 18 71 117 4306 Set of 18 with training video and book 71 117 9402

adults. It provides good ball control thanks to the reinforced head and the additional fibreglass inlay. Shaft length: 95 cm. The set consists of: 6x sticks each of yellow and green and 6 balls. Suitable for both left and right handed people. Set of 18 71 117 5501 Set of 18 with training video and book 71 117 9705

“Kids Maxi” Floorball Stick 71 117 4902 71 117 4915 71 117 5006 71 117 5019

Yellow stick Red stick Replacement head, yellow Replacement head, red

Floorball “Kids Mini” Stick This stick is particularly soft and flexible. At 70 cm in length, it is designed for use by children up to 140 cm. The set consists of: 6 sticks each of red and yellow and 6 balls with holes. 18 items in the set. Suitable for both left and right handed people. 71 117 4944

Floorball “Kids Mini” Stick 71 117 4928 Red stick 71 117 4931 Yellow stick

“Champ” Floorball Stick 71 117 5602 71 117 5615 71 117 5703 71 117 5716

Yellow stick Green stick Replacement head, yellow Replacement head, green

Conical shaft

Floorball Set e “Profi” The ideal set for improving and expert players. The strong shaft is made from fibreglass and the head and band on handle are polyethylene. Shaft length 96 cm and 80 cm. The set consists of: • 9x right hand Reactor sticks • 3x left hand Reactor sticks • 6x balls 71 117 4524 Senior 96 cm Set of 18 71 117 4537 Junior 80 cm Set of 18

Black stick White stick Replacement head, black Replacement head, white

Floorball Stick f “Liga” This stick that was specially developed for improving and young players. The strong shaft is made of polycarbonate, and the head is of durable nylon. Shaft length: 80 cm. The set contains: 6 black and 6 white sticks and 6 balls. Suitable for right and left handed people. Set of 18 71 117 4407 Set of 18 with training video and book 71 117 9503

“Liga” Floorball Stick 71 117 5107 71 117 5110 71 117 5208 71 117 5211

Black stick White stick Replacement head, black Replacement head, white

A quick overview of the advantages of Floorball: • Trains players in the sequence of movement for many types of sport (e.g. handball, tennis, volleyball etc.) • Develops and trains sideways step movement • Supports the development of a team spirit • Develops strength, stamina and speed • Co-ordinates different types of movement • Does not require any particular place or many markings

• Is safe and prevents injuries • Balls and sticks are inexpensive and easy to transport • Easily understood, simple rules mean fun right from the very beginning • Offers many variations and develops creativity • Suitable for all age groups from children all the way up

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

• Great fun for anyone who plays! Our tip: Try it out! You will soon be won over by this great idea from Sport-Thieme.

t 67

Floorball Accessories e

20 cm

Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

rial can hold a complete set. Ideal for storage and transportation. The bag will hold up to 15 sticks. 71 117 4801

Official Competition Goal with Catching Net steel, size: WxH 160x115 cm, 40 cm net depth at the Single Goal Net for all 160x115 cm goals. 71 117 7608

Floorball Bag

f For storage of up to 3 Floorball

Floorball Goalie Gear Goalie Trousers Floorball Goalie d Floorball b With eye visor, helmetMask With hip and leg padding, the made of Goalie Pullover c Floorball Extremely durable and easy to clean, padded, breathable fabric, 100% polyester. 71 117 6621 S Each 71 117 6618 M Each 71 117 6605 L Each 71 117 6634 XL Each

optimal protection against aggressive shots. 100% polyester. 71 117 6520 S Each 71 117 6517 M Each 71 117 6504 L Each 71 117 6533 XL Each

See product video

www.sport-thieme.com

Folds down

Bag e Floorball This bag made of strong nylon mate-

Competition Goal a Floorball The official competition goal made of tubular

shock-resistant plastic, cage protection. Suitable for all sizes. 71 117 6706

New

top, 65 cm net depth at the bottom. Comes complete with goal and catching net. 71 117 6403

38 cm

Unihockey Ball ø approx. 70 mm. White 71 116 8509 Red 71 118 0002

sticks. Made of nylon with zip and carry belt. 71 117 6807

h i

Ball Bag g “Flex” 100% nylon for storing and trans-

Ball j Floorball The new competition ball with small

porting up to 150 floorball balls. 71 117 6810

indentations something like a golf ball. ø approx. 70 mm. With: • improved flight • faster speed • more precision 71 116 8512 Each

Flex Ball Bag Set Ball bag with 50 white Floorball balls. 71 117 6823

Each Each

Puck k Floorball ø 70 mm. 71 117 4700

Each

o Front

l m

• Complete with net • Folds down • Stands very stable and securely

The Original Floorball® Goal for Competition and Training m Floorball Goal A strong goal, easy to fold away and transport, made of tubular steel for indoors l Floorball Goal With folding net hangers, complete with net. HxW: 105x140 cm. 71 117 5804 Each Single Goal Nets for all 105x140 cm goals. 71 117 6100

and outdoors. The foldable net frames have a safety lock. Delivery includes net. Size: 60x90 cm. 71 117 4609 Each Single Goal Nets For all 60x90 cm goals. 71 117 6009

New

The Official n Floorball: Competition Boards The rules state that for competition the rectangular field of 40x20 m must be surrounded by 50 cm boards with round corners. The individual elements are made of reinforced plastic. The whole structure is free-standing. All pieces are clipped together. The following is included: • 52 straight boards in 2 m lengths • 4 straight boards in 1 m lengths • 4 corner pieces and • 2 transport carts, size LxWxH: 200x80x150 cm when loaded. 71 117 6302

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Rear

“Floorball” o Topo Tactics Board An indispensable aid. The board is made from strong plastic and there is a complete playing field on the front while the rear has half a field enlarged. Comes with a marker that can be wiped away. 26x41 cm. 71 144 0430-1 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Street Hockey - Just for Fun! Street Hockey Sticks Street Hockey Stick a “Junior” With 100 cm long shaft, head made from durable plastic. 71 116 5500 Right 71 116 5513 Left Replacement Head for Junior Model 71 116 6402 Right 71 116 6415 Left

Street Hockey Stick c “Senior” With 130 cm long shaft, head made of durable plastic. 71 116 5601 Right 71 116 5614 Left Replacement Head for Senior Model 71 116 6200 Right 71 116 6213 Left

Street Hockey Pucks

b The best stick, with 147 cm long

Hockey Ball d Street Non bouncing ball made of a vinyl

shaft. Made from specially selected ash wood. One piece with a durable moulded plastic head. 71 116 5106 Right 71 116 5119 Left Replacement head for Fusion model 71 116 6226 Right 71 116 6239 Left

mixture for controlled handling and optimal shooting. 71 116 6008

“Fusion” Street Hockey Stick

Hockey Puck e Street Durable vinyl puck, ideal for smooth

surfaces, can be used outdoors or indoors. 71 116 6109

Street Hockey Goals Hockey Goal f Street Made of steel tubing with precision joints, easy to assemble, with a weatherproof polyethylene net. HxWxD: 107x127x66 cm. 71 116 5803 Each

f e

Individual Goal Nets for Street Hockey Goals 71 116 5816 Each

Complete with net

Folds down for easy transport

Junior

Fusion

Hockey Goal g Street Made from steel tubing, folds down

All wooden shafts can be shortened at any length!

for easy transport, complete with net. 71x51x46 cm. 71 116 5832 Pair

c Senior

Street Hockey

Street Goal h Mini Strong aluminium goal with completely welded goal frame including net with 4.5 mesh width. Goal 1.20 x 0.80 m, with folding net hangers 71 115 2223-1 Each Goal 180x1.20 m, with folding net hangers 71 115 2526-1 Each Replacement net For 1.20 x 0.80 m goals with 4.5 cm mesh width 71 115 1813-1 Each For 1.80 x 1.20 m goals with 4.5 cm mesh width 71 115 1914-1 Each

i Folding Sport-Thieme Mini Goal Can be used as a training goal for football, street hockey or fun sports like beach football and beach handball. Its special folding mechanism means that it is easy to transport and erect. This makes it ideal for different uses. When in use the folding mechanism can be locked securely in place and two earth bolts with safety rope prevent the goal from slipping. The net is permanently connected to the goal with a special net pole that covers the whole goal. Frame is made of powder coated steel tubing, net is made from polyethylene. 60 x 90 cm, approx. 5 kg. 71 115 1712-1 Design: 60x90x70 cm Each 71 115 1738-1 Design: 135x100x110 cm Each

(with or without roller blades) is the new sport from America that is becoming more and more popular in Europe. • Do you want to play with a ball, a puck and a stick? • Just dribble a bit, practice by yourself, play real matches? • In the morning, during your break or at the weekend? • On the street, in the park, at school, anywhere without fixed training times and commitments? Simply: just for fun … We have top quality equipment for all your street hockey needs.

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Now! Order

Keeper Mask j Goal To protect face, plastic caged shell cover. One size fits all. 71 117 6706-1

See product j video

www.sport-thieme.com

t 69

Badminton … Badminton Racquets Badminton racquets, pre-strung with ASHAWAY strings c Badminton Racquet Balanced one piece racquet with a graphite shaft and aluminium isometric head, 96 g. Suitable for ambitious players. Good handling, power and shuttle contact are the characteristics of this racquet. 71 117 1932

a b

Badminton Racquet d Victor Very balanced school racquet, alu-

minium head with hardened steel shaft. 100g. 71 117 2108

With especially strong Multifil strings

Badminton Racquet e Victor Long-life racquet made from robust, hardened steel. The all-round racquet that meets high demands. 104g. 71 117 2209

Racquet a Badminton A balanced school sport racquet, with steel head, hardened steel shaft, PVC handle. Also suitable for outdoor use. 110 g. 71 117 1903

AL 6500 Badminton f Victor Racquet

Badminton Racquet Standard ready strung racquet, with steel head, hardened steel shaft, PVC handle. Also suitable for outdoor use. 115 g. 71 117 1945

A top quality badminton racquet at an amazingly low price, with aluminium head and solid carbon shaft. Balanced, super handling for every advanced team player, 96g. 71 117 2300

e c

G 7500 Badminton g Victor Racquet Balanced one-piece racquet made from 100% graphite, with isometric head, strung with Ashaway Ralley 21 strings. Good handling, power and a feeling for the shuttlecock are what make this racket stand out. 95 g. 71 116 9300

Badminton Racquet

Ready strung racquet, with aluminium head, hardened steel shaft, PVC handle. 105 g. 71 117 2007

Badminton Accessories h

h “Victor 1000” Badminton Shuttles

h i

Made from nylon. White and neon yellow with cork base. Ideal for dark halls where these shuttles are up to 30% more visible. White basket, red = fast 71 117 2834 Tube of 6 White basket, blue = medium 71 117 2805 Tube of 6 White basket, green = slow 71 117 2821 Tube of 6 Neon yellow - ball basket, blue = medium 71 117 2818 Tube of 6

Badminton Racquet Tape

Feather Shuttlecocks i Natural With specially selected goose feathers

Vibration absorbing and non-slip, length approx. 110 cm. 71 117 2326 Set of 10

and cork base. Very good flight. 71 116 7900 Price for 12

Shuttlecocks j Nylon Carlton T 800 with PU base. Available in 3 different designs. 71 116 7825 Red = fast 71 116 7809 Blue = medium 71 116 7812 Green = slow

Tube of 6 Tube of 6 Tube of 6

Marking Tape k Floor For marking out badminton courts. The tape clings to all gloss floors once they are dust and grease free. It is supple and lays in straight lines. The durable tape can be removed easily and without leaving any residues. 110 m is required for the entire court. Length of roll 33 m, 38 mm wide, white. 71 129 9700

New

l Shuttlecocks with coloured baskets

Even when the light is not very good, these neon shuttlecocks can always be seen. Good flight characteristics and resilience come as standard. Box of 5 in red, yellow and blue. 71 116 8004 Tube

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Rack m Lockable For Badminton Rackets. 16 mm deep rack, stores up to 25 badminton racquets, saving space. Strong and stable metal frame for wall mounting. 71 117 1802 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

… Systematically Hitting Shot by Shot BISI School Sport Initiative BISI Badminton Racquets with steel shaft, aluminium head and learner's handle. Strung with durable Galaxy strings. B = Badminton I = into S = Schools I = Initiative • All BISI racquets have been equipped with a new type of learning handle that makes it impossible to hold the racquet incorrectly. • The racquets come in different lengths to suit players of all ages as well as offering the correct handling for those who are getting better at the technique of the game. • The broader head on “BISI Mini” and “BISI Junior” models above optimise the point of contact on these shorter racquets as timing and hand/eye coordination are not yet fully developed in children. • As the BISI racquets are perfect for learning the optimal racquet control, players in the German national badminton squad play with these racquets! Especially the shortened “BISI Junior” racquet. The basic idea of the BISI concept is to teach beginners the optimal racquet technique.

Badminton Racquet a “Mini” With shortened shaft, total length

Buy now !

Badminton Racquet b “Junior” With shortened shaft, total length 58cm, approx. 100g, with child friendly head. 71 116 9313-2

Badminton Racc “Classic” quet Standard racquet, total length 66cm, approx. 105g. 71 116 9313-1

Shuttles d Badminton Quality nylon shuttles with pleasant base, blue/medium, box of 6. 71 116 9313-4

BISI Badminton School Set

Set

53cm, approx. 98g, with child friendly head. 71 116 9313-3

School Badminton Set e BISI Specially selected for schools and clubs. Consisting of: • 10 BISI badminton racquets in different lengths (4x mini, 4 junior and 2x classic models) • 6 badminton shuttles • 1 training poster with many exercises (in German) • 1 large storage bag 71 116 9313-5

Badminton School Set

Badminton Saver Set Top Rated

Set of 19

www.sport-thieme.com

Broschüre Broschüre klein

Now comes with an instructions Badminton Set f School This badminton set is specially chosen

• 1x large storage bag with interior compartment and strong carrying strap • 1x teaching DVD with visual explanations with schools and clubs in mind. of the most important shots and exerThe set consists of: cises • 10x robust badminton racquets with steel head and particularly durable multifiler strings • 1x school sport brochure with instructions for many exercises (In German) • 6x shuttlecocks with nylon feathers and cork 71 117 2906 bases

Set of 35 Saver Set g Badminton Is specially selected for schools. The set consists of: • 20x badminton racquets with steel head and multifiler strings • 12x shuttlecocks with nylon feathers and

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

cork bases • 1x large storage bag with carrying strap • 1x teaching DVD with visual explanations of the most important shots and exercises • 1x booklet with instructions for many exercises (In German) 71 117 2922

t 71

Badminton

a Badminton Tournament Net b with tensioning system.

b c

Tournament Net a Badminton Complies with DIN and the latest

Exact height adjustment

DBV (German Badminton Association) regulations. The 1.2 mm thick nylon net has fibre glass bars on the side that sit perfectly. The kevlar rope is 8.00 m long and has a tensioning device at one end, see b. 71 117 1600

Our TĂ&#x153;V approved badminton sets correspond with the latest IBF and German Badminton Association (DBV) regulations.

You will also need tensioning device in illustration no. 2 to play.

Tip: Device b Tensioning With clamp, 2 hooks and approx.

f And there's more:

With base plate

Ground Markings page 99

22 mm wide tape. Tensioning can be adjusted from 5 to 60 cm. Can also be mounted on existing badminton or volleyball nets 71 117 1701 Badminton Net Nylon 1 mm, with 660 cm kevlar rope, mesh width 18 mm, black, 602 cm long, 76 cm high. 71 116 6907

Badminton Posts c Portable Comply with the latest DIN EN 1509 and DBV regulations. The low height when assembled, without additional struts, reduces the risk of injury. Robust all steel construction is easily dismantled. Each post weighs approx. 65 kg and is therefore very stable. Two small wheels on each side of the post enable easy transport. There are 4 rubber buffers on the base to protect the hall floor and to prevent slipping. An eyelet is welded onto each base to enable the net to be tensioned according to regulations. Without net. 71 116 3504 Pair

Badminton Nets for Multiple Courts These nets can be used in schools and training to make the best possible use of the hall length or width and enable larger groups to practice. Individual nets are 602 cm long and can be altered in any way on the kevlar rope. 2 nets on a 15 m long kevlar rope 71 117 1323 3 nets on a 23 m long kevlar rope 71 117 1336 4 nets on a 31 m long kevlar rope 71 117 1349

Replacement Wheel

Mobile

Posts with Base Plate f Support These posts are necessary to obtain the regulation height for nets on multiple courts. 71 116 3605

for badminton posts c and e. 71 150 5708

Badminton Tournament Net Made from 1.6 mm thick polypropylene, with lateral polyester bars and 8 m long kevlar rope. 71 117 1206

Posts g Badminton Made from aluminium, 80x80 mm,

New

Now Even Better! With extended locking loops

i Now! Order

anodised. Includes net and tensioning hooks, ground socket with cover. Without net. 71 116 8206 Pair

Board d Display In a ring binder, suitable for all types of sport. With this new display in a ring binder, you can show point scores from 0 - 99 and set results from 0 - 7. The other side of the board is intended for players passes, game plans, rules or other documentation. 71 115 6007

h Mobile Middle Posts Portable Badminton Posts

e The posts have an additional weight and are therefore very stable. They are best suited for multi purpose courts. One portable post weighs approx 110 kg. Without net. 71 116 8105 Pair

For multiple courts beside each other Badminton nets can be attached and tensioned on both sides Two wheels make it easy to transport. Height adjustable, nonslip with rubber pads, 75 kg. Please order the sizing sheet before ordering. DBGM pending 71 116 3533 Each

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Long Band i ReivoÂŽ Stretches from 8-16 m incl. reel. Quick and easy to attach to posts and can be used as court border or for marking out a court. An economical alternative to a net. 80% polyester, 20% elasthane. 71 143 7821-1 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Speedminton® Set

Set

Buy now !

Speedminton Speed badminton is a new type of racquet sport with a new specially developed shuttle called “Speeder” with remarkable drive. It is more stable in the wind and faster than small court badminton. Windrings (3 g) serve to weigh down the Speeder for more staility in the wind. Just play for fun and fitness, without nets or rules, wherever you can find space. Otherwise play as a competition sport in fun matches with point markers in each set or on Speed badminton’s Easy Court or on tennis courts.

a Speedminton® Set S70 The set consists of: • 2 aluminium racquets, red/black • Speeder 3 mix pack, • 2 speed lights, • 1 Wind Ring • 1 thermo bag • instructions. 71 133 8182

Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

Set

Buy now !

b Speedminton® School Set The set consists of: • 1 roomy sports bag • 12 colourful aluminium S100 speed racquets, 58 cm long, 169 g • 5 Speeder tubes (15 Fun Speeders) • 24 goal markers • game instructions 71 133 8166

Speedminton® Individual Racquets

c Speedminton® S 300 Set The set consists of: • 1 black/white shoulder bag • 2 high quality carbon composite racquets in white/black, 58 cm long, 169 g, strung with multifiler strings • new U shape for more power and speed • 1 mixed pack (1 Fun, 4 Match, 1 Night) • 4 Speed lights, 4 goal markers • 2 Wind Rings • instructions 71 133 8153

d Speedminton® S 100 Set The set consists of: • 1 shoulder bag • 2 hardened light aluminium Speed racquets, 58 cm long, 169 g • 1 mixed pack (1 Fun, 4 Match, 1 Night) • 4 Speed lights, 4 goal markers • 2 Windrings • instructions 71 133 8140

Speedminton® Accessories

Night Fun Match

S100 Racquet h Speedminton® The bestseller for Speedminton® Power Play.

Set Match Speeder Tube

e Competition ball for distances of 15-23 m and speeds up to 290 km/h. One pack containing five balls and two Windrings. 71 207 3138

Court f Easy Court marking kit with fluorescent 2.5 cm wide strapping and pegs. It is the court you can bring with you, simple to set up. 8 straps each 5.5 m to be arranged in 2 squares. With instructions. 71 207 3109

Buy now !

Night

g Speedertube Mix Pack The set consists of: • 1 Fun (short distances) • 3 Match (medium distances) • 1 Night (for night Speeding) • 2 Windrings 71 133 8179

Hardened aluminium, 169 g, length 58 cm. 71 207 3112

Each

i Top level racquet made from graphite, multifile strings, Speedminton® S500 Racquet

string tension 14 kp, 3/4 cover. Length: 58 cm, 169 g. 71 133 8195

Each

Speedminton® rules free

www.sport-thieme.com

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 73

First Serve … Tennis Racquets

New

“MP Tour” a Victor® Tennis Racquet A top performance racquet for optimal ball speed and offensive play. Bridge construction in the centre of the racquet for a precises aggressive game. • Magan Hi-Fibre Mesh • head: bridged “heart” • approx. 275 g • balance: 320 mm • handle: medium • max. string: approx. 30 kg • strings: titan polyester • frame height: approx. 22 mm • string pattern: 16/19 main/cross • Bag: full sized thermo bag with handy compartment 71 218 2836

“Winner” b Victor® Tennis Racquet

New

A tennis racquet for beginners. Aluminium frame completely strung with synthetic leather handle tape. Weighs approx. 350 g, 68.5 cm long. 71 218 2807

“Tour Energy c Victor® 27” Tennis Racquet This racquet is easy and good to use with good playing characteristics for beginners and more advanced players. • aluminium • approx. 305 g • handle: medium • max. string: approx. 26 kg • multifile synthetic strings • length: 690 mm • string pattern: 16/17 main/cross 71 218 2810

“Tour Energy TI” d Victor® Tennis Racquet This robust racquet is well strung for improving players. • material: fused graphite • approx. 310 g • handle: medium • max. string: approx. 26 kg • multifile synthetic strings • length: 680 mm • string pattern: 16/19 main/cross • Bag: full sized thermo bag 71 218 2823

Tennis Balls and Tennis Accessories 60 balls

72 balls

New i

Price Tip

Buy now !

Ball Bucket e Tennis Contains 60 top quality pressureless training balls, durable felt and special rubber mixture ensure the bounce is constant. Suitable for ball machines. 71 137 6409

Tennis Ball h “Softball” With tennis ball design, suitable for

training racquets and bat boards. Bouncy, yellow, ø 70 mm. 71 109 8105-2

Training Ball f “Wilson” Non-pressurised, arm friendly ball.

Trainer” g “Sport-Thieme Tennis Ball

Robust for use in schools and training with excellent quality webbed felt, good playing characteristics. This ball is really durable. 72 balls in one bucket. 71 137 7532

Non-pressurised training ball with excellent playing characteristics and bounce. Suitable for ball machines. 71 137 4621 Price for 4 71 137 4634 Price for 60

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

“US Open” Tennis Ball i Wilson Official ball for the hardest tennis tournaments in the world since 1978. With extra durable felt for longer use on all types of surfaces. 71 137 7545 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

…for Tomorrow’s Tennis Professionals Children's Tennis

New

Mini a “Ace” Tennis Set • 10 Junior racquets 53 cm • 10 Fase 3 spin balls • 10 Fase 2 easy soft balls • high quality storage bag 71 217 5326

c d

New

“Junior” Tennis Racquets The easy to use and methodically correct way to start with tennis. Recommended by top experts as the right racquet for children. Strong and very light mid-size aluminium racquets. Fully strung. Article Model Handle Weight Length Player height Article no.

Mini b “Tyger” Tennis Set • 10 Junior racquets 58 cm • 10 Fase 2 spin balls • 10 Fase 1 mid speed balls • high quality storage bag 71 217 5339

Junior 53 00 218 g 53 cm 104-115 cm 71 137 5451

Junior 58 00 230 g 58 cm 116-127 cm 71 137 5464

Junior 68 0 245 g 63 cm 128-151 cm 71 137 5477

The classic fat boards

• complete with net • can be stored away saving space • easy to transport • stands stable • for indoor and outdoor use

i Step” Bat Boards i “First Wooden racquets for children, the official Net Equipment for f Tennis Children

VDT (German Tennis This children's tennis net set can be trans- Assoc.) ported and used quickly. When assembled recomthis strong aluminium equipment is the mended regulation size of 6.10x0.85 m. All parts of the frame that come in contact with the floor are lined with protective rubber. The equipment can be easily dismantled for transportation. 4x 10 kg cast iron weights guarantee high stability, complete with net and quick tensioners. 71 136 8808

Tennis Ball g “ACADEMY” The ideal school tennis ball for children and beginners. Pressureless and 30% lighter than normal balls and with a considerably slower flight. Recommended by VDT (German Tennis Association) and suitable for use with children's tennis racquets, 40 g, light and easy to play with, box containing 4 balls, yellow. 71 137 5608

and proven training racquet for school and children's tennis. 71 137 3208 Blue Each 71 137 3211 Red Each

j Training Ball j Tennis Made from soft, flexible plastic. Very good for training shots and coordination. 71 116 3009-1

g Practice Racquet k Tennis Made of multi-bonded wood, suitable for

Soft” Methodical Ball h “Funny For methodical structure in short court tennis and children's training. The strong composition of these balls means that when they are hit, all the energy is absorbed and the ball then leaves the racquet “with brakes on”. 71 137 5611 Price for 4 71 137 5637 Pack of 60

tennis, softball and indiaca. The perforated hitting surface is approx. 21x23 cm, handle length approx. 14cm. Recommended for children from the age of 6, complete with handle tape and wrist loop, 275 g. 71 137 3501

Ball Basket l “Comfort” Easy ball collection without the stooping. Simply place the basket on top of the ball and press gently. Can hold approx. 72 balls. Foldable handles for raising the basket which is great help when doing serve training. With practical cover for transportation, galvanised. 71 137 3309

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 75

Tennis Training Aids

• adjustable • for indoor/outdoor use • rounded bars

Spin Tennis Ball c Portable Throwing Machine

Ball Throwing b Tennis Machine, Junior Model The compact size makes this machine very easy to transport. Available in battery operated or 220 V version. 71 137 5406 Battery 71 137 5419 220 V

Model Agility Co-ordination Ladder

a Fitness and co-ordination are a fundamental element of modern, progressive tennis lessons. This new methodical aid will help you develop your legs, coordination and speed, using different types of exercises. For example, the co-ordination ladder is ideal for use in developing a sense of rhythm. Width approx. 40 cm, extra flat

bars that are adjustable to different distances from each other. Ground anchor included for fixing the ladder down in sports fields and a suction cup for hall floors. The coordination ladder comes in a practical storage and transport bag. 71 137 3921 8 m 71 137 3934 4 m

Tennis Nets

Size (LxWxH) Weight Electrical supply Ball capacity Ball speed Scattering Spin/Slice Ball height Remote control Article number

Transportable machine with spin function. Battery operated. “Spin+” has a remote control. 71 137 5422 Battery 71 137 5435 Battery, remote control

bJunior Battery Junior 220V 51x30x49 19 kg Battery 125 15-135 km/h yes no flat to lobbing no 71 137 5406

51x30x49 19 kg 220V 125 15-135 km/h yes no flat to lobbing no 71 137 5419

c Portable Spin

Portable Spin +

56x36x51 19 kg Battery 110 15-135 km/h yes yes flat to lobbing no 71 137 5422

56x36x51 19 kg Battery 110 15-135 km/h yes yes flat to lobbing infrared 71 137 5435

comply with DIN EN 1510 (LxH: 1272x107 cm)

Black

Green

“Camelot” 3.5 mm Tennis Net 2 mm Row Tennis Net e Double 3 mm Row Tennis Net d Double Double net with tensioning rope Double net with tensioning rope underneath, 2 mm PE knotted. Mesh width approx. 45x45 mm. Upper edge 100 mm. Made from 100% nylon. PVC coated steel rope. 71 136 9928 Black 71 136 9931 Green

underneath, 3 mm PE knotted. Mesh width approx. 45x45 mm. Upper edge 100 mm. Made from 100% nylon. PVC coated steel rope. 71 136 9944 Black 71 136 9957 Green

Top quality knotless square meshed net, to meet a high level of usage. Made of 3.5 mm thick black polyester cord, extremely robust thanks to the hemmed in polyester band at the top and sides. With non-movable meshing and optimal visibility. It keeps its shape well. Inclues steel rope. Not illustrated. 71 137 2306

mm Knot Free Tennis Net f 4Single row net, fully hemmed in 100% nylon band, 4 mm knotfree polypropylene. Mesh width approx. 45x45 mm. PVC coated steel rope, black. 71 136 9960

Tennis Net Accessories

g Tape g Net Made of nylon, with adjustable loops and carabiner hooks. Length: 1.83 m. 71 136 9117

• two year durability guarantee on the net • absolutely weatherproof • very strong • long lifespan

Anchor h Ground Galvanised, to be driven into sand, easy to use. 71 113 0717 Ground Anchor Socket Made of iron, galvanised, for halls and all-weather pitches. 71 136 9003

3.5 mm Tennis Net j Deluxe Heavy net made of approx. 3.5 mm thick black woven polyethylene with plastic coating. Recommended for use out-

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

doors, with strong hemming and steel line. 71 137 0300 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Table Tennis: Balls and Accessories

New

a What bat for which player? Explanation of the LAS system.

H A F

Hobby: Plays now and again for fun and fitness Beginner: Plays regularly. Has technique and ball control is continually improving. Advanced: Trains regularly. Technically competent and tactically astute.

c New

d Larger hitting surface for beginners

Donic Schildkröt “Team Germany 400” Table Tennis Bat

Special schools bat with concave handle, 1.4 mm foam for maximum ball control. A 71 110 7630

Schildkröt b Donic “Young Champs 400” Table Tennis Bats Schools bat. Ideal for training technique. With a vibration absorbing, concave handle for better ball control. 1.8 mm Elite cover. A 71 110 7656

Schildkröt c Donic “Persson Line 500” Table Tennis Bats A school and club bat for improving players. The anatomic cork handle fits perfectly in the hand and will ensure the perfect hold for all techniques. 1.8 mm Prestige cover (ITTF approved). F 71 110 7656

Schildkröt “Oversize d Donic Maxi” Table Tennis Bats A methodical bat for more fun while learning table tennis techniques. These bats are 40% larger than normal bats but the same weight. This makes it easier for beginner's and small children to control the ball. External pimples, without foam, special wood, bonded together five times, 145 g. H 71 110 7643

Table Tennis Balls and Accessories

• more visible • slower • ideal for beginners and method training

144 balls Size comparison: Method ball f and competition ball

Balls for Table Tennis f Method Bucket with 50 table tennis balls, in

Top Rated

50 balls f

www.sport-thieme.com

orange, 55 mm. These balls are slower and more visible. 71 110 7816

Table Tennis e Sport-Thieme Ball Bucket

71 110 8109 White balls 71 110 8112 Orange balls

Padded bag for up to 12 bats. 71 110 8503

Joola® Tabletennis Ball Set

Competition quality training balls for schools and clubs. The balls come in a bucket containing 144 balls, diameter 40 mm. 71 110 7803 White 71 110 7832 Orange

3* Table Tennis Balls h Joola® 40 mm, select quality.

Tennis Bat Storage g Table Bag

Table Tennis Balls j “Double-Circle” i Schildkröt Top quality, from training to competiTable Tennis Balls, 40 mm

tion. Balls in the new 40 mm size, jade ball, white. Pack of 6 Pack of 3 71 110 9607 White balls Pack of 6 Pack of 3 71 110 9610 Orange balls

Original Chinese training ball, ideal for school and club sport. 6 balls in a box. 71 187 8309 White Pack of 6 71 187 8312 Orange Pack of 6

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Different ball sizes to ensure more fun. The set consists of: • 3 x ø 38 mm balls, • 2 jumbo ø 44 mm balls, • 2 elephant balls ø 55 mm. 71 110 8200

t 77

Game - Set - Match! “Tacteo Cornilleau Outdoor” Table Tennis Bat

a Top Rated

A weatherproof bat made with new composite materials developed by Michelin, the rubber specialists. The bats are very strong, last a long time, sit easy in the hand and have good playing characteristics. Ideal for intensive use in schools, clubs and leisure areas. H “Tacteo 30” for Beginners 71 111 0207

a c New

b New

“Tacteo 50” for Regular Training b 71A 111 0210 F “Tacteo 60” for Technique c and Ball Control

www.sport-thieme.com

71 111 0223

Set Special offer!

Buy now !

Contains 144 balls

d “Tacteo 30 Outdoor” Table Tennis Set

The outdoor package consists of: • 12 high quality “Tacteo 30” table tennis bats • 1 bucket with 144 balls, ø 40 mm. Ideal for institutions, where robust bats and many replacement balls are required. 71 111 0294 White balls 71 111 0281 Orange balls

Competition Net Sets, Comply with DTTB and ITTF Regulations New

New Klick e Joola® Solid net set with height adjustment and clamping system. 71 110 4833 Replacement Net 71 110 4934

JOOLA® Outdoor Net Set

f An economical leisure table tennis net set. Strong and solid, made from plastic with a weatherproof net. 71 110 5113 Replacement Net 71 110 4934

Replacement Net For Table Tennis Net Set JOOLA®: WM, Spring and Europaliga. 71 110 4921

Complies with ITTF specifications, stable metal body, cotton-steel thread net, micro height adjustment with integrated net bar lock. 71 110 4817

be folded together. With numbers 1-30, 5 sets for the new rules. Size: 49x28 cm. 71 110 4413

Top of the range, strong metal design in accordance with ITTF regulations. Handy star grip for finer height adjustment. Net holder with wide support and net made of particularly robust fabric. 71 110 4703 Replacement Net 71 110 4918

with micro height adjustment in practical storage bag. 71 110 4820

Tennis Score Counter m Table In a practical plastic folder that can

Spezial” g “Sport-Thieme Table Tennis Net Set

Weatherproof

Europaliga i Joola® Very solid metal net set for clubs,

m New

Strong School Sport Net Set

Joola® World Champion Top Model

Electronic Score n Joola® Counter

TIMO Net Fittings

Weatherproof fittings made of robust plastic. Easy to assemble and dismantle with handy fastening screw, height adjustment and tensioning chains. 71 110 5302 Replacement Net 71 110 4905

Click” Net Set h “Timo A strong metal table tennis net set with height adjustment and click-on fastener. 71 110 5315

“Perfect EN” l Sport-Thieme Table Tennis Net Set Suitable for the following Sport-Thieme Table Tennis Tables: Berlin indoor, Berlin outdoor and Timomatik (EN tables). 71 110 4716 Table Tennis Replacement Net For Sport-Thieme Table Tennis Net Set: “Perfect EN”. 71 110 4729

Table Tennis Score o TSP Counter to use. Power supply: 18 DC 1.5 V battery size: D (R20) - approx. 100 hours display time or DC 18 V mains connection. Batteries and mains adapter are not included in the delivery. Size (HxW): 48x28 cm, 3 kg (batteries not included). 71 110 4426

Easy to use and very practical. Score counter made of hard plastic with luminous numbers. The special ring mechanics prevent the numbers being ripped off. Can be displayed on both sides. Set numbers from 0-5 and points from 0-31. 39x22 cm. 71 110 4400

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Mobile electronic counter for displaying the score in table tennis, badminton and volleyball. The display is easy to read with up to 9 sets, 99 points and a serving side display. Figure height: 12.5/7.5cm. Simple

Table Tennis Bats

a inverted pimples

Sport-Thieme “Paris” Table Tennis Bats

Beginner's bat. Internal pimples, without padding, anatomic handle, special wood bonded 5 times. H 71 110 8402

Set

• external pimples • 1.5 mm foam

• inverted pimples • 1.5 mm foam • ITTF approved coating

• inverted pimples • 1.8 mm foam • ITTF approved coating

“Rom” Table b Sport-Thieme Tennis Bats

“Wien” Table c Sport-Thieme Tennis Bat

“Berlin” Table d Sport-Thieme Tennis Bat

Schools bat for optimal ball control. External pimples, with 1.5 mm padding, concave handle, special wood bonded 5 times. H 71 110 8415

A bat for schools and club sport. Pimples on the inside 1.5 mm foam, concave handle, made from special wood that is bonded five times. ITTF approved surface. A 71 110 8457

Schools and club bat with ITTF approved surface for more ball control and safety. Inverted pimples, 1.8 mm foam, concave handles, special wood bonded five times. F 71 110 8460

Special offer!

Set

Special offer!

Buy now !

“Paris” e Sport-Thieme Table Tennis Bat Set Consisting of: • 2 Sport-Thieme “Paris” bats • 6 high quality training balls. 71 110 8428 White balls 71 110 8633 Orange balls

Set

Sport-Thieme Table f “Rom” Tennis Bat Set Consisting of: • 2 Sport-Thieme Rom bats • 6 high quality training balls. 71 110 8431 White balls 71 110 8646 Orange balls

“Wien” g Sport-Thieme Table Tennis Bat Set

“Berlin” h Sport-Thieme Table Tennis Bat Set

Consisting of: • 2 Sport-Thieme “Wien” table tennis bats • 6 high quality training balls. 71 110 8473 White balls 71 110 8659 Orange balls

Consisting of: • 2 Sport-Thieme “Berlin” table tennis bats • 6 high quality training balls. 71 110 8486 White balls 71 110 8662 Orange balls

Set Special offer!

Buy now !

Set Special offer!

“Berlin” j Sport-Thieme School and Club Sport

Buy now !

Table Tennis Set

i Sport-Thieme “Rom” School Sport TT Set

Ideal for schools and leisure centres. The set consists of: • 12x Rom table tennis bats with 1.5 mm padding, external pimples, concave handles • 1x ball bucket containing 144 training balls (40 mm) 71 110 8444 White Bucket 71 110 8620 Orange Bucket

This table tennis set contains: • 12 “Berlin” high quality table tennis bats (ITTF approved surface with 1.8 mm foam, inverted pimples), • 1 storage bag for the bats and • 1 bucket with 144x 40 mm training balls. Ideal for centres where table tennis is regularly played. 71 110 8604 White Bucket 71 110 8617 Orange Bucket

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 79

Table Tennis Exclusive To t ® TIMO Patent Table Tennis Table

Patent Table a Timo Tennis Table Conforms to the requirements of EN 14468-1, Class B, meaning Timo patent is ideal for use in school and club sport. High quality gas compressor springs make it easy and quick to set up. People in wheelchairs and children can set up the table themselves. All metal parts are plastic coated, scratch-proof and painted matt black. The strong mobile structure has large wheels for easy transportation

• for handicapped and integrative sport. • ideal for people in wheelchairs • height adjustable • 40 cm leg freedom for people in wheelchairs.

with 2 locking brakes improving its stability. The all-round metal frame and PVC edging offer extra protection against damage. Uneven surfaces can be levelled out with the height adjustable supporting legs. The table is also suitable for playing alone (playback). Includes assembly instructions. Please order at same time: net set. Size when stored: LxWxH: 152.5x82x186 cm. 71 110 2303

Advantages of the TIMO Patent Table Tennis Table: • assembly and dismantling is • stands extremely safely because possible for people in wheelchairs of the lockable brakes • there is a large amount of leg • automatic anti-tip mechanism space for people in wheelchairs • the workmanship is above normal stan• the special frame design makes it easy to dards. All connections between the assemble and dismantle the plates playing surface and the frame have been multiply screwed and also glued

And there's more: Net sets on page 78

Table Tennis Court Playing Area Screen

New With fixed screw-on net sets

Compact b “Berlin Indoor” Table Tennis Table Strong leisure table that complies with EN 14468-1 class C (leisure table, not waterproof). The 19 mm fine plate (green) guarantees optimal ball performance. The compact under frame is quick to set up and dismantle and can be unhinged simply with the bar safety system. With four steerable double wheels. Includes net set and ball and bat holders on sides (without bats or balls) and instructions. Size when stored away: LxWxH: 152.5x69x163 cm. 71 110 3218 Sport-Thieme “Perfect EN” Table Tennis Net Set Suitable for Sport-Thieme table tennis tables: Berlin indoor, Berlin outdoor und Timomatik (EN standard tables). 71 110 4716-1

d Available with

and without print

Trolley c Transport Takes 48 playing area border screens. Assembled size (LxWxH): 275x80x180 cm. 71 110 9506

caps. 200 x 67 cm. Packing weight 3.5 kg. With Sport-Thieme logo 71 110 9115 Each PVC cover is on a steel frame with additional Without Sport-Thieme logo reinforcement at the base. With PVC floor 71 110 9102 Each

Area Border Screen d Playing Competition quality. The dark green

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Exclusive to

t a

e With fixed screw-on net sets

Coma Timomatic® pact SportThieme Table Tennis Table Table tennis for schools and club sport (complies with EN 14468-1 class B). The 19 mm fine bonded playing surface ensures perfect ball spin and makes the table strong and stable. The table is also suitable for training alone in playback. The black under frame made of robust square tubing is plastic coated. Four large swivelling castors ensure comfortable transport and there is a safety bar with an automatic locking device when in play or storage modes. Delivery includes bats and ball holder (bats and balls not included) with net. Size when folded down LxWxH: 152.5 (with net: 184) x72x155 cm. 71 110 3407 Green playing surface 71 110 3436 Blue playing surface

Requires very little storage space

Table Tennis Half Plate Replacement Service Replacement half plates for TIMOMATIC®, TIMOMATIC Super Compact®, TIMO Patent and Berlin indoor. 19 mm multi layer bonded bolster plate with non-glare plastic lacquer coating and all around PVC edging plate halves. Please note: replacement plates may have slight colour differences to the original plate. More replacement prices available upon request. 71 110 2606 Plate Halves

b Sport-Thieme “Special” Table Tennis Table A table tennis table for top level sport and competitions that complies with EN 144681 class A. Multi coated 25 mm fine bolster plate with very good playing characteristics. The advantage of this table is that it can be folded away to save space. With the snap-lock system for fixing the legs to play or store away. Each plate half has two wheels (128 mm) with rubberised surface. Assembled size (LxWxH): 152.5x16.5x142 cm, 103 kg. 71 110 2837

b 25 mm fine bolster plate for competitions

“Roller” Table c Sport-Thieme Tennis Table Table tennis table for top level sport and competitions that complies with EN 144681 class A. Height adjustable table with a 25 mm thick bolster plate. Stable sub construction with moving wheels, 2 of which can be locked. Simple to assemble and dismantle. Assembled size (LxWxH): 152.5x75x185 cm, 111 kg. Without net. 71 110 2824

And there's more: • table tennis balls page 77 • table tennis nets page 78

c Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 81

Table Tennis with Rollomat Table Tennis a Joola® Table

Competition table that complies with EN 14468-1 class A for high level sport, with mobile under frame. Easy to use, strong and stands very stable with automatic folding bases. Steel springs hold in the plate halves when in the “high” position. Approx. 115 kg. Size when in storage position: LxWxH: 152.5x60x187 cm. Without net. 71 110 4309 Green 71 110 4312 Blue

b Joola® “Permanent” Net Set

“Permanent” Net Set b Joola® Stationary net sets specially for the Joola® “Rollomat” and “Olympic” tables. 71 110 4859 All tables on this page are available with blue and green plates.

“World Cup” Table c Joola® Tennis Table A table tennis table for school and club sport. Complies with EN 14468-1 class B. Plate thickness 22 mm, super fast playing area, 50 mm metal profile frame. Each half plate is on 4 castors and therefore particularly good to fold down as the halves push into each other. Very simple to set up and fold away. Approx. 106 kg. Without net. 71 110 2202 Green 71 110 2215 Blue

“Duomat” Table Tennis d Joola® Table An ITTF certified competition table that complies with EN 14468-1 class A for top level competition. The ideal table for clubs with a large youth membership and a lot of intensive training. Each half of the table is mounted on 4 wheels and stored by pushing the tops together. The surface is 22 mm thick and very fast. The metal profile frame comes with a rounded glued-on PVC edge that protects the playing surface. Approx. 126 kg. Size when folded: 135x75x167 cm. Without net. 71 110 2505 Green 71 110 2518 Blue

“Transport” Table e Joola® Tennis Table

Compact storage

A table tennis table for school and club sport that complies with EN 14468-1 class B. Both sides can be moved separately and it can be assembled and dismantled without any great effort. The 19 mm thick plates stand on stable metal sections. Ball bearinged castors make transport easier. Approx. 90 kg. Storage size LxWxH: 153x49x167 cm, without net. 71 110 3306 Green 71 110 3319 Blue

“3000-SC” Table f Joola® Tennis Table

Very little storage space

Super Compact System Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

EN 14468-1 class A / top level sport The Super Compact System can be set up and dismantled very quickly. This table has the well proven JOOLA® competition surface (22 mm). Safer to move around and more stable because of the 4 castors of which 2 have locking brakes and solid hard rubber height adjusters. 115 kg. Can be stored away saving space HxW: 160x56 cm. Without net. 71 110 4325 Green 71 110 4341 Blue

And there's more: Net sets on page 78 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Indoor Table Tennis Tables New

a “Sport 140” a Cornilleau Indoor Table Tennis Table Manufactured to EN 14468-1 class B standard. This means that the table is very suitable for training in school sport. The 19 mm chipboard plate has good playing characteristics and a reinforced frame of 40 mm. The four steerable double castors and the stable folding mechanism guarantee easy transport and that the table is quick to assemble and dismantle. Comes with a permanent screwed-on net, 72 kg. 71 111 0324

New

“Competition 640” b Cornilleau Table Tennis Table, ITTF approved Competition table that complies with EN 14468-1 class A. 22 mm thick chipboard plate with special coating. This means the ball bounce will be perfect and extend the lifespan. The patented folding mechanism, the stable frame and the height adjustment make it easy to set up and dismantle and offer the highest level of safety. An ITTF approved net is included in the order. 110 kg. 71 111 0337

“Privat Roller” c Stiga Table Tennis Table

Complies with EN 14468-1 class B for schools and clubs. The 19 mm playing surface is coated in blue, frame profile A 40x45 mm, preassembled. Semi-automatic frame with square tubular right-angled profile 30x30/50x30 mm, plastic coated. Mobile with 4 wheels, 100 mm per table half, all wheels rotate. 2 wheels per table half can be locked. Storage size LxWxH: 152.5x66.5x154 cm. Assembly instructions, weight 80 kg without net. 71 110 7106

And there's more: Net sets are on page 78

Mini Table Tennis

Strong table

New Just 4 Fun Table

New • Height adjustable: 60, 68 and 76 cm • Quick to assemble and dismantle thanks to the folding mechanism

d Cornilleau

Mini Table Tennis Table

A strong table tennis table for leisure, fun and games. Ideal for small rooms. Quick to assemble and dismantle using the folding mechanism. Blue playing surface: 137x76 cm. Height adjustable: 60, 68 and 76 cm, 34 kg, including net. 71 203 3727-2

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Table Tennis Table Set e Mini Open, place on a table and play away. Fun table with net, bats and two balls. LxWxH: 66x33x9 cm. 71 203 3730

t 83

Outdoor Table Tennis Tables a 540 Cornilleau Outdoor a PRO Table Tennis Table A very robust table tennis table for intensive use in sports clubs. Specially developed for places where the table needs to be dismantled quickly. This makes it ideal for schools, camping grounds, swimming pools and youth clubs. 7 mm thick melamine resin plates, includes metal net. Storage size (LxWxH): 154x75x155 cm, 84 kg. 71 111 0308

Folds Down Quickly

for the Cornilleau table tennis b Cover table Weatherproof cover for PRO 540 Outdoor table tennis tables. No illustration. 71 110 3032

c 510 Cornilleau Outdoor c PRO Table Tennis Table A freestanding table tennis table for intensive use indoors and outdoors. Delivery includes a steel net. 7 mm thick melamine resin plate. Under-frame made from nonrusting steel, 77 kg. 71 111 0311

30 Cornilleau d “Tacteo Outdoor” Table Tennis Bat

Weatherproof bats with new composite material technology developed by the rubber specialists Michelin. The bats were specially developed for learners and intensive use. It is very strong and has a long lifespan, sits well in the hand and is good to play with. Ideal for intensive use in schools, clubs and leisure centres. 71 111 0207-2

“Tecto” Table e Cornilleau Tennis Table

New

Weatherproof leisure table for hobby and garden. The low weight, simple folding mechanism and four double castors mean that children can set this table up. The melamine plate is very stable and has no glare. The table can be played individually in “play back” position. Fixed net included in order, 44 kg. 71 111 0340

t f

• stable design weighing 116 kg • Weatherproof

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Weatherproof f Sport-Thieme Outdoor Tabletennis-Table Complies with EN 14468-1, manufactured class B. This table can be used outside the whole year long. It is scratch and shockproof. With a 10 mm melamine resin playing surface, in green or blue, frame profile 50x20 mm galvanised and plastic coated. Base frame made of galvanised sheet steel tubular profile and is plastic coated, includes 4 mm sheet steel net set. Assembly would take two people approximately one hour. Due to the low weight of individual parts of only 115 kg, the table is ideally suited for use in places that are tricky to access. It is possible to anchor the table into a concrete socket using fishplates found on the bases. 71 110 7207 Green 71 110 7210 Blue Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Outdoor Table Tennis Tables Compact a “Berlin Outdoor” Table Tennis Table Weather proof leisure table that complies with European standard 14468-1 class C (leisure table, weatherfproof). The 5 mm thick blue melamine plate will continue to keep its playing characteristics even when exposed to the sun's rays and rain. The compact underframe with the bar safety system allows children to set it up and dismantle it quickly. Comes with 4 steerable double castors, which means it can be moved without problems on uneven surfaces. The net, ball and bat holders (without contents) and assembly instructions are included. Storage size (LxWxH): 152.5x69x163 cm. 71 110 3221

New

With fixed screw-on net sets

Cover A waterproof cover for the Berlin compact outdoor table. Not illustrated. 71 110 3029

“Match 3.0” Table b Kettler® Tennis Table A weatherproof table tennis table for leisure use. 22 mm aluminium compound plate with non-glare playing surface. Four movable wheels and a folding mechanism ensure that it is quick to set up and dismantle. You can work alone with the plate half in an upright position. This order includes a permanently attachable net set and a bat and ball holder (not filled). Stored size (LxWxH): 62x183x171 cm. TÜV/GS approved, five year guarantee on the aluminium compound plates. 48 kg. 71 110 8705

New

160 cm

b “Match 3.0” Including net

Tennis Table Cover c Table Weatherproof cover for Kettler outdoor

170 cm

ow! der N table tennis tables. High quality strong syn- Or thetic fabric protects against dampness, dust and dirt. 80 cm 71 110 3016

“Champ 3.0” Table d Kettler® Tennis Table A weatherproof table tennis table for high demands in leisure sport. The 22 mm AluTec composite plate has a non-glare playing surface. With 35 mm aluminium tubing frame, four steerable double wheels with rubberised rolling surface and a folding system with guide making it fast to set up and dismantle. It is possible to train by yourself by tilting one plate up. A permanently attached height adjustable net set and bat and ball holder (not filled) are included. Stored size: (LxWxH): 68x183x165 cm. TÜV/GS, five year guarantee on all Alu-Tec composite plates. 71 110 3191

New

d “Champ 3.0” Including net

“Champ 5.0” Table e Kettler® Tennis Table This is the top model in the Kettler table tennis series. A weatherproof outdoor table tennis table that will meet the highest demands. Very good playing characteristics as it has 22 mm thick non-glare alutec compound plates. Stable under-construction and four steerable double castors with rubberised rolling surface and height leveller. It is possible to train by yourself by tilting one plate up. A permanently attached height adjustable net set and bat and ball holder (not filled) are included. Stored size: (LxWxH): 68x183x165 cm. TÜV/GS, five year guarantee on all Alu-Tec composite plates. 78 kg. 71 110 3175

New

e “Champ 5.0” Including net

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 85

Concrete Table Tennis Tables Suitable for self assembly

Acrylic Concrete b “Standard” Table Tennis Table

a Replacement Parts for ab Table Tennis Table Plate Halves Made of 30 mm thick acrylic concrete for TT table (ill. no. 1 & 2). 71 152 0109 Base Frame for Table Tennis Table (illustration no. a). 71 151 9509 Base frame for TT Table (illustration no. 2) 71 152 0301

a Colours available for concrete table tennis table ab

RAL Blue 5002

RAL Green 6002

“Profi” Acrylic Concrete Table Tennis Table

This is a particularly attractive table tennis table as it is stable and the under-structure is made from solid acrylic concrete. The components of the frame are connected by a patented interlocking system making assembly simple. Locking pins that point inwards ensure great stability. This practical design is not only very stable but also improves the appearance of any outside recreational area. The table playing surface is the same as “Standard” (30 mm) but “Profi” at 480 kg is considerably heavier. Nevertheless the heaviest individual part is only 120 kg. Net set not included. 71 110 3700 Green 71 110 3713 Blue

New

c Weatherproof • weatherproof • aluminium

g 86

Includes net set

Tennis Metal c Table Net Set

Concrete Table d Dywidag Tennis Table

This net set is weatherproof and particularly stable. The specially reinforced net edges are what makes this set stand out. The perforated steel net is galvanised and painted matt green. Complete with fixing material, suitable for our concrete tables. LxH: 152.5x12 cm. 71 110 6608

An extremely stable table tennis table as it has been made in one piece. Comes complete, ready to play, 6 cm thick plate made from a grey-green concrete mortar, under frame of smooth exposed concrete with weatherproof, grey protective coating. Very stable as it weighs 750 kg. The table is chamfered with an aluminium edging. Delivery includes a strong aluminium net set. LxWxH: 274x152x76 cm. 71 111 0005

Table Tennis Net g Aluminium Made of aluminium for outdoor concrete tables. Suitable for our outdoor tables. 4 mm thick material. LxH: 152.5x12 cm. 71 110 6800 Aluminium Table Tennis Net Set (8 mm) Made from 8 mm thick aluminium. Suitable for our concrete outdoor table tennis tables. LxH: 152.5x12 cm. Not illustrated. 71 110 6813

This economical acrylic concrete table will impress you with its suitability for use outdoors. The playing surface is 30 mm thick and is made from pure acrylic resin. It is scratchproof and resistant to frost, heat and UV rays. The non-porous surface means that the bounce of the ball is precise. The surround tubing is made from rigid shockproof PVC and provides perfect protection against breakage on the edges. Simple to assemble: There are no foundations required thanks to the hot dip galvanised and height adjustable metal under structure. The ground should be even and solid. Three adults will be enough to assemble the table as the heaviest individual part is only 120 kg. Net not included. Total weight approx. 300 kg. 71 110 3609 Green 71 110 3612 Blue

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

30 Cornilleau Oute “Tacteo door” Table Tennis Bat A weatherproof bat with very good playing characteristics. Developed using new technology from composite material by Michelin. Ideal as a school and club bat. 71 111 0207-1

Table Tennis Bat f Outdoor Ideal for outdoor use in schools, swimming pools and at festivals. The plastic bat is strong and weatherproof. 71 110 6334 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Hot Smashes at any Time of the Year Luxe” Concrete Table a “De Tennis Table The table tennis table for the most demanding situations. The acrylic playing surface of this very stable table is 45 mm thick. It is anti-glare and non-porous which ensures perfect playing conditions and makes the playing surface even more scratchproof and resistant to weather influences. The solid construction from special concrete ensures that the table stands very stable. The table weighs approx. 700 kg (short legs) or 750 kg (long legs). As the heaviest part of the table weighs only 180 kg and can therefore be assembled manually by 4 adults without lifting equipment. It is simple to assemble the table plates, which are screwed into the base frame giving the table great stability. An aluminium edge all around the table protects the playing surface perfectly from damage and the rounded off edges make it safe and prevent injury. Net fittings are not included. The table tennis tables with long legs are concreted into foundations. Green Table with short legs 71 110 4006 Table with long legs 71 110 4019 Blue Table with short legs 71 110 4022 Table with long legs 71 110 4035

Table Tennis Tables All table tennis table with corners comply in size with international regulations (LxWxH): 274x152.5x76 cm.

• 5 year durability guarantee on material Excluding damage arising from vandalism

• plate thickness 45 mm • rounded edges

Acrylic Concrete b “Quattro” Table Tennis Table The “Quattro” round table offers more players great fun and combines this great idea with the well loved “normal” concrete table for outdoor use. The playing area will not scratch. The allround PVC section protects you from injury and the edges from damage. The table plates are screwed to the base frame, which is made from solid acrylic concrete to form a stable unit. Special materials make this table tennis table with its 30mm thick plates totally resistant to frost and other weather influences. The diameter is 240 cm. Assembly is very easy. The heaviest individual part of the table weighs 150kg and approx. 415 kg in total. 71 110 3508 Green 71 110 3511 Blue

New

c “Champion” Table Tennis Table

This table tennis table is made of acrylic concrete with rounded edges. The special feature of this top class table tennis table are the rounded edges, that make it safer. The 30 mm thick playing surface is made from acrylic resin and is nonscratch and absolutely weatherproof. The components of the frame are connected by a patented interlocking system making assembly simple. This means that the table is suitable for self assembly. Although the “Champion” weighs 480 kg, the heaviest individual part only weighs 120 kg. This practical design is not only very stable but also improves the appearance of any outside recreational area. 4mm aluminium net included. 71 110 3726 Green 71 110 3739 Blue

Replacement Parts for a Table Tennis Half Plates Made from acrylic concrete (45 mm) for table tennis tables 71 110 4006 and 71 110 4019. 71 152 0200 Base Frame For table tennis table 71 110 4006. 71 152 0402 Base Frame For table tennis table 71 110 4019. 71 152 0415

Replacement Parts for b Base Frame For round table tennis table 71 110 3508. 71 151 9701 Replacement Set for Crossed Net Fittings For round table tennis tables 71 110 3508. 71 152 0604 Table Tennis Half Plates For round table tennis tables 71 110 3508 and 71 110 3511. 71 151 9600

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

• made from acrylic concrete • with rounded corners • available in green or blue

t 87

Ready For Take Off Long Jump Take Off Boards Take-Off Boards a Multi-Jump for Long Jump and Triple

Jump

A flexible take off area for individual adjusting

b Training board, wooden, multi bonded

c Competition board, wooden, multi bonded

Weatherproof take-off boards made from innovative UV stable PE plastic. Multi Jump will fit in existing mountings. The standing board has great grip and is suitable for sports shoes and spikes. The contact board can be exchanged for competition boards with plasticine. Characteristics: • weatherproof • grippy surface for sports shoes and spikes • no need to varnish, no bevelling, no cracking off • fits in existing troughs • DLV approved and certified • IAAF E-060463 certificate 122x34x10 cm, 19 kg. 71 123 5526

Off Board b Take For long jump. Made from wood, var-

nished white, multi-bonded, 122x20 cm, 10 cm thick. 71 123 5409

Plastic board Weatherproof

Off Board c Take For long jump, wooden, 122x34 cm, 10 cm thick, with insert. 71 123 5412

Off Board d Take For long jump. Made from white

New

plastic, weatherproof, take off surface made of strong plywood, replaceable, 122x34 cm, 10 cm thick, with insert. 71 123 6806

Accessories

f g

10mm

7mm

45° 17mm

i Aluminium

Take Off f Replacement Surfaces Made of resistant plywood, 122x20x1.5 cm, for the plastic take off board e. 71 123 6907 Plasticine Complies with new IAAF 2006 regulations and DLV (German athletics association) guidelines. Made from micro wax and therefore does not dry out. Set consists of 12x 20.5 cm strips, angled at 45°. This set will be sufficient for 2 take off boards or a double in-lay board. 71 123 6620

Inlay Strips For training. Pine wood, resistant to dampness, 122x10x1.5 cm. Not illustrated. 71 123 7001 Boards h Inlay Competition Design. Plywood, bonded waterproof, 22 mm thick. Fluted 10x7 mm on both sides for plasticine. Complies with the latest IAAF and DLV guidelines. LxW 122x10 cm. 71 123 7014

Frame i Base For fixing the take off board. Insertion of such a base frame enables the take off board to be easily removed and stored in the equipment room. Aluminium angular metal frame, length 123cm, for 34 cm wide boards. 71 123 7102 Replacement Insert For the Multi Jump take off boards 71 123 5539

UniBlock Competition” e “Getra Take Off Board Getra UniBlock Competiton is unique worldwide as the only take off board that is made completely from extra hard, fully pressed rubber with a white surface coating of spikeproof structured EPDM (caoutchouc rubber). The result is an optimal take off effect for jumpers. The pressing procedure undergone during manufacture means that all weak points are avoided. There are no swelling, freezing up, weathering or warping. A top quality product, 'Made in Germany'. UniBlock Competition: • easy on the budget • durable and economical • maintenance free • winterproof and waterproof • suitable for all fitted troughs • fully recycleable • comes with black inlay strips Perfect for competition, club and school sports and as basic infrastructure for all sports centres. Recommended by top trainers. Approx. 30 kg. 122x34x10 cm. 71 123 5542

j Set of Take Off Boards With this set of take off boards, you are always ready to do the long jump. The specially selected equipment has proven itself over many years. Consists of: • 1 take off board d • 1 replacement board surface f • 1 base frame i 71 124 9109 Plastic boards weatherproof

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Starting … Co-ordination Ladder a Agility The coordination ladder is used in athletics to make running more effective. You can do different basic exercises with this product. It is particularly good at developing rhythm for youths. For better runners it improves the ability to adjust step length for improved stride flexibility and frequency. Width: approx. 40 cm, extra flat bars that are adjustable to different distances from each other. Ground anchor included for fixing the ladder down in sports fields and a suction cup for hall floors. The coordination ladder comes in a practical storage and transport bag. 71 137 3921-2 8 m 71 137 3934-2 4 m

e c Indoor Starting Block This starting block with its nonslip underside, with an antiglide cover, gives each starter a firm base. The base plate slopes forward to prevent tripping. The base plate is approx. 65 cm long, 28 cm wide and has quickly and easily adjustable starting blocks. Absolutely essential for indoor racing. 71 125 0406

Indoor Starting BlockX®

An indoor starting block made from PE foam with anti slip film to ensure a problem-free start in halls. Suitable for plastic or parquet floors. Specially developed for children's athletics, these blocks will allow the child to practise starts without problems. Different block lengths available: 35 / 25x15x8 cm. 71 125 0510 Pair

g from Slopin

Starting Blocks d Aluminium Aluminium blocks coated with Regupol, can be easily adjusted using the two bolts with wing nuts. The rails have additional guide grooves so the blocks sit perfectly, as well as marks for width adjustment. Complete with 2 galvanised ground anchors. 71 125 0507

Anchor e Ground Galvanised, suitable for all starting

Replacement Block For starting blocks 71 125 0507, made from aluminium, coated with Regupol. Not illustrated. 71 125 0002 not illustrated

tening equipment enables the above starting blocks to be fixed to synthetic tracks. The fastening equipment is simply screwed under the start rail. 71 125 0103

• Good sound • visible from a long distance • secured against unauthorised clapping

Starting Block g “Super” With specially developed short ser-

blocks and should be ordered at the same time. 71 125 0204 Price for 3

Including blocks

“Super” Starting

rated edge for synthetic tracks suitable for Block competition at the highest levels. Adjustable angle on aluminium blocks with • with strong aluminium rails tartan covering which prevents the feet • IAAF certificate from slipping. The 3 ground anchors supplied ensure that the “super” starting block E-02-0340 is easy to fix safely to the cinder track. 71 125 0305

Each Each

Starting Block i Reivo® This starting block does everything

long distance, ensures accurate timing of all races, essential for all clubs and schools. 71 130 2400

• non-slip • sloping

Block Fasteners with Spikes f Starting Made from galvanised steel. This fas-

Replacement Block For starting blocks 71 125 0305. 71 125 0015 Right 71 125 0028 Left

Clapboard h Starting Good audibility and visible from a

Aluminium Starting Blocks

mm 10-20

without needing adjustments. Can be used immediately on synthetic or cinder tracks. L: 70, W: 33 cm. • Patented 3 block solution • Always ready for both left or right footed starters • Stride length can be adjusted at any length • Starting pads are covered with Regupol • With 3 ground anchors • Starting block fixing with appropriate spikes 71 125 0103, please order separately 71 123 5119

Reivo® Vario Starting Block

Price Tip

Buy now !

• always ready for right and left footers • adjustable stride length.

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 89

High Jump and Pole Vault Accessories ZACHARIAS High Jump Crossbars inflatable high jump lath

And there's more: • Multi Games Posts from Sport-Thieme page 63 • Reivo® Bands are page 98

High Jump a Zacharias Crossbar You have never been able to jump so high without fear. The multiple German champion Thomas Zacharias has developed this crossbar. It is a safe and uncomplicated device, which is ideally suited to meet the beginner's needs. It consists of a foil tube

with an elastic suspension cord. It makes teaching and training easier. It almost never falls down, which saves valuable time. Training is easy and fun as the fear of injury is removed. Training will never be the same without it. Indoor for halls 71 124 1118

Windproof, inflatable, for outdoors. Stopper holds air in. 71 124 1121

Tips from Thomas Zacharias Easily the best senior high jumper in the world, world record holder at 1.98 m. The Fosbury flop and soft landing mats have turned high jumping into a popular sport. This is because success is immediate: you jump over or you knock the bar. If you train with a replacement for a crossbar (e.g. magic cable or Zacharias crossbar) to begin with, you don't need to worry about any injuries or failures that slow down the learning process. Later on multiple crossbar supports help to save time and keep the group together despite varying standards My top tips: • practice your run up and take off first and pass over the bar using the “scissors method” with bent knees • standing flop (from the box is best) only from the side position and not backwards, to learn the proper movement and landing • only “flop” over the crossbar when you have mastered the first 4 elements.

High Jump Mat

High Jump Mats

Art.-Nr. 71 125 1106 71 125 1207 71 125 1308 71 125 1119 71 125 1210 71 125 1311 71 125 1122 71 125 1223 71 125 1324 71 125 1135 71 125 1236 71 125 1337 71 125 1148 71 125 1249 71 125 1340 71 125 1151 71 125 1252 71 125 1353

Maße 400x250x50 cm 400x250x50 cm 400x250x50 cm 400x300x50 cm 400x300x50 cm 400x300x50 cm 500x300x50 cm 500x300x50 cm 500x300x50 cm 500x400x50 cm 500x400x50 cm 500x400x50 cm 600x300x50 cm 600x300x50 cm 600x300x50 cm (DLV approved sizes) 600x400x50 cm 600x400x50 cm 600x400x50 cm

1) 2) “Super” Versand- “Standard” Type Rain Cover type gewicht 375 kg 375 kg 375 kg 450 kg 450 kg 450 kg 563 kg 563 kg 563 kg 750 kg 750 kg 750 kg 675 kg 675 kg 675 kg

900 kg 900 kg 900 kg

Pole Vault Mat

c Art.-Nr. 71 125 2907 71 125 3001 71 125 3102 71 125 2910 71 125 3014 71 125 3115 71 125 2923 71 125 3027 71 125 3128

IAAF designs available on request

Extra Price for Corner Recesses

Foam core High jump mats are delivered without corner recesses. If the mat is longer than 5 m, we recommend ordering due to the shorter high jump bar length. Please order separately. Recesses 75x45 cm. 71 125 1164

All high jump and pole vault mats can be made to your colour requirements. Combinations from the colour scheme are also possible. If no colour is given we will deliver the colours in the photographs.

Pole Vault Mats Maße 400x530x80 cm 400x530x80 cm 400x530x80 cm 500x530x80 cm 500x530x80 cm 500x530x80 cm 500x670x80 cm 500x670x80 cm 500x670x80 cm (DLV approved sizes)

1) 2) “Super” “Super” “Standard” Type Rain cover type Type 360 kg 360 kg 360 kg 440 kg 440 kg 440 kg 550 kg 550 kg 550 kg

IAAF designs available on request

“Standard” High Jump System

Consisting of individual foam blocks RG 17/25 (mono, without hollow chamber system) and a spike-proof mat and cover. The cover is made out of reinforced polyester fabric with a top layer made of spike proof trellis weave material. The bottom side is made of a non-slip (spike proof) gymnastics mat material. With ventilation holes on three sides and zip.

Made from hollow foam blocks RG17/25 and a protective mat. The cover is made from reinforced polyester material. The bottom side is made of non-slip gymnastic mat material. The top has a spike proof mesh and a zip for replacement. Ventilation holes and carrying loops are provided all round and the zip is covered.

“Super” High Jump System

Advice and ordering

CFC free

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Tel. +49 53 57-181543 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

High Jump – t ® Sets the Bar High! Fibreglass reinforced plastic a Crossbar 4 m bright yellow

4,5 m bright yellow

b Crossbar Pads

Sport-Thieme® Competition High Jump Cross Bars For the high jump and pole vaulting. Unbreakable, tested, ideal for competition and training, consists of one polyester tube with double fibreglass reinforcement, the ends of the crossbar have a support with rounded edges. The diameter of our cross-

bars conforms to DLV regulations and they have proven themselves in many German national and international events. These crossbars come with a 2 year guarantee against breakage.

d f

c Ropes for High Jump

a High Jump Competition Cross Bars

an outer diameter of 30.45 mm. The ends are placed on the high jump bar 71 123 9906 Each

With pressure plate: Attractively priced crossbar for schools and training. Made from plastic and reinforced with fibreglass. Bright yellow As illustration a. 71 124 0506 4 m 71 124 0607 4.5 m

Pads b Crossbar Two foam tubes, each 1m long, suitable for all high jump crossbars reduces the risk of injury. The pad is placed on the high jump bar. 71 124 1408

c Made from woven cord approx. 5 m Ropes for High Jump

long with weight bags and “signal flag”. 71 124 1105

Slider f Screw With pressure plate, protects the aluminium post from damage. Inner size 45x42 mm for 40x40 mm posts. 71 123 8509

Each

Slider g Screw with diversion bracket. The crossbar is diverted and does not fall on the high jump mat. This helps avoid accidents and extends the working life of your crossbar. Screw slider 45x42 mm, with pressure plate for protecting the aluminium posts. Suitable for 40x40 mm posts. 71 123 8512 Pair

Crossbar Lengths:

And there's more: Original Zacharias crossbars on page 90

• High jump 400 cm long • Pole vault 450 cm long

High Jump Stands e Practical Light alloy stand with recessed measuring tape, which can be read easily. Complete with screw slides and scale for accurate adjustment of the crossbar. With non-slip rubber cushioning on the underside of the stable T base and safety device to prevent the T base falling unintentionally. 71 123 8206 2 m Pair 71 123 8219 2.5 m Pair

protects the aluminium post from damage.

High Jump Crossbar

Post section 40mm

Support End Piece d “Blauend” Made from plastic, for crossbars with

40mm

A heavy lath tube made of triple reinforced fibreglass. Pullwinded 30/50 mm tube, extremely strong and a great contrast to the background. Complies to IAAF standards. 71 124 0359 4 m bright yellow 71 124 0304 4.5 m bright yellow

Replacement Parts Measuring Tape (self adhesive) 35mm wide, for 1 pair of high jump stands up to 250 cm. 71 151 6106 Aluminum Posts With inserted measuring tape. 71 123 8004 2.0 m long 71 123 8017 2.50 m long

Measuring tape protected on the inside

Sport-Thieme Lath Holder

Pair

Each Each

Adjustable in nine different ways

Bands ..for high jump, page 98

High Jump Sets

Section of post 45x45 mm inner

DBGM

h Sport-Thieme Lath Holder

High Jump Set 1 With this set you have absolutely everything you will need for high jump training and competition. Excellent quality at an attractive price. Consisting of: • 1 pair of 2.5 m high jump stands e • 2 fibreglass reinforced plastic crossbars a • 1 Zacharias crossbar pg. 90 a 71 123 7900

High Jump Set 2 Set consisting of: • 1 pair of 2 m high jump stands e • 1 apir of screw sliders with diversion brackets g • 2 fibreglass reinforced plastic crossbars a • 1 Zacharias crossbar pg. 90 a 71 123 7913

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

With diversion bracket and viewing window DBGM approved Height adjustable using handle. The new viewing window can be read at all heights. There is a spacing of 5 cm along the lath holder. The additional diversion bracket stops the crossbar falling on the athlete's landing surface, thus avoiding painful contact with the crossbar and increasing the lifespan of the crossbar. 71 123 9805-1 Pair

t 91

Pole Vault and Throwing Training Tips for Pole Selection A pole is defined by two characteristics: its length and its hardness, e.g. 430/70. Here, the pole is 4.30 m long and the second number means that the pole is intended for a vaulter with a body weight of 70 kg. Only a vaulter with a very good technique and a grip height of 4.30 m will push this pole to its limit. The grip height also plays a decisive role: the lower one grips, the harder the pole becomes.

Fibreglass Pole Vaults 310 cm

430 cm

Fibreglass Pole Vault d “Lancet” ø 21mm. This bar is specially designed for beginners. Length: 310 cm/up to 30 kg 71 123 3719-0 Length: 310 cm/up to 35 kg 71 123 3719-1 Length: 310 cm/up to 40 kg 71 123 3719-2 Length: 310 cm/up to 45 kg 71 123 3719-3

d Transparent

c a

Competition Pole Vault Stand

Oval sides, crossbar made more stable by the triangular design, can be taken apart to save space. Height can be adjusted from 2.10 - 6.50 m using a handcrank at eye level, plastic coated steel base frame with 4 free running plastic rollers and locking device, including double guide rails made from galvanised steel, centimetre scale for precise horizontal adjustment (80 cm in the jumping direction, 40 cm in the opposite direction). IAAF certificate. 71 123 3302

And there's more: • Magnesium page 198 • Pole vaulting sets and mats page 90

Replacement Stoppers For 310 cm long and ø 21mm Lancet pole vaults. 71 123 7708

e “Lancet” Competition Fibreglass Pole Vaults

Anchoring galley

b Insertion Socket for Pole Vaulting

Made from fibreglass-reinforced plastic, complies with DLV and IAAF regulations. Additionally equipped with an angular rim to hold the protective cover. With 10 mm outflow hole to prevent water lodging. For outdoor units with anchoring galleys. 71 123 3416 Each

With Lancet End Stoppers

German made fibreglass plastic with SK band, ø 33 mm. Well tested and proven. Each bar is pre-bent to a programmed level. 71 123 3706-0 430 cm/up to 62 kg 71 123 3706-1 430 cm/63-67 kg 71 123 3706-2 430 cm/70-73 kg 71 123 3706-3 430 cm/75-80 kg Replacement Stoppers For the 430cm long and ø 33mm Lancet pole vaults 71 123 7711

Covering Plate c Fibreglass 71 123 3429

Throwing Training

f i g

• New design • Record throw: over 90 m! • High level of accuracy with throws • 3 howling sounds

f “Pegaline 2000” Practice Javelin

g The flying siren… you can hear it as

DBGM The fun and safe way of learning and training javelin technique. The stabilising wings ensure that the javelin flies well. Its shape makes it popular with children and students - everyone wants a use it. Made from plastic, length 100 cm, weight approx. 220 g. 71 185 4103

it is thrown as three howling sounds are created by this action. The steering plume ensures perfect spiral rotation. The special notches mean you can hold it well and the super fast turns and aerodynamic design make it very accurate. Suitable for children from 5 years up, 35x16x9 cm, 240 g. 71 133 4803-1

Throwing Bar i Rubber For throwing training, 300g, 29cm long in grey. 71 124 8207-1

Nerf Vortex Mega Howler

Balls j Nock Suitable for indoor javelin training. 71 124 8702-1 600 g 71 124 8715-1 800 g

h Rings Air filled in blue and red. 71 135 3802-2 Blue 71 135 3815-2 Red

And there's more: Each Each

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

• Throwing balls are on page 18 • Spaceball on page 288 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Top Quality Javelins from t Training Javelins Mark II” a “Aerotrainer Apollo Training Javelin

Competition Javelins

The ideal javelin for training and practice, made of aluminium, for beginners and advanced throwers alike. 71 124 8308 400 g, blue Each 71 124 8337 500 g, bright blue Each 71 124 8324 600 g, green Each 71 124 8340 700 g, yellow Each 71 124 8311 800 g, orange Each

“Super b Sport-Thieme Training” Training Javelin “Super Training” Javelin from Sport-Thieme is a durable and very well balanced aluminium training javelin that complies to IAAF regulations. The body is made from multihardened aluminium alloy with a steel tip and snugly fitting handles. This javelin has excellent characteristics and energy transmission values. It is ideal for beginners, clubs, schools and all sports ground. Recommended by the leading trainers. 71 124 6357 400 g 71 124 6360 500 g 71 124 6373 600 g 71 124 6386 700 g 71 124 6399 800 g

Javelin Size Table Which javelin for whom?

Mens: 30-45 Y. + A youths

Weight for approval for competitions including cord handle minimum 800 g Manufacturer's information: Tolerance for delivering 805 competition equipment 825 g Total javelin length minimum 2,600 mm maximum 2,700 mm Length of the metal head minimum 250 mm maximum 330 mm

These javelins are specially developed for the different throwing lengths and have the best flight characteristics for the defined range. Excellent aerodynamics, a high quality aluminium javelin. 600 g, red, up to throwing distance of 55 m 71 124 8614 Each 800 g, turquoise, up to throwing distance of 70 m 71 124 8601 Each

Apollo Competition e “Aeroflo” Javelin Made of aluminium to the high quality that has been recognised for years. 71 124 7305 400 g, blue Each 71 124 7334 500 g, bright blue Each 71 124 7321 600 g, green Each 71 124 7347 700 g, yellow Each 71 124 7318 800 g, orange Each

Mens: 50-55 Y. + B youths

Women: 30-45 Y. A+B-youths 14 Y. M+W 15/14 Men: 60-65 Y.

Men: 70-75 Y. Women: 50-55 Y.

velins Training Ja

These competition javelins are designed for maximum flight even if the athlete's technique is not yet perfected. This is a forgiving javelin. This javelin is made with special attention paid to durability and long-term use. The body is made from multi-hardened special alloy with steel tips and snugly fitting handle. The centre of gravity has been carefully selected to allow great flight and an excellent transmission of energy values for throws. This is the ideal basis for competitions for clubs, schools and sports grounds. Recommended by top trainers. 71 124 7158 400 g 71 124 7161 500 g 71 124 7174 600 g 71 124 7187 700 g 71 124 7190 800 g

n Javelins Competitio

Apollo High Performd “Laser” ance Javelin

Sport-Thieme “Competition” Javelin

c d New New

Men: 80 Y. + Women: 60 Y. + A+B youths: M=W 13/12

700 g

600 g

500 g

400 g

705 725 g

605 625 g

505 525 g

405 425 g

2,300 mm 2,400 mm

2,200 mm 2,300 mm

2,000 mm 2,100 mm

1,850 mm 1,950 mm

250 mm 330 mm

220 mm 270 mm

200 mm 250 mm

Distance between the tip of the metal head and the centre of gravity minimum maximum

900 mm 1,060 mm

860 mm 1,000 mm

800 mm 920 mm

780 mm 880 mm

750 mm 800 mm

Shaft diameter at the thickest point minimum maximum

25 mm 30 mm

23 mm 28 mm

20 mm 25 mm

20 mm 24 mm

20 mm 23 mm

Cord handle width minimum 150 mm 135 mm 140 mm 150 mm 130 mm maximum 160 mm 145 mm 150 mm 160 mm 140 mm Circumference of cord handle should not increase the diameter of the shaft by more than 8 mm

All competition javelins offered by us correspond with the latest weight class regulations from the IAAF

The javelins come in strong cartons which can be used later to transport the javelins safely to competition.

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 93

Lively Talents! “Steh-auf” Self Adjusting Hurdles

• • • • • • • • • •

5 year warranty tensioning springs for re-setting adjustable return rate (slow/fast) 100% vertical adjustment very clean, exact, solid workmanship height adjustable from 76-106 cm can be used on both sides guaranteed to be safe to set up alone padding indestructible bending joint mechanism

a “Steh-auf” Self-Adjusting Hurdles

Can be set up on both sides

The ideal school and training hurdle for inside and outside. At last, no fear of accidents and no time wasted standing them back up. • Stand themselves back up from both sides. • This enables a very high training frequency. • The hurdles can be jumped in both directions. • Padded crossbars ensure that no injuries are caused. • Rapid adjustment to all competition heights. 76 - 106 cm. • Hurdling information on the bases. • Bases can be removed for easy transportation and storage. 71 123 4901-0

e – g self adjusting

Easy to learn the hurdle technique with the original Zacharias hurdle

Hurdles b Zacharias Helps hurdle training enormously, as the well known problems of fear and danger of injury are forgotten. They are specially developed for use by beginners but are also good for training high level sportspeople because they have no sharp edges. Training can therefore be carried out without any risks. The product is also good for jumping training, as a height aid for the high jump or as part of circuit training.

g Plastic coated, stable tubular steel, 2.8 kg, non-staged adjustment, smooth joints, foam cushioned. Height adjustments 8-107 cm, 112 cm wide. 71 123 4507 (joint) c Adjuster Two joints for one Zacharias hurdle 71 151 6904

f e

Folding

Pair

d Hurdle Transport Cart For approx. 40 hurdles (depending upon type), easy to load and unload. Load from the rear, ideal space saving alternative for storage and transportation of all hurdles. Robust tubular steel design, bolster plate steering, drawbar for manual use or towing, large pneumatic wheels. LxWxH: 335x119x50 cm. 71 131 1408

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Mini Training e “Return” Hurdle This new hurdle will stand up again when knocked down saving time going around putting hurdles up again. It is a perfect training instrument with many variations. Stable, light aluminium construction with folding in feet. Height adjustable from 40-60 cm in 5x 5 cm stages, width 81 cm. 1.6 kg. 71 124 3114

Midi Training f “Return” Hurdle Height adjustable from 55-84 cm. Seven heights: 55-70 cm in 5cm stages, 76, 80, 84 cm, width 83 cm. 2.2 kg. 71 124 3101

Maxi Training g “Return” Hurdle Height adjustable from 66-106 cm. Seven heights: 66, 71, 76, 84, 81, 100 and 106 cm, width 88 cm. 2.6 kg. 71 124 3127 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

…Get Over Every Hurdle! Training Hurdles for Children

Hurdles b Professional made from Aluminium The “international” model is a weather-resistant and completely maintenance-free hurdle with coloured wooden crossbars. The competition design is very adjustable: from 762 mm to 1067 mm using the simple spring catches on the stands. Counterweights ensure the bending mechanism is correct. With IAAF certification. 71 123 4709

Aluminium/steel tubing competition hurdles

Replacement Crossbar Unbored, can be used on all hurdles. 120x7 cm, 12 mm thick. 71 124 3000

Hurdles c Competition With its aluminium/tubular steel

Aluminium Professional Competition Hurdles

design, our attractively priced competition hurdle is also IAAF certified. 71 123 4800

Indoor and Training Hurdles

Hurdle a Children's Made from PE foam. As it is so soft, this hurdle will remove children's fear of hurting themselves. Height adjustable at 19, 38 and 50 cm. Width 70 cm. Can also be used as an obstacle on an obstacle or “steeplechase” course. Can be used indoors and outdoors. 71 123 4666

e and Training Hurdles e Indoor Adjustable to competition heights. Equipped with rubber protectors, without weights. 71 123 4608

Mini Hurdles Set

Training Hurdles for Outdoor Use

Outdoor Training Hurdles

Steel tubing, adjustable at six levels via a pin that fits into holes in the stand. 71 123 4611

New

Training Hurdles f Outdoor Steel tubing, adjustable at six levels

• removes fear • reduced risk of injury

via a pin that fits into holes in the stand. The crossbar is replaced with a Vario Elastic Band (80% polyester, 20% elasthane), that stretches from 60-120 cm. Fluorescent colours, very easy to see. This product will remove the fear of the crossbar and reduce injuries. 71 123 4682

Hurdles Set d Mini Expand your training program with this set of six complete hurdles. The best way to combine play and training. 71 144 6106 Pack of 6

Large Building Block g BlockX The multi functional block for you motor ability training obstacle course. Adjustable for use by small children right up to adults, for school and club sport, this block will ensure training and practising can be carried out without fear or injuries. Can be used as: • an obstacle • a throwing target • a hand implement • a building brick • a swimming board • a slalom track • a hurdle • a toy • gymnastics equipment Block size 50x15x9 cm, made from high quality PE foam with holes bored in it.

BlockX Basic Set Set of 20 blocks (basic set) containing 5 blocks in each of the following colours: red, green, yellow and blue. 71 186 5501 Set of 20

BlockX Set Consisting of: • 20 large blocks • 40 connection plugs • 10 hurdle bases 71 186 5530

Set

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 95

Hammer, Discus, Shot Put Protective Caging For training and competition

a e

d b • In ground sockets • Hanging height 5m rising to 5.5m

For sets with an internal net height 7 m on the side pieces 10 m in accordance with DLV Regulations: Price available on request.

a Protective Cage For hammer and discus Complies with DLV regulations. It has 2 adjustable vents. Can be adjusted from 5 to 5.5 m. Aluminium posts, 80x80x3 mm. The upper area is made from

aluminium. Connecting poles, net suspension hooks and extra strong ground sockets with covers are included in delivery. This cage should be inserted 500 mm deep into the ground. Without net. 71 123 9111

Stop for Shot Put b Shot For use indoors and outdoors. The shot stop makes learning and training, effective and can be quickly used anywhere. This shot stop is made from special rubber granulate, it is spike-proof, weather-proof and non-slip. Two boreholes also mean that it can be anchored to the ground. L: approx. 100 cm. Comes without markings. 71 123 7229

Hammer c Throwing For training and competition, made from cast iron with swivel head and wire, standard handle. Throwing hammers are supplied in a dismantled state. 71 123 8639 3.00 kg 71 123 8642 4.00 kg 71 123 8600 5.00 kg 71 123 8655 6.00 kg 71 123 8626 7.25 kg Replacement Parts for Throwing Hammer Essential for competition d 71 123 8903 Cable, 98 cm e 71 123 8916 Handle

l l

m f Free standing

Important notice:

f Protective Cage Free-Standing, suitable for competition With stable base frame. This protective cage can be assembled

anywhere, as no ground sockets are required. Without net, otherwise as design a. 71 123 9124

j • in ground sockets • height of unit 4.5 m

g Protective Cage For Discus The height of the cage is 4.50 m throughout. The supports are made of strong rectangular 80x80mm aluminium sections with welded on brackets. The net is suspended from solid connecting poles. The well thought through connecting and fastening system ensures problem-free assembly. Delivery, in natural aluminium sheeting, includes connecting poles, net

The protective nets must be removed immediately after use to prevent storm damage.

Accessories for protective cage for hammer and discus: Element for Pull h Fixing Up Protective Nets For problem-free assembly and dismantling of hammer and discus protection nets. The upper edge on both upper vertical sides have a ø 12 mm edge rope added. The upper edge is worked into the area of the boom thimble, which has the corresponding pull rope to pull the net high. This fixing element fits all hammer and discus protective nets. A fixing element is required for outer and inner nets. 71 123 9153

k Galvanised Throwing Circle Throwing circle for discus, ø 2.50 m. To be cemented into the ground, with welded longitudinal and diagonal braces for easier installation and greater measuring accuracy. Installation costs are reduced. Height 70 mm, international version. 71 124 0014

l Galvanised Throwing Circle Throwing circle for shot put and hammer, ø 2.13 m. To be cemented into the ground, with welded longitudinal and diagonal braces for easier installation and greater measuring accuracy, which means that installation costs are reduced. Height 70 mm, international version. 71 124 0001

m Take Off Board fixing hooks, extra strong ground sockets with protective covers - to be inserted 500 mm deep. Without net or net weights. Protective caging without side swivelling section. 71 123 9108 Protective Net for Hammer and Discus Outside net, 5 mm reinforced polypropylene, for the above system, height 4.5m, 21m long. 71 123 9137

Net i Protective For protective cages 71 123 9111 and 71 123 9124, 4 mm polypropylene, height rises from 5m to 5.5m. 25 m long. 71 123 9140 Weight Sack j Net Made from 100% white polyester weave. Without filling. 71 123 9166

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

for Shot Put (complies with IAAF E-08-0536 regulation). Plastic, weather-proof. 71 123 7216 Fixing Set For shot put boards above. 5 brass dowels with M 10x30 machine screws. No illustration. 71 123 7232

And there's more: Reivo® Markings on page 99 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Shot Put, Discus and Relay Batons Polished

Calibrated

Shot Puts a Training Made from cast iron, ideal for schools and training (also for youth competitions). Each weight is a different colour. 71 124 5211 3.00 kg, white, ø 95 mm 71 124 5224 4.00 kg, black, ø 102 mm 71 124 5237 5.00 kg, red, ø 109 mm 71 124 5266 6.00 kg, blue, ø 119 mm 71 124 5240 7.26 kg, yellow, ø 126 mm

a c

d • Plastic

Rubber

Ideal for training, schools and competition • 100% calibrated

• For indoor use

f Throwing Stones

Calibrated Shot b Competition Shot Puts d Plastic Puts Do not bounce, suitable for indoor Made from cast iron. Each weight in a different colour. 71 123 6109 3.00 kg, white, ø 95 mm 71 123 6112 4.00 kg, black, ø 102 mm 71 123 6125 5.00 kg, red, ø 111 mm 71 123 6154 6.00 kg, blue, ø 119 mm 71 123 6141 7.26 kg, yellow, ø 126 mm

use. All shot puts are black. Filled with scrap iron. 71 123 5311 2.00 kg, ø 99 mm 71 123 5324 3.00 kg, ø 112 mm 71 123 5337 4.00 kg, ø 112 mm 71 123 5340 5.00 kg, ø 128 mm 71 123 5379 6.00 kg, ø 140 mm 71 123 5366 7.26 kg, ø 140 mm

Shot Puts c WV Made from rubber, suitable for halls

Stones Performance Shot Puts f Throwing e High Calibrated, made from cast iron, painted Calibrated, made from cast iron, each

and sports grounds. Filled with scrap iron, does not bounce. 71 124 4609 2.50 kg, blue, ø 105 mm 71 124 4612 3.00 kg, blue, ø 105 mm 71 124 4625 4.00 kg, red, ø 115 mm 71 124 4638 5.00 kg, red, ø 140 mm 71 124 4667 6.00 kg, red, ø 140 mm 71 124 4654 7.26 kg, red, ø 140 mm

weight in a different colour, polished, 100% round. 71 124 5804 3.00 kg, ø 97 mm 71 124 5817 4.00 kg, ø 102 mm 71 124 5820 5.00 kg, ø 110 mm 71 124 5859 6.00 kg, ø 115 mm 71 124 5846 7.26 kg, ø 125 mm

h Nock balls

black, comply with DRKV competition rules. 71 124 6719 10 kg 71 124 6706 15 kg

g Throwing Bar

Throwing Bar g Rubber For throwing training, 300 g, 29 cm

Balls h Nock Ideal for indoor javelin training.

long, grey, rubber. 71 124 8207

71 124 8702 600 g 71 124 8715 800 g

Particularly durable and strong For Senior Citizens:

Certificate j IAAF number E-04-0399

n Low risk of damage

Relay Batons Made of light alloy, in different colours. For juniors, ø 30 cm, length 299 mm 71 124 8904 Each For senior citizens, ø 38 mm, length 299 mm 71 124 8917 Each

Discus l Competition Complies with DLV and IAAF regula-

i j

Discus k AIndoor newly developed sports item, ideal for school sport! DBGM approved Specially developed for use indoors, particularly suitable for psychomotor exercises for catching and throwing as well as for developing technique in children's athletics. The outer rubber ring ensures children's safety when holding it and also protects

tions, made from plywood, with calibrating screw and metal ring. Extremely durable and robust. Turns slowly. 71 124 4146 0.75 kg 71 124 4104 1.00 kg 71 124 4117 1.50 kg 71 124 4120 1.75 kg 71 124 4133 2.00 kg

lations. Good rotation and flight characteristics at all distances. 71 124 3606 0.75 kg 71 124 3619 1.00 kg 71 124 3622 1.50 kg 71 124 3635 1.75 kg 71 124 3648 2.00 kg

Training Discus n Rubber Attractively priced. Does not bounce

with metal ring and calibrating screw, complies with DLV and IAAF regu-

and therefore causes no damage to the hall floor. Ideal for training. 71 124 3202 1.00 kg 71 124 3215 1.50 kg 71 124 3228 1.75 kg 71 124 3231 2.00 kg

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 97

Ideal for children's athletics against injuries and damage. ø 17 cm weighs only 350 g. 71 124 3244

Discus m Competition Made from special resistant plastic

Vario Elastic Bands Some of the many uses:

New c

• net replacement in games • removes fear when learning and practising swimming, gymnastics, skiing and athletics etc. • marking out field with goals • training band for developing strength, speed and endurance • ideal for use in rehabilitation • optimal way of marking boundaries e.g. closing off sections • towing in walking, trekking and swimming

Running, jumping, playing

• over 180 uses in schools, clubs and leisure • looped connection for joining any number of bands • all bands now have extra long locking loops

Reel

Large Reel

In water

Now Even Better!

10 advantages to you:

Doing gymnastics

• Quick and simple to attach to stands, goal posts, around the hips, arm, legs! • 100% stretchable! • The velcro system offers you a rigid hold! • Very easy to see luminous colours (red, yellow, red) • Very safe! No metal or hard plastic on the band • Simple to attach and release many bands (also without ends) without knots! • Every distance can be bridged (e.g. lengthways along a large gymnastics hall) • Waterproof, washable and light fast • Ideal as a replacement net for all games, also for use in the water! • An ideal training band for athletics, swimming and rehabilitation!

Gymnastics with the Mini Band

Playing & exercising

Reivo® Bands

Handicapped sport

• 80% polyester and 20% elasthane • 100% stretchable • Quick to assemble thanks to the practical quick fasteners Article No.

Description

Length

71 143 7876 71 143 7818 71 143 7805 71 143 7821 71 143 7834 71 143 7850

Reivo® Midi Band Reivo® Short Band Reivo® Ski Band Reivo® Long Band Reivo® Plus Band Reivo® Super Band

2m 4m 4m 8m 13 m 23 m

Stretches to Approx.

Approx. Loop Length Including Reel

4m 8m 8m 16 m 26 m 46 m

45 cm 60 cm 70 cm 60 cm 60 cm 60 cm

• • • • •

As a goal marker

Adjustable c Reivo® Stomach Belt Resistance Belt b Reivo® Elastic Reivo® Band, 4 m long, with extra large Velcro loops. The long Velcro fastenings are very reliable for strength and speed training. 71 210 1301-1 Each

This belt can be attached to all Reivo® bands quickly and easily. Very comfortable to wear as you can adjust it to suit your needs from approx. 75 - 145 cm. 100% polypropylene, includes adjusting buckle and quick fastener, belt width 5 cm. 71 143 7889

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Ground Markings Ground Markings a Reivo® For pre-schools, schools and clubs. Simply lay and… ready! The proven and indispensable aid with many uses • as a methodical aid to learning and practising techniques and tactics • as an organisation and orientation aid (e.g. circuit training) • new markings are quickly understood and easily changed again • no tripping when walking on marking as they are non-slip and hard wearing. The markings are made with a special rubber powder. The material is extremely durable and non-slip. Numbers from 1-7 and foot symbols (3 right/3 left) for sticking on discs give an additional optical aid. Discs, blue ø 24.5 cm 71 218 5907-1 Each Discs, red ø 24.5 cm 71 218 5907-2 Each Discs, green ø 24.5 cm 71 218 5907-3 Each Discs, yellow ø 24.5 cm 71 218 5907-4 Each Line, blue 71 218 5923-1 Each Line, red 71 218 5923-2 Each Arrow, blue 71 218 5936-1 Each Arrow, red 71 218 5936-2 Each Corner, blue 71 218 5949-1 Each Corner, red 71 218 5949-2 Each

• special rubber granulate • extremely strong

Price Tip

Top Rated

Buy now !

www.sport-thieme.com

7 cm

35,5 cm 35 cm

16 cm ø 24,5 cm

Thigh length 27,5 cm

ø 40 cm

Reivo® Floor Markings Set Save money with the economical set offer

Set Buy now !

Floor Marking Set 1 Consisting of: • 6 red, 6 blue discs • 10 red, 10 blue lines • 4 red corners, 4 blue corners

Lines

Floor Marking Set II The set consists of: • 2 x blue, red, green and yellow discs, ø 24.5 cm • 1 x blue, red, green and yellow, discs ø 40 cm • 20 x blue and red lines • 6 x blue and red corners • 4 x blue and red hands • 4 x blue and red feet

71 144 4807

Consisting of: • 10 red and 10 blue lines • 2 red and 2 blue corners for marking playing area (without glue). 71 144 4836

Set of 24

ø 40 cm discs The set consists of one red, blue, green and yellow disc.

Ground Markings New shapes but the same reliable quality. 71 218 5952-1 Hand, blue Each 71 218 5952-2 Hand, red Each 71 218 5965-1 Foot, blue Each 71 218 5965-2 Foot, red Each

• non-slip • no risk of stumbling

Set of 40 71 144 5246 71 218 6001

Set

Set of 80

Hands and Feet

Reivo® Ground Markings “Discs ø 40 cm” These large discs are made from non-slip rubber granulate and offer many ways to mark out places for pre-schools, schools and clubs. 71 218 5910-1 Disc, blue Each 71 218 5910-2 Disc, red Each 71 218 5910-3 Disc, green Each 71 218 5910-4 Disc, yellow Each

Consisting of: • 10 red and blue hands • 10 red and blue feet 71 144 4865

Marking Discs

Arrows

Set

The set consists of 10 arrows in red and blue.

The set consists of 2 blue, red, yellow and green discs ø 24.5cm.

71 144 5086

71 144 4881

Set of 20

Set of 8

Some uses for Reivo® Ground Markings: Example: Playing tactics on court

Example: Swimming Diving discs

Example: Basketball moves

Example: Slalom hockey

Example: Step guide for passing

Example: Distance markings for jumping areas

Example: Hand positioning for cartwheel

Example: Gymnastics

Example: Vaulting

Example: Playing field markings

Example: Start markings

Example: Run up to Fosbury Flop (high jump)

Example: Gymnastics

Example: Volleyball tactics

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 99

Effective Coordination Training.... Coordination Equipment

Football

forwards /backwards left / right

Bola Balance Board a Rola Changes in balance start the board

f b

rolling and need to be counteracted. The movement in linear. Even the smallest dysbalance requires a quick and measured counter movement. Movement becomes more certain and posture is trained. Plate 60x35 cm with rubber buffers and ø 12 cm solid timber roll. Supports up to 100 kg. 71 134 7917-1

Rocking Board b Pedalo® Ideal for all balancing exercises on two legs and with partners. More challenging when used with the tipping foot boards 71 128 7602-1 e.g. in top level sport by the German ski jumping team. LxWxH: 60x35x10 cm. Will support up to 150 kg. 71 128 5811-1

This Holz-Hoerz coordination training product allows you to train you whole body effectively. You will experience new impetus to move and improve your: • balance • strength • speed • mobility • execution of movement • sequences of movement Reaction times are reduced, the postural system is stabilised and body strength is applied efficiently. The body learns to use only the muscles need for the desired movement.

• develops balance and reactions • aids concentration and alertness • optimises movement sequences and technique • improves the ability to react to and process stimuli • trains the whole postural system

Rotation

Rotating Rocking Board

d Rodeosell® DBGM approved. Thanks to the spe-

The rotation of the standing plates require quick, arbitrary counter reactions from the body and train a sense of orientation in space. Even the slightest changes in balance make the board rock and rotate forcing the user to compensate with the finest of corrective actions. The difficulty level can be changed with the locking plates. Plate 60x35 cm. 71 128 7703-1

cial slope on Rodeosell® you can develop your own momentum and get moving. Level 1: Who can stand still on Rodeosell® Level 2: Who can turn round completely and stand still afterwards? Develops a sense of orientation is space and therefore suitable for all team games. ø 55 cm, height 22 cm, supports up to 100 kg. 71 211 7007-1

Trimm Top e Pedalo® The sport top for optimal positioning of the foot when feet are hip width apart. Very good control of strength distribution in the feet. Equal rolling characteristic when under weight, mobilises the ankle. Natural wooden plates ø 55cm with a solid wooden half ball. Height: 8cm, will support up to 120 kg. 71 215 0710-1

Foot Board f Tipping Makes spring boards, rocking boards, rotating rocking boards and Rola Bola more difficult. The Tipping Foot Board consists of two boards on top of each other. They move in different directions independently of each other. Presents a real challenge for motor control as both feet need to work independently of each other. 35x12x10 cm. 71 128 7602-1 Each

b k 100 t

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Mat g Anti-Slip Improves stability when training in shoes. Suitable for all training products with 60 cm wide wooden plates. 50x30 cm. 71 128 7501 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

... for all Types of Sport

Handball

Moving Pedalo® h Wawago® The ankle is always activated by tilting the standing board, as it changes all the time when moving. The calf muscles and Achilles’ tendon are stretched. This makes training with Wawago ideal for all types of sport where the calf muscles become shortened from jumping (e.g. handball). Suitable for people up to 100 kgs, approx. 40x40x22 cm. 71 128 8201-1

Pedasan

i Shoes normally support the postural system of our feet and the muscles and ligaments are passive. Training in bare feet on the Pedesan will strengthen foot arches and the reflex zones on the soles of the feet will be optimally activated. This stimulates the metabolism and mobilises and strengthens the ankles. Width 37 cm, ø 22 cm. Will support up to 100 kg. 71 129 6408-1

Sport j Pedalo® A classic product for training balance, stability in standing, reaction, body posture and controlling strength input. LxWxH: 38x22x22 cm. Supports up to 120 kg. 71 129 6307-1

3-Dimensional m m Stabiliser The whole body training aid for Round Springboard k Pedalo® Reacts immediately to changes in

Pedalo® Springboard l Large Ideal for one to two leg exercises.

weight e.g. catching balls and really challenges the sense of balance. If you place two boards beside each other and weigh each down with one leg the training will reflect natural movement and increase the training effect. ø 32 cm. 71 128 5202-2 40 - 70 kg Each 71 128 5215-2 70 - 90 kg Each

Improves ability to stand and jump. When combined with the tipping foot boards 71 128 7602-1 used for skiing and ski jump training and simulates the descent shock. LxWxH: 60x35x20 cm. Tipping foot board not included. 71 128 4209-1 40 - 70 kg 71 128 4212-1 70 - 90 kg

improving sensory control of balance and movement. Even the slightest dysbalance or instability of the movement system are reflected by this three dimensional standing platform. Reactions and the whole postural system improve. Top level sports people use this stabiliser for optimising their sequences of movement and reducing reaction times. Standing platform: 60x35 cm. Will support up to 150 kg. Tipping board not included. 71 214 1406-1

Reflextraining

f k

m l

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Volleyball

b f

t 101

Teaching and Information Boards · Accessories Teaching and Information Aids

Presentation Products

Height adjustable from 122-196 cm

Ideal for use with chalk

Folders b Tactics A handy size, for short tactics sessions on the side

Including coloured magnetic player symbols Teaching Boards a Sports Can be rolled out and are magnetic. Well proven in use by teachers, players and officials for game plans and tactics. This board hangs and can written on with normal school chalk. The unprinted part of the board can be used for making notes etc. Comes with colourful player symbols. Size 105x95 m. 71 144 1534 Volleyball 71 144 1518 Handball 71 144 1505 Football

of the field or as a teaching folder for courses. Magnetic board 28 x 18.5 cm including playing notepad, pen and magnets. 71 221 9107 Football 71 221 9110 Handball 71 221 9123 Basketball 71 221 9136 Volleyball Set of Replacement Magnets for Tactics Folders 71 143 9713 27 pieces Replacement Magnets Parts for magnetic teaching boards. Round coloured magnets with plastic caps consisting of: 12 play symbols for each team in red and yellow (no 1-12), 3 referee magnets and a ball symbol. Magnet size ø 24 mm, total: 28 in set. 71 143 9700 28 pieces

Flip f Functional Chart A stable four legged aluminium tubing frame prevents tipping over when unbalanced. The table is made from plastic coated steel sheeting, 70x100 cm, magnetic, includes pen holder. The table is height adjustable from 122-196 cm. It can be used sitting down at the lowest level e.g. for handicapped people or children. Horizontal singly pushed in jotter holder that suits all jotter sizes. Covering cap that doubles as a tearing edge for paper. 71 206 7618

Set of Flip Chart Jotters Universal jotters, suitable for all flip charts. Holes for portrait and landscape formats, 25 mm grid, 80 g paper, 65x98 cm. 5 jotters of 20 pages. 71 206 7621 Set of 5

Magnetic Tactics Board Set c “Universal” These tactics folders are exactly the thing for quick instructions at the sideline. This board set contains 9 playing fields/courts on tear resistant magnetic, washable film sheets for football, handball, basketball, volleyball, badminton, ice hockey, rugby, American football, tennis as well as a blank white board. Playing field size: 30x19 cm, including a film marker and 26 player symbols. 71 144 0443

• non-tear paper • includes special pen • ideal for schools

Board g Writing The surface is magnetic and can be wiped clean with a dry cloth. Silver anodised aluminium frame, complete with pen holder and attaching material. 71 197 2711 60x90 cm 71 197 2724 90x120 cm 71 197 2737 100x150 cm

New

Football

Tactics e Topo Board

Tactics Boards d Magnetic With a strong aluminium frame and corner reinforcement, two hanging eyelets, special magnetic coating for writing, can be wiped dry, including magnets for 2 teams, 2 pens and dry cleaning felt. 45x30 cm 71 143 8622 Football 71 143 8648 Handball 90x60 cm 71 143 8635 Football 71 143 8651 Handball

102 t

The correct tactic can often be the difference between winning and losing. Therefore the trainer must not only find the answer to the opposition's tactics but must also be able to get his own ideas over to his players quickly and clearly. The tactics boards are therefore an indispensable aid. Tactics boards are made from strong plastic with a complete playing field printed on the front and an enlarged half playing field on the reverse. Includes washable board markers. Size 26 x 41 cm. 71 144 0401 Basketball 71 144 0427 Handball 71 144 0430 Unihockey

Flip Chart h Pocket Writing pads and stands are integrated and assembled with very little effort, The high quality packaging means that the pocket flip chart can be taken anywhere, This is the ideal solution for teaching, seminars, lectures, presentations but also as a training aid. Contains 3x 20 sheets in one pack, with grid/blank, sheets are perforated for easy removal, 78x58 cm. 71 218 2201

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Saturn Ring and Training Aids Individual parts for training aids: Stand Base ø 20 cm, height 11 cm. 71 143 7401 Rotating Hinge Fitting 71 143 7414 Holder and Crossbar 150cm long 71 143 7427

d Sport-Thieme Training Aids

b c c

Hung loosely:

The Sport-Thieme Training Aids

Tightly secured:

Training aid for all types of sport! A combining system that offers endless variations with a minimum number of components for pre-schools, schools, general sport up to high performance training. A bar, a base and hinge are the basic elements, that can be assembled in any shape you wish. All parts are made from supple plastic and the weight of the base guarantees high stability. The hinge joint can be moved to any height on the 158 cm long bar. The horizontal bar can be fixed firmly into the hinge or can simply rest on it. The hinge can be turned 360 degrees into any position. One training kit consists of: 2 bases with 2 holding bars, 2 joint holders with 1 cross bar. 71 143 7212

d c

Training Aid Set This set can be used in many ways and motivates because creativity is introduced to practising and training. The set consists of 5 complete training aids. 71 143 7209 Set of 5

See also: “Agility” Coordination Ladder on page 53

a The Sport-Thieme Saturn Ring

Mini Hurdles Set

The versatile play and training aid!

• Suitable for all cones • Ideal for health and speed training

Hurdles Set e Mini Expand your training program with this set of 6 complete hurdles. The best way to combine play and training. 71 144 6106-1 Pack of 6

… as a training aid

And there's more: • Marking cones on page 115 • Gymnastics bars on page 230 • Bean bags on page 264

Saturn Ring Set I

f Sport-Thieme Saturn Ring Saturn Ring Set II

Saturn Ring Set I

Saturn Ring Set II

Consisting of: • 12 Saturn Rings • 12 marking cones 38 cm high • 12 gym bars 100 cm long 71 130 0518

Consisting of: • 6 Saturn Rings • 6 Marking cones, 50 cm high • 6 Gymnastics bars, 100 cm long 71 130 0521

..as a playing aid

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Versatile fun and training aid; perfect for use inside and outside!Patent 19820022 This sports and fun aid will captivate young and old, big and small with its almost endless combinations. Do you want to train and play with new combinations and using your own ideas? With Saturn Ring this is no problem: You simply place the Saturn Rings on the floor or position them on the cones, quickly add the gymnastics bar and hey presto, your ready. Use Saturn Rings for practising agility, skills and speed with the obstacles of your choice at different heights. Great fun. 71 130 0505

t 103

Prevention and Aftercare …

Price Tip

Comprehensive range of high quality tape including tape cutter and instructions

Buy now !

Tape Case a Sport-Thieme The case contains a wide range of high quality tape. It is well organised so you just need to take a quick look and take what you need. This makes it easier to plan stocks. Contents: • 1 tape cutter, • 1 set of instructions, • 5 rolls of under bandages, • 5 rolls: 2.5 cm wide tape, • 10 rolls: 3.8 cm wide, • 2 rolls: 5 cm wide, • 1 can of taping glue. 71 142 6234

Tape b MSuitable for stabilising joints (foot, hand, knee, finger). Very adhesive, high tensile strength but easy to tear. Roll length 10 m, 3.8 cm wide. 71 142 6221 3 rolls 71 142 6205 6 rolls 71 142 6263 30 rolls

M Tape 71 142 6276 2.5 cm wide 71 142 6289 5 cm wide

6 rolls 6 rolls

Under Bandage c Tape Foam under-bandage to protect the skin from the tape. Roll 7 cm wide, 27.4 cm long. 71 142 6407

12 rolls

i j

e Quick aid with long lasting cold

Cold Compresses d Immediate For quick cold treatment of knocks, swelling, pulls and strains. By simply activating the compress you get a one-off 30 minutes of cold at (-4 °C). Not re-usable. 4x16 cm. 71 142 5404 Price for 3

Gel Cushion e Cool Reusable cold compress. Simply chill in the fridge before use, quickly and comfortably relieves pain with long lasting coolness. Size: 13x14 cm. 71 142 3903 Pair

k Igloo Drink Coni “Legend” tainer

Bag f Ice These ice bags can be filled with ice

For cold and warm drinks (max. 60 °C). Balanced valve in the cover for easier opening. Holds contents cold for approx. 12 hours, height: 35 cm, ø approx. 26 cm, holds 7.6 litres. 71 142 2157

cubes, lumps of ice or cold water. The folding design means the bag will fit all body shapes. Height approx. 23 cm. Holds approx. 1 litre of water. 71 142 5417

Treatment Ice Box j Large Complete with contents for immediate

New Compress with g Cold/Warm Velcro Strip (Set) Easy to attach to the body, very soft. This set contains 2 gel packs and a washable nylon cover with Velcro fastening. Simply place in the fridge or freezer for a cold compress or in the microwave or hot water for a warm compress. Approx. 28x15 cm. 71 198 1908

104 t

Bottle Holder with Six Drinking Bottles Holder h Bottle Including 6 silver “Top” bottles holding 0.75 litres, for non-carbonated sports drinks or iced water. The cover has a sealable drink opening. PE, handles can sink down. Made from shockproof plastic. 71 218 3406

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

cold treatment. Cool gel pads with cover and three immediate compresses including instructions for use. An additional plastic shell for transporting more bandages. Capacity: 15.2 litres, WxHxD: 41x26x38 cm. 71 142 1705 empty 71 142 2001 filled

Box k Ice With information set for immediate use on the playing field. It holds ice and drinks and keeps them cool for up to 10 hours. Capacity: 6.6 litres, approx. 30x21x31 cm. 71 142 2102 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

… with the Sports Chemist Sport-Thieme a First Aid Products: Fitness and First Aid Case A complete programme for school and clubs. The products offered by us have been developed and produced under the control of sports doctors. Accident prevention regulations require adequate first aid stocks to be kept and that these stocks should be replenished in plenty of time. Please check your stocks in good time!

New

The high quality proven aluminium case for mobile use in schools and clubs. The special stacking system means that the compartments can be changed to suit your needs. LxWxH: ca. 45x32x14 cm. Contents: • 1 x 400 ml cool spray • 1 x 200 ml massage oil • 3 “Sofort” cold compresses • 1 Active Sportgel 150 ml • 1 sticking bandage • 3 rolls of Tape, 3.80 cm • 1 DIN 13160 first aid top up 71 217 8817 empty 71 217 8804 filled Refill Set for Fitness & First Aid Case 71 142 1864

New

Spray b Cooling CFC free. Application: bruises and sprains are sprayed several times from approx. 10-15 cm. Has a cooling and deodorising effect. Contents: 400 ml. 71 142 3714

Shoulder Bag g Sanitary Made from black bovine leather with

Massage Oil c Relax For care for and relaxing muscles after participating in sport. Excellent for all therapeutic massage purposes. High quality components e.g. soya oil, arnica extract and vitamin E, all ideal for lasting regeneration of the muscles and skin. 200ml. 71 142 3727

Balm e Warm For rubbing on the skin, muscles and joints. Relaxes the muscles and helps mobility. Ideal for preventing pulled muscles, seizing and hardening in the muscles. 50 ml tube. 71 142 5228

Sports Gel d Active Refreshing and enlivening thanks to f the essential oils and valuable medicinal plants and herbs. Prevents premature tiredness in sport and work. PH neutral economical. For targeted use. 150 ml tube. 71 142 3730

Sticking Bandage

Elastic, breathable and self adhesive bandage for protecting and fixing bandages. Waterproof, skin-friendly and nonslip. For ball sports, gymnastics and athletics. 7.5 cm wide, 4 m long when stretched, blue. 71 142 4919

adjustable shoulder strap, handle and adjustable inner divider. Contents comply with DIN 13 160 with new expanded contents: additional Sirius life saving blanket, diagnostic torch, Red Cross hanging cards (in German) and first aid clothes scissors. 225x185x75 mm. 71 198 2057 First Aid Top Up Pack (Not illustrated), for sanitary satchel and case - DIN standard 13160. 71 142 3020

h “Scout” First Aid Pack With high quality dressings in sizes suitable for preschools and filled with treatment material for the most common types of accidents children and young people have. Made from soft, supple, waterproof nylon with a double-sided zip, belt loops, carrying handle and adjustable shoulder belt. 29x21x7.5 cm. 71 142 2724 Top Up Pack for “Scout” “Scout” First Aid Bag 71 142 3017

New 3M Senior First Aid j “Senior” Case First Aid Case i “Junior” A high quality aluminium case with first aid contents aimed to meet the needs of juniors. Contents: • one large and small cold and one large and small warm compress, • one prepared cold compress, • 1 roll of tape in 2.5 and 3.8cm, • 1 Coban bandage, • 1 disinfectant spray,

• 1 cool spray, • 2 packs of plasters, • 10 wound bandages, • 1 pack of blister plasters • disposable gloves. LxWxH: 37.5x30.5x12 cm. 71 142 4834 Refill Set for Junior First Aid Case 71 142 4847

Robust case with reinforced aluminium frame. Equipped, with sports medicine in mind, with the help of physiotherapists from the German football league. Contents: • 2x cold/warm comfort compresses, • 2x mini cold/warm compresses, • 20x family plasters, • 12x fixing plasters (sensitive), • 5x Microdon M ready bandages, • 5x Microdon L ready bandages, • 1x 2.5 cm tape,

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

• 2x 3.8 cm tapes, • 2x coheban bandages, • 15x protective strips, • 5x maxi protect strips, • 12x steri-strips, • cool spray • cool gel • disposable gloves. Case size (LxWxD): 48x36x15 cm. 71 142 4805 Complete Refill Set for Senior Sports Case 71 142 4818 Complete

t 105

Measuring and Monitoring a Sigma “PC 3” Very simple heart rate monitoring for those starting their training. Functions: heart rate display, time, stop watch. Chest strap and bicycle holder included. 71 200 0044

“PC 15” c Sigma Heart Rate

“PC 9” b Sigma Heart Rate

Monitor

The sports heart rate monitor for exact control, planning and evaluation of training. Chest strap included. 71 200 0060

Heart rate monitor for sports people with defined training targets. Includes chest strap and bicycle holder. 71 200 0057

“Onyx Easy” f Sigma Heart Rate Monitor

Our tip:

Sigma “Onyx Balance” Heart Rate Monitor

Easy to use. Centred on the most important functions with a slim design for active women. Easy to read because of the large character display and using a flexible decorative ring instead of buttons. 71 208 9140

A digitally coded heart rate monitor for general use and leisure sports people. Simple to use and equipped with the basic functions making it suitable for everyone who wants to train in a healthy and targeted manner. 71 208 9111

e Sigma “Onyx Classic” Heart Rate Monitor The classic for youths and the young at heart. With very easily read display with large characters and easy to use because of a flexible decorative ring instead of buttons. 71 208 9153

“Onyx Fit” g Sigma Heart Rate

i Oregon Scientific “SE300”

Monitor A digitally coded heart rate monitor for fitness sports people. Easy to use and equipped with the functions relevant for training. 71 208 9124

A heart rate monitor with speed and distance features. • Enter the desired speed and distance and calculates time to reach target • Works independently of satellite signals • Digitally coded radio transmission from the chest strap • Acoustic alarm or vibration alarm once the heart rate training zones have been crossed • Calculates calories used and percentage fat burned • Training programme with warm-up and cool-down timer • saves 3 different training profiles • Stopwatch saves 66 laps • Time of day, date, alarm, background lighting • Water resistance for up to 50 m 71 146 1187

h Sigma “Onyx Pro” Heart Rate Monitor Digitally coded heart rate monitor with pre-programmed individually adjustable stamina and interval training programmes. Ideal for all professional and ambitious sports people. Detailed evaluation of training. 71 208 9137

Comfortex Textile j Sigma Chest Strap Very comfortable to wear and perfect sit • ECG exact • digitally coded • you can change that batteries yourself • waterproof • compatible with all ONYX models 71 208 9182

New

Logger Heart Rate Recording Device k Data Will save the heart rate data on standard analogue and digital chest straps (Polar, Sigma, Oregon Scientific). This small device can be carried on the belt and will store up to 30 hours data. Delivery also includes evaluation software and a USB cable. Chest strap not included. 71 209 2704

106 t

Function Overview Model Illustration Heart rate Time Stopwatch Date Countdown Total training time Adjustable h.r. target zones Target zone alarm Time training in target zone Maximum heart rate Average heart rate Lap counter Calorie counter Fitness test Training data saved Training manager Digitally coded radio transmission Stamina training programme Interval programme Other Training Battery change Light Art. No.

PC 3 a • • •

PC 9 b • • • •

PC 15 c • • • •

• • • •

•

• • • • • • 50 •

•

• •

•

Onyx Classic Onyx Balance Onyx Easy Onyx Fit e d f g • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

•

1 •

1 • •

1 • • • • 71 200 0044 71 200 0057 71 200 0060 71 208 9153

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

• 50 • • 7 • • 1

Onyx Pro h • • • • • • • • • • • 50 •

7 • • 4 3 1 1 3 3 • • • • • • • • 71 208 9140 71 208 9111 71 208 9124 71 208 9137

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

More running computers and heart rate monitors on www.sport-thieme.com

Heart Rate Monitors Our tip:

“FS1” Heart Rate Mona Polar itor For those new to training and participating in sport for rehabilitation Simple to use coded watch. 71 146 3242 Each

New

“FS2c” Heart Rate b Polar Monitor For fitness beginners Simple to use with an extra large display of training data. 71 146 3213

“FS3c” Heart Rate c Polar Monitor

“F4” d Polar For fitness level sports people.

For fitness beginners Automatic adjustment of zones based on age or manually input upper and lower limits. Comes with an alarm that can be switched off. 71 146 3239 Each

A sporty design. Display and visual description of current training heart rate via heart symbol. Displays calorie usage. Recallable training units and total data. 71 146 0634 Each

New

F7 Grey e Polar You train your way with the F7. It looks splendid and motivates you to train. The unique OwnZone® function will tell your personal training target zones for the best results based on your current form. 71 146 2005 Each

Accessories Transmitter Set i Polar T31 chest strap transmitter for Polar heart rate monitors. Also ideal for Polar compatible heart rate monitors. 71 146 1259 uncoded 71 218 2706 Coded Polar Elastic Chest Strap For Polar T31 and T61 chest strap transmitters. 35% polyester, 35% elasthane, 30% polyurethane. 71 146 1262 USB 2.0-IRDA j Polar Adapter Infra red interface for transferring training information in two directions: downloading to a PC and uploading to the receiver. For Polar RS400 - S610i - S625x. 71 146 1855

Weark Polar Link™ with coded transmitter To guarantee you the best in training comfort Polar invented the WearLink+ . It not only measures your heart rate but also adjusts to your body and movements. The transmitter set is made of an elastic textile belt with electrodes and a transmitter. The new side opening mechanism makes it even easier to open and close. 71 146 2106

“RS100” Heart Rate f Polar Monitor

FT40 g Polar The FT40 will help you to reach your

The basic model for runners with OwnZone® Function. Coded heart rate monitoring. Displays and saver 99 laps and intermediate times. Countdown timer. Including WearLink™. 71 146 1884 Each

own training targets and understand your body better which will lead you very simply through your training. It determines the correct training intensity so you can enjoy training and improve your general fitness. 71 146 2018 Each

FT60 h Polar You will always receive up to date targets adjusted to your personal training habits. This will help you remain motivated and improve your fitness more. The STAR training programme will provide you with weekly targets, feedback and instruction to make your training more efficient and effective. 71 146 2021 Each

Function Overview FS1/FS1c FS2c FS3c F4 F7 RS100 FT40 FT60 Model a b c d e f g h Illustration Time • • • • • • • • Display lighting • • • • • • • Stopwatch • • • • • • • • Suitable for swimming yes yes yes yes yes yes yes yes Date with week day and alarm • • • • • • • Polar STAR Training programme • Polar OwnIndex® Fitness Test • • EnergyPointer • OwnZone® • • • Simple Calorie counter • OwnCal® • • • • OwnCode® -/• • • • • • • • WearLink+ textile transmitter • • • • Recallable training data 1 1 1 1 12 1 50 50 Weekly training summary 12 16 16 Total values • • • • ECG exact heart rate monitoring (from F4 up also as % of max hr) • • • • • • • • Manually adjustable heart rate target zones • • • • • • • • Automatically sets target zones based on age formula • • • • • • Graphical display of target zones • • • • • • Target zone with acoustic and optical alarm • • • • • • • • HeartTouch: receiver works without touching but• • • • • • • • tons • • • Art. No. 71 146 3200 ff. 71 146 3213 71 146 3239 71 146 0634 71 146 2005 71 146 1884 71 146 2018 71 146 2021

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 107

Heart Rate Monitors and Step Counters

The Polar entry level model Trac” Sports Radar a “Speed Ideal for additional speed evaluation! Who has the fastest tennis serve, at what speed is the runner running, who has the strongest goal shot? With this product, speeds can be determined in seconds and are clearly displayed. It is an extremely reliable product and is very simple to use. Suitable for many sports. It is most useful to check and control success in learning, increasing motivation during training. It is also a great idea for special events, fetes, anniversary celebrations or street festivals. Make goal shots or other sports competitions great fun for both young and old. Guaranteed to keep their attention. Product characteristics: • light yet strong frame LxWxH: 16.5x17.8x5.8 cm • simple to use • bright, 3 digit LED display visible from a long distance • battery powered (6x 1.5 volt batteries) • stand with 3 different adjusting levels • automatic shut off function after approx. 5 minutes thus saving batteries • wide angle detection (40° wide and 60° high) for oncoming balls • speed display up to 199 km/h 71 146 1132-1 Mains Adapter for Speed Trac for 230 V mains. 71 146 1145-1

See also: More heart rate monitors on page 106-107

New

Get fit and active

“FS1” Heart Rate Monitor b Polar For those new to training and participating in sport for rehabilitation. The extra large display and ease of use you will see improvement immediately. With extra large display and ECG exact heart rate and training time. Manually adjustable training zones with alarm. 71 146 3200 uncoded 71 146 3242 Coded

FA20 c Polar Daily movement can have a positive affect on your health. The innovative and easy to use Polar FA20 shows you as how your movement affects your fitness. The FA20 will lead you to a fitter and more active lifestyle without complications. • calories used • distance • training date • 24/7 activity processing • active time • active trends (compares nine weeks) • training targets: calories or distance • training effect: health or Fitness • date, weekday, time (12/24 h, with alarm) • low battery warning signal • white 71 146 2047 Each

Pedometer d Sport-Thieme Counts up to 99,999 steps. Attach the pedometer to

Price Tip

Buy now !

the band of your trousers or belt and off you go. The pendulum method measures data. Displays: • kilometres /miles • calories used (kcal) 71 206 0907

Counter with Panic Alarm g Step Step counter with panic alarm and LED lights. Displays distance covered, calories used, daily targets (steps, calories, distance). Clock with weekday, alarm and timer and background lighting. Simple to attach via a belt clip. 71 146 1129

New With docking station Folding frame with attaching clip for belt or pocket. Pedometer e Digital For measuring the distance when walking or jogging. Shows time of day, steps, distance or kilocalories. Folding case with attaching clip for belt or pocket only weighing 26 g. 71 146 1174

108 t

with PC Connection f Pedometer A digital pedometer with USB connection, docking station and PC software to display, analyses and prints your training data. Evaluates distance, displays calories used, daily recording for seven days, days target details (steps, calories, distance), expected finishing time, count up and count down timer, digital watch with 24 hour display, weekday and alarm functions. Background lighting to make reading the display easier. 71 146 1158

Wear Digital Step Counter h Any The PE980 is a step counter with a newly developed sensor which can record steps in all dimensions (directions). It comes with a clock, alarm, 7 day saving function, distance and calorie counter. 71 146 1190

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Stop Watches TIMING & RECORDING

Crown Stopper

a f e

“Modul 3” Stopwatch

Memory stop watch. In proven ergonomic design offering a special multi function feature with 3 different time modes (split, lap, addition) permanently available during timing. Pre-set split time can be taken from hourly time, separate system and memory reset, countdown with repetition, time of day, with international 23 hour display, 59 minutes, 59.99 seconds. The connection of both Printo and Modul 3 units create a small, extremely powerful timing and recording system. Modul 3 can be connected immediately to Printo even if purchased at different times. With hanging cord. 71 130 3807

j h

Thermal Printer Set

Thermal Printer f “Printo” Including Module 3 stopwatch and case. This universal timing and recording system is simple to use economical, easily Guaranteed carried and lightweight. Technical waterproof details: can be attached to Module 3. for 3 years Prints: split, lap, addition times, time mode symbol, prints next number in the “Profil 1” Stopwatch sequence. Two basic functions (a) saves Profil 1 stopwatches have a strong, information from MODUL 3 therefore waterproof ABS casing, are very easily read. freeing up memory space (for timing more They come with a cord and protective bag. than 60 competitors), (b) saved conVery user friendly, with clear display and tents of the stop watch are available large viewing angle. later, the advantage here being that saved 71 130 3100 times can be printed out later in different modes. Standard thermal paper rolls. Light Delta “E 100” Stopwatch barrier connection available on request, Although this stopwatch has handy over 8000 print-outs per battery set, technical features, it is easy to use. Made 120x85x35 mm, approx. 200 g. in Germany. Easy-to-read LCD display, fast 71 130 3706 search/memory. Functional display for lap, short lap, as well as adjustable split time from normal time. Function mode key, disReplacement Roll for Printo play and memory key, protective case with Approx. 3.7 cm wide safety cord. 71 130 3908 71 130 4002

Stopwatch a Crown These are the most frequently used mechanical stopwatches. The professional anchor quality protects against dust and water due to the great care taken in its production, diamond cut metal housing (55 mm) with bow ring and shock-proof precision mechanics. 1/10 second pitch, display period: 15 mins. Clockwork, seven jewels 71 130 3302

The Classic b “AMIGO” Stopwatch Universally used for ice hockey and field hockey, basketball, handball, football etc., 1/10 second pitch, 15 min. display period. 71 130 3403

Stopwatch c “Felix” Technically simple and strong stopwatch with many uses, shock proof, unbreakable main spring, ABS special casing, with hanging cord, winder on rear. 71 130 5601

Allsport” Stopwatch d “Amigo An economical mechanical addition stopwatch. Robust ABS housing with neck cord. 1/5 second pitch, 60 min display time. 71 130 5500

Stopwatches

i Stoppstar 2

j Stratos 2

2” Stopwatch i “Stopstar Guaranteed simple and functional timing without additional functions (chrono). The ideal watch for pros and amateurs. ABS housing with neck cord. 71 130 5409

2” Stopwatch j “Stratos Ergonomic shape, simple and functional operation, ABS housing with neck cord. SR44 Button cell battery. 71 130 3504

g Profil 1

h Delta E 100

e Modul 3

1/100 7 digit 6.5 mm • 66x70x21 mm approx. 62 g

• • • • 1/100 7 digit 8 mm • 82x61x28 mm approx. 90 g

• • • • 1/100 2.5 lines 7 mm • 90x60x29 mm approx. 90 g 65

• • • • 1/100 7 digit, 1.5 rows 6 mm • 82x61x28 mm approx. 90 g 60

Mignon cells (AA) 1.5 V approx. 2-5 years

Button cell SR 54 approx. 2 years

Mignon cell (AA) 1.5 V approx. 2-5 years

Micron cells (AAA) 1.5 V approx. 5-7 years •

•

• •

Athletics

Sports with laps/lanes

Stopwatch characteristic

Easy to use

simple and functional

Article no.

71 130 5409

71 130 3504

Sports with interruptions in play Very temperature resistant (-15°C to +60°C) 71 130 3100

Mignon cells (AA) 1.5 V approx. 2 years • • • • • For sport types with pre determined times

Functions: Start/Stop/Reset Addition/Split/Dual Hanging cord Protective cover included Accuracy (Sec.) LCD display Digit height Display 9 hrs, 59 min., 59.99 Sec. Size Weight No. of spaces for laps, intermediate or finishing times Battery included: Running time Time (12/24 h) Date display Spray water resistant Shockproof Countdown Uses

• • •

1/100 7 digit 7 mm • 82x61x28 mm approx. 70 g

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

waterproof 71 130 4002

Also available as Set l with Printo thermal printer 71 130 3706 71 130 3807

t 109

Digital Stop Watches Accessories Thermal g DIGI Printer

New

b DIGI DT 100

With night light function DIGI Stopwatch a PC-9-EL1 The stopwatch for ambitious trainers. Displays the fastest, slowest and average lap time. Ideal for training with groups. The memory function can also be useful for documenting training or competition performances. Record all the important times and analyse them later. Timer with 30 second time out function. Pacer for 10-320 beats/minute, delivery includes a handy DIGI clip for a writing board. 71 130 3201

Waterproof and shockproof housing PC-73 d DIGI Multi Functional Watch This watch has many applications in timing and evaluation. Counter function for up to 99 laps, pacer function, DIGI pressure print system. With hanging cord. 71 130 5005

Digital Stopwatches Functions: Start/Stop/Reset Addition/Split/Dual Hanging cord Protective bag included Accuracy (sec.) LCD display Digit height Display 9 hrs, 59 min., 59.99 Sec. Display 59 min., 59.99 Sec. Size Weight No. of spaces for laps, intermediate or finishing times Battery included: Running time Time (12/24 h) Date display Spray water resistant Shockproof Countdown Alarm Uses

This stopwatch has a solid metal housing. With 100 memory spaces for laps and intermediate times as well as an alarm, timer and pacer function. Technical data: 3 line display, time (12/24h) with date, alarm, stopwatch function 9 hours, 59 minutes, 59.99 seconds, timer: 9 hours, 59 minutes, 59.99 seconds with 30 seconds time out function, pacer: 10-320 beeps per minute. Saves up to 100 laps/intermediate times, recall function for stopped times, recalls the fastest slowest and average lap times, spray water resistant, strong, shockproof stainless steel frame. Uses standard 3 V lithium CR2032 batteries, 125 g. 71 130 8509 Each

Top models with 500 or 2,000 memory spaces. These watches can record laps, intermediate times, finishing times, winning times or speeds. The data remains stored, with the time and date, until you physically remove them. This means you can easily gather a lot of data and evaluate it later on. The watch has a Dual Timer, for which you can specify on and off times and have them running immediately after each other. DIGI point printing system. With hanging cord. PC 110 with 500 memory storage spaces 71 130 4608 PC 111 with 2000 memory storage spaces 71 130 1407

143” Jumbo Display e “Stoptec Stopwatch Economical digital stopwatch with an extra large display and hourly signal. With hanging cord. 71 130 6503

f Stoptec 141 •

e Stoptec 143 •

Thermal Paper For DIGI thermal printer 71 130 4709. 1 unit = 5 rolls of 3 metres. 71 130 4901

Thermal Printer Set Set contains: • DIGI multifunctional stopwatch c • DIGI thermal printer 71 130 4709 Printer with PC 110 stopwatch 71 130 4800 Printer with PC 111 stopwatch 71 130 4813

Connection Set for DIGI PC h Digital 111

Extra large display

d DIGI PC-73 •

141” Stopwatch f “Stoptec The economical digital stopwatch for everyone. With hour signal and hanging cord. 71 130 6907 a DIGI PC-91 EL • • •

Analyse your times in comfort at your computer. Connect the PC111 c stopwatch directly via a USB port to your PC. The software (supplied) will save the data as a text file. The data can then be evaluated in many common programs. 71 130 1508

b DIGI DT100 • • •

•

a Sport-Thieme • • •

1/100 6 digit 8 mm

1/100 6 digit 12.4 mm

1/100 2 rows 7 mm •

1/100 3 rows 6 mm •

1/100 3 rows 5 mm •

• 75x53x15 mm approx. 29 g

• 75x53x15 mm approx. 49 g

65x61x16 mm approx. 61 g 50

63x56x17 mm approx. 66 g 60

63x59x16 mm approx. 65 g 60

75x60x15 mm approx. 125 g 100

Button cell: SR 54 approx. 2 years • •

• Sports with intermediate timing Conical shape

Stopwatch characteristics Article no.

PC 110 and PC 111 c Digi Multi Function Watch

The printing system. The printer is connected to the DIGI PC 110 and PC 111 stopwatches c. The printout can be performed, either completely or partially, at the same time as the timing or at a later date. The printer is battery operated, with thermal print paper. 71 130 4709

71 130 6907

110 t

c DIGI PC-110/111 • • • • 1/100 3 rows 6 mm •

71x60x17 mm approx. 64 g 500/2000

3 V lithium batteries Button cell: SR 54 3 V lithium batteries3 V lithium batteries 3 V lithium batteries 3 V lithium batteries approx. 2-3 years approx.. 2-3 years approx. 2 years approx. 2-3 years approx. 2-3 years approx. 2-3 years • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Sports with pre- All sports, pacer and recall Sports with All sports All sports All sports determined duration function for stopped times intermediate timing Night light function Pacer 10-320 beeps per Can be connected to DIGI Thermal Jumbo display Economical Multiple uses minute and versatile printer 71 130 4709 or PC connection to DIGI connection set 71 130 1508 Page 111 (only for DIGI PC-111) 71 130 3201 71 130 3201 71 130 6503 71 130 5904 71 130 4608 / 71 130 1407 71 130 5005

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

“Sport-Thieme” Table Top Clocks and Stop Watches

Price Tip

Buy now !

“Sport-Thieme” Stopwatch Stopwatch a “Sport-Thieme” Characteristics: displays the quickest, slowest and average speeds, lap counter. Adjustable countdown, max. 10 hours, automatic repeat of completed countdown and number of completed countdowns, 30 second countdown for time out. Impulse transmitter can be set from 10 to 320 beats/min, with impulse frequency, beat counter and total elapsed time. Display of hours, min, sec, date, day and year, automatic calendar, with battery and hanging cord. 71 130 5904

3 year guarantee • 60 intermediate memory spaces • impulse generator with sound • count down • automatic calendar

Counter” Hand Counter b “Tally Counts everything that needs to be counted, from 0 to 9999, metal casing, nickel-plated. 71 130 5308

Table Stopwatches

New

Count down function with 2 times ø 11 cm, for schools, sport and industry “Mesotron” Table Stopwatch

c Economical, easily read, quartz analogue table/wall stop watch. Suitable for use in all areas e.g. schools, sports, laboratory and industry. Florescent face, ø 11 cm. The ergonomic design means that this clock stands perfectly. Functions: start/stop/addition any number of times/reset. Measures: 0-60 seconds, 0-60 minutes. Runs for approx. 20 hours. 175x130x40/95 mm, approx. 375 g including 1.5 V mignon cell AA battery. 71 130 6705

200” Table Timer d “PRISMA Practical interval-up-down timer for use in schools, sport, industry and privately. Optimal stability, good ergonomically arranged parts. Large LCD display (two rows with function window) makes functions easy to understand, reading off is uncomplicated and very precise. Character height 22/8 mm, ABS plastic housing, choice of 2 timers 1/10 sec or 1/100 min. Functions: Start/Stop/Reset, addition, fly-back, countdown with adjustable alarm tone, 2 fully programmable timers with the option to separate or collective start/stop application, repeat, manual or auto-

matic, normal time display, switchable time resolution a) 999 mins, 99/100 min, b) 9 hours, 59 mins, 59 secs, 175x130x40/90 mm, 390 g, batteries: mignon cell (AA) R6, lasts approx. 1-2 years. 71 130 4507

8 Table Top Clock e EA strong metal housing with black face and easy to see hands. The second hand is red and the minute hand is yellow. Mechanical, displays 1 second to 1 min, face ø 207 mm, (HxW) 220x 209.5 mm. 71 151 1707

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 111

Everything Under Control Time Timer

New a

Timer a Time Time ticking on is an abstract concept but even recognising the elements of time is the first step towards independence for many people. Punctuality and limiting time is often required e.g. at meetings, at work, at home etc. Time Timer makes the passage of time clearer. Using this product success can be measured by looking at the duration of measured actions. Use Time Timer in seminars, meetings, presentations, classes, computer and games times. With Time Timer there is no need to concentrate on the normal clock or to understand it. You see and feel the passage of time as the red disc clearly shows how much time is left. Battery operated. Pocket model: Protective cover that works as a stand in a nylon bag Table model: With stand Wall model: Extra large numbers that are easy to read Pocket model (7.5x7.5 cm) 71 176 9829

Table model (18x18 cm) 71 176 9816 Wall model (30x30cm) 71 176 9803

b Timer Armband Watch c Time The well proven Time Timer idea reduced here to a smaller red disc can count from 1 minute to 12 hours. Two different acoustic signals will sound shortly before time runs out and once the time is up. As well as this, the analogue/digital watch has all the features of a standard watch. Diameter of face: 20 mm. Nonrusting stainless steel frame, waterproof to 30 m, easy to use, background lighting and sporty design. Comes packed in a can with cover and instructions. 71 154 1700

with Acoustic b Time-Timer Signal Time Timer, for all those who need extra help in timing, now comes with an acoustic signal. The Acoustic Time Timer has the same advantages as the original model but also has a subtle but clear signal that can be set to go off when the time is up. Special features: black frame, with an on and off button for the signal, subtle sound when the time is up. Runs on batteries. Pocket model: with protective cover that doubles as a stand (7.5 x 7.5 cm) Table model: with stand (18x18 cm). 71 123 1003 Pocket model 71 123 1016 Table model

New

Timer CD ROM d Time This CD ROM also offers sound as

d Sport Event Timer e Digi Timing for sports occasions. If you

112 t

wish to take times for your sport, this product will do so simply, reliably and with a great degree of comfort. You can use it when timing on fixed tracks (e.g. 100 m running) as well as for any other type of sporting occasion (e.g. fun runs). This timer will save 8000 times using the 10 hand stoppers (accessory) that can be connected to the timer when timing. A timer can be assigned to each lane. All data can be recalled on the display and printed on paper using the integrated thermal printer. It is also possible to connect the timer to a computer directly. The data is simultaneously transferred for further processing or can be transferred at a later stage. You can give participants a starting number immediately during timing or on the timer or computer at a later date. This timer is equipped for both mains and battery operation. Delivery as per illustration. Technical data: • 8000 data saving places for timing • Saves up to 999 races • Integrated thermo printer • PC connection with software • Connection for up to 10 hand stoppers

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

well as visual illustrations. Hours, minutes or seconds can simply be set and adapted to the size of the screen. For Windows and Macintosh. Comes with online help. 71 154 1713

• 12/24 h time of day with date • 4 digit start number input • 4 digit placing number • Double digit lap number function (track races) • Automatic print out option with pause function • Complete print out of a race • Up to 99 starting groups in one race • Recall function for all races • Loud acknowledgement signal • Battery or mains operated 71 103 1603

Stopper for DIGI-Sport f Hand Event Timer e The Digi Sport Event Timer will take up to 10 hand stoppers. This means that different timers can stop the timer at the same time. 71 103 1704 3 m cable length 71 103 1717 15 m long cable Paper for Digi Sport Event Timer 1 unit = 5 rolls 71 103 1805 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Display Systems for Sports Occasions

board a Display In a ring binder, suitable for all types of sport. With this new display in a ring binder, you can show point scores from 0 - 99 and set scores from 0 - 7. The other side of the board is intended for players passes, game plans, rules or other documentation. 71 115 6007-3

New Top” Display Board d “Multi This electronic display board can be used everywhere as it does not need mains electricity. It runs on its own battery. The rear console with LCD screen is suitable for 14 different types of sport. Technical Data: • visible from 35 m • digit height 9 cm • 6 kg • LxWxH: 733x368x115 mm • battery runs for approx. 20 hours. 71 131 6591

c b Table Tennis Score Counter

Second Timer c 24 DBB certified, complies with new

rules For timing ball possession in basketball. Timing adjustable from 24-99 seconds. Two digital displays with 22cm character height, 20, and 25 m control cable. With console and horn. 71 131 6706 Pair

TSP

Electronic Score Counter Electronic Score e Joola Counter Mobile electronic counter for displaying the score in table tennis, badminton and volleyball. The display is easy to read with up to 9 sets, 99 points and a serving side display. Simple to use. Power supply: 18 DC 1.5 V battery size: D (R20) - approx. 100 hours display time or DC 18 V mains connection. Batteries and mains adapter are not included in the delivery. Size (HxW): 48x28 cm, 3 kg (batteries not included). 71 110 4426-2

And there's more: Table stopwatches page 111

Radio Controlled Clocks

f Large Area Clocks Robust aluminium housing with indestructible macrolon glass, 40x40 cm, radio clock, battery operated. Choice between standard numbers or bars for numbers on the face. Also available in ball proof design (complies with DIN 18032, part 3.) With bars for numbers Without additional “ball proof design” package. 71 186 4582 With numbers Without additional “ball proof design” package. 71 186 4508

Clocks for large rooms in gyms and sports halls bars for numbers g With With additional “ball proof design” package. 71 130 8437 With numbers With additional “ball proof design” package. 71 130 8424

Weatherproof Outdoor Clock

Outdoor Clock h Weatherproof Waterproof radio controlled clock for

Radio Controlled Clock

ø 30 cm in standard design suitable for all both indoors and outdoors. ø 42 cm, weath- rooms. Battery operated (1.5V). Black frame, with bars for numbers erproof metal casing, white background 71 186 4524 with Arabic numbers, very easy to read. For white 230V/50Hz mains connection. 71 186 4537 71 186 4595

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

i j

t 113

Team Identification and Cabins Trainer and Player's Cabins and Player's Cabins a Trainer A weatherproof place for team officials and subs for the home and visiting teams. Speak to your sponsors as, not only is the cabin economical in price, but you can also place advertisements on the side walls and back walls. Advantages: • elegant bow shape on strong aluminium frame • heavy aluminium ground frames • no rusting, glass breakage and extremely resistant • double polycarbonate plates or acrylic glass plates • 1 piece wooden foot rest • stable wooden beamed bench or with plastic seat shells • fits 6 or 10 people

Design: • fits 6 people • with plastic seat shells • acrylic glass

Trainer and Player's Cabins for 6 people Size: 2.87 m long, 2.10 m high and 1.25 m deep With polycarbonate 71 111 9002 With sitting bench 71 111 9015 With 6 seat shells With acrylic glass 71 111 9031 With sitting bench 71 111 9028 With 6 seat shells

Player's Cabins • very robust and resistant polycarbonate glass or acrylic glass plates • 100% UV proof • unbreakable • sheets can be individually replaced • withstands all weather conditions • extra strong construction with additional cross bars

Design: • fits 6 people • with bench • polycarbonate

Trainer and player's cabins for 10 people Size: 5 m long, 2.10 m high and 1.25 m deep With polycarbonate 71 111 9044 With sitting bench 71 111 9057 With 10 seat shells With acrylic glass 71 111 9060 With sitting bench 71 111 9073 With 10 seat shells

All players cabins now come with seethrough clear acrylic glass all around. Polycarbonate side plates are available.

Mobile Set for Players Cabins With wheels and handle for easier transport. Set for one cabin. 71 111 9086

And there's more: • changing benches are on page 126

d Vests b Team Made from 100% polyamide, fits well. Available in five different colours for men and youths. Youth's 71 106 3400-2 Red 71 106 3413-2 Yellow 71 106 3426-2 Green 71 106 3439-2 Blue 71 106 3442-2 Orange

114 t

Men 71 106 2104-2 71 106 2117-2 71 106 2120-2 71 106 2133-2 71 106 2146-2

Yellow Green Red Blue Orange

See also: • Marking cones on page 54 • Footballs from page 4

Vests c Reversible These vest can be worn on both sides. Each side is a different colour. Very nice to wear, flexible and therefore allow quick changes of players during training. Simple to wash, very strong. 100% polyester. Adult size. 71 106 2407-2 Blue-green-navy 71 106 2410-2 Yellow-red-navy

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Team Sashes

Approx. 5 cm wide, 100% polypropylene, available in blue, red, green and yellow. For children, approx. 45 (90) cm long 71 130 2309 Blue 71 130 2338 Red 71 130 2325 Green 71 130 2312 Yellow For adults, approx. 60 (120) cm long 71 130 2208 Blue 71 130 2237 Red 71 130 2224 Green 71 130 2211 Yellow

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Marking and Measuring Marking This is the target …

Marking Saucer Set

Indestructible and indispensable aids for marking out games and play. Extremely practical multi-purpose marking and barrier cones. Made of shockproof polyethylene. Available in fluorescent red and yellow. Available in different sizes but also stack well. Ideal for sports halls or outdoor areas. The fully galvanised marking plates are also particularly useful for marking distances outdoors for all throwing sports. All products are made from very strong and fully weatherproof material.

15 cm ø 30 cm

See also:

We recommend suction holders for anchoring page 152

Consisting of: • 16 bars • 32 floats 71 112 7515

Volleyball g Water Made from aluminium with tourna-

• Gymnastic hoops page 228 • Half hoops page 275

Easy to grip thanks to the round pimples

ment net and tensioning, 240 cm long. It can be dismantled, is easily assembled and does not tip over thanks to the stabilising system. This set can be used at all depths for volleyball teams of up to 4:4. Order includes aluminium bars, five floats, one net and tensioning cord. Ball not included. 71 112 7007

Rainbow Balls h Neon A new, amazing feast of colour. The

intensive colours blend with each other. Matt, smooth surface. The “light” gymnastic balls are suitable for all exercises and games. With needle valve. Can also be used in water. 71 109 1205-1 ø 18 cm 71 109 1218-1 ø 23 cm 71 109 1221-1 ø 27 cm

Fun Ball Sunrise Rainbow Balls e Water Soft foam ball made of PE foam. Very i Especially good for children, these Goals d Water Universal for many school and leisure

Weights for Water Games

strong and robust. ø 20 cm, 300 g. Yellow/black. 71 191 9208-2

games. They can be used in the deep end, shallow end and on the edge of the Now! pool. Strong aluminium construction with Order net. Ball not included. 96.5x71x61 cm. 71 112 6903

Set consisting of 4 x 500 g weights, including 4 tensioning ropes approx. 130 cm long. 71 112 6235-1 Set of 4

Ball f Beach For many water and beach games.

144 t

Strong inflatable ball 35 cm. 71 114 1809

Price for 5

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

balls are easy to catch, hold and throw. They can be individually inflated and thanks to the new round knobbly structure, are pleasant and easy to grip. Also suitable for gymnastics, relaxation, improving circulation and for use in water. 71 109 4334-1 ø 18 cm, 180 g 71 109 4347-1 ø 23 cm, 220 g Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Even More Bathing Fun! Simple to attach

Swimming Float a “Kombi” Simple to use and with universal

applications. It can be used as a slide, bathing island, water catwalk, ideally suited for getting people at ease in the water, small children's swimming, club and school sport as well as special celebrations. Another advantage is that any number of floats can be combined, depending on what your require, to make a “walking plank”. It is simple and easy to do. Just attach the first float to a starting block or overflow channel and attach the rest using the four links provided. The perfect solution for balance exercises. 215x100x5 cm. 71 112 3601

Swimming Float b “Giant” The economical alternative: this

The economical alternative!

swimming and playing float has great buoyancy and stability. 145x100x5 cm. 71 112 3500

Hole ø 10 mm

Water Mats c Tatami Tatami mats are perfect for use in the pool as a float or fun object. Their thickness is a real bonus. The mats greatly reduce the risk of accident or injury due to their highly elastic shock absorbing qualities. Each mat is 1x1 m, 4 cm thick and

weighs 3 kg. Anti bacterial coating, anti allergic. Also anti-slip due to the special rice straw embossing. Can be used on both sides. Colour combination: green/red, washable, waterproof. 71 119 7264-1

with Holes d Float Specially designed for use in therapy and familiarising people with water. Made

from unbreakable plastazote foam, very durable, with holes, ø 10 mm, 95x70x1.5 cm. 71 112 3904 Each

Film Slide • optimal surface • 6 m long, 1.10 m wide • tear-resistant canvas Caterpillar e The caterpillar is ideal for use in groups. It can be moved forwards, backwards as well as in competitions with other groups among other things. Suitable for the schoolyard, pre-school, gymnasium and

swimming pool. 100% polyester blue canvas 7 m long approx. 50 cm wide. The side is oversewn, therefore eliminating sharp edges. 71 135 5505-1

Slide f Film This film allows you to have great fun diving on the grass. This slide really comes into its own when it is warm outside. Children plunge with great gusto onto the long

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

water carpet. The slide is made from tearresistant material. It is 2.5 mm thick and has a 1/2” sprinkler connection. 6m long and 1.10 m wide. 71 112 5304 Each

t 145

Water Fun Equipment – Makes Them Chirpy! Water Play Brick Set of 48

Set of 48

Bomb Animals b Water Great fun for all the “water babies”.

Water Playbricks

Eight different funny water animals. Just dip them in the water and the fun starts. 100% polyester. 71 213 7009 Set of 8

Even the smallest of children will have fun with this play brick set. Using only a few bricks, simple shapes can be made. They put no limits on creativity and imagination. Manufactured from plastazote®, which floats, is unbreakable and totally non-toxic (no gas or poisons). The set consist of 48 bricks 18x9x4.5 cm in yellow, green, red and blue. 71 114 9308 Set of 48

New

c Power Splash Set

New

Baseball bats for the water. Includes ball and integrated water pump. A howl for all those water fans. The children can play baseball in the water and at the same time spray each other with water from the integrated water pistol that will shoot up to 15 metres. The set consists of 2 bats coated in PE foam and two plastic balls. Suitable for children over four years of age. Bats 60cm long. Comes in assorted colours. 71 224 0318 Each

f Underwater Balance Have fun balancing under water. These underwater balancing aids encourage children to develop their coordination and improve their balance. The aim is to balance under water using the board either alone or in pairs. In two designs: elongated, oval as a board or round as a disc, great for use in pairs. For children over 6 years of age. Assorted colours. Balance Board, length approx. 60 cm 71 218 1400 Each Balance Disc, ø approx. 50 cm 71 218 1413 Each

e f

Board d Jive A wave rider made from soft but very shockproof plastazote® foam. It can be used as a swimming, sitting or sliding board. Comes in two colours, 95x48x5 cm. 71 112 3803

h g Tree Trunk Swimming Floats h Floating g “Frog” This floating imitation tree trunk is For more fun in the pool. This colourful toy will add more colour to your pool and is a great source of new ideas. Made from high quality plastazote® foam, skin friendly and free of toxins and gases. 92x64x5 cm. 71 112 7704

146 t

specially designed for children and young people. Anyone who sees it will immediately want to play with it. Size 200 cm long, ø 16 cm. 71 114 9513 Each

Net for Ball Mountain If you already have the balls for the ball mounClimbing on the ball mountain … no one tain you only need the 100% nylon 3 mm can resist! thick net with 30 mm mesh width. 2x3 m. DBGM approved. A climbing product that consists 71 112 5708 of balls of different sizes held together in a nylon net piling up into a huge mountain. The strong net can be easily gripped and will survive even the wildest of antics. You can of course, just use Hand Pump the balls individually. The mountain is made of 10 For inflating and different sized balls in a 3 mm thick nylon net deflating balls. Output with mesh (30 mm wide) that is simply closed per stroke 2x2000 cm≈, up. Recommended minimum water depth: 1.50 m complies with DIN stan71 112 5506 dards. Each 71 110 0105-1

i Ball Mountain

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Bathing Fun and Swimming Equipment Trolleys

horse” b “Sea Water Fun Object A floating water game made from high quality foam. The sea horse floats upright in the water. You can also sit on it. Size 74x72x6 cm. 71 114 9601

New

c d

New Inside shelves can be adjusted at any level! Dragon” c “Little Water Fun Object

Aluminium Caged Trolley

Size 125x125x62 cm, closed design lockable, shelves can be adjusted to any height, with sliding doors. Holds 970 litres. 71 130 9977-1

150x148x62 cm, closed format, lockable, shelves can be adjusted to any height, with sliding doors. Holds 1,376 litres. 71 130 9906-1

New

Fun water attraction that many children can use at the same time. The small dragon “rides” over the water and provides great fun for children. Made from special high quality foam. 100x100x75 cm. 71 223 2111 Each

Boat ” d “Power Water Fun Object A water object that will awaken children's imagination. Made from special foam. 125x60 cm. 71 201 0407

Ideal for water fitness items, floats and swimming boards

Storage Basket f Mobile Open, strong plastic basket guarantees that

Equipment Trolley e Swimming Ideal transport and storage trolley for aqua fit-

New

ness weights. Great for different swimming products of all types. Strong 55x50 mm plastic frame with four plastic castors. Inner nylon weave with holes to let water out. Comes dismantled quick and simple to assemble. 150x75x85 cm. 71 224 1106 Each

the water runs off quickly and your swimming items will dry perfectly. Ideal for storing and transporting aqua fitness products, swimming boards, floats and water fun products. Available in to sizes. With galvanised transport wheels. 71 210 8719 60x74x40 cm Each 71 210 8722 60x42x40 cm Each

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

See also: Storage for Comfy Floats on page 139

t 147

Inflatable Water Objects Octopus

Loop

Swimming and Jumping Island

White Shark

c d

a Octopus 8 arms, 1 suction holder 71 114 8305 is required for anchoring. 600x600x120 cm, approx. 45 kg 71 114 7504 800x800x120 cm, approx. 55 kg 71 114 7517

Sea Star As Octopus 71 114 7504, but with 5 arms. 1 suction holder 71 114 8305 is required for anchoring. 600x600x120 cm, approx. 35 kg 71 114 7302 800x800x120 cm, approx. 45 kg 71 114 7315

Shark c White 500x250x100 cm, approx. 20 kg. Water Wheel b Loop Absolutely robust, can also be used on land. Outer ø 200 cm, 45 kg 71 204 1113 Outer ø 240 cm, 65 kg 71 204 1100

1 anchor 71 114 8305 is required. 71 206 3209

and Jumping Island d Swimming 400x400x50 cm, approx. 45 kg. Two suction holders 71 114 8305 are necessary for anchoring. 71 114 8103

Accessories

e Dino

g h i

e f Pinky

148 t

Pump g Hand For inflating and deflating large

400x250x100 cm, approx. 20 kg. One suction holder 71 114 8305 is necessary for anchoring. 71 114 8709

floating objects on this page and page 143. The support is locked to the side of the pump for deflation. Output 2.3m≈/min. at 335 W, 230 V. 71 114 8204-2 Each Suction Holder For anchoring the water objects to the pool edge or floor. Will hold up to 80 kgs. Total length 32 cm, ø of each suction holder 12 cm. 71 114 8305 Each

f “Pinky” The island is anchored using a

Set for i Repair Inflatable Water Fun Objects

the Friendly e Dino, Dinosaur

rotating joint, meaning that even though Pinky is anchored, it can still turn, ø 2.60 x 0.25 m, approx 7 kg. One suction holder 71 114 8305 is necessary for anchoring. 71 114 8800

Use this repair set to fix small holes in the water fun objects. Contains glue, patch and instructions. Patches are 50 x 50 cm. Please state patch colour required when ordering. 71 114 8813 Each

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Hygiene and Organisation in the Swimming Pool Megaphones

Bathing Mats

New

a Clothes Hanger

g Rear

h d • “Sanitized” finish

Replacement Net Bag

Hangers a Clothes Made from unbreakable plastic. Can be used for hanging many things including shoes. A net can also be attached. 44.5x43cm. 71 200 1207 Red Each 71 200 1210 Blue Each Replacement Net Bag Made from nylon with hooked edges, fits all hangers. 71 112 8202

Locker and Key Bands

c With a clamp fastening made from

• • • •

water flows off on four sides soft and safe to stand on durable and easy to clean withstands temperatures

i e

Bright blue Blue Grey Bright grey

Grillings d Durowalk Dampness and cosy warmth are a paradise for germs that cause dangerous diseases. There is the risk of athlete's foot and other infections being passed on anywhere there are many people walking bare foot through wet areas day after day. “Durowalk” is the only product of this type that has the licensed “sanitized” improver, which prevents bacteria and fungi from developing. The floor covering is designed in such a way that the water under the mats will flow away at all angles. The rounded laths mean when walking on a Durowalk pool mat, it feels soft underfoot and you can stand better. Width 60 cm. Light blue 71 112 8707 con. m Blue 71 112 8710 con. m Grey 71 112 8736 con. m Bright grey speckles 71 112 8749 con. m

unbreakable plastic. 12mm wide, approx. 27cm long. 71 112 9306 Blue Each 71 112 9319 Yellow Each 71 112 9335 Red Each Locker and Key Band Standard Mat Accessories With rounded edges, for Anodised and engraved alu! w o N r changing rooms or for dry Orde minium number plates. walking areas. Size 60x40 cm. Blue. Please submit numbers. 71 113 1707 Each Price per 100. 71 112 9348 Each

Complies with

DIN 51097

With audible signal

Grillings e Floor Floor grillings are indispensable.

Hand g Waterproof Megaphone

They are safe for walking on in wet areas and do not spread athlete's foot and other fungi. They are made from shock proof plastic and are bonded together. Maximum length is 6 m, width 60, 80, 100, 120 cm but also available in intermediate sizes, the price for which is calculated at an additional 15% of the next largest size. Weight per square metre: 5kg. Available in blue, green, pink, grey and red. The underlays are always black. We will gladly send out a sample if required. Individual mats under 1m√ carry a surcharge of 20%. No right of return. 71 113 1619 60 cm 71 113 1622 80 cm 71 113 1635 100 cm 71 113 1648 120 cm

Maximum output 25 watts. This unique waterproof hand megaphone is perfect for intensive use in swimming, watersports and sailing. Clear transmission of speech, high quality housing with all round view thanks to the transparent cone. Made from ASA plastic, very easy to use, handy and extremely light at only 1.1 kg. In open spaces sound will reach up to 1,000 m and can be used in normal way for up to six hours. 32 cm long, powered by 6 (UM 2) batteries. Batteries not included. 71 114 6729 Light blue 71 114 6716 Red with siren

Complies with

DIN 51097

Shoe Covers j Disposable Made from plastic film with rubber bands, suitable for all shoe sizes up to 45. For use in gymnasiums, swimming pools and museums. 100 in bag with perforation for easy removal. 71 112 0501 Bag

Megaphone h Shoulder 20 watt output. Handy design. light, for halls and external use. Will reach up to 250 m, 33 cm long, no siren. Batteries not included. Weight: approx. 2kg. 71 114 6107

Hand Megaphone i Mini Max. out put 12 watt. The small megaphone with a siren, very light and easy to use, can be used anywhere. Will reach up to 120 m, approx. 500 g, 21 cm long. 71 114 6602

One-off extra charge for orders of less than 100 aluminium number plates. 71 112 9377

And there's more: Changing benches page 126-127

Shoe Covers k Re-Usable Very strong and flexible, with anti-slip

Rear

Swimming Hat l Latex Heavy deluxe quality with reinforced

band for men and women. Also available in other colours for orders exceeding 100 hats. perforations on bottom. PVC material. One 71 112 0325 Yellow Each size fits all up to size 45. 71 112 0341 Red Each 71 112 0602 Pair 71 112 0312 Blue Each

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Caps m Swimming 100% polyester. Colours depend on our stocks. 71 112 0211 Boys 71 112 0208 Men

Each Each

t 149

Diving Boards: No Jumping from the Pool Edge! Fibreglass Diving Board • 5 year stability guarantee • Complies with DIN 13451-10 5% reduction when you order more than three diving boards

Accessories

Diving Board a Fibreglass A specially produced diving board, with great spring, for daily use in pools and for general sport use. The board is resistant to dampness, is robust, elastic and maintenance free. The silicon carbide cover gives it good grip. We recommend that it should be sprinkled with water on a daily basis to clean the upper surface. The following are included for assembly: • fixing bolts • upper plate • rubber intermediate plate 5 year guarantee if properly assembled 71 112 2709 4.0 m 71 112 2712 4.5 m 71 112 2725 4.8 m

Diving b “Duraflex” Board The high performance diving boards that have been used exclusively in all important diving competitions and events around the world since 1958. Special techniques, high quality material as well as careful construction are the reasons for the exceptional flexibility and also mean that the diving board can be put to heavy duty usage on a continual basis. These boards are a crowd puller for your pool. Made from duraluminium with baked enamel in double component varnish on the upper side with special non-slip cover. Length 487 cm, width 49.5 cm 71 112 3005

150 t

d “Competition” Roller Sub Structure b c “Maxiflex B” Diving Board The high quality diving board is the same as Duraflex except with greater flexibility due to additional edge tapering at the end of the board. Especially good for lighter and top sports divers. 71 112 3018

c “Durafirm” Sub Structure

With end bracket and roller adjustment Specially cut to handle the high demands of the above diving board. Very durable construction, all moving parts have precision bearings and are easily replaced. Diving board not included. 71 112 3207

Diving Boards 50 cm wide. Only the most flawless end brackets and sub-structures will guarantee a long life span for your diving boards! Therefore we recommend: When purchasing a new board also buy a new end bracket. This ensures maximum safety.

Absolutely maintenance free. Made from V2A stainless steel with strong rubber rollers with non-wearing polyamide bevel wheels with polyamide teeth. Can be operated directly with a plastic hand wheel. The brakes can only be released with a special key. Five year guarantee on the bevel wheel and teeth. 71 112 1504

All diving boards listed are delivered without any sub structure. If you require this part please order separately see d-f

Guarantee Duraflex and Maxiflex diving boards come with a 2 year stability guarantee. If the boards are mounted on non-durafirm substructures the guarantee does not apply.

Caution: Please note: light alloy diving boards must have a protrusion of 1.50 to 1.60 m from the middle of the sub structure bracket to the tip the board. When ordering please state the length and type (e.g. fibreglass, aluminium) of your existing board.

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

End Bracket e Hinged For diving boards Steel shaft, galvanised 71 112 1403 made from V2A-nirosta 71 112 1416

Each Each

Unit f Jumping Made from 2 channel irons for additional height with the roller sub structure (71 112 1504) and hinged end bracket (71 112 1403), galvanised. Please state the length and type (fibreglass, aluminium) of the existing board when ordering. 71 112 3308 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Water Polo Equipment Water Polo Goals Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

And there's more:

a Water Polo Goal

Hand pumps on page 33

For fixing to side of pool Pool edge fixing set for sockets with internal ø 34 mm. Comes without sockets. 71 112 7616 Pair

And there's more: When ordering goal a, please inform us 1 What pool edge system you have and the distance from upper edge of the pool to the upper water level. 2 Distance from the edge of the pool to the middle of the socket 3 Internal diameter of the socket

Water Polo Goal b “Fun” Made from high frequency welded very durable, strong and UV resistant canvas material (the same material as in rafting boats, 2.5 mm thick). Delivery includes hand pump, repair set, two tensioning cords and a carrying bag. 200x100x100 cm. Weight per goal approx. 9 kg. 71 112 6802 Pair

Water Polo Goal c Aluminium 3x0.9x1.35 m stable construction, 80x40 mm posts, real stoved enamel finish in white, folds together, therefore saves space in storage. The goal is screwed together, with non-rust net hooks and net hangers. Unsinkable because of foam in the

Polo Goal d Water “Neptune special” free floating,

c forward tilting floats. Free floating. 71 112 7603

Pair

Water Polo Goal Net Polyethylene, 3mm, not illustrated. 71 112 7906

Pair

3x0.90x1.6 m. A stable construction thanks to the tried and tested special 75x40 mm profile in combination with aluminium sheeting (edged) floats. As the floats are extremely wide, the goal sits very stable on the water. The rear can be folded up, cross bar and posts are white, float red, baking varnished, comes with net hooks, hangers, floats and calibration weight. 71 112 7629 Pair

Accessories 67x67 cm

j Polo Cap h Water 100% nylon, with ear protectionrecognised nationally and internationally No. 1 + 15 red, no. 2-14 white 71 112 0729 Set No. 1+15 red, no. 2-14 blue 71 112 0732 Set

100% cotton

g Suit for Lifee Swimmer's saving A suit for different training exercises, raw white 100% cotton no appliqué, trousers without braces with two pockets, jacket with covered buttons, one chest pocket and two side pockets. Suit weight approx 240 g/m√. 71 114 0008 40 Each 71 114 0011 44 Each 71 114 0024 48 Each 71 114 0037 52 Each 71 114 0040 56 Each

g f Water Polo Balls Circumference 68-71 cm. Weight 400-450 g.

Water Polo Ball

f Plastic with easy to hold surface. Weight and circumference, complies with regulations. 71 108 0908

“Prima Super” Training Clock

The robust training clock designed for continuous use indoors or in outdoor pools. Shows one 60 second cycle. Four-coloured cross of hands. Strong construction, aluminium frame, freestanding model. Face: black numbers on a yellow background with protective Plexiglass cover and with back plate. External size 67x67 cm. Electrically powered (24 V) with 20 metre lead. Protected transformer with power plug. 71 112 6408 Each

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

30x30 cm

“Time” Training Clock

Can be used anywhere thanks to the quartz battery motor. Strong frame, approx. 30x30 cm with a bright plate and four colour crossed hands. Start/stop switch on the outer frame. Batteries included. 71 210 0207 Each

t 151

Lane Markers From t

Competitor Lane Markers

b a

10 cm

15 cm

Certified by the LEN

With these lane markers, manufactured to FINA and LEN standards, you have the optimal competition conditions, which of course are so necessary for real success. The plastic discs are threaded through non-rusting steel wire rope. These lines have the best water calming performance. The discs break the waves before they can cause turbulence in the neighbouring lanes. The turnbuckle is covered with a cap and at the other end, there is a balancing spring to ensure that it lies well on the water. Standard colours red/white/blue (with 5 m red at each end, centre white and blue alternately) Other colours are also available: extra price approx. 10%.

Competitor Gold 25 m, Standard 25 m, float ø 10 a Competitor b float ø 15 cm cm 71 114 3704 Competitor Standard 50 m, float ø 10 cm 71 114 3717

Each

Accessories

Each

Lane Markers

f spring for d Balancing Competition Lane Markers

71 114 3906 Competitor Gold 50 m, float ø 15 cm 71 114 3919

71 150 6336 Each Turnbuckle for competitor lane markers. Replacement rope for 25 m competitor lane markers. 71 150 6323 Each 71 150 6310 Hexagonal Socket Spanner for ComReplacement rope for 50 m competitor lane markers. petitor Lane Markers. 71 150 6307 71 150 6349 Each

e f

Used in the Olympic games and major events e.g. World Championships in 1975 (Cali), 1978 (Berlin) and 1982 (Equador). European championships in 1977 and 1982. Olympic games in Montreal, Moscow, Los Angeles, Seoul and Barcelona, FINA cup Tokio, Universiade Mexico and all German championships from 1974 to 2007.

Markers g Lane For marking individual swimming lanes. All lane markers have white and red tubular ball floats that need no maintenance and are always ready to be used. It is not necessary to dry them and the colours do not fade. They are made from polypropylene. This material does not rot, is self floating and will not stretch. The floats are approx. 90x60 mm. They can be clipped in at the ends with either karabiner snap hooks or additionally there is the choice of an adjustable 8 hook.

h Karabiner spring hooks

markers will take approx. 1x 50 m long line of ball on ball lines, or approx. 2x 25 m lines of ball on ball lines, hot dip galvanised with three bars. 71 114 5407

8 hook

International Standard Lane Markers With closely packed tubular ball floats, 5 meter red balls on both ends, white middle. 71 114 2600-0 25 m 71 114 2613-0 50 m

152 t

i With rubber tyre disc wheels for Reel Trolley

transporting reels and simplifying putting down and taking up lines. Hot dip galvanised without reel. 71 114 5508

Lane Markers, with distanced tubular ball floats Tubular balls sit securely on the line. a float every 100 cm 71 114 2600-3 25 m 71 114 2613-3 50 m a float every 50 cm 71 114 2600-2 25 m 71 114 2613-2 50 m a float every 25 cm 71 114 2600-1 25 m 71 114 2613-1 50 m

h Reel 90cm wide winding up drum for lane

i j Backstroke Turning Indicator

False Start Line

Marker Holds l Lane Made from 2VA non-rust material. For lane dividers with a snap hook ends. 71 114 4909

Suction Cup Holder j Buntings For back stroke: please state width of m For fixing the rope or for fixing water

pool when ordering. Buntings made from flag material. 71 114 4101 per m

for False Start Unit k Line Please state size of pool when ordering. 71 114 4303

per m

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

games. It holds fast to every flat surface (minimum size 12x12 cm) and can be used anywhere a holder is needed in the pool. Aluminium plate with hanger and super suction cup with double chambered system. ø of suction cup 33 cm. Will support up to 80 kg. 71 112 6509 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Lane Dividers and Transport Trolleys c e

Dividers c Lane In red and white hostal floats. Please order the end hooks (illustration 5) at the same time. Rope 12mm thick. a hostal float every 25 cm 71 114 4417 per metre a hostal float every 50 cm 71 114 4420 per metre Ball to ball 71 114 4404 per metre

Aluminium Trolley

a Particularly stable, easy to roll up and roll out the lane markers, very easy to transport and store. Takes approx. 3x 25 m Competitor Gold lane markers ø 150 mm article no. 71 114 3906, 6x 25 m competitor standard lane markers ø 100 mm article no. 71 114 3704 or 12 of the normal ball lines article no. 71 114 2600-0. Size 1.78x1.18x1.37 m. 71 114 5700

Aluminium Trolley For a choice of: • 2x 25 m Competitor Gold lane markers, ø 150 mm 71 114 3906, • 4x 25 m competitor standard lane markers ø 100 mm 71 114 3704 or • 8x standard lane markers 71 114 2600-0. No illustration. 1.40x1.40x1.35 m. 71 114 5713 Free from prohibited softening agents

e Marker End Hooks e Lane Double sided snap hooks (nickelised die-cast zinc) and 1 additional adjustable figure of 8 hook (non-rusting VA material). LxW: 9x2.5 cm, inner diameter 1.2 cm. End hooks must be ordered separately. 71 114 4808

d Tubular Floats d Individual ø approx. 7cm, approx. 9 cm long,

Trolley b Aluminium For approx. 6 Competitor “Gold” lane markers: ø 150 mm each 25 m, article number: 71 114 3906, 12 Competitor lane markers ø 100 mm each 25 m, article number: 71 114 3704 or 24 standard lane markers with normal floats, article number: 71 114 2600-0. 2.45x1.18x1.50 m. 71 114 5726

weight approx. 60 g per ball. For lane markers with approx. 8 mm hole 71 114 5003-1 Red Each 71 114 5016-1 White Each For lane markers with approx. 12 mm hole 71 114 5003-2 Red Each 71 114 5016-2 White Each

Lifesaving

Phthalate-

FREE

i Life Buoy for Boating and General Watersports Made from flame resistant polystyrene foam with white 8 mm diameter pp holding cord, oil resistant. Design: 12 kp bearing capacity, white, ø 65 cm outside, ø 38 cm inner 71 114 0705 Design: 22 kp bearing capacity, red/white, ø 75 cm outside, ø 45 cm inner 71 114 0718

New

BEMA® Life Vest

The well proven solid type 100, EN 395 life vest is specially designed for protected waters and inland navigation. It has reflective strips and a safety collar ensuring if the wearer goes unconscious they will automatically end up on their back. Whistle and adjustable leg strap also included. Available in 3 children's sizes (mini, medium and maxi) and 3 adult sizes (M, L and XL). Orange. 100% polyester cover. Washable at up to 40° C. Mini, 1-4 years, size 86-104, up to 20 kg 71 224 1207 Each

Medium, 4-8 years, size 104-128, 20 to 30 kg 71 224 1210 Each Maxi, 8-12 years, size 128-152 30 to 40 kg 71 224 1223 Each M, women's size 38-42, men's size 46-50, 60 up to 80 kg 71 224 1236 Each L, women's size 42-46, men's size 50-54, 80-100 kg 71 224 1249 Each XL, men size 54-58, 100 to 120 kg 71 224 1252 Each

Poles i Saving Made from light alloy tubing, ø 4.2cm catching loop firmly attached, extremely durable. 71 114 2105 2.80 m 71 114 2118 5.30 m

j Ball k Safety Styrofoam ø 30 cm, strong plastic net with strong loop for holding a rope, also useful for swimming lessons. 71 114 1405

Saving Belt j DLRG Adjustable therefore suitable for all

Rope l Safety Approx. ø 7 mm, one end has a snap

sizes. This rope secures the life saver therefore reducing the risk. 71 113 7200

hook and float, while the other has a hand loop. Made from pure polypropylene, 20 m. 71 114 1607

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 153

Gymstick® · Bosu® · Flowin®

Gymstick™

a Gymstick™ Gymstick™ is a simple, effective and versatile training aid for use in physiotherapy, fitness centres and clubs as well for independent, individual training at home. Gymstick™ can be used for all exercises that free weights are used in. It improves the functioning of the heart and circulation, strength, stamina, mobility, balance and fat burning. The 75 cm long latex tubes are attached to each end of the bar (130 cm long) and the two free loops are fixed under the feet. The resistance can now be simply and easily controlled. Delivery includes a storage bag and exercise instructions. 71 149 6000 Light/green 71 149 6013 Medium/blue 71 149 6026 Strong/black 71 149 6039 Extra strong/silver 71 149 6042 Ultra strong/gold

b Gymstick™ b Aqua Up until now Gymstick training was

Adjustable to any point between 72 -114 cm

only possible over water but with the “aqua” you can now get the special benefits of Gymstick training in the water. The 117 cm long fibreglass bar has a pleasant waterproof handle. The tubes correspond to the Original Thera Band thicknesses. 71 149 5502 Light/green 71 149 5515 Medium/blue 71 149 5528 Strong/black 71 149 5531 Extra strong/silver

Telescope c ForGymstick™ everyone who likes to travel the

b Adjustable to any point betw een 72 -114

“Telescope” Gymstick™ is the perfect alternative. The three fibre glass bars with Thera-Band® Tubing can be adjusted to any length from 72 to 114 cm and fits in a travel bag. 71 149 6055-1 Light/green 71 149 6068-1 Medium/blue 71 149 6071-1 Strong/black 71 149 6084-1 Extra strong/silver

New New

• trunk stabilisation • stomach muscle training • proprioceptive training

d Flowin® The unique high friction training system from Flowin® allows comprehensive and effective training. Whole body training in a manner not yet known. The Swedish developers of Flowin®, in cooperation with universities, physiotherapists and athletes, have succeeded in developing a versatile training product that is suitable for people of all ages and fitness levels and have no equal in terms of efficiency and functionality. 71 218 4425 Sport 71 218 4438 Professional

154 t

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Ballast™ Ball e BOSU® The simplest of ideas often have the greatest effect. BOSU® Ballast™ Ball is a large exercise ball, ø 65 cm, filled with small granules weighing approx. 2.5 kg. These granules can move freely in the ball. Ballast™ Ball will not roll away. This opens up a lot of options. Ballast™ Ball can also be easily stacked and you will not need any special equipment to arrange. 71 218 4409 Individual 71 218 4412 Set of 5 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Fit with the Original FLEXI-BAR®

Flexi-Bar® CDs

e FLEXI-BAR® for Children

FLEXI-BAR® FLEXI-BAR® FLEXI-BAR® Sport Intensive Athletic for ProfesStandard sional

CD Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

a Flexi Bar® Step Beats CD

Winner of the envogue.tv SPORTSOUNDAWARD 2003 award. Over 60 minutes of music specially selected for training with the FLEXI BAR®. Also excellent for Step training hours. 71 200 9940

for FLEXI-BAR® c Stand Holds up to 30 FLEXI-BARs® (suitable for all types of FLEXI-BAR®). Mobile, approx. 49x43x12 cm. FLEXI-BARs® not included. 71 200 9979

unit for d Hanging FLEXI-BAR® Hanging shelf for FLEXI-BAR®, holds approx. 30 bars. Wooden, LxWxH: 20x49x28 cm, 3 kg. 71 200 9995

FLEXI-BAR® combines strength training, stamina training, deep muscle training, coordination training, posture training and stabilisation of movement. The bar adds to posture improvement and figure training. Also useful in therapy for back and joint problems. Approx. 520 g, 153 cm, TÜV approved. Includes exercise poster. For children 71 200 9924 Sport Standard 71 200 9908 Intensive 71 200 9937 Athletic for advanced use 71 200 9911

e f g h

Transport Bag i FLEXI-BAR® A large carrying bag for all FLEXIBAR® models in two designs. The bag provides optimal protection against damage and dirt to the bars. 71 212 5507 for 10 FLEXI-BAR®s 71 212 5510 For 30 FLEXI-BAR®s

FLEXI-BAR®

Carrying Bag j FLEXI-BAR® This practical carrying bag is made

FLEXI-BAR® “Step Beats II” CD

FLEXI-BEATS II, 130 BPM. Workout: 56:14 min, Total: 62:18 min. 71 200 9982

New

from a weatherproof and very light material that will store and protect your FLEXI-BAR®. 71 200 9966

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 155

Back and Forth to Fitness with XCO® Trainer ®

New

„Athletic“

„M“

Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

„S“

„L“

-V b XCO For XCO walking & running and group fitness sessions! The new XCO-V can also be used indoors and especially in gyms. Concept: 3 in 1 (invest once and profit three times!)

• group fitness sessions • indoor (treadmill) • outdoor (XCO®-Walking & Running) 71 204 1689 Each

XCO® Walking & Running Set + Belt

a XCO® The XCO® Trainer is a new concept to the world of sport, fitness and rehabilitation. The dynamic forward and backward movement by the person holding will shake the loose mass contained inside the XCO® trainer quite violently from one side to the other. This movement works both the agonistic and antagonistic muscle groups. This “co-contraction” of muscles protects the joints. Guide to use: Small: Rehabilitation and people beginning to train; Medium: Users with small hands, especially one hand training. Large: Users with large hands. Athletic: for advanced use. Size: S, 32 cm, ø 5 cm, 760 g 71 204 1605 Size: M, 42 cm, ø 5 cm, 980 g 71 204 1618 Size: L, 32 cm, ø 7 cm, 1,325 g 71 204 1621 Size: Athletic, 42 cm, ø 7 cm, 1,700 g 71 204 1634

New Walking & Running c XCO® Set + Belt XCO® Walking & Running: Fitness training for beginners and improvers. The two aluminium tubes (27 cm, 620 g) with loose mass are used as weight bars in training and carried by the hand loops. XCO® Walking & Running can also be used as

additional weights in the belt. The set consists of: • 2x XCO® Walking & Running • 1x Training belt (100% polyester) • 2x hand loops • 1x Training plan • 1x Training DVD 71 204 1676

Variable weight loads

New

Training Vest e Flex This vest is ideal for fitness, strength Weight Vest d AFG Perfect for fitness exercises in all types of sport. 100% cotton. Approx. 10 kg. 9 different interchangeable weights. Fits every body size. 71 148 9200

156 t

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

and running training. Comfortable sit for every size thanks to the variable weight loads (“Flex Metal” weights each 200 g) and the velcro band. Chlorine resistant and therefore suitable for use in water. Total weight: 9 kg. 100% nylon. 71 198 2477 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Dumb Bells and Weights

4 kg

Price Tip

Buy now !

New b

Individually adjustable weights

Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

Wall Storage

g 3k

• easy to grip with plastic cover • for gymnastics, aerobics and fitness training

1k Storage Racks

Rack a Storage For gymnastics and aerobics dumbbells. Mobile storage rack for gym and club use. Holds up to 80 dumb bells. The strong double castors make it fast to transport to the next training location. 28 kg, Storage size: LxWxH: 112x65x86 cm. 71 145 9278

c Dumbells For gymnastics, aerobics and fitness Wall Storage Rack

b For gymnastics and aerobics dumbbells. Space saving solution for up to 50 dumbbells. Made from strong rectangular tubing. Wall fixings not included. LxWxH: 150x48x24 cm, 13.2 kg. 71 145 9281

See product b video

And there's more: • Aerobics dumbbells page 159 • Steps on page 160-161

www.sport-thieme.at

training. Cast iron with coloured plastic coating. The glossy surface prevents the absorption of sweat and can be easily cleaned. Handle length: approx. 9cm. For use in studios, clubs, fitness centres and at home. 0.5 kg, yellow 71 146 3460 Each 1 kg, red 71 146 3402 Each 1.5 kg mint 71 146 3499 Each

Now Even Better!

2 kg, purple 71 146 3415 3 kg, green 71 146 3428 4 kg, blue 71 146 3431 5 kg, orange 71 146 3444 7.5 kg, pink 71 146 3473 10 kg, black 71 146 3486

Each Each Each Each Each Each

Weight Cuffs To increase power and speed

Variable weight loads Wrist / Ankle Irons d Variable Robust weight cuffs for fitness and running training. Variable weighting using the integrated stretch pockets, with Velcro system. • comfortable to wear • Flex-metal weight inlays • can also be used in water • durable material (100% nylon) 71 198 2448 2x 1.10 kg 71 198 2451 2x 2.25 kg

g e Wrist Irons

Weights with wide Velcro fastening to perfectly fit wrists. Durable 100% nylon cover. 2x 450 g. 71 198 2435 Pair

New

Irons f Hand Glove weights for fitness and running training. These gloves will fit all hands perfectly as they have a triple fastening system. Can be used in water. Approx. 2x 450 g. 100% nylon cover. 71 198 2406 Pair

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Cuffs g Weight The wider and longer velcro bands mean you can use these on both the wrists and ankles. 100% polyester. 71 218 3608 0.5 kg Each 71 218 3611 1.0 kg Pair 71 218 3624 1.5 kg Pair 71 218 3637 2.0 kg Pair 71 218 3640 2.5 kg Pair

t 157

Keep Fit, Stay Fit Order Now!

Seven Weight Classes

For approx 42 bars

Bars a Weighted These weighted bars are used in aerobics and in therapy. They are particularly suitable for warming up. Using the 1.05 m long bar will develop shoulder, chest and buttocks muscles. The bar diameters vary from 20 mm (1 kg) to 43 mm (6 kg). Weighted bars are made from flexible plastic and offer perfect protection when doing shoulder exercises. Can also be used in water. 71 146 6759 1 kg, orange 71 146 6762 1.5 kg, grey 71 146 6704 2 kg, light blue 71 146 6717 3 kg, red 71 146 6720 4 kg, green 71 146 6733 5 kg, yellow 71 146 6746 6 kg, dark blue

Trolleys for b Transport Weighted Bars This trolley offers enough space for approx. 42 bars. LxWxH: 53x53x85 cm, 15 kg. With wheels and handle. 71 146 6775

Vinyl Weights Set

Bodypump™ Barbell Programme

2.5 kg

Dumbell Set g Vinyl Set consists of • 2 each of: 1.5 kg, 3 kg and 5kg weights. • 1 practical storage rack to save safe when storing. Perfect for gyms, clubs and home use. LxWxH: 38x38x28 cm. 71 146 4405

5 kg

With holes for handles

Kit Fit'us Barbell Set

c Bodypump™ Quick Locks With quick release mechanism for weight bars ø 27 mm. 71 146 6674 Pair

Stands d Barbell A stable powder coated frame. Designed for 20 set. LxWxH: 195x84x138 cm. 71 146 6690

New e Bodypump™ Weight Discs Original weight discs. Plastic coated discs with steel sand filling. 71 146 6616 1 kg 71 146 6629 2.5 kg 71 146 6632 5 kg 71 146 6687 10 kg

Pair Pair Pair Pair

See also:

Punch Pad e Wall High quality strong natural

More training aids: • Skipping ropes page 229 • Weight cuffs page 157 • Weights page 176-177

Boxing Arm Makiwara d Kick Combination model, with 4 handles for vertical or horizontal use and eyelets for wall fixing. LxWxH: 60x35x25 cm, approx. 6 kg. 71 150 1719

And there's more: • punch bags from page 174

cows leather with foam padding and fixing set for wall assembly. Rectangular 71 150 1722 75x50x13 cm Pyramid 71 150 1735 50x50x25 cm

Boxing Accessories

Skipping Rope f Boxing The professional rope for boxing, fitNow! Order

ness, top-level and school sports. Adjustable plastic coated steel rope, approx. 280cm long. Unbreakable plastic handles with opening for additional weights. 71 150 1403

Skipping Rope g PVC For high speeds during stamina

g h Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

training. The length of the rope can be adjusted to approx. 3 m. With counter. 71 146 1028

See also: More skipping ropes on page 229

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Protection h Groin Hard wearing protection. 50% cotton, 40% polyester, 10% elasthane. The protective shell can be removed for washing using the velcro fastening. 71 149 9605 S 71 149 9618 M 71 149 9621 L 71 149 9634 XL

Guard i Mouth Special protection for the upper jaw. Warmed up with hot water. This will allow you to get the best bite and therefore the mouth guard will hold its shape, black. 71 150 0817

t 171

Boxing

Punch Padding a Hand Ideal for punching and sparring with a partner. Durable, ø 27cm, filling approx. 6 cm. 71 150 0123

Punch Boxing Gloves

The outer part of this glove is 100% cow hide, inner 100% polyurethane, with sewn in thumbs and velcro fastener. An economical glove to demanding beginners. Black/red. 71 150 0006 10 oz. 71 150 0019 12 oz.

Each

Real Leather

Professional Boxing g Prano Gloves

Hand Bandage e Boxing New workout hand bandage. Protects and stabilises the hand. Simple and fast to put on and remove. Ideal for course use. 60% cotton, 40% elasthane. 71 150 0918 S-M 71 150 0921 L-XL

New

AIBA

Easy to bandage without any help.

Boxing Bandages

With thumb loop and velcro (pair). Protects and stabilises hands in boxing gloves. Black, elastic, approx. 300 x 4 cm. 65% cotton, 40% polyester. 71 150 0950

172 t

Gloves f Boxing with Open Fingers Leather, with open fingers and rubber band fastener. Ideal for training on machines and self protection 71 149 9940 S 71 149 9953 M 71 149 9966 L

For Your Protection Hill “Five Star” i Green Competition Head Protector

Ideal sparring and competition glove. Leather with sewn-in thumb and velcro fastening With a very deep slit in the hand surface. 71 150 2246 White, 10 oz 71 150 2259 Black, 10 oz 71 150 2262 White, 12 oz 71 150 2275 Black, 12 oz

g New

Leather, pre-bent with elastic band fastening. Suitable for equipment and punch bag training. Black and red. 71 149 9924 S-M 71 149 9937 L-XL

New

Boxing Gloves d Workout High quality training gloves with velcro fastening making them easy to put on and take off. With sewn in thumb for avoiding injuries. Ideal for workouts, boxing aerobics and home boxing. Outer material: 100% polyurethane. Inner padding 100% polyester. 71 150 4037 8 oz. Pair 71 150 4008 10 oz. Pair 71 150 4011 12 oz. Pair 71 150 4024 14 oz. Pair

For punch bag training c Boxing Gloves

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

“Five Star” Competition comes with AIBA and DBV approval. Made from the best bovine leather and hand-made padding. Can be put on with one hand thanks to the double layered velcro and strap fastenings on the back. Sits really well and adopts no dampness. • red and blue • S, M, L and XL 71 150 3542-1 S, red 71 150 3555-1 S, blue 71 150 3568-1 M, red 71 150 3571-1 M, blue 71 150 3584-1 L, red 71 150 3597-1 L, blue 71 150 3601-1 XL, red 71 150 3614-1 XL, blue

Head Protector j Sparring Outer material 100% polyurethane, inner cover of high quality leather with extra thick foam cushioning. Protects zygomatic bone and chin, washable. For sparring. Adjustable using the Velcro fastener at rear. 71 150 0716 Sizes: S-M 71 150 0729 Sizes: L-XL Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Boxing c

Height adjustable

e • Height adjustable • 165-205 cm

Punch Bag c Cylinder The punch bag to have. Ideal for

Agression a Anti Punch Cylinder A sporty way to break down aggression. Offers the boxer great fun. Can be used indoors or outdoors. Base made of plastic, can be filled with sand or similar material. Cylinder filled with air, very strong. Height 150 cm. 71 133 7219

Punch Cylinder Set Consisting of: • 1 Punch Cylinder 71 133 7219 • 1 (8 oz.) pair of boxing gloves. 71 133 7280

training and breaking down aggression. The rotating upper body is 75 cm long and ø 30 cm. Simple to adjust height from 1.70-1.90 m. The standing box can be filled with sand or water (approx. 80 litres). 71 150 4314

Box Boxing Dummy d Fit Newly developed training aid for young and old, professional and beginner. Simple height adjustment using the Quicklock system (162-177-192 cm). Upper body made from strong, high quality and easy cared for material, suitable for punches up to 250 kg. Stable stand that can be filled with either sand or water. 71 150 4503

g Evolution Boxing Set Standing Evolution e Free Punch Bag More fun in fitness boxing. The professional training equipment for studios and ambitious fitness sports people. Large yellow hitting surface (130x40 cm). Height adjustable from 165-205 cm. Stable base, ø 75 cm, can be filled with sand or water (approx. 100 litres). Height: 165 cm. 71 150 4327

New

See also: More training aids: • Skipping ropes page 229 • Weight cuffs page 157 • Weights page 176-177

Standing Bag b Free Strong training aid for fitness studios and leisure use. The upper body has a 1 cm thick anti shock coating while inside the bag there is foam filling, 75 cm long, ø 35 cm. Simple to adjust height from 1.75-2 m. The standing box can be filled with sand or water (approx. 100 litres). 71 150 4301

Torso” Boxing f “Fantom Dummy The training partner in an exceptional design for versatile and realistic training. The body is multi-padded with triple height adjustment (180-185-190 cm). Upper body material is synthetic leather with a round rubber standing base. When hit the upper body torso goes into a rocking motion. The rocking improves training attacking and protective movements as well as leg-work. 71 150 4516

New • height adjustable • robust leather

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Evolution Boxing Set Professional fitness boxing training for use in gyms or at home. Contents: • 1 pair of 10 oz. training gloves with velcro fastening, • 1 pair of boxing hand bandages (60% cotton, 40% elasthane) • 1 free standing Evolution punch bag. 71 150 4330

t 173

Boxing for Everyone New

“Profi” Wall Holder

• Swivels

Line Punch Bag b Studio A professional punch bag made from particularly

Real Leather

non-tear material. Filled, includes 4 point hanging chain. Black. 71 150 0309 35x80 cm, 25 kg 71 150 0312 35x100 cm, 30 kg 71 150 0325 35x120 cm, 35 kg 71 150 0338 35x150 cm, 45 kg 71 150 0341 35x180 cm, 55 kg

b Price Tip

Buy now !

“Champion” Boxing Set

Bag c Punch Made of robust leather with special filling. This bag should not be missing from any club. Indispensable training aid for developing boxing accuracy and speed. Equipped with fastening hooks, swivel and a chain. 71 150 0208 35x90 cm, approx. 22 kg 71 150 0224 35x110 cm, approx. 28 kg 71 150 0211 35x130 cm, approx. 35 kg

Holder for Punch Bag d Wall For hanging punch bags up to Boxing Gloves

Boxing Bandages

“Champion” Boxing Set

Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

Punch Bag Wall Holder a Profi The steel construction has been developed to meet professional demands. Takes punch bags up to 60 kg. Extends approx. 1 metre. Punch bag and dowelling material are not included but snap hooks are. 71 150 1940 non-swivelling 71 150 1911 swivelling

The Champion Boxing Set has been specially assembled by professional boxers. It will stand up to the roughest treatment. Included in delivery: • Tearproof punch bag, 150 cm, 45 kg • Rotating wall holder made from steel extending 100 cm from wall • Competition quality leather boxing gloves (10 oz) with velcro fastening • Boxing bandages with thumb loop and velcro for stabilising the hands 71 150 1937

40kg safely and comfortably. The swing arm, that folds back, extends approx. 50 cm. Delivery includes Karabiner hooks but not screws or dowels for attaching to the wall. 71 150 1953

Hanger for Punch Bag e Roof Steel, galvanised, includes attaching hook. Delivery does not include dowels or screws. Will hold up to 55 kg. 71 150 1908 Replacement Chain for Punch Bag with four hanging points 71 150 2103

Boxing Set

“Kids” Boxing Set

“Chicago” Boxing Set

Perfect for youths and women

Boxing set for well trained youths and men

100 cm

80 cm

60 cm

Specially for children

h “Chicago” Boxing Set

Boxing Set f “Kids” The ideal beginner's package for young and old, especially suited to “messing” and breaking down aggression. The set consists of: • 1 punch bag (11 kg) is made from durable 100% nylon fabric, 28x60 cm, filled including hanging chain and swivel connection. • 1 pair of 8 oz. boxing gloves, with velcro fastening (Children can put gloves on and remove them alone). Only for private use. 71 150 4444

174 t

Set g Boxing For training and breaking down aggression. Suitable for youths and women. The set consists of: • 1 non-rip 100% cotton punch bag, approx. 30x80 cm, 18 kg, filled, red, hanging chain included • 1 pair of 10 oz. boxing gloves. Only for private use. 71 150 4415

The complete training package for home use. Contents: • 1 punch bag made from strong 100% nylon material, 30x100 cm, approx. 23 kg, including hanging chain. • 1 pair of 10 oz. pvc black boxing gloves, with velcro fastening, easy to put on and remove. • 1 skipping rope with rotating joint • 1 storage bag. The skipping rope and gloves can be stored in the punch bag after training. Only for private use. 71 150 4431

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Weights: Sets and Accessories 10 kg Chrome Weights Set

Delivered with a practical storage case 10 kg set c Dumbbells, This set comes in a practical ABS storage case. Consisting of: • 1 chrome weight bar (30 mm) • 2 star seals • chrome discs with rubber inlay (2x2.5 kg, 2x1.25 kg) 71 146 5613

Select tech™ a Bowflex® Weights Pair This technically advanced and patented weight system offers all the advantages of up to 17 different pairs of weights. • Small weights: SelectTech™ 221 from 2 to 21 kg in 15 different stages (stamped in kg). The weight can be changed is small stages, 1 to 2 kg, between 2 kg und 21 kg • Large weights: SelectTech™ 1090 from 4.5 to 41 kg in 17 different stages (stamped in pounds). The weight can be changed in small 5 pound stages (2.3 kg) between 10 pounds and 90pounds (4.5 41 kg). 71 203 6120 2-21 kg Pair 71 203 6146 4.5-41kg Pair

Tri-Tech Dumbbell Case Set Selecttech™ b Bowflex® 2 in 1 Weight Stand

d Tri-Tech Dumbbell Case

• the unique design offers ergonomic functions for optimal use of both Bowflex Selecttech™ weight sets • the storage position for the weight makes it comfortable and safe to lift them • large adjustable frame guarantees the maximum of standing security • size: LxWxH: 70.5x52x62 cm 71 203 6159

Set Triangular weights in a practical storage case. The set consists of: • 1 chrome weight bar • 2x 1.25 kg + 2x 2.5 kg chrome weights • 2 adjusting rings 71 146 3907

Weight Accessories Curl Bar

i Approx. 120 cm long, ø 30 mm, 7.5 kg. i Standard 71 146 6528 j safety thread j With 71 146 6560 k Weight Bars l k Long ø 30 mm m

New n Bell Storage Stands e Kettle A very stable storage stand. Suitable

With safety thread

p l Long Weight Bars With safety thread, ø 30 mm, 180 cm, ca. 10 kg. 71 146 6557

for approx. 150 kg per stand. Size: LxWxH: 150x60x80 cm. Weight: 20 kg 71 145 7618

Bells f Kettle Kettle Bells are mainly used for ballistic type exercises e.g. snatches, lunges, swings or long cycles. These exercises require speed but also muscular endurance. Kettle Bells are more compact than dumbbells and are therefore more suitable for plyometric training or throwing exercises. They can however also be used in strength training e.g. bent presses. 71 217 4307 8 kg Each 71 217 4310 12 kg Each 71 217 4323 16 kg Each 71 217 4336 20 kg Each 71 217 4349 24 kg Each 71 217 4352 4 kg Each 71 217 4365 28 kg Each 71 217 4378 32 kg Each 71 217 4381 36 kg Each 71 217 4394 40 kg Each

71 146 6515 160 cm long, approx. 9 kg 71 146 6502 180 cm long, approx. 10 kg 71 146 6531 200 cm long, approx. 10 kg

Weights Bar m Short ø 30 mm, 35 cm long, approx. 2.5 kg. 71 146 5802 Bar n Dumbbell With safety thread and seal, length

Lifter's Belt g Weight Padded and made of robust leather, approx. 12cm wide. 71 146 7039 65-80 cm 71 146 7000 75-90 cm 71 146 7013 85-100 cm 71 146 7026 105-120 cm

approx. 35 cm, ø 30 mm, approx. 2.5 kg. 71 146 5815 Rings o Adjustment Comes with spring loaded stopper, ø 30 mm. 71 150 6004

Pair

Adjusting Ring p Replacement For ø 30 mm weights bars. Shoulder Protection Roll For 30 mm diameter weight bars. Black, anti-bacterial, pitted leather surface, 50 cm long. 71 209 0001

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

71 150 6020 With safety thread 71 150 6017 With screw

Pair Pair

Locking Cap q Spring For ø 30 mm weights bars. 71 150 6033

Pair

t 175

Barbells Cast iron

Barbell Stands Stainless Steel Lugs

• for dumbbells and training barbells • hole: ø 30 mm

Rubberised

• long lasting and rust free • quiet • cast iron core • hole: ø 30 mm

Chrome

• chromed with rubber inlay • hole: ø 30 mm

Storage Rack g Disc Strong disc holder stand with 7 stainless steel holders for space saving storage of discs with 30 holds. LxWxH: 78x45x100 cm. 71 145 9210

Competition

• cast iron • in internationally prescribed colours • hole: ø 50.5 mm

Details: see table

220 cm

Competition Barbell

e Made of special steel. Length 220 cm with swivel

socket, ø 50 mm, bar 30 mm, grip range 131 cm, 450 kg max. capacity, 20 kg, Please order seals separately. 71 146 2409

Star Seal For the competition barbells, 2.5 kg. Not illustrated. 71 146 2412

Each

Cast Iron a

Rubber b

Black, approx. 120 cm with 50 mm disc space, 9.5 kg. Delivery does not include clasps. 71 146 2425

for Storage or Knee-bending Exercises h Rack Made of steel tubes, adjustable height 105-185 m, approx. 70x35x115 cm. Will support up to 300kg (when anchored to the floor.) With safeguards 71 145 7605

60 kg Disc Sets

Weights Weight

120 cm

Competition SZ Bar

Chrome c

0.5 kg

Competition d -

71 146 4809 71 146 4900 71 145 8709

60kg Cast Iron Weight Disc Set Consisting of black weight discs with 30mm holes ø 30 mm (4x10 kg, 2x5 kg, 4x 2.5 kg) 71 146 5004

1.25 kg 71 146 4812 71 146 4913 71 145 8712 71 146 2308 2.5 kg 71 146 4825 71 146 4926 71 145 8725 71 146 2311 5 kg 71 146 4838 71 146 4939 71 145 8738 71 146 2324

60 kg Set of Rubber Weight Discs

Barbell Sets Carefully selected barbell sets. Made from cast iron or chrome with a long weight bar, chrome, 180 cm including seal. Sets consist of:

This set consists of rubber weight discs with a 30 mm diameter hole, (4x 10 kg, 2x 5 kg, 4x 2.5 kg). 71 146 5046

60 kg cast iron set

10 kg 71 146 4841 71 146 4942 71 145 8741 71 146 2337 15 kg 71 146 4854 71 146 4955 71 145 8754 71 146 2340 20 kg 71 146 4867 71 146 4968 71 145 8767 71 146 2354 25 kg

60 kg Set of Chrome Weight Discs This set consists of chrome weight discs with a 30 mm diameter hole, (4x 10 kg, 2x 5 kg, 4x 2.5 kg). 71 212 4403

• 60 kg sets: 4x2.5 kg, 4x5 kg, 2x10 kg • 100 kg sets: 4x1.25 kg, 2x2.5 kg, 4x5 kg, 6x10 kg 71 146 3301 60 kg, cast iron 71 146 3314 100 kg, cast iron 71 146 3327 60 kg, chrome 71 146 3330 100 kg, chrome

71 146 2366

176 t

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Dumbbells Dumbbell Stands and Holders

d TKO SDS Weight Sets

TKO SDS Weights No ends coming off anymore

• patented Tri Grip® - makes it easier to grip • patented SDS locking system for weight ends: no more screwing on • high quality rubber cover on the weight ends • large easy to read writing • the following sets are available (each weight has two discs): • 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18 and 20 kg • 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36, 38 and 40 kg • 42, 44, 46, 48 and 50 kg 71 146 6401 2-20 kg 71 146 6414 22-40 kg 71 146 6427 42-50 kg

a For compact weights with sloping Storage Stand

storage. Strong steel construction. Double storage area. 150x65x73 cm. 71 145 9252

Dumbells e Chrome For gymnastic and weight lifting exercises. Price per item. 71 146 7404 1 kg 71 146 7417 2 kg 71 146 7420 3 kg 71 146 7433 4 kg 71 146 7446 5 kg 71 146 7459 6 kg 71 146 7462 7 kg 71 146 8003 8 kg 71 146 8016 9 kg 71 146 7488 10 kg

New Chrome Weights

Chrome Weights Set Consists of a weight set from 1 to 10 kg (1 pair each). 71 146 7491

Rack b Storage Space saving and visible storage rack for all barbells. Also can take dumbbells and kettle bells and discs. LxWxH: 77x71x79 cm. 71 145 9294

New Side Weight Stands c TKO Weight stands for eight pairs of weights, with storage room on two sides. The patented front load design allows the user to hold on comfortably in standing. • space saving - the back fits against straight walls • a stable safety area for the weights • for weights with a holding width of over approx 14.5 cm • stand weight: 32 kg • HxWxD: 114,5x43x28 cm • weights not included 71 146 6430

Dumbbell Sets

Dumbbells

Dumbbells with exchangeable cast iron discs, short bars 35 cm long, ø 30 mm, approx. 2.5 kg. Stacking 10, 15 or 20 kg. 2x 1.25 kg, 2x 2.5 kg = 10 kg 71 146 5509 2x 1.25 kg, 2x 5 kg = 15 kg 71 146 5512 2x 1.25 kg, 2x 2.5 kg, 2x 5 kg = 20 kg 71 146 5525

Dumbells g Compact The classic dumbell set used by top athletes for training. Permanently screwed-on cast iron dumbells, non interchangeable. Individually priced. 71 145 9803-0 2.5 kg 71 145 9803-1 5 kg 71 145 9803-2 7.5 kg 71 145 9803-3 10 kg 71 145 9803-4 12.5 kg 71 145 9803-5 15 kg 71 145 9803-6 17.5 kg 71 145 9803-7 20 kg 71 145 9803-8 22.5 kg 71 145 9803-9 25 kg 71 145 9816-0 27.5 kg 71 145 9816-1 30 kg

Compact Weights

Compact Weights Set Set of 24 dumbbell weights g 2 pairs each of 2.5-30 kg. 71 145 9829

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 177

Home Trainers

Home Use

New Back friendly position

New Display

“Giro M” Home Trainer b Kettler The new beginner's model from Ket“Ambition” a Bremshey Recumbent A seated home trainer from the new generation from Bremshey. 71 201 4311

And there's more: Cardio Pulse on page 182

tler. Comes with an easy to use training computer with permanent display for six functions and change of display, alarm if heart rate exceeds limit, recovery heart rate with fitness grades and time. 71 225 2100

“Ambition” c Bremshey Home Trainer A beginner's model from the new Bremshey Generation. 71 201 4340

Our tip:

“Giro P” Home Trainer d Kettler The new Kettler home trainer with 12 training programmes. Saves data for up to four people. 71 225 2113

Model Manufacturer Timing Training distance Total kilometres Speed Cadence Calorie usage Target zone training Hand h.r. / Ear clip / Chest strap Signal at upper h.r. optical / acoustic Recovery h.r. with fitness marks Pre-programming Programme / h.r. controlled Flywheel Resistance levels Power supply Assembled size (LxWxH in cm) Max. weight Article number

178 t

Giro M Kettler • • • • • • •/-/o/• • -/6 kg 8 Batteries 89x59x142 cm 110 kg 71 225 2100

“Golf P” / “P Eco” Home Trainer f Kettler The Golf P is a high quality sporty home trainer with

Kettler “Golf M” Home Trainer

The new successful model from Kettler has a modern and easy to use training computer. Very wide and low access. 71 225 2126 c Ambition Bremshey • • • • • • • •/-/o -/• 3/11 kg 10 Batteries 99x55x134 cm 135 kg 71 201 4340

Giro P

Kettler • • • • • • •/•/o o/• • 12 / 1 9 kg 16 230 V 94x59x142 cm 130 kg 71 225 2113

eight training programmes. As the Golf P Eco is generator driven it can create its own electricity (Eco option in white). 71 225 2139 Golf P 71 225 2142 Golf P Eco

e Golf M

a Ambition Recumbent

Kettler • • • • • Depend on load level • •/o/o •/• • • -/7 kg 10 Batteries 110x53x135 cm 150 kg 71 225 2126

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Bremshey • • • • • • • •/-/o -/• 3/11 kg 10 Batteries 170x33x78 cm 135 kg 71 201 4311

f Golf P / P Eco Kettler • • • • • Depend on load level • •/o/o •/• • • 8/1 9 kg 15 P: 230 V / P Eco: Generator 110x53x135 cm 150 kg 71 225 2139 / 71 225 2142

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Ergometers for Home Use

Home Use

Display

“Pacer” Ergometer a Bremshey Ergometers with low entry level and versatile consoles that are easy to use. 71 201 4353

“Explorer” Ergometer “B 5.1e” Ergometer c Bremshey b Reebok Stable ergometers with low entry level and colour LCD Ergometers for ambitious and performance orientated display. 71 201 4366

sports people and for rehabilitation. 71 212 3918

Our tip:

New

“EX3” Ergometer d Kettler The basic model in the ergometer range with low access and training computer with LCD display. 71 225 2155

Model

a Pacer

Manufacturer Timing Training distance Total kilometres Speed Cadence Energy usage Hand h.r. / Ear clip / Chest strap Signal at upper h.r. optical / acoustic Recovery h.r. Programme / h.r. controlled PC Interface Flywheel Resistance levels in watts Adjustable watt levels Power supply Assembled size (LxWxH in cm) Max. weight Article number

Bremshey • • • • • • •/-/o •/• • 6/1 11 kg 25-350 25 Watt 230 V 105x26x73 cm 135 kg 71 201 4353

“Pacer” Recumbent e Bremshey Ergometer The new seated ergometer is exceptional thanks to the ergonomic sitting position. 71 201 4324 b Bike 5.1e Reebok • • • • • • •/-/o •/• • 6/1 10 kg 25-400 25 Watt 230 V 100x55x148 cm 150 kg 71 212 3918

c Explorer Bremshey • • • • • • •/-/o •/• • 12/ 1 14 kg 25-400 25 Watt 230 V 90x55x134 cm 135 kg 71 201 4366

“X 1” Ergometer f Kettler This beginners model is part of the new generation of Kettler machines. Only for home use. 71 146 9019

d Exum

e Recumbent Pacer

Finnlo • • • • • • -/•/o •/• • 12 / 4 10 kg 25-400 25 Watt 230 V 110x55x129 cm 150 kg 71 206 7908

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Bremshey • • • • • • •/-/o •/• • 12 / 1 13 kg 25-350 25 Watt 230 V 162x69x119 cm 135 kg 71 201 4324

f X1 Kettler • • • • • -/•/o •/• • 2/1 • 10 kg 25-400 25 Watt 230 V 105x53x128 cm 130 kg 71 146 9019

t 179

Ergometers for Home Use

Home Use

B5.8e Limited Edition Ergometer b Reebok “B5.7e” Ergometer a Reebok A top level ergomoter for ambitious and performA performance ergometer with a fresh design. Comes with a docking station for an iPod and loudspeakers. 71 225 2201

ance oriented athletes and for rehabilitation. 71 212 3976

“X 3” Ergometer c Kettler Technically the same as the “X 1” ergometer but with additional programmes. Only for home training. 71 146 9022

Our tip:

“X 5” Ergometer d Kettler This ergometer is lower for getting onto. Only for home training. 71 146 9035

Model Manufacturer Timing Training distance Total kilometres Speed Cadence Energy usage Hand h.r. / Ear clip / Chest strap Signal at upper h.r. optical / acoustic Recovery h.r. Programme / h.r. controlled PC Interface Flywheel Resistance levels in watts Adjustable watt levels Power supply Assembled size (LxWxH in cm) Max. weight Article number

180 t

“X 7” Ergometer e Kettler This is the perfect piece of technology

“RX 7” Sitting f Kettler Ergometer

for individual training. Only for home training. 71 146 9048

Perfect training in a comfortable sitting position. Only for home use. 71 146 9051

a B5.8e Ltd. Reebok • • • • • • •/•/o •/• • 17 / 1 10 kg 25-400 5 Watt 230 V 100x55x148 cm 150 kg 71 225 2201

b B5.7e Reebok • • • • • • •/-/• •/• • 6/1 10 kg 25-400 5 Watt 230 V 100x55x148 cm 150 kg 71 212 3976

c X3 Kettler • • • • • • -/•/• •/• • 8/1 • 8 kg 25-400 25 Watt 230 V 100x53x128 cm 130 kg 71 146 9022

d X5 Kettler • • • • • • -/•/• •/• • 8/1 • 10 kg 25-400 25 Watt 230 V 115x53x130 cm 150 kg 71 146 9035

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

e X7 Kettler • • • • • • -/•/• •/• • 48 / 5 • 10 kg 25-400 25 Watt 230 V 115x53x133 cm 150 kg 71 146 9048

f RX 7 Kettler • • • • • • -/•/• •/• • 48 / 5 • 10 kg 25-400 25 Watt 230 V 150x61x105 cm 150 kg 71 146 9051

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Ergometers: Semi Professional Use

Semi-Professionel

New

New U.N.O. Ergometer EB 3000

a The U.N.O. equipment series has now been successfully completed with the EB3000 ergometer. It matches U.N.O. machines high standards and sets new standards. 71 206 0428

Fitness® E3200 Deluxe b Vision The new E3200 series of ergometers is very suitable for cyclists. With multiply adjustable seat. 71 207 4056

“Carbon Bike EMS” Fitness c BH Ergometer This semi-professional ergometer has been designed and tested with very intensive training in mind. Comes with ventilator fan and castors for transporting. 71 218 1921

Our tip:

New Fitness® Recumbent e Vision Ergometer R2250 Deluxe Pleasant and comfortable seat position allows excellent cardio training. New with newly developed ergonomic seat. 71 207 4069

“E60” Ergometer d Tunturi The performance series from Tunturi in a new design. 71 145 6530

Model Manufacturer Timing Training distance Total kilometres Speed Cadence Energy usage Hand h.r. / Chest strap Signal at upper h.r. optical / acoustic Recovery h.r. Resistance levels Programme / h.r. controlled / user PC Interface Flywheel Resistance levels in watts Adjustable watt levels Power supply Assembled size (LxWxH in cm) Max. weight Guarantee private / semi prof. / prof. Article number

b E3200 Deluxe Vision Fitness • • • • • • • /o • /• • 20 10 / 4 / 4 11 kg 25-400 5 Watt 230 V 104x66x142 cm 140 kg 3/1/71 207 4056

c Carbon Bike EMS BH-Fitness • • • • • • • /o • /• • 16 12 / 4 / 1 14 kg 10-350 5 Watt 230 V 114x54x153 cm 150 kg 2/1/71 218 1921

d E60

a EB 3000

Tunturi • • • • • • - /• • /• • 16 23 / 1 / 8 • 10 kg 25-400 5 Watt 230 V 96x65x124 cm 135 kg 2/1/71 145 6530

UNO Fitness • • • • • • • /o • 20 10 / 2 / 32 11,5 kg 25-400 25 Watt 230 V 109x50x139,5 cm 150 kg 3/2/1 71 206 0428

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

e R2250 Deluxe Vision Fitness • • • • • • • /o • /• • 20 10 / 4 / 4 11 kg 25-400 5 Watt 230 V 163x66x135 cm 140 kg 3/1/71 207 4069

t 181

Cross Trainers for Home Use

Home Use

Our tip: “Satura M / M b Kettler EXT” Crosstrainer The starter model for the new Kettler Satura series with manual performance adjustment. Satura M EXT with more ergonomic flat and long steps. 71 146 9729 M 71 146 9732 M EXT

New

Crosstrainer “Vito XLS” a Kettler The successor to Vito XL in a new design. Whiteanthracite. 71 146 9716

Accessories

Cardio Pulse Set e Kettler An ECG-precise heart rate monitor for all Kettler home trainers with a facility for recording heart rate. The heart rate information is transmitted remotely to your training computer and appears on the digital display. Possible measurement inaccuracies are almost non-existent due to this sports-medicine method. 71 146 8700

“Rivo” Crosstrainer d Kettler The new “Rivo” Crosstrainer is very easy to use and “Vito XS” Cross Trainer c Kettler Compact cross trainer from the proven quality Kettler HKS series. Made in Germany. 71 146 9673

Model Manufacturer Timing Training distance Total kilometres Speed Cadence Energy usage Ear clip / Hand h.r. / Chest strap Signal at upper h.r. optical Recovery h.r. Resistance levels Programme / h.r. controlled / user PC Interface Flywheel Resistance levels in watts Adjustable watt levels Power supply Assembled size (LxWxH in cm) Max. weight Article number

is also very stable and excellent quality. ”Rivo P2 has additional programmes and adjustments available on the computer. 71 225 2403 M 71 225 2416 P

d Rivo M / P Kettler • • • • • • M: - / • / - P: o / • / o • • M: 8 / P: 16 M: - / - / - P: 12 / 1 / 4 M: 12 kg / P: 18 kg Batteries M: 132x68x163 cm / P: 150x68x169 cm M: 110 kg / P: 130 kg M: 71 225 2403 / P: 71 225 2416

• = Included in order

182 t

c Vito XS Kettler • • • • • • •/•/o • • 10 -/-/14 kg Batteries 136x53x154 cm 130 kg 71 146 9673

o = Available as an accessory

Now! Order

Transmitter Set f Polar T31 chest strap transmitter 71 146 1259 uncoded 71 218 2706 Coded

a Vito XLS Kettler • • • • • • •/•/o • • 10 -/-/18 kg Batteries 150x53x156 cm 150 kg 71 146 9716

b Satura M / M EXT Kettler • • • • • • •/•/o • • 10 -/-/18 kg Batteries 162x56x156 cm 150 kg 71 146 9729 / 71 146 9732

– = Not available

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Cross Trainers for Home Use

Home Use

Our tip:

“Pacer Front” Cross Trainer a Bremshey With the drive mechanism at the front, this cross trainer ergometer ensures pleasant movement. 71 201 4379

damage. It is made from high quality vinyl and has a pore-free surface (easy to clean). The low height (2 mm) means that no one will trip over it. 140x60 cm. 71 198 3005 Black 71 198 3021 Transparent

Manufacturer Timing Training distance Total kilometres Speed Cadence Energy usage ear clip / Hand h.r. / Chest strap Signal at upper h.r. optical Recovery h.r. Resistance levels Programme / h.r. controlled / user PC Interface Flywheel Resistance levels in watts Adjustable watt levels Power supply Assembled size (LxWxH in cm) Max. weight Article number

ambitious and performance oriented sports people. 71 212 3947

rehabilitation. 71 212 3963

New

Now! Order

Mat for Fitness Machines d Protective This mat will protect your floor from sweat and

Model

“5.7e” Crosstrainer c Reebok “C 5.1e” Cross Trainer The top cross trainer in the Performance series, for b Reebok Offers very good and pleasant whole body training for ambitious and high performance athletes and for use in

b Cross 5.1e Reebook • • • • • • -/•/o • 16 6/1/20 kg 25-400 25 Watt 230 V 105x58x162 cm 130 kg 71 212 3947

Satura E / E EXT Crosstrainer Fitness Elliptical “X1500” f Kettler e Vision The top model in the new Kettler Satura series, with a The series of machines from Vision Fitness. Now you have the opportunity to choose the console and functions yourself. 71 207 4160 Deluxe 71 207 4173 Premium a Pacer Front Bremshey • • • • • • -/-/o • • 12 6/1/1 34 kg 25-250 25 Watt 230 V 182x71x168 cm 135 kg 71 201 4379

• = Included in order

c cCross 5.7e Reebook • • • • • • -/•/o • 16 6/1/20 kg 25-400 25 Watt 230 V 105x58x162 cm 150 kg 71 212 3963

o = Available as an accessory

very comprehensive range of attributes. PC interface included. 71 146 9745 E 71 146 9758 E EXT

e X1500 Deluxe / Premium Vision Fitness • • • • • Del. - / • / o - Prem. - / • / • 20 Del: 7 / - / - Prem: 18 / 3 / 5 9,5 kg 40-250 5 Watt 230 V 145x66x170 cm 135 kg 71 207 4160 / 71 207 4173

f Satura E / E EXT Kettler • • • • • • •/•/o • • 75 E: 8/ 1 / - E EXT: 48 / 5 / 4 • 22 kg 25-400 5 Watt 230 V 162x56x156 cm 150 kg 71 146 9745 / 71 146 9758

– = Not available

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 183

Cross Trainers: Semi Professional

Semi-Professional

b Fitness® “X6200 HRT” a Vision Elliptical Trainer

“XE2000” b U.N.O. Crosstrainer

The new X6200 series. Comes with an exceptionally long stepping length and moving pedals, that make the movements very regular and smooth. Now in three models: Simple, deluxe and premium 71 207 4131 Simple 71 207 4144 Deluxe 71 207 4157 Premium

The XE2000 comes with a running surface that can be set at any angle and the cockpit has a ventilator. 71 206 0431

Our tip: Simple

Deluxe

Premium

”C60 19'' d Tunturi Crosstrainer

U.N.O. “XE4000” Crosstrainer

c The XE4000 comes with a running

The popular C60 with the unique Tunturi console which has a colour display. Easy to read the exact information. 71 145 6572

surface that can be angled at any level and an electronically controlled gradient. The cockpit has a ventilator. 71 206 0444

d Model Manufacturer Timing Training distance Total kilometres Speed Cadence Energy usage Hand h.r. / Chest strap Signal at upper h.r. optical / acoustic Recovery h.r. Programme / h.r. controlled / user PC Interface Chip card reader Slope adjustment Flywheel Resistance levels in watts Adjustable watt levels Power supply Assembled size (LxWxH in cm) Max. weight Guarantee private / semi professional / professional Article number

a X6200 Simple

aX6200 Deluxe

Vision Fitness • • • • •/o 7/-/11 kg 40-250 230 V 201x69x175 cm 140 kg 2/1/71 207 4131

Vision Fitness • • • • • •/o 7/-/11 kg 40-250 5 Watt 230 V 201x69x175 cm 140 kg 2/1/71 207 4144

• = Included in order

184 t

a X6200 Premium Vision Fitness • • • • • •/• 18 / 3 / 5 11 kg 40-250 5 Watt 230 V 201x69x175 cm 140 kg 2/1/71 207 4157

o = Available as an accessory

b XE2000 U.N.O. • • • • • • •/o • • 4/2/1 13 kg 25-400 20 Watt 230 V 165x61x173 cm 170 kg 3/2/71 206 0431

c XE4000 U.N.O. • • • • • • •/o • • 4/2/1 • 12,2 kg 25-400 20 Watt 230 V 209x60x167 cm 170 kg 3/2/1 71 206 0444

d C60 19'' Tunturi • • • • • • •/• • • 121 / 1 / 100 • 37 kg 20-350 20 Watt 230 V 180x61x163 cm 135 kg 2/1/71 145 6572

– = Not available

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Treadmills for Home Use

Home Use

Display

3 year guarantee Display Paragon 308

“Marathon a Kettler TX” Treadmill

Display Paragon 508

A treadmill for leisure runners and walkers who are highly selective with regard to quality and price. Equipped with slope, routes and time programmes as well as a heart rate controlled programme to tailor programmes to suit your needs. Only for home use. 71 145 4837 TX 1 71 145 4879 TX 5 71 145 4866 TX 3

Can be folded away saving space

“Paragon” Treadmill b Horizon Easy to use, high performance and

quality, the Paragon series also has an innovative folding system with four castors to make it very compact in storage. Silver/ anthracite. 71 199 8841 Paragon 308 71 199 8854 Paragon 508

New This protection set contains four different high quality protective and maintenance products and two micro fibre cloths: • 1x 150 ml Glide & Care – for treating adjusting parts and joints • 1x 150 ml Active Cleaner – for cleaning deep in the surfaces • 1x 150 ml Hygiene Fresher – for hygienic disinfection of contact surfaces • 1x 150 ml Top Glide – for special treatment of the ability to glide on treadmills • 1x microfibre cloth “fine” • 1x microfibre cloth “coarse” • 1x spray tube extension 71 146 9282

Manufacturer Timing Training distance Speed Calorie usage Hand h.r. / Chest strap Maximum h.r. Recovery h.r. Programme / h.r. controlled / user Motor output (duration) Speed min. / max. kmph PC Interface Slope adjustment Running area (LxW in cm) Assembled size (LxWxH in cm) Size when folded down (LxWxH in cm) Max. weight Article number

Display

“TR1000” Treadmill d U.N.O. The new starter model for the U.N.O.

Product c Kettler Protection Set

Model

e New

treadmill series stands out for its ease of use, appealing looks and low weight. 71 218 3800

“TR3000” Treadmill e U.N.O. The new high performance treadmill from U.N.O. has a wealth of programmes and can be directly controlled from the handrails. 71 218 3813

Silicon Spray For all treadmills 71 200 9807

b Paragon 308 Horizon Fitness • • • • •/o • 6/1/1,29 kW 0,8-16 0-10% 130x50 cm 181x86x138 cm 89x86x167 cm 135 kg 71 199 8841

d TR 1000 U.N.O. • • • • •/0 • 10 / 2 / 2 1,32 kW 1-8 0-14% 140x61 cm 191x92x133 cm 105x92x167 cm 140 kg 71 218 3800

• = Included in order

Now! Order

a TX 1

b Paragon 508

a TX 3

Kettler • • •

Horizon Fitness • • • • •/o • • 15 / 2 / 5 1,8 kW 0,8-20

Kettler • • •

-/• • • 4/1/1,3 kW 1-16 • 0-12% 140x51 cm 196x88,5x134 cm 89x88,5x190 cm 140 kg 71 145 4837

0-12% 150x50 cm 200x86x138 cm 89x86x185 cm 160 kg 71 199 8854

o = Available as an accessory

-/• • • 6/2/1,3 kW 1-16 • 0-12% 140x51 cm 196x88,5x134 cm 89x88,5x190 cm 150 kg 71 145 4866

e TR 3000 U.N.O. • • • • •/o • 9/9/9 2,2 kW 1-18 0,25-14% 140x51 cm 195x88x144,5 cm 105x88x171 cm 140 kg 71 218 3813

a TX 5 Kettler • • • • •/• • • 10 / 8 / 2,2 kW 1-20 • 0-12% 140x51 cm 200x87x145 cm 89x87x192 cm 150 kg 71 145 4879

– = Not available

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 185

Semi-Professional Treadmills

Semi-Professionell

TR 5000 Treadmill a U.N.O. The TR 5000 provides a natural walking and running feeling as well as effective shock absorption for joint friendly training thanks to the EAS shock absorbers. The speed and gradient are easy to control while training using the handrails. 71 218 3842

Handle for b

Now! Order

6 Pro” Treadmill b U.N.O.“LTX The top model in the LTX series for

for “LTX 6 Pro” c Handle Treadmill This stable steel tubing construction allows safe running training. These longer handles are 125 cm. 71 206 0398 Pair

Fitness® “T9700 HRT” d Vision Treadmill

professional use. Runs on the extremely strong and silent 2.2 kw AC motor (continuously running). Guarantee: 3 years private use. Extended handles are optional. Includes Polar chest strap. 71 206 0327

The top model in the Vision Fitness series. Suitable for clubs, schools, hotels etc. With extra large running surface. Computer displays training values (time, speed, slope, heart rate, calories, programme profile, lap time and average speed). The T9700 HRT also graphically displays the current speed and slope. There are 16 training programmes in total of which five are user controlled and four are heart rate controlled programmes. 71 207 4229 T9700 Simple 71 207 4203 T9700 HRT

Our tip:

b 2.2 kilo watt ac motor

Model Manufacturer Timing Training distance Speed Calorie usage Hand h.r. / Chest strap Programme / heart rate / user Motor output (duration) Speed min. / max. kmph Slope adjustment Running area (LxW in cm) Assembled size (LxWxH in cm) Max. weight Guarantee private / semi professional / professional Article number

a TR 5000 U.N.O. • • • • •/o 9/2/2 2,6 kW 1-18 15 Stufen 152,5x56 198x81x143 160 kg 3/2/1 71 218 3842

• = Included in order

186 t

b LTX 6 Pro U.N.O. • • • • •/• 7/1/1 2,2 kW 0,8-25 0 - 15% 157,5x55 210x83x146 200 kg 3/2/1 71 206 0327

o = Available as an accessory

d T9700 Simple Vision Fitness • • • • -/11 / - / 5 2,2 kW 0,8-20 0 - 15% 152x51 203x74x145 190 kg 3/2/1 71 207 4229

d T9700 HRT Vision Fitness • • • • •/• 11 / 4 / 5 2,2 kW 0,8-20 0 - 15% 152x51 203x74x145 190 kg 3/2/1 71 207 4203

– = Not available

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Rowing Machines & Indoor Bikes New Suitable for spinning classes in gyms.

“Kadett” Rowing a Kettler Machine The rowing machine with special outrigger construction. Equipped with training computer displaying time, performance, stroke rate, distance, energy consumption, heart rate and automatic change notification. Pre-programmes: time, distance, total distance, stroke rate with optical and acoustic signal (can be shut off), 2 hydraulic cylinders, adjustable pull resistance level from 1-12, smoothly gliding seat on rails and pivoting footplates with toe clips. Position can be individually adjusted to suit leg

position, non slip floor caps, comprehensive training manual. Maximum user weight 130 kg. Assembled size: (max) 150x170x46 cm. Only for home use. 71 145 5742

• Shimano double function pedals (normal/click) • Handlebars and saddle are horizontally and vertically adjustable at any level Indoor bike for professional and commercial • 30 mm stainless steel axles use. • 5 year guarantee on the frame • Strong oval 3 mm tubing • LxHxW: 130x62x120 cm • Flywheel 27.6 kg 71 206 9148 • High quality slatted belt drive • Orange powder coated

Physio-Fit d Sport-Thieme “Indoor Cycle”

“Ergocoach b Kettler LS” Rowing Machine • Rope pull rowing ergometer with new linear guiding system for the ball bearinged rolling seat • Training computer with easy to read LCD display and graphical profile display, 10 programmes including heart rate monitored training and heart rate zone setting for fat burning and fitness zones, PC interface • Heart rate monitoring via a POLAR chest strap (included in order) • Percentage display of upper heart rate with optical and acoustic warning signal • Sweat resistant foil covered keyboard • Induction braking system, speed dependent output regulation up to 500 W • Castors on front • Maximum weight: 130 kg • Assembled size (LxWxH): 180x55x59 cm 71 146 9279

“Coach LS” c Kettler Rowing Machine • Heart rate monitoring via a POLAR cheststrap (included in order) • Percentage display of upper heart rate zones as well as optical and acoustical warning signal • Sweat resistant foil keyboard • Magnetic braking system, 10 resistance adjustment levels • Castors at the front • Maximum weight: 130 kg • Assembled size (LxWxH in cm): 180x55x59 71 146 9266

New

897” Speed Bike e “XT Very strong and easy to handle • 20 kg flywheel • Pedalling resistance can be set at any level • The saddle is adjustable by height and length • Handlebars with integrated training computer for speed, time, distance, calories used and scan functions • High quality castors on the front • Height levellers on the rear • With freewheel • Only for private use LxWxH: 126x45x113 cm. Max. user weight 150 Kg 71 212 2609

Price Tip

Display

f “Concept 2E” Rowing Machine The Concept 2 Indoor Rowing machine has long been the top professional rowing machine worldwide. The new “E” model will train your body safely and effectively. Extremely stable thanks to the new leg style, more comfortable with a higher sitting position, integrated digital heart rate monitoring and PM4 monitor with race function. Computer display of heart rate, calories and metres rowed. The pre-programmed and self defining programmes will add to the variety of training. Assembled (LxWxH): 240x61x51 cm. 71 207 2917

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 187

Fitness for Home Needs “Apollo” Hanging a Kettler Stretching Gravity Trainer The “Over head” position has been recommended by sports and orthopaedic doctors for relieving discs in the spinal cord and preventing back pain and muscle tension. Equipped with: • strong precision steel tubing frame (tunnel tubing) with swivel joints

Home Use • quick adjusting of foot holders and securing notch • quick adjustment of the maximum slope to a vertical over head position; secured against unsupervised use. Maximum user weight: 110 kg. Assembled size: LxWxH: 150x85x226 cm Can be folded down to save space: DxWxH:40x85x200 cm 71 146 8902

Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

Space saving

b+ c storage

a “Apollo” Hanging Stretching Machine

on weight benches by folding upwards

100 Weights b Primus Bench A weights bench that meets the needs of regular home training. Equipped with: back padding with adjustable angles, height adjustable weight bar rest, adjustable leg curler, takes 100 kg weights, leg curler 40 kg. Assembled size (LxWxH): 203x101x108 cm, LxWxH: 75x101x163 cm (in storage format). Delivery does not include weights or weight bars. 71 147 1319

c Kettler “Classic” Fitness Centre Highly functional and strong for professional training at home. Equipped with: powder coated tunnel steel tubing 51x45 mm, variable seat and back parts. Can be folded away to save space, height adjustable, chromed weight rest, variable leg curler, lat pull tower, butterfly with adjustable arm padding, bench press set with quick adjusting system, extensive training instructions. Size when assembled: LxWxH: 250x104x200 cm, Size in storage LxWxH:135x104x200 cm. Takes up to: 120 kg on weights bench, 60 kg on pull tower, 60 kg on leg curler. Delivery does not include weights or weights bar. 71 145 7764

e g

New

Ab & Back Trainer d Finnlo Multi functional stomach / back trainer. With the ergonomically perfect body position for stomach and back training. Avoids lordosis problems for the spine. Weights not included. • Max. weight: 150 kg • LxWxH: 152x68x82 cm / 118x68x33 cm when folded away 71 218 3709

“Vario” Stomach / e Kettler Back Trainer • For ambitious training of the stomach muscles and the upper body with dumbbells • High quality, hygienic, ergonomic padding material • Adjustable hip and pelvis padding • Adjustable back padding • Folds away saving space via an innovative folding mechanism

188 t

• Height adjustable stand base for different training positions and intensities • Folds away saving space via an innovative folding mechanism • Max. weight: 130 kg • Assembled size (LxWxH): 140x45x120 cm • Folded down (LxWxH): 115x45x18 cm 71 146 8931

“Tergo” Back Trainer g Kettler • For training the lower back muscles • Max. weight: 130 kg • Assembled size (LxWxH): 145x60x110 cm • Folded down (LxWxH): 148x60x45 cm 71 146 8944

“Torso” Multi Funcf Kettler tion Bench • For ambitious training of the stomach muscles and the upper body with dumbbells • High quality, hygienic, ergonomic padding material • Individually adjustable foot padding • Multi adjustable back padding • Multi adjustable seat padding

Rückenmuskulatur • High quality, hygienic, ergonomic padding material • Folds away saving space via an innovative folding mechanism • Max. weight: 130 kg • Assembled size (LxWxH): 107x45x85 cm • Folded down (LxWxH): 100x45x38 cm 71 146 8928

See the videos for products on

www.sport-thieme.com

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

h Kettler “Lineo” Stomach Trainer

• For dedicated stomach training • High quality, hygienic, ergonomic padding material • Individually adjustable foot padding • Height adjustable stand base for different training positions and intensities • Folds away saving space via an innovative folding mechanism • Maximum weight: 130 kg • Assembled size (LxWxH): 145x50x60 cm • Size when folded down (LxWxH): 130x50x25 cm 71 146 8915 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

t Gymnastics Construction Kits ®

Patent P19507093

Recommended by the DTB (German Gymnastics Assoc.) and used in the DTJ's Children Moving forum

e i Kombi Platform

d Kombi Climbing Slide

From the Single Unit to Equipment Set • strong and durable • high quality workmanship for continual use • many uses • extremely easy to transport • space-saving and practical Extract from a report of Förderverein Psychomotorik e.V. Bonn Germany, Chief Executive Rudolf Lensing Conrady.

Kombi Ladder

Kombi Box Top and Kombi Box Middle Part

Kombi Gymnastics Stools

Kombi Climbing Ladder

Kombi Balance Beam

Products a-m are on page 190.

More flexible than ever!

Kombi Wedge Mat

Sport-Thieme Gymnastic System Advantages:

Easy to handle

Simple for children to transport

• Updated methodical educational planning ideas for teacher and trainer • Enlarged Increases the opportunities for independent student involvement • Combines with existing equipment and equipment systems • Simple to Transport It is a pleasure to assemble with rollerboards that fit. Three Kombi Gymnastics

Stools can be stacked on top of each other without becoming unsteady • Compact Size The mats also fit to the sizing scheme (50x50 cm) and are of the familiar Reivo® quality of course!

The gymnastics box you can combine to suit your needs Sport-Thieme Construction Kits have almost no limitations. They are designed in such a way that they can be combined with traditional gymnastics equipment into a gymnastics course:

Vario Boxes page 195

Gymnastics Boxes page 193

Bars page 198

Gymnastics Bench page 201

Varianta page 202

Wall Bars page 204

Reivo® Mats page 217

Soft gymnastics mats (100x150x25 cm) on page 214

Trampolines on page 210

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Balance Beam page 199

Lüne Combinato page 267

t 189

Gymnastics Construction System - Everything Fits! The Sport-Thieme Gymnastics Construction System With new elements and small moderations, existing standard items and system sets can be easily built into a versatile equipment set!

Box Top a Kombi Made of pine wood. Top side covered with leather, suspension tubes on the sides made of galvanized steel. 150x50x26 cm. 71 120 6500

b Box Middle Part b Kombi Made of pine wood with galvanized steel suspension bars, 1450x447x200 mm. 71 120 6601

Horizontal Bar c Kombi Made from a galvanized steel tube, 119.5 cm long, Ă¸ 3.4 cm, with 2 hooks for attaching to Kombi boxes. 71 120 6702

c d

Platform d Kombi Made of multiplex wood with needle felt cover. 150x50x7 cm. 71 120 6803

Gymnastics Stool e Kombi Made of layered ply-wood with corner connections and poles made of ash. Ă¸ 35 mm, 50x50x25 cm. 71 120 7008

Made with CFC-free foam, non-slip 100% polyester gymnastics mat material cover and Velcro straps. WxLxH: 100x150x25 cm. 71 120 6409

g h

Storming Plank h Kombi Made of wood,with integrated rungs,

i 248 cm

24 8c m

hooks for hanging. 71 120 7604

Climbing Slide i Kombi Made of wood with semi circular

l 248 cm

Kombi Wedge Mat

Made of layered ply-wood with 4 steerable wheels, 46x46x10 cm. 71 120 7109

248 cm

With Rubber Protectors

24 8c m

Kombi Roller Board

m New attaching system for safer hold

n 120 c m

150 cm

shapes for hanging. 71 120 7402

24 cm 24 cm 10 cm

35 cm

j Made of wood, 100x60mm, with

l Made of wood with 2 suspension

2 clamps. 71 120 7200

hooks. 71 120 7301

Kombi Balance Beam

Kombi Climbing Ladder

Made of wood with semi-circular part at one end for hanging. 71 120 7705

190 t

Kombi Half Ladder

Kombi Ladder

m Made of wood with hanging hooks, 1500mm long. 71 120 7503

40 cm 15 cm

All sizes in cm

Kombi Climbing Frame

To be attached horizontally or at a slope to Vario and Kombi boxes, Kombi stools, wall bars or bars.

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

100 cm

Stable wooden construction with hanging hooks and a climbing net made of 16 mm strong Hercules rope. 71 120 8203 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Gymnastics Kits from t ®

Kombi B ox Top Kombi B ox Middle

Set

Special Offer!

Set

Buy now !

Special Offer!

Buy now !

Set Special Offer! b Buy

Gymnastics Kit Set I a Kombi This Kombi gymnastics unit provides

now !

many options to combine with existing ladders, gymnastics benches, balance beams, etc. Your choice of uses for existing equipment is increased by the many variations it offers. • 1 Kombi-Box top part 25 cm pg 190 a • 1 Kombi-Box middle part 20 cm pg 190 b • 2 solid middle parts (each 10 cm) • 1 solid middle part (20 cm) • 1 solid wooden bottom piece (25 cm) 71 120 8001

c Kombi Gymnastics Set II

Set consists of: • 1 Kombi box top part pg. 190 a • 1 Kombi-Box middle part pg 190 b 71 120 7806

And there's more: To make transport easier we recommend the swivel wheels on page 193

Gymnastics Box Set II b Kombi With additional swivel wheels, article

number 71 121 7302, page 193 d for easier transportation. 71 120 8014

And there's more: We recommend the bar for two boxes, see page 190

Set

Special Offer!

Buy now !

Set

Special Offer!

1 Kombi Platform

Buy now !

2 Kombi Mini-Mats

e 4 Kombi Gymnastics Stools 2 Kombi Rollerboards

d Kombi Gymnastics Stool Set I

This set replaces your small vault boxes and gives more options. Consisting of: • 2 Kombi stools page 190e • 1 Kombi mini mat 71 120 7907 Each

Gymnastic Stool Set II e Kombi Consisting of:

• 4 Kombi stools page 190 e

• 2 Kombi roller boards pg 190 f • 1 Kombi- platform pg 190 d • 2 Kombi mini mats 71 122 4216

Practical Examples:

Flic-Flac Warm-ups

Cartwheel over 2 balance beams

Vault from a height

The slope consists of two Kombi ladders (page 190 m and a Kombi multifunctional mat .

4 Kombi stools, 2 Kombi balance beams, 2 Kombi mats, and Kombi multifunctional mat.

Kombi-Box top part, suspended Kombi platform and parallel bars.

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 191

Training Gymnastics Box exclusive to t

Sport-Thieme “Standard” Sloping Vaulting Boxes 'Standard' Vaulting Box The alternative gym box in terms of material and workmanship. All box sections are made of birch multiplex wood. All hard wood corner elements as well as corner joint spigots are glued and screwed together, ensuring durability and a good fit. Particularly advantageous: All covers are made from high quality cowhide leather and the corners are very rounded. This increases safety and reduces the risk of injury. 1 part, LxWxH: 70x50x40 cm 71 121 5306 3 part, LxWxH: 70x50x40 cm 71 121 5319 4 part, LxWxH: 140x50x90 cm, not illustrated 71 121 5322 5 part, LxWxH: 150x50x110 cm 71 121 5335 With integrated swivel wheels 71 121 5351 6 part, LxWxH: 150x50x110 cm 71 121 5348 With integrated swivel wheels 71 121 5364 Swivel Wheels Transport unit with 4 swivelling castors. 71 121 7302-1

c b

a b

Price Tip

Real Leather

Buy now !

• All 5 and 6 part boxes now come with openings for the Vario system. • All 4, 5 and 6 part boxes now come with openings for gymnastics benches making them even more versatile • very accurate • all parts fit into each other in any pattern.

All openings are fitted as standard to accommodate later inclusion of swivel wheels

Sport-Thieme Sloping Vaulting Boxes

Now possible to combine with existing boxes

Vaulting Boxes e Sloping Make the most of the sloping vaulting

Real Leather

• Padded curves • Padded head board

Sloping d Sport-Thieme Vaulting Box No more fear of jumping with our safety vaulting box. This practical training aid was designed based on the latest educational findings and offers more safety when training. The difference: The front has an additional removable cushioned board which is padded with strong leather. For jumping and gymnastics exercises without fear. The box has many uses e.g. for squat or straddle vaults, warm ups for the

192 t

flick flack as well as a jumping aid (either lengthways or sideways). The finish, durability and safety features of this box are exceptional. Can be combined with existing vaulting boxes. 71 122 3402

The Bavarian Accident Insurance Association (GUV) concluded that our boxes: • facilitate worry free jumping over long boxes • reduce the risk of injury • have many applications for teaching

box with the right top part. All existing 5 and 6 part boxes can be fitted, even other manufacturer's boxes. A new Sport-Thieme connecting system (DBGM approved and legally protected) makes this possible. Simply provide us with the inner and outer size of your box. 71 122 3431

f Vaulting Box Set

This sloping vaulting box set is a genuine offer from Sport-Thieme. This set is also a 6 part box. An offer that can't be missed. The set consists of: • 1 x 6 part inclined vaulting box with leather cover • 1 sloping upper part • 1 top padding 71 122 3705 Set

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

And there's more: • Sport-Thieme gymnastics kit from page 190

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Gymnastics Boxes from t ® Vaulting Boxes with Cowhide Leather Cover

Now Even Better!

Best material, top quality TÜV approved safety: convincing arguments for SportThieme Vaulting Boxes, made in our own factory. Solid top quality pine wood and high quality leather will get good use when a new vaulting box is required. The perfect workmanship, precision and clever design all guarantee a high level of stability. All box parts are extra strengthened with hardwood bars which are double bolted at the corners with additional corner holding wooden blocks. The stable bases have nonslip uncoloured rubber pads. We recommend the swivel wheels to make transporting the boxes simple enough for children. All boxes in the series have the necessary slots as standard. 1 piece, LxWxH: 70x50x40 cm. DIN EN 916 Type 2 71 121 4707 Each 3 part, LxWxH: 70x50x40 cm 71 121 4710 Each 4 part, LxWxH: 140x50x90 cm not illustrated. 71 121 4723 Each

Now all 4, 5 and 6 part boxes come with space for holding gymnastics benches providing even more uses.

Real Leather

vaulting box c 5-part With integrated swivel wheel and rolling mechanism for the upper part of the vaulting box. 71 122 3024 5 part, with integrated swivel wheels 71 121 4778 Each 5 part, LxWxH: 150x50x110 cm. 71 121 4736 Each

6-part vaulting box With integrated swivel wheel and rolling mechanism for the upper part of the vaulting box. 71 122 3037 Each

b • very exact to ± 0.5mm • all parts can be combined together in any pattern • all 5 and 6 part boxes have openings for the Vario system (page 192) • all boxes with openings can be retrospectively fitted with swivel wheels d

6 part with integrated swivel wheels 71 121 4765 Each 6 part, LxWxH: 150x50x110 cm. DIN 7908, DIN EN 916 Type 1 71 121 4749 Each

Now! Order

• All 5 and 6 part boxes now come with a swivel wheel and rolling mechanism for the upper part of the vaulting box.

And there's more: The new gymnastics box see-saw is on page 194

Certified Safety from t Comprehensive equipment testing on Sport-Thieme vaulting boxes. Your safety is paramount to us, therefore we leave nothing to chance. Each gymnastics box is systematically tested with the best technology and highest expertise. Only

when all the tests are completed and all safety requirements are met, will the product receive the much sought after “GS” the German TÜV certification, your guarantee of certified safety.

4 swivel wheels

Five year guarantee Wheels d Swivel Every Sport-Thieme Vaulting Box should be equipped with swivel wheels. The 4 steerable wheels make transporting vaulting boxes safe and easy and make it simple for young people to move them. They can be installed on existing boxes without any problems. Comes with detailed instruction manual. 71 121 7302 Replacement Rubber Padding For gymnastics boxes. 71 155 8106

See product d video Determining the changes during diagonal measurements

40,000 walking test processes

Continual testing of the swivel wheel mechanism

www.sport-thieme.com

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Push down operating lever

t 193

Gymnastics Boxes Moving Wheels for Upper Part of Gymnastics Box

and Cover of Vaulting Box

An ingenious idea providing many new uses for gymnastics boxes. Children can move, Now! Order sit, kneel or lie on it alone or with others on the lid. This means that the gymnastics box will be seen as a Paddle Rollerboard much loved item and is Makes your rollerboard into an indoor highly challenging. Can paddle boat. This new way of moving be attached to all strengthens users and allows new moveexisting gymnastics ments. Comes with robust rubber balls for boxes. Patent pending. The more controlled movement. Length approx. upper part can be attached to other 105 cm. Assorted colours. boxes with the moving wheels. 71 121 7328 Set 71 199 9509-3

Part a Upper /Cover of Gymnastics Box For 5/6 part boxes with moving wheels. Will only fit onto original SportThieme gymnastics boxes as other manufacturers use a different joining system. 71 121 7331

Wheels b Moving for Upper Part

With four swivel wheels

Kombi Gymnastics Box Seesaw • simple and quick to assemble • suitable for all makes of gymnastics boxes • with sliding protection Now Even Better!

Gymnastics Box d Kombi Seesaw DBGM approved. This seesaw set allows you to make more of your gymnastics box. Children can stand, lie, or sit alone or with others and rock in a lengthways direction. Quick to assemble by simply placing the gymnastics box in the rocking set. Suitable for all types of gymnastics boxes. Top part not included. 71 121 0819 Pair

And there's more: • vaulting boxes from page 193 • mats from page 212 • gymnastics benches from page 201

Introductory price

Safety Moving Device Buy now !

Moving Device e Safety Patent pending. This moving device was developed to provide more safety and protection against inappropriate use when transporting gymnastics boxes. Gymnastics boxes with this moving device will support up to approximately 90 kg when moving. When weight exceeds 91 kg, the frame will automatically sink and the gymnastics box then stands on its legs and is not mobile. Once the weight is removed, the underbody will rise up again and can be moved again.

New

Dropping mobile unit sunken

194 t

mobile

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

• strong metal construction • 4 easy moving swivel wheels • with automatic dropping mechanism • with adjustable springs • material protects the box • it is possible to subsequently attach to all DIN standard boxes • with comprehensive assembly instructions 71 121 7344 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Original Vario Gymnastics Boxes from

The Original: Vario Gymnastics Box

Set

Offer!

Buy now ! d c

A universal piece of sports equipment that can be used for many exercises. This variable set can also hold parallel bars or horizontal bars. As it is operated by changing the angles, it is straight forward and methodical to use. The Vario gymnastics box set is especially suitable for handicapped gymnasts, kindergartens, and primary schools. The many variations in use are not however exclusive to small children. They are also suitable for older children, adolescents and adults. A great asset to any club or school. Take advantage of the many uses this box offers.

Vario Gymnastics Box Sets Vario Vaulting Box Set 1 This combination set offers many variations on new and interesting exercises. Everyone in the gymnastics group will be delighted to use the new set. The set consists of: • 2x vaulting boxes a • 4x hanging bars d • 1x ladder 40 cm wide c • 1x ladder 120 cm wide c 71 122 3008

c Real Leather

Boxes Vario a Mini (3 Parts)

Vario Gymnastic Box Set II

For our little ones! Mini boxes in 3 parts, size 100x50x70 cm. Same high quality materials and design as their “big brothers” There is an additional opening on the long side for a 40 cm wide ladder as well as for 2 hanging bars. There are gaps in the front for attaching gymnastics benches. 71 122 3806

Consisting of: • 2 gymnastics boxes with integrated swivel wheels a • 4 hanging bars d • 1 x 40 cm wide climbing ladder c • 1 x 120 cm wide climbing ladder c 71 122 3011

Mini Box Set Swivel Wheels With 4 swivel wheels for transporting the Vario Mini Boxes safely, conveniently, and easily. No box should be without the swivel wheels. Can be added to existing vaulting boxes. Similar to illustration on page 193 d. 71 122 4001

Consists of • 2 Vario Mini boxes a • 1 climbing ladder, 40cm wide c • 2 hanging bars d 71 122 3907

Accessories for all Gymnastics Boxes with safety band

b b

Bench Teeter b Gymnastics DBGM approved. This seesaw teeter hangs securely between two gymnastics boxes with Vario openings. The gymnastics bench is attached to the teeter. Suitable for gymnastics benches with DIN standard middle section only. The seesaw is secured underneath with a belt and off you go. Supports up to 150kg. 71 119 9909

Ladder c Climbing With hanging hooks 150 cm long. 71 122 3109 40 cm wide 71 122 3112 120 cm wide

The versatile sport item

Each Each

Bars d Hanging Made from solid ash 140cm long. 71 122 3301

Each

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

f Transport Trolley

DBGM. For Small Boxes. The easy and safe way to transport up to 6 small vaulting boxes. It can be stored away in the equipment room without taking up too much space. It is highly recommended by Prof. Dr. U. Nickel, Children's Sport Forum. 71 131 1307

t 195

“Original Reuther” Spring Boards from All spring boards are 120x60 cm.

With more bounce Springboard a “Standard” An elastic springboard in standard design, non padded. “Original Reuther”, 120x60 cm. 71 122 2005

b Springboard Standard springboard. Comes with a strong yellow-

Springboard c “Strassburg” A high performance springboard with improved elas-

gold needle felt covering on the jumping area. “OriginalReuther”. 120x60 cm. 71 122 2106

ticity compared to standard versions. Could serve as an introduction to the World Championship Springboard. Jumping area is padded with a red carpet. Original Reuther. 120x60 cm. 71 122 2207

Ergotop WM Springboard

4” Springboard g “Ergotop Highly elastic with 4 exchangeable spiral springs.

In 2 designs: • for adults • for children up to 40 kg

Springboard d “Budapest” Competition board with red carpeted jumping surface. Very high elasticity. FIG certified. 120x60 cm. 71 122 2308

'Junior' Springboard

e Same construction as the Budapest springboard d. Specially made for body weights up to 40 kg. Original Reuther. 120x60 cm. Not illustrated. 71 122 2409

“Ergotop 2” Springboard

f This springboard combines the fast reaction of the metal springs with the good shock absorption of the Budapest springboard. Little power is needed for a high bounce thanks to the sensitive spring core. With two exchangeable spiral springs. 120x60 cm. 71 120 9701

This means that the board can be adjusted to suit the weight of the user. Spring board with fibreglass plastic. 120x60 cm. FIG certified. 71 120 9727 White Single Spiral Springs For springboard f and g, for the hardest use of the board. 71 120 9714

“Ergotop 6” Springboard

New

Each

Accessories

With 6 springs for a soft adjustment

“Ergotop 8” Springboard With 8 springs for hard adjustment.

j Padding For existing springboards. 71 122 2500

“Ergotop 6 and 8” Springboards FIG certified, “Original Reuther” high quality springboard with 6 or 8 varnished springs for either soft or hard adjustment in accordance with the FIG product standards of 2004. The upper side is “sandwich” construction of carbon fibre hybrid which ensures an even distribution of pressure across the whole board with very high spring.

Model Number Certificate Spring type Complies with FIG Spring effect 1-6* Uses** Suitable for Recommended bodyweight Article number

Wooden Springboard a

Padded Springboard b

6” springboard with 6 springs for softer h “Ergotop settings.

Stands k Springboard Mobile metal stands, hold up to 4 spring-

71 120 9730 “Ergotop 8” springboard with 8 springs for the hardest use. 71 120 9743

boards. For ease of storage they can be turned crossways or facing upwards. A useful investment that ensures order and more space in the equipment room. 71 122 2601

“Strassburg” Springboard c

“Junior” Springboard e

Wooden

1 Schools/clubs

2 Schools/clubs

3 Schools/clubs

4 Schools/clubs

Beginners

Children

up to 50 kg 71 122 2005

up to 50 kg 71 122 2106

Beginners/ trained users up to 50 kg 71 122 2207

up to 40 kg 71 122 2409

“Ergotop 2” Springboard f

“Budapest” Springboard d

GS certified

FIG certified

“Ergotop 4” Springboard g

“Ergo Top 6” Springboard h

“Ergotop 8” Springboard i

GS and FIG certified FIG certified FIG certified Wooden/metal springs Wooden Metal springs Wooden/metal springs Metal springs interchangeable interchangeable interchangeable interchangeable soft soft hart soft 5 5 6 6 6 Club/ Club/ Club/ Club/ Club/ competitive sport competitive sport competitive sport competitive sport competitive sport improvers improvers Competitive artistic Competitive artistic Competitive artistic gymnastics gymnastics gymnastics up to 60 kg up to 70 kg 40-70 kg 85-90 kg 40-70 kg 71 120 9701 71 122 2308 71 120 9730 71 120 9743 71 120 9727

* = 1 = low, 6= very high ** = Information is based on body weight and level of ability of the user.

196 t

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Vaulting Horses, Side Vaulting Horses, Balance Beams Real Leather

5 year tee guaran y and

on bod ction leg constru

b Horse with Metal Legs c Vaulting Height adjustment: 90-130 cm

71 121 8507 Each Height adjustment: 100-150 cm 71 121 8510 Each Height adjustment: 110-170 cm 71 121 8523 Each Vaulting Horse with Wooden Legs Height adjustment: 90-130 cm 71 122 2920 Each Height adjustment: 100-150 cm 71 122 2917 Each Height adjustment: 110-170 cm 71 122 2904 Each

All models have castors for easy transportation

Gymnastics Horse The 160 cm rump has special padding and is covered in real cowhide leather. The Gymnastics Horse with Metal Legs height of all designs can be adjusted in 5 71 121 3515 Without pouches Each cm stages. The natural coloured rubber 71 116 3706 With pouches Each stoppers and tensioning chain ensure a safe stand. The 2 castors mean that the Gymnastics Horse with Wooden Legs horse can be easily transported. Height 71 121 3502 Without pouches Each adjustable from 110-170 cm. 71 121 3603 With pouches Each

a b

Vaulting Horse

With a sturdy tubular steel base, rubber floor pads on all legs and additional castors on two legs. Three legs have a scale for height adjustment, fourth leg with special clamp adjustment for a more exact level. Body length 55 cm with special upholstery and core real leather cover.

Balance Beam f Training Beam Cover With a glued on felt non-slip e Balance Cover existing beams and raise them up to competition standards with this easily fitted cover for 5 m long beams. 71 122 4825

Beam g Training Simple to attach to any gymnastics

Part Gymnastics h 3Horse/Vaulting Horse Made from special foam, cover made from rip-proof polygrip mat material. Practical training aid to reduce fear when jumping and practising. The individual parts are very stable, can be used on their own and can be joined together using the velcro system. LxWxH: 90x60x110 cm. 71 120 5477

Boxes i Reivo® With RG 30/50 foam inner core. These practical vaulting boxes have been developed to meet safety standards, be versatile, be appropriate to demands put on them, be durable and to provide fun for all users. With strong, high quality polygrip

i Reivo® Trapeze

Vaulting boxes Design

71 121 4329 71 121 4303 71 121 4316

3 pt. 3 pt. 4 pt.

cover. Complete with 2 bases, beam length 300 cm, height 18 cm. 71 122 4607

bench with velcro bands. Foam covered with 100% polyester non-slip canvas cover, size LxWxH 350x30x30/10x20 cm. 71 122 4854

And there's more: Gymnastics benches page 201

100% polyester covering. The trapezium shaped individual parts are tightly attached to each other using Velcro bands but can also be used individually. This makes them very versatile as they can be used in gymnastics, therapy, rehabilitation or indeed for leisure purposes. Particularly advantageous: the new Velcro band layout (DBGM approved) means you can make a small soft surface out of the boxes. See table for details. Upper Part Highest LxW cm Part 85x60x75 85x30 25 cm 130x90x120 120x45 40 cm 130x90x120 120x45 30 cm

Total height Surface Area in cm LxWxH cm

75 120 120

Small soft landing area

h Vaulting Horse

i Reivo® Vaulting Box With foam core

Jumping height: 50, 80 and 110 cm

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 197

Bars for Schools and Clubs Parallel Bars a Competition For Seniors. Manufactured to DIN EN 914 specifications, 3.50 m long special plywood bars. Height adjustable from 120-180 cm, with an integrated transporting device. The width is adjustable from 400-560 mm. 71 120 8418

School Sport Parallel Bars

â&#x20AC;˘ with easy rolling wheel mechanism â&#x20AC;˘ stable base frame

Manufactured to DIN EN 914, specifications, 3.50m long special plywood wooden bar. Height adjustable from 110 to 160cm high, equipped with in-built swivel wheels, width adjustable from 340 to 500mm. 71 120 8421

50 mm

Cross section of bar

b 3 part inlay mat 40 mm

Wider base frame for a more secure stand

Bar Mat Set b 3WithPart padding that covers the floor frame exactly. With foam filling and non-slip cover. For Parallel Bars 71 120 8421 71 120 6047 For Senior Competition Bars article no. 61 120 8418 and Multi Use Parallel Bars article no. 61 120 8405 71 120 6050 For other bar models - please order sizing sheet 71 120 6063

Underlay Mat c 1ForPiece laying in track of support bars. With composite foam filling and non-slip cover. For Parallel Bars 71 120 8421 71 120 6018 For Senior Competition Bars article no. 61 120 8418 and Multi Use Parallel Bars article no. 61 120 8405 71 120 6021 For other bar models - please order sizing sheet 71 120 6034

Parallel Bars d Multi-Use Comply with DIN EN 914.

Ideal equipment multi-use for men's gymnastics or senior school gymnastics. Featuring height adjustable bars: every 5cm from 120-180 cm, the other side has a telescopic system that extends from 120 up to 230 cm. Adjusts wide-wise from 400-560 mm. It is equipped with a transporting device with wheels for ease of transport. Bars are made of special laminated wood. 71 120 8405

1 part inlay mat

c Telescopic height adjustment

Parallel Bar Rails

And there's more: Trapeze boxes as a training aid and pedestal on page 197

Telescopic height adjustment

120 - 230cm

120 - 180cm

Made of special laminated wood (TBU 7-10) with round ends, 3.5m long. 71 120 8304

Accessories

i Now! Order

for Parallel Bars g Gloves Made of Japanese leather, 3 holes Individually adjustable width Training Bars e Handstand Bars are 70 cm long, width adjustable from 30 to 60 cm. 71 121 3430

198 t

with rolls and Velcro fasteners. 71 120 9802 Size 1 (large) 71 120 9815 Size 2 (medium) 71 120 9828 Size 3 (small)

Holder f Magnesium Stable metal construction with plastic holder approx. 35x35x15 cm, height adjustable from 65 to 100 cm, moves around easily on castors. 71 119 1703

Universal Hand Protector

h For horizontal bars, parallel

bars and rings, made of durable leather with buckle strap, size 2 (medium). 71 120 9860

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Powder i Magnesia In a plastic bag, 2.5 kg. 71 119 1400

Block j Magnesia 1 package of appox. 450 g. 71 119 1413

Pack

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Original Reuther Competition Bars and Beams New

c Beam with b Competition Aluminium Core

• Easy to use due to the integrated transporting unit • Width adjustable from 100-180 cm in 5 These bars were developed based on many cm stages requests to design a freestanding product • Height adjustment: high bar 205-250 cm, that can be used as asymmetric bars in low bar 135-180 cm gyms without requiring any tensioning. • With Spieth Carboflex bars (fibreglass bar These bars are suitable for children and with wooden cover) youths. If more experienced gymnastics are • 15 cm wide frame and 171 cm long overusing them and creating strong momentum, hang it is advisable to use additional tensioning • Space needed 2.20x1.70 m (without mats) to secure the bars. 71 120 8610

Freestanding a “Club” Asymmetric Bars

Padded and covered with synthetic leather. Elastic running area that has been additionally stabilised. Adjustable height from 700 to 1250 mm. The special construction of the sloping legs means that the distance between the feet are practically the same irrespective of the height at which it is set. FIG tested and recommended. “Orginal Reuther”. 71 120 8809 Complete

“Barcelona” Balance Beam With integrated absorption pads for reducing peak force. Not illustrated. 71 120 8812

Unit c Roller For SPIETH Beams “Original Reuther”. 71 122 4812

Pair

New

Available in 3 designs.

d Cross section of asymmetric bar

This is just an example of the total goods on offer. We can supply all “Original Reuther” from SPIETH gymnastics equipment.

Detailed views:

Asymmetric Bars f 'L' For school and sport facilities, with

“Club” Beams with Aluminium Core

New, very soft padded beam with Servolift height adjusting. Servolift gas springs make it even easier to adjust the underframe. The bases always remain in the same position regardless of height adjustment. The beam is soft underfoot and the impact is greatly reduced. • height adjustable from 50-130 cm • from 50-90 cm in 10 cm stages • from 90-130 cm in 5 cm stages • 500 cm long beams, 10 cm wide • End padding made from PU foam 71 120 8825

unbreakable wooden coated fibre glass bars, featuring a bracing system and safety tightening mechanism. Adjustable height of lower bar from 140 to 180 cm, and of upper bar from 205 to 245 cm. Adjustable width up to a max. of 110 cm. “Original Reuther”. 71 120 8607

Competition Asymmetric Bars And there's more: Training beams: page 197 Fabian Hambüchen

“Dortmund” for professional sport. As 71 120 8607, but with 180 cm width to satisfy competition specifications. FIG certified. without gripping force meters 71 120 9408 With additional gripping force meters 71 120 9411

Conversion Set for Asymmetric Bars Widening Cover e Beam Can be placed on any beam because the Velcro bands will fit all shapes. The cover widens your beam by 10 cm to a total of 20 cm wide. This cover is indispensable for training and exercises and can also be used on the floor. Available in 2 versions: 200 or 300 cm long. 71 122 4838 200 cm Each 71 122 4841 300 cm Each

Width adjuster

Bar holder

This set contains all necessary parts for changing obsolete “L” bars into the new length of 180 cm. 71 120 9509

Asymmetric Bar Rail Unbreakable, made of wood covered fibreglass bar with 40 mm diameter. Also fits any Spieth's. Original Reuther. Not illustrated. 71 120 8708 not illustrated

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Tensioning Cord

t 199

Climbing and Slides Rolling Bar Slide

Climbing Net

• strong coated foam rollers • hygienic as washable

Step Pedestal

net sets f Climbing including hangers for two pairs of gymnastics rings

New

b Rollerboard Track

Rolling Bar Slide

a d Floor Mat

Bar Slide a Rolling A class slide! The body is massaged, stimulated and sensitised as you roll down this slide in different positions (stomach, back, sitting, kneeling, forwards or backwards). When rolling on the stomach the neck muscles are stimulated and tonic stretching is promoted. It can also be climbed either with or without a rope. This method can be used to transport balls, mats etc. If objects are rolled down this slide, attentiveness and speed of reaction are developed in a fun way. The Rolling Bar Slide can be hung on wall bars or on step pedestals. A very versatile item for sport and therapy. Very stable, will support up to 200 kg. Pedestal not included. 71 200 5805 200x60 cm 71 200 5818 250x60 cm 71 200 5821 300x60 cm

Roller Track Set

Set consists of: • 250 cm Rolling Bar Slide • Rollerboard Track • Step Pedestal 71 200 5889

Climbing net sets without hangers

86 cm

Climbing Net Tip: Hang or knot colourful chiffon scarves to the net. Who can get the green scarf quickest? Who is adept enough to get the knot to the net open? Use soft mats as fall protection.

And there's more: Chiffon Scarves on page 259

Climbing Net with Wall Fixing

40 cm

g 130 cm 70 cm

Track b Rollerboard When pushing up, positioning and climbing on a rollerboard you are developing balance compensation, bi-lateral coordination and motor planning. When going downhill you use postural stretching in the stomach area and therefore developing muscle tone. Simply hang the rollerboard track onto the Kombi pedestal and you will be at the optimal moving speed for therapy. Total length approx. 150 cm. 71 128 3831

Pedestal c Step Hang your roller board track or the rolling bar slide from this pedestal and enjoy: crawl underneath, climb through it, climb it and abseil. Flexible uses: the high step can be attached on the left or right hand side. 130x70x86/40 cm. 71 200 5906

And there's more: • Rollerboards on page 253 • Wall bars on page 204

200 t

Can be combined in any way e.g. to wall bars

Net e Climbing Let the gymnasts race up the net, swing off it, jump into it, simply climb away etc. Simply lay out a soft mat for safety. Hanging material not included. Will support up to 400 kg. Rope, ø 2 cm, mesh width 25 cm, 2.5x3 m.

Mats d Floor Ideal for laying out on floors of rooms for exercises. With PE foam filling providing perfect shock absorption and very light compared to standard foam mats. Velcro band on the corners to combine many mats side by side or behind each other. Cover: upper made of 100% polyester glossy blue gymnastics material, non-slip base. 71 121 3326-1 100x150x6 cm, 5.5 kg 71 121 3300-1 100x200x6 cm, 7 kg 71 121 3313-1 100x200x8 cm, 8 kg

Polypropylene rope, orange 71 127 2619 Spun fibre rope, natural, particularly soft 71 127 2635

Climbing Net Sets including Hangers Net for Gymnastics f Climbing Rings Complete including hanging mechanism for two pairs of existing gymnastics rings. Contains net, plywood bar, attaching strap and hooks. Net: Polypropylene, orange 71 127 2606 Net: Spun fibre rope, natural 71 127 2648

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Net with Wall g Climbing Attachment Complete with net, wall holders, holding bar and raising mechanism. Net: Polypropylene, orange 71 121 1102 Net: Spun fibre rope, natural 71 121 1160 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Gymnastics Benches, Classics for all Gymnasiums Gymnastics Bench Hanging Strip For hanging to wall bars, bars or gymnastics boxes

Screw-On

Multiplex Base

Bench Plate and Beam

Guaranteeing good stability and steadfastness

Made from multibonded pine wood

With long bolts, only from Sport-Thieme.

Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

Buy now ! Anti-Skid Protection Non-slip and protects the hall.

Attaching holes For transport castors b

Accessories Castors for b Transport Gymnastics Benches Simple to move your benches using these castors. Can be easily fitted even to existing equipment. Instructions included. 71 121 8914 Pair

a Gymnastics Benches Castors for transporting

The classic in every gymnasium, in the typical gymnastics bench shape. Good oscillation, made of solid, multibonded, flexible bonded wood. A top quality product. The stable middle support and the base are made from solid multi-plex plates with anti skid protection that also protects the floor. The running beam has rounded corners for safety. The hanging bar can be hung onto horizontal bars, wall bars or vaulting boxes. The 2 metre long gymnastics bench cannot be hung from wall bars.

Suitable for all DIN gymanstics benches

Gymnastics benches without castors 71 121 8406 71 121 8419 71 121 8422 71 121 8435 71 121 8448

Beams

c Beam Simple to attach to any gymnastics bench with velcro bands. Made from foam covered with 100% polyester non-

slip canvas, size LxWxH 350x30x30/10x20 cm. 71 122 4854-2

2.0 m 3.0 m 3.5 m 4.0 m, DIN 7909 4.5 m

Gymnastics Bench Holder

Gymnastics Benches with Transportation Castors

Bench Holder d Gymnastics Made from a strong belt with velcro

71 121 8464 71 121 8477 71 121 8480 71 121 8493 71 121 8927

fastening. Suitable for all DIN standard gymnastics benches. Holds the bench when hung on the bars from a set of wall bars. DBGM pending. 71 121 8930

2.0 m 3.0 m 3.5 m 4.0 m 4.5 m

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 路 Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 路 www.sport-thieme.com

t 201

Climbing To Your Heart's Content Varianta Play and Gymnastics Equipment Jumping, climbing and balancing, all in one system

DBGM

b With quick fasteners

f c a With synthetic leather covered Varianta Play and Gymnastics Equipment padding, consisting of 4 multiplex parts, Varianta Vaulting Box

with side round ash bars. Additional equipVery popular in pre-schools and schools for ment can also be added to the front. jumping climbing and balancing exer130x47x90 cm. cises. These open style boxes are very versa71 129 7906 tile to use as equipment can be added on all sides. They can be combined with boxes and beams totally safely thanks to the safe, Varianta Practise Set patented quick connectors. Children will also easily assemble the many combinations. Consisting of: Varianta offers many kinds of activity: • 1 Varianta Vaulting box a obstacle courses, hanging and balancing apparatus as well as ladders and slides and • 1 Varianta Ladder d • 1 Varianta Slide e climbing mechanisms 71 129 8606 etc. All equipment can be hung on a set of wall bars.

Varianta Additional Equipment: Varianta Balance Beam

b With 2 clamp locks. LxWxH: 240x10x6 cm. 71 129 8000

Half Ladder c Varianta With clamping lock for hanging onto vaulting boxes or wall bars. 240 cm long. 71 129 8303

Ladder d Varianta 240 cm long, with clamp lock for hanging. 71 129 8101

Varianta Climbing Slide

e With semi-circular shaped clamping lock for hanging 240x31 cm inner approx. 24cm 71 129 8202

Chicken Ladder f Varianta 240 cm long, with clamping lock for hanging. 71 129 8404

Bar Slide g Rolling Simply hang the slide onto a Varianta Gymnastics box and off you go. Rolling down is fun in every position: on

Balancing Board l “Senses” Feel the different surfaces with your

hands or bare feet. 71 212 4849

Balancing Walk Way The most fun you can have when balancing and playing! The different surfaces, small and large obstacles, fixed and movable objects take balancing to a new level. Suitable for attaching to the Varianta system, climbing sets and large area wall bars. Varnished birch, LxW: approx. 180x20 cm. Great for barefoot expeditions. Each board supports up to 120 kg.

Balance Board h Grooved Can you balance beside the groove? This meandering groove is great as a marble track. It is a smooth balancing board on the back. 71 212 4807

Balancing Board i “Branches” With six half rolls

Stone” j “Wobble Balancing Board

Balancing Board m “Croak” The funny soft filled frogs can be

removed as they are attached with velcro. 71 212 4810

Cube n Sport The multi-sport cube with upper part

and lid, with castors, 65x65x60 cm. 71 216 8858

71 212 4823

202 t

the stomach, on the back, sitting, kneeling, forwards or backwards. It can also be climbed either with or without a rope. This method can be used to transport balls, mats etc. If objects are rolled down this slide, attentiveness and speed of reaction are developed in a fun way. The Rolling Bar Slide can be hung on wall bars or on step pedestals. A very versatile item for sport and therapy. 250x60 cm. 71 200 5818-2

These discs move in all directions but despite this are fixed solidly. 71 212 4836

Balancing Board k “Boulder” With 5 wooden “boulders” at different

Bock o Trapeze Perfect for hanging the balancing boards. 84x70x57 cm. 71 216 8917

Balancing Walkway Set Contains 6 different balancing boards each 180x20 cm. 71 212 4908

heights. 71 212 4852

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Gymnastics: Gymnastics Stools, Lüneburger Stegel Jumping and Gymnastics a+ b Stool

• 40 mm padding • Strong side hold With additional hangers for boards and ladders

b With colourful cover

New

40 cm

70 cm

Real Leather

50 cm

And there's more: • Kombi gymnastics stool page 191 • Lüne Combinato – the moving building site page 267

Jumping and Gymnastics Stool Suitable for many exercises, especially for use in pre-schools and primary schools. The completely new design has an additional hanging bar for boards and ladders. The stools also stack well and take up very little room when stored. The under frame is made of oval metal tubing with non-slip rubber bases on the bottom. The upper part has a durable leather cover. LxWxH: 70x50x40 cm.

With leather cover a 71 121 4404 Each With colourful synthetic cover in red, b green and blue, assorted colours. 71 121 4417

Each

with Felt Cover, LxW 200x27 cm c Board 71 128 1008-1

a Stacks as a training stool for jumping training

Lüneburger “Stegel” High jump stands with jumping rope

Lüneburger “Stegel” For halls and playgrounds. Built appropriately for their purpose, very strong, well proven and suitable for many exercises. All parts of this versatile set can be used individually.

The classic for many purposes

Stand d Wooden Well designed, approx. 110 cm high, suitable for all additional parts. 71 122 0171

Pair

Beams e 3400Balance cm long.

71 122 0113

Set

f Ladder Length 4.10 m, with hanging bracket. 71 122 0126

Board g Gliding With hanging bracket, length 175 cm. 71 122 0142

of Net Posts h Pair With height measurement (can also be used as high jump stands) with screw valves and a jumping cord. 71 122 0139

g Additional Set Volleyball training net

Lüneburger “Stegel” Set Consisting of: • 1 pair of wooden support bucks • 1 set of balance beams • 1 ladder • 1 gliding board • 1 pair of net posts with screw valves • 1 high jump cord 71 122 0168

Netball basket and net

h Post d Reivo® Short Band

i Additional Set

for Ball Games

Consisting of: • 1 pair of net ball baskets

• 1 pair of net ball nets • 1 volleyball training net • 1 Reivo® short band 71 122 0184

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 203

Wall Bars & Pull Up Bars With all the accessories for safe, strong assembly

10 cm

25,2 cm

210/230 cm

3,5 cm

80 cm

Wall Bars b Home Ideal for pre-schools, primary schools Double Wall Bars

a Wall Bars, comply with DIN EN 1234

A versatile sports product for many gymnastics exercises and for increasing levels of fitness. These wall bars stand out for the high quality material and expert workmanship. The side plates are made from solid pine and all bars are made from

strong, oval shaped ash. For additional safety the first and third bars on top are additionally offset. Ideal for removing stress on the spinal cord and balancing exercises. Safety approved by the German TÜV. Comes with all assembly materials (angle brackets, dowels and screws).

Single Wall Bars

Single: HxW: 260 x 100 cm, not illustrated 71 122 6515-1 Double field HxW: 280x200 cm 71 122 6502-1 Double: HxW: 260 x 200 cm 71 122 6502-2

or home use. With side walls made from strong pine and ash round bars. Easy to install.(Pull Up bars not included) Will support up to 100 kg. Comes with all assembly material (angle brackets, screws and dowels). 71 122 6515-3 HxW: 210x80 cm, 8 bars 71 122 6515-2 HxW: 230x80 cm, 9 bars

• with side handles • with safety screws

f Aesthetic solid wooden sides

New Set

With additional joining bars for simple use.

Pull-Up Bar

c DBGM approved. Can be hung at any height on your wall bars. For pull ups and stretching exercises. 70 cm wide, strong metal construction with wooden bar. The pull-up bar folds away for storage, thus saving space. Will support up to 80 kg. 71 122 6906

204 t

New

Safety clasp

Special Offer!

Buy now !

Bent bars

Aesthetic simple and safe

Bars with Pull-Up d Wall Bar The set consists of: • 1 wall bar 230x80 mm • 1 pull-up bar c 71 122 7013

Bars with Pulle Wall Up Bars DGBM approved. For many different exercises. Consisting of: • 1 set of wall bars 210x80 cm • 1 pull-up bar 71 122 7000-1

Bar f Pull-Up DBGM approved. Can be hung at any height on your wall bars. For pull ups and stretching exercises. 70 cm wide, strong metal construction with wooden bar. With additional hold on both outer edges. The pull-up bar folds away for storage, thus saving space. Will support up to 80 kg. 71 122 6919

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

g Bar g Attaching Made from plywood with round ash bars. Can be hung anywhere on wall bars. Width 75 cm. Will support up to 100 kg. 71 122 6544 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Expand the Uses for your Wall Bars

200 cm

Wall a Climbing for Hanging to Wall Bars

Bar Slide b Rolling A class slide! The body is massaged,

Using this climbing wall you can offer children the opportunity to experience the full extent of their need for movement and action. The different climbing holds allow different ways of climbing the wall and to come back down safely. The climbing plate area (200x61cm) has fixing eyelets on the back for fixing to normal wall bars. 10 climbing holds included. Wll support up to 100 kg. 71 119 0407-1

stimulated and sensitised as you roll down this slide in different positions (stomach, back, sitting, kneeling, forwards or backwards). When rolling on the stomach the neck muscles are stimulated and tonic stretching is promoted. It can also be climbed either with or without a rope. This method can be used to transport balls, mats etc. If objects are rolled down this slide, attentiveness and speed of reaction are developed in a fun way. The Rolling Bar Slide can be hung on wall bars or on step pedestals. A very versatile item for sport and therapy. Very stable, will support up to 200 kg. Pedestal not included. 71 200 5805 200x60 cm 71 200 5818 250x60 cm 71 200 5821 300x60 cm

And there's more: • Mats from page 212

Free planning service Assembly, Inspection, Maintenance The advantages to you e.g.: • quality and safety standard with high Our complete service for all demands sets offers you security in their • good value for money functionality. The quality and safety certifi- • products are guaranteed to be safe as they carry the RAL certification cation RAL 945 relates to the work in maintaining, inspecting, repairing Tel.: +49 5357 181 543 and planning. The advantages to you are:

Fax: +49 5357 181 921

Our technicians will gladly advise you

100 cm

Wall Bars Proc Reivo® tector For adding to existing wall bars. Core made from strong Neopolen® foam. Cover made from polygrip gymnastics mat material. 100% polyester. Simple to attach with velcro bands that are sewn tightly to the cover and laced around the bars. 200x100x6 cm, 7 kg. 71 208 9746

Simple to assemble: The Velcro bands are hung around the bars.

And there's more: • Gym. benches page 201 • Gym. boxes from page 192

Storming Plank d Kombi Wooden with integrated rungs and hanging hooks 71 120 7604-1

Climbing Slide e Kombi Made of wood with semi-circular shape for hanging. 71 120 7402-1

Balance Beam f Kombi Made of wood, 100x60mm, with 2 clamps. 71 120 7200-1

Only hang these attachments up to a slope of approx. 45°.

f g

24 cm

h i

24 cm

Kombi Climbing Ladder

g Made from wood with semi-circular shape for attaching. 71 120 7705-1

Kombi Half Ladder

h Wooden with 2 hanging hooks. 71 120 7301-1

10 cm 35 cm

i Slide “Athlete” model, to be hooked on fixed wall bars. Wooden frame construction with synthetic leather cover, padded with rubber foam, suitable for many

15 cm

exercises. LxW: 200x50 cm. 71 122 6805

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

50 cm

t 205

Gymnastics Walls for More Movement Climbing Houses

a 230 cm

322 cm

Middle part can be pulled out at an angle Gymnastics House a 5ThePart ideal climbing and gymnastics

Gymnastics Wall c Folding The well loved gymnastics wall bars

wall combination, an original from SportThieme. Stores away against the wall saving space. Consisting of: climbing pole with ladder, climbing net, wall bars, half ladder, bar with knotted rope. WxD: 322x123 cm, When folded back: 410x24 cm. 71 197 3916

are now available in a folding in 3 part variation. A real hit for the children's gymnastics room. When the climbing net is added on, many new types games and climbing fun await. The climbing net can be removed and laid on a gymnastics box or bench. Consisting of: climbing bar with ladder, climbing net, wall bars. LxH: 300x230 cm. 71 197 3714

Gymnastics House b 3ThePart ideal climbing and gymnastics

Wall distance when folded out:

wall combination. An original from SportThieme! Can be folded back to the wall to save space. Consisting of: climbing pole with ladder, wall bars, bar piece with knotted rope. WxD: 122x123 cm. When folded back: 210x24 cm. 71 197 3903

e Wall Leaves e Climbing Comes with five varnished climbing

Freestanding Hexagon d Climbing The great climbing house that stands by itself. With six different elements, it is a real pleasure to use. Contents: bar element, climbing net element, triple ladder, triangle ladder, grid element, wall bars, pre-assembled, 222x222x218 cm. 71 206 7100

206 t

holds in four different designs. 71 215 0808 Mat Set For the Climbing Hexagon. 8 piece, 6 cm thick. Standard, width 50cm (outside) 71 206 7201 Large, complies with DIN-EN, B 200 cm (outdoors) 71 206 7214

Now! Order

Bar Waves f Wall These five different wall elements

Children's Wall Bars These new pleasantly designed children's wall bars are made from varnished pine and will open up lot of new experiences for children. Can be combined with individual gymnastics wall elements as they come in the standard size of 230 x 100 cm.

invite you to try them out. 71 215 0808

Wall Bars g Sloping With seven integrated slopes providing lots of new climbing experiences. 71 215 0808

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Wall Bars h â&#x20AC;&#x153;Cheeseâ&#x20AC;? With different sized holes for climbing, crawling through and as a goal wall. 71 215 0808 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

New Climbing Fun

a 230 cm

Climbing Net Wall Bars

Half Ladder Distance from wall:

Folding Gymnastics a Kombi Wall The universal, multi-functional gymnastics wall for your little ones. With 40 cm distance from the wall, it can be accessed by the children from the front and rear. The climbing net part and the wall bars can be folded down and outwards and can be set at 3 different slope levels or fully horizontal e.g. on a vaulting box or support bock. Consisting of: half ladder, climbing net, wall bars, climbing pole with ladder, bar piece (can be rotated 90°) with rope. Without mats and supporting bock. 71 197 3701

Climbing Bar with Ladder

b Fall Protection Mat

c Supporting Buck

Mat Set

Gymnastics Wall Combinations

Order now:

Fall Protection Mat With non-slip gymnastics mat material on the underside. Particularly easy to clean 100% polyester cover in colourful orange. Mat core made of composite foam with fleece coating. 71 196 9001 200x100x7 cm 71 196 9014 150x100x7 cm 71 196 9030 200x39x7 cm

Strong high quality construction made completely from special beech wood, sanded and varnished. Distance from wall approx. 40 cm, galvanised iron wall fixings. The climbing wall is constructed in such a way that the parts can be bought individually and built up either singly or together. The individual elements are 230 cm high, 100 cm wide. All corners and edges are rounded off.

• pre-assembled • many uses

Buck c Supporting For folding down Kombi gymnastics

for Attaching to Wall

230 cm

Mat Set for Kombi Gymnastics Wall. Complies with DIN-EN. Comes with a velcro band for safely joining the mats. Cover: 100% polyester. Consisting of: • 4 mats: 200x100x67cm • 2 mats: 150x100x7 cm • 2 mats: 200x39x7 cm 71 196 9085 Orange 8 parts 71 196 9098 Blue 8 parts

walls. LxWxH: 215x66x78 cm. 71 197 3802

Individual Sections of Gymnastics Wall

Bar with Knotted Rope

Special Offer!

Buy now !

100 cm

Bars d Wall Ideal in children's gymnastics and

Poles with Ladder g Climbing Distance between bars: 27cm, length

therapy. Suitable for children over 3 years of of bars: 33 cm. Registered design. age and complies with EN 1176. Wall bar 71 186 6605 distance 10.5 cm. 14 round bars, ø 35 mm. 71 127 2202

j Climbing Wall Set With 16 climbing holds. 71 186 7103

Large Span Wall Bars

Net Part e Climbing Net made of 16 mm propylene material, ball connectors, mesh width 24 cm. 71 127 2404

Bar Part with Rope

Removable bar. The rope can be hung from either top or bottom. 71 186 6706

h Distance between bars: 30 cm. Bars ø 35 mm. 71 127 3609

Climbing Wall without Holds

Equipped with space for 15 climbing holds. 71 186 7116 not illustrated

Fixing Elements k Wall l Floor No. of Fixing Set Fixing Set sections 1 2 3 4

2 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Please order individual elements at the same time: k Wall Fixing Set

For 40 cm distance from wall Set contains: • 1 wall spacer, • dowels • screws. 71 186 7204

Fixing Set l Floor The set consists of wooden screws and dowels for fixing the sections to each other and to the floor. 71 186 7305

t 207

Swing Safely ... Tau-Trapez® Climbing Rope Now Even Better!

“Free” swinging, rocking and turning

Swing a Suspended DBGM approved. Swinging, rocking, turning and “free swinging”. The Suspended Swing is simply fun. The swing can also be used with the hands on the floor. Games such as picking up bean bags, throwing at targets etc. while swinging are also possible. Even severely handicapped children and children with movement difficulties can gain important experiences on it. Strengthens and tones. Suitable for every posture e.g. on stomach, back or even squatting. Even nervous children will soon gain confidence when swinging in the suspended swing. Individually adjustable. Cover: brushed canvas (100% cotton). Takes up to 100 kg. 71 127 1922-1

Point Hanging Mechanism b One For suspended swing. Strong hemp rope with swivel, figure of 8 hook and hanging ring. Room heights 2.40 to 4 m. 71 129 2930

See product a video

For variety in gymnastics classes. This system is easily and safely used with existing climbing rope systems. It has lots of different uses when used with climbing nets and other play equipment. The trick is the simple and fast way of assembling of trapeze rods and ropes using rope clamps. This offers a real alternative to using standard large equipment. This clamp system can be used on all ropes with a diameter of greater than 20 mm without additional knots or ties. An ideal aid to adventure sports in the gym.

www.sport-thieme.com Bars Swing d Parallel Converts the bars to a swing. The free swinging board is simply hung on the bar frame and as a result of the new system, the holding ropes can be quickly adjusted. The wooden plate is 98x49 cm and the holding rope 400 cm long. The board supports a maximum of 150 kg. 71 119 9808

Mat e Padded For the parallel bars swing. The mat is filled with loose foam flakes and therefore fits the body well which means you can sit, lie or stand safely and comfortably. Cover: quality synthetic leather (87% polychloride, 13% polyester). 71 186 6403

Parallel Bars Set The set consists of: • 1 bar swing d • 1 padded mat e 71 186 6504

make of your rings. Children can stand or sit on the seat. Quick to assemble by simply handing in the rings. Velcro bands ensure a safe hold. 71 186 4364-1

208 t

climbing equipment. Each wooden trapeze bar (100 cm long, ø 35 mm) comes with 2 clasps (for enlarging). Will support up to 80 kg. With very little effort you can build: • a swing • a simple trapeze • a swinging bar ladder or • a multiple trapeze at different levels 71 119 8300

Trapeze Bars Simple to assemble on all ring sets

h Now covered in silicon hosing to avoid damage to the rings

Trapeze Bar g “Profi” This trapeze bar is daring and adventurous and is exhilarating fun when swinging and flying, as well as introducing totally new forms of exercise. The huge variation in movements on a trapeze include: • swinging • rocking • jumping • propping oneself up • hanging • balancing • and basic movements The bar is made from tough elastic ash (75 cm long, ø 35 mm). Both holding ropes are made from soft hemp with an 8 shaped hook on which the ring hangs. Sport-Thieme tip: The bar and rope can be also be bound with tape giving more grip when practising. Supports up to 80kg. 71 119 1208

Bars, with Safety h Trapeze Hangers and Eyelets Board f Swing Extend the uses you can

Climbing Rope c Tau-Trapez® For making new additional uses of

These hangers guarantee safety when hanging trapeze bars in swing rings. The side eyelets facilitate joining with more trapeze bars. Use them for swinging and rocking, with a gymnastics bench as a slide for example. Width 75 cm, will support up to 80 kg. Simple to attach to all ring sets. DBGM approved. 71 119 0902-2

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

i Simple to assemble on all ring sets

Connecting Ropes for Trapeze Bars

Strong Isilink cable, takes up to 200 kg with safety hooks on both sides. You can join the trapeze bars together with these ropes and then they become a step ladder for climbing and swinging. Also ideal for hanging Tripez. Rope length 1.25 m with many levels of adjustment. 71 119 0915 Pair

Trapeze Bar Set Consisting of: • 2 trapeze bars g • 2 connecting ropes i 71 119 1107

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Gymnastics and Swinging: Get in the Swing of Things Fast With protective edging all around

Gymnastics and Swing Set

Gymnastics and Swing Set a Consisting of: • 1x pair of poly ropes ø 12 mm, 200 cm long variable adjustment • 1x pair of metal gymnastics rings with plastic covers • 1x trapeze stick ø 30 mm, 48 cm long • 1x solid wooden swing seat 48x18 cm All parts are interchangeable. 71 186 4351

Notice for engineers: Weight for hanging rope ladders, swings, ropes etc. DIN 1055, part 3 stipulates that depending on what is hung, a vertical load of 2000N and horizontal load of 900 N are the relevant calculations (without assessing oscillation).

Plate b Rope Climbing ropes in gymnastics halls should not contain any knots because of the risk of accidents. With this rope plate, it is possible to swing or rock on the climbing rope, whether sitting or standing, without any risk. Suitable for subsequent fitting to all climbing ropes. The height can be adjusted using the special support. Now comes with surrounding protective edging. Delivery does not include climbing rope.

340 mm

Soft hemp climbing ropes are available in all lengths. Price on request.

Fibre Climbing Rope d Hard ø 30mm, hanging eyelet on top, plastic seal on bottom. 71 118 9807 3 m long 71 118 9810 4.25 m long

Climbing Rope Hemp, ø 34 mm with rope cuffs and hanging eyelets. 71 165 6103-3 5 m, long 71 165 6103-4 5.5 m, long 71 165 6103-5 6 m, long 71 165 6103-6 6.50 m, long

/ Bar Ladder e Rope With 7 six hole rungs, poly rope ø 16mm, 210cm long with hanging ring. 71 186 4335

Swing c Plate Stable wooden disc ø 30 cm with

Bar Ladder f Rope/ With solid wooden rungs, with

16mm poly rope. Rope length 3 m, smooth adjustment. 71 186 4348

hanging rings, sisal rope ø 10mm. 71 186 4322 With 6 bars, 2 m long 71 186 4319 With 8 bars, 2.70 m long

h Top® Swing Seat g Swing Thread the end of the robe through the round opening. Form a loop underneath and pull the rope through the resulting loop. The loop will automatically tighten with the weight of the person swinging. Plastic plate. ø 22 cm, 7 cm high, 400 g. Climbing rope not included. 71 118 9315

Swing Bar h Hildesheim DBGM approved Increase the use you make of your rings: attach a swing bar onto them. Many people can swing at the same time. Made from shock proof wood 3.5 m long with 4 hanging eyelets for simple and secure assembly. 71 121 1405

Tripez®

With instructions

Safety harness with Velcro fastening included, enables attaching to gymnastics benches.

Tripez Set Expand the uses you can make of your Tripez. consisting of: 2 Tripez article number 71 120 0616 71 120 0629

Tripez® Premium Model

New improved design! Patent No. 10005331, protected design The intelligent further development on trapeze bars. Three shockproof ash bars are mounted onto a frame at an angle of 90º making Tripez® a versatile piece of equipment for adventure sport. Use it by itself or combine many Tripezes, exercises can be carried out in singly or with partners. Whether you are standing, sitting or hanging, Tripez is ideal for swinging in all

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Now with eyelets for joining other items directions, (width 75 cm, takes up to 200 kg.) Comes with additional fixing belts for attaching to gymnastics benches. Complies with DIN standards. 71 120 0616

More information on this product

www.sport-thieme.com

t 209

Trampolines by “Master” Series Trampolines

“Grand Master” Series Trampolines • Frame padding included • Will fit through 200cm standard sized doors • Adjustable with lifting transporter to a clearance height of 197 cm

Same as Grand Master but size: 457x275x99 cm (frame size), 366x183 cm (jumping sheet).

“Master Super Special” Trampoline With bed made of 13 mm thick nylon thread, frame padding and transporter unit. 71 123 1104

“Master School” Trampoline

New

“Grand Master” Series Trampolines

Frame size 520x305x115 cm, jumping sheet 426x213 cm, very stable. Made from special oval steel tubing, galvanised, folds down quickly, with exchangeable floor protectors, with transporter stand or lifting transporter stand for simple lifting and placing. Height with lifting transporter stand in sunken position 1.97 m (normal design 2.20 m).

“Grand Master Exclusive” Trampoline With jumping sheet made from 6 mm thick nylon bands, re-enforced base frame and frame padding. 1.15 m high. Design: with transporter 71 123 0228 Design: with lifting transporter 71 123 1133

“Grand Master Exclusive” Trampoline The competition quality trampoline used in the Olympic Games in Sydney 2000, with jumping sheet of 4x6 mm nylon bands, including frame padding. Design: with transporter 71 123 1159 Design: with lifting transporter 71 123 1162

Grand Master 'School' Trampoline With simplified frame construction and jumping sheet made of rip proof synthetic fabric. The inexpensive alternative for school and home. Design: with transporter 71 122 5408 Design: with lifting transporter 71 123 1146

“Grand Master Super-Special” Trampoline With jumping sheet made from 13 mm thick nylon bands, with frame padding. Design: with transporter 71 123 0215 Design: with lifting transporter 71 123 1120

“Grand Master Exclusive Premium” Trampoline

Bases made from flat oval tubing, 110 steel springs and 8 reinforced corner springs, frame padding 30 mm. Jumping sheet made from 4x6 mm nylon bands, double supports with new base construction. 71 123 1175 With transporter 71 123 1188 With lifting transporter Grand Master Trampolines Have an access height of 220cm with the transport stands. With lifting transporter, the height is 197cm

Replacement Parts for Trampolines Grand Master Super Special, Grand Master Exclusive and Grand Master School models Spare Frame Padding For above mentioned trampolines. Made of shock absorbing material with washable surface. It hides the frame construction and the space between frame and jumping sheet to prevent injuries. 71 123 0303 Jumping Sheet Made of PVC coated mesh. 71 122 8638

With simplified frame construction and jumping sheet made of rip proof synthetic fabric, includes frame padding and cover. An inexpensive alternative for school and hobby use. Comes with transporter unit. 71 122 5411 Replacement Parts for Trampolines

Master, Master Super Special and Master School models: Jumping Sheet Made of 13mm thick bands of 100% nylon. 71 122 8641 Replacement Steel Springs 235 mm long, 30 mm diameter, 100 springs. 71 122 8928 Safety Frame Padding For Master, Master Super Special and Master 'School'. 71 123 0316 Jumping Sheet Made of 13mm thick 100% nylon thread. 71 122 8612 Jumping Sheet Made of 6mm thick 100% nylon thread. 71 122 8609 Replacement Steel Springs 235 mm long, ø 30 mm. 71 122 8915 Price for 118 71 122 8902 Each

Extra safety in training and competition Suitable for FIT competitions

f c

New d

Extra Frame

Frame e Extra For Grand Master trampolines Master Exclusive Open d “Grand End” Trampoline Trampoline c “Secura” Spotting Mat

210 t

A special spotting mat specially developed for use with the trampoline. PVC cover with four close sitting handles. Top part made from skin friendly elastic canvas. 125 x 175 x 14 cm. Suitable for trampolines, tumbling and equipment gymnastics. 71 123 0361

Without cross-section on the front Jumping sheet made from 4 x 6 mm nylon tape 71 122 5437 With transporter 71 122 5440 With lifting transporter Jumping sheet made from 6 x 6 mm nylon tape 71 122 5453 With transporter 71 122 5466 With lifting transporter

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

with elastic tension. 71 123 0329

Pair

Mat f Cover With tied in wedges, 300x200x20 cm. By removing the wedges, the mats have many uses. 71 123 0332 Set

And there's more: Air-Tramps page 293 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Extremely Stable Mini Tramps “Open End” Mini Tramp

for difficult exercise routines End” Mini Trampoline a “Open With two sides without cross struts for more safety, especially suited for difficult exercises, if strong projectile force is needed. With 120x120 cm height adjustable galvanised steel tube frame and a 13 mm thick nylon thread jumping sheet 60x70 cm. Side frame padding is also included. 71 123 0808 Complete

Open End 'School' Mini Trampoline With simplified base, jumping sheet made of 13 mm wide nylon bands. An inexpensive model for school sport or hobby use, also includes cover. Not illustrated. 71 122 5424 Complete

Your safety is important to us. Therefore all trampolines have been certified as safe.

Available in 2 sizes

Tramp c Mini Frame and base of galvanised special spring steel tubing. The base is adjustable in both height and slope, with non-slip rubber caps on the under side. Jumping sheet made from highly durable double perlon. Complete with frame padding made from shock absorbing material with PVC cover.

Replacement Parts for Mini Tramp c, Models A+B

Jumping sheet with integrated frame padding

Super Mini Tramp

b With integrated frame padding for high performance without the injuries. The sheet and frame padding are sealed together as a unit. The galvanised frame is 113x113cm, double perlon jumping sheet: 60x60cm. Patented angle and height adjusting, easy and fast to use. 71 123 0404 Each

Mini Tramp with Complete Covering Model A frame size 112x112 cm, jumping sheet 60x60 cm 71 122 5307 Complete Model B frame size 125x125cm, jumping sheet 70x70 cm 71 122 5310 Complete

Fixing Cable For frame padding for model A + B. 71 122 5756

Set

Rubber Cable For tensioning mini tramp jumping sheet, approx. 2.5 m long with hanging hooks on both sides. Four cables are required per trampoline. 71 166 0106-12 Each

Panel with Holes End fixing panel for self assembly to rubber cable. 8 plates required for 1 mini tramp A +B. 71 122 5772 Price for 8

Jumping Sheet With integrated frame padding including 4 fixing cables for the padding. 71 122 5769

Replacement Hooks For hanging the rubber cable. 36 hooks are required for 1 mini tramp A + B. 71 122 5785 Price for 9

Jumping Sheet with Eyelets 71 122 5727 For Model A 60x60 cm 71 122 5349 For Model B 70x70 cm Rubber Cable (1 Set) Please order at the same time, to repair 8 panels with holes 71 122 5772 71 122 5714 For model A 71 122 5336 For model B Frame Padding/Complete Cover 71 122 5701 For model A 71 122 5323 For model B

The New Double Mini-Tramp 190

Mini Tramp 190 d Double In the new competition size. Frame dimensions: 350x190x70 cm. Sheet size: 292x92 cm. 71 123 0505

Order! Now

Trolley for Mini Tramps e Transport • made from galvanised steel tubing • 4 free moving wheels • with carrying handle and safety belts • space for 8 mini tramps in different sizes • easy to transport • secure storage • Assembled size 122x112x151 cm Mini tramp not included 71 123 0824

Team” Mini Tramp f “Euro A Mini Tramp for gymnasts, that pro-

e For 8 Mini Tramps

vides particularly high stability and exceptional bounce. It has a special frame construction with flat oval frame and large standing area, the first choice for top sport,

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

high level acrobatics and show groups. 125x130 cm, jumping sheet 60x70 cm with 6 mm wide nylon bands, complete frame padding cover, 36 springs 32x185 mm. 71 123 0811

t 211

Information on the Quality of Mats Materials: Gymnastics Mat Cores Compound material

Neopolen®

• foam from foam flakes that have undergone a special pressing and gluing process • very resistant but despite this elastic • volumetric weight (RG): 800, 100 or 120 kg/m≈ (for gymnastics mats) • Use: as a gymnastics equipment mat (RG 100 + RG 120) for landings and falling heights of up to 60 cm or as a floor gymnastics mat.

• expanded polypropylene foam, mainly sealed foam particles • good resilience to static and dynamic loads • volumetric weight (RG): low • Use: as a gymnastics equipment mat (light gymnastics mat) for pre-schools and primary schools for landings and falling heights of up to 60 cm • CFC free foam

Polygrip Gymnastic Mat Material

Napped Gymnastics Mat Material

• polyester: 100% • breaking strength: 2,500 N • 600g/m√ • pitted structure • resistant to slipping

• polyester: 100% • breaking strength: min. 2,500 N • resistant to slipping • napping structure • protects against skin grazes

PE Foam

• many layers of polyethylene foam glued on top of each other (sandwich style) • very stable yet a low weight • Volumetric weight (RG): 30kg/m≈ (for gymnastics mats) • Use: as a floor mat

PU Foam

• Polyurethane foam • very stable shape • Density: minimum 20kg/m≈ • Use: as a soft mat • CFC free foam

Materials: Gymnastics Mat Surfaces Canvas

• polyester: 100% • breaking strength: 2,500 N • 650g/m√ • smooth surface • abrasion resistance in accordance with EN 12503-5 + -6

Needle Fleece

• Core and surface solidly glued so no folds build up • no burns • skin friendly • stable underfoot

Tested, Checked and Standardised Sport-Thieme mats continually undergo quality control Types Absorption Properties checks. This is the Penetration Restore coefficient % Max. braking acceleration Type Typical use only way to guadepth mm (1 g = 9.81 ms√) (rebound height) rantee that the quality the customer not necessary not necessary 1 ≤ 80 Mat for Floor Exercises without vaulting (beginners) demands is deli2 ≤ 65 ≤ 35 20 - 60 Mats for floor exercises with vaulting (4 cm floor mat) vered. 3 ≤ 30 ≤ 50 ≤ 55 Mats for floor exercises with vaults for landing (6 cm gymnastics mat) A pivotal element of Mats for simple sequences with equipment with controlled 4 ≤ 40 ≤ 110 ≤ 50 this is complying with European standards landing (landing mats 12 cm) (EN) 12503-1. These standards apply technical 5 ≤ 40 ≤ 110 ≤ 50 Landing mats (landing mats 15 cm) safety standards to eight types of gym6 ≤ 14 * ≤ 105 * ≤ 15 * Mat for difficult sequences (competition landing mats 20 cm) nastics mat for use in schools, training and 7 ≤ 35 ≤ 185 ≤ 25 Soft floor mats for simple exercises (30 or 40 cm) competition. There are specified values that 8 ≤ 20 ≤ 250 ≤ 25 Soft floor mats (30 cm), volumetric weight 23 kg must be complied with for the shock absorption and anti-slip properties of the upper and * comparable value FIG (Federation Internationale de Gymastique) rules 1997 base of mats in order to guarantee the safety For your safety: Always use gymnastics mats for their intended purpose and be especially careful to ensure you have enough shock of users. absorption in line with European regulations.

EN 12503-1 Classified by Type and Use

Safety Requirements

Reivo® from Sport-Thieme Reivo® Kombi Mat System “A great contribution to preventing accidents” Advantage 1: All mats have the “Reivo Velcro Safety System” Advantage 2: No fear of the mats separating Advantage 3: Mat underneath is extremely non-slip Advantage 4: All soft mats can be converted into soft flooring Advantage 5: DIN EN certified, high quality materials

Joining and fixing flaps

212 t

Non-slip

High quality materials

Andreas Aguilar about Reivo® sports mats from Sport-Thieme: ”Safety is a very important aspect when children and young adults are partaking in gymnastics. The joints between sports mats that are laid together present a huge risk in this regard. This is why the intelligent solution of using flaps at the joints in Reivo® sports mats appeals to me so much. It prevents injury. This is only one of the examples of how their 25 years experience shows in Reivo® sports mats. Their experience also shows in the well thought out construction as well as in the high quality product, precise workmanship and long lifespan. Therefore my recommendation is clear: You should also choose Reivo® sports mats from Sport-Thieme.

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Andreas Aguilar Andreas Aguilar, World Gymnastics Champion on the rings in 1989, Olympian and German champion, gives advice now in the areas of children's gymnastics and encouraging and developing young talent among other subjects. As a result of his great experience, he is very competent to provide advice to Sport-Thieme in the development of gymnastics equipment and for practical tests with both young and old. Prices available on request. Please contact us.

What Mat for Which Purpose? Decision Making Factors for Mat Types The decision as to which type of mat, with different characteristics, should be used should be based on the following criteria: • Age group/body weight (primary or secondary level) • the pupil’s abilities • exercises they will undertake • jumping or falling height • type of landing The mat should have the optimal shock absorbing qualities but also the optimal firmness.

Sinking Depths: Gymnastics and floor gymnastics mats (1. + 4.)

Landing mats (2.)

Sinks deeply on flat surfaces

1. Equipment gymnastics mats EN12503-1 Type 3 These gymnastics equipment mats are for simple exercises and vaulting for floor gymnastics. They are suitable for landing and falling heights of up to 60 cm. 2. Landing mats EN 12503-1 Type 5 und 6 Landing mats are suitable for use with equipment for landing heights of over 60 cm. They ensure a safe stand thanks to the high level of shock absorption. Landing mats are particularly recommended if the acrobatic movement contains a flip in flight or more than one complete body rotation. It is recommended that more shock absorption is used for lighter people and for those who are beginners. In this case you should combine the landing mat (see page 220) with the soft floor mats (see pages 218 and 219), or use a Reivo® Kombi Convertible mat (see page 217).

3. Soft Floor mats EN 12503-1 Type 7 und 8 Soft Floor mats are suitable for flat landings such as the Hecht vault, over gymnastics boxes, high jump, or uncontrolled landings. As the user will sink deep with good shock absorption, this ensures safety. The relatively deep level that the user sinks when landing on the feet or from equipment presents a problem. Sinking deep can cause a “vice effect” and lead to injury. This risk can be reduced by using landing mats (see page 220-221) or floor gymnastics mats (continuous). This avoids “swing bridges” and the gymnast has a higher level of stability when standing. With the Reivo® Kombi Convertible mat (see page 217) you can combine both mat designs ideally: • point elastic soft floor side with canvas for uncontrolled landings • flat elastic side with needle felt cover for a high level of standing stability on landing.

4.Floor gymnastics mats (continuous roll):EN 12503-1 Type 2 For floor gymnastics, a discipline for women and men with tumbling and gymnastic elements over an area of 12x12 m or 14x14 m. It can be used in schools as a covering between mats or for a more secure stand on soft mats.

Floor gymnastics mats (carpet) on page 222-223 3.

Soft mats (3.)

Soft Mats on page 218-219

Sinks deepest 2.

Landing mats on page 220-221

Gymnastics Mats on page 215-216

Transporting and Storing Mats 6.

If mats are stored, transported and used in a suitable way their lifespan and functionality will be extended. There should be no nicks or bending stress as otherwise the inner structure of the mat will be damaged.

5. 5. Floor mats (Continuous mats): Storage: Rolled up on a core, with the felt side outwards, fixed in place with the belt or Velcro band; standing or hanging. Transport: Carry with the handles or on a special mat trolley. Our latest mat trolley is designed in such a way that there are no pressure points left on the mats.

Tel. +49 53 57-181543

Transport and storage for floor gymnastics mat (continuous) on page 223

6. Soft and Landing Mats: Storage: Lying storage is the best, alternatively: upright against a wall fixed in place with straps and protective corners, the mat should not sag. Transport: In an upright position on a special trolley or carried by schoolchildren. Transport and storage for soft and landing mats on page 218

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

7. Gymnastics Mats: Storage: In a mat trolley (please check the manufacturer’s instructions as to the loading permitted), that fits the mat's size (no hanging over the sides); up to a maximum of 12 gymnastics mats per trolley. Transport: With the mat trolley; remove and replace from the smaller end, in primary schools transport the mats in fours and using at least two people for secondary schools. Transport and storage for gymnastics mats on page 216

t 213

Gymnastics Mats for

Equipment:

“Sportime” Gymnastics Mats • core glued to cover • will not cause folds • very non-slip

a With Velcro Corners

The light gymnastics mats for children • low weight • very solid • with velcro on corners

making it ideal for children to use and carry. This mat is not suitable for heavy people as the mat is light and will not be as non-slip when supporting heavier weights. Velcro straps on the corners, which can be used to hold several mats together. Covered upper side with smooth blue 100% polyester gymnastics mat material with non-slip base. See table for more details.

Lightweight Gyma Children's nastics Mats Complies with EN 12503, type 3. This light gymnastics mat is ideal for preschools and primary schools. With Alveo foam filling. Very light when compared to normal foam mats (but still much firmer),

Characteristics of Mats Uses: User: Surface: Core: Base: a

Floor exercises Pre-schools and primary Canvas Alveo Gymnastics mat material

150x100x6 200x100x6 200x100x8 200x125x8

posite foam core RG 100, solidly attached to 100% polyester gymnastics mat mate-

Characteristics of Mats Uses: Equipment and floor gymnastics mats User: Schools and clubs Surface: 100% polyester gymnastics mat material Core: Composite foam Base: Waffle base

rial. This gives extra assurance that puckering cannot happen. The under side has anti-slip waffle type material to give more security against slipping. It is not possible to add accessories such as velcro bands, carrying loops or carrying handles to this type of mat. 71 120 2045 150x100x4 cm, 9 kg 71 120 2003 150x100x6 cm, 12 kg 71 120 2058 200x100x4 cm, 12 kg 71 120 2016 150x100x8, 15 kg 71 120 2029 200x100x6, 16 kg 71 120 2032 200x100x8, 19 kg

With Alveo foam 100% polyester filling canvas upper surface

Blue

Yellow

Green

Red

Dispatch weight

71 121 3326 71 121 3300 71 121 3313 71 208 9704

71 208 8903 71 208 8932 71 208 8961 71 208 9717

71 208 8916 71 208 8945 71 208 8974 71 208 9720

71 208 8929 71 208 8958 71 208 8987 71 208 9733

5.5 kg 7 kg 8 kg 10 kg

Sizes in cm

Gymnastic Mat b “Sportime” The economical alternative. Com-

Price

New

100% Polyester Gymnastics Mat Material

Waffle material underneath

RG 100 composite foam core with gymnastics mat material (100% polyester) tightly bonded.

e Characteristics of Mats Uses:

“Sportime” Gymnastics Mats

Equipment Mat

• landing characteristics • very stable to stand on Base: • you will make a deeper impression than in standard mats speed at which this mat breaks down • optimal shock absorption shocks, this newest development from our

Even more non-slip!

Characteristics of Mats

Available in 4 colours

Equipment mats, floor exercises with jumping User: Schools, clubs and pre-schools Surface: Polygrip material glued to the core Core: Sandwich method, composite foam/Neopolen Base: Waffle base glued to the core Uses:

With this new super light gymnastics mat you will not need velcro bands or other elements to joint up mats. This is because the base is bonded with very anti-slip waffle backed material guaranteeing a safe stand on the floor and preventing slippage between mats. As the edges are so exact they can be placed up against each other. The “Super Light” surface is bonded to the foam core making Gymnastics Mat ceases impossible and increase the safety Complies with EN 12503, type 3 while doing gymnastics. A special sandwich Suitable for schools and clubs, floor and core (Neopolen and composite foam) equipment gymnastics up to 60 cm and for ensures very good shock absorption. Polyuse in pre-schools. grip 100 % polyester. c Sizes Dispatch Blue Yellow Green Red weight in cm

150x100x6 200x100x6

71 222 9007 71 222 9049

71 222 9010 71 222 9052

214 t

71 222 9023 71 222 9065

71 222 9036 71 222 9078

User: Surface: Core:

Equipment gymnastics mat for simple routines Schools, clubs Polygrip glued to core Special composite foam VEV 120 Gymnastic material glued to core

5.5 kg 7.5 kg

“GTM 3000” d Reivo® Gymnastics Equipment Mat Complies with EN 12503-1 type 3 and 4 with landing absorption properties! This gymnastics mat has the best shock absorption properties. The core is made from VEV 120 high quality special foam. Cover made from non-tearing, anti-slip 100% polyester Polygrip gymnastics mat material. Underside with anti-slip 100% polyester waffle base. Upper and under side are glued tightly to the foam core. Square cut, in order to join mats together smoothly. With coloured carrying handles. The new foam used has extremely good shock absorption and is capable of immediately absorbing and breaking down any energy arising very quickly. Thanks to the

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

own manufacturing section is perfect for gymnastics with equipment in schools. Blue 71 207 7606 200x100x6 cm, 17 kg Yellow 71 207 7619 200x100x6 cm, 17 kg Green 71 207 7622 200x100x6 cm, 17 kg Red 71 207 7635 200x100x6 cm, 17 kg Blue 71 207 7648 200x100x8 cm, 22 kg Yellow 71 207 7651 200x100x8 cm, 22 kg Green 71 207 7664 200x100x8 cm, 22 kg Red 71 207 7677 200x100x8 cm 22 kg Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Gymnastics Mats in Different Designs “Super” and “Classic” Gymnastics Mats

For mats: a – d

a+b

• composite foam is flame retardant • easily gripped and non-slip 100% polyester cover Covered zip reduces risk of injury

Gymnastics Mat a “Super” Manufactured to EN 12503-1, type 3. Filled with high quality composite RG 120 foam filling 120 kg/m≈, with removable core. Can also be used as a small floor gymnastics mat. The cover has a sealed in zip, made from 100% polyester napped gymnastics mat material, non-slip, dustfree, washable and with leather corners without carrying handles, squared off for stacking. Carrying handles and a velcro band can be attached. Contact our Export department at +49 (0) 5357 181 543 or info@sport-thieme.com. Details: see table

b “Classic” Gymnastics Mat

Complies with EN 12503-1 type 3 With RG120 composite foam filling (120 kg/m≈). Pitted polygrip gymnastics mat material, 2500 N tear resistance, 600g/m√, in strong blue, yellow, green and red. Mat material sewn all around with leather corners and the same anti slip qualities as normal mat material. It is possible to attach carrying handles or a Velcro band: contact the international department at +49 (0) 5357 181 543 or info@sport-thieme.com. Details: see table

Gymnastics Mat c 'Special' Filled with RG 80 composite foam filling, blue, non-slip, dust free, washable with leather corners and without carrying handle, squared off for stacking. Ideal for floor exercises and very easy to transport, napped 100% polyester gymnastics mat material. Carrying handles and a velcro band can be attached. Contact our Export department at +49 (0) 5357 181 543 or info@sport-thieme.com. Details: see table

Characteristics of Mat Equipment gymnastics mats, floor gymnastics mats Schools and clubs a gymnastics mat material, b Polygrip mat material Composite mat filling Non-slip mat material

Uses: Users: Surface: Core: Base:

Characteristics of Mats c+d Uses: Users: Surface: Core: Base:

Floor exercises Schools, clubs and pre-schools c gymnastics mat material, d Polygrip mat material Composite mat filling Non-slip mat material

RG 120 complies with EN

Sport-Thieme “Special” and “Classic S” Gymnastics Mats

New

• Now also available in strong colours! • Exchangeable core

Gymnastics Mats Cover “Classic” Gymnastics Mats a“Super” made from Gymnastics Mat Material b Cover made from Polygrip Mat Material

Sizes in cm

Blue

150x100x6 150x100x8 200x100x6 200x100x8 200x125x6 200x125x8

71 120 4403 71 120 4429 71 120 4416 71 120 4432 71 120 4458 71 120 4445

71 207 7707 71 207 7749 71 207 7781 71 207 7824 71 207 7866 71 207 7909

Green

Red

Dispatch weight

71 207 7723 71 207 7765 71 207 7808 71 207 7840 71 207 7882 71 207 7925

71 207 7736 71 207 7778 71 207 7811 71 207 7853 71 207 7895 71 207 7938

14 kg 17 kg 18 kg 23 kg 22 kg 28 kg

Yellow 71 207 7710 71 207 7752 71 207 7794 71 207 7837 71 207 7879 71 207 7912

S” Gymnastics d “Classic Mat With RG80 composite foam filling. The mat material is 100% polyester pitted Polygrip, 2500 N tear resistance, 600 g/m√, in strong blue, yellow, green, and red. Mat material sewn all around with the same anti slip qualities as normal mat material. It is possible to attach carrying handles or a Velcro band: contact the international department at +49 (0) 5357 181 543 or info@sport-thieme.com Details: see table

Mat Trolley e Gymnastics Community design registration pending. Mat trolley with 12 x 100x100x6 cm gymnastics mats. RG120 kg/m≈ flame retardant composite foam core. Surface and sides are laminated with non-tear, narbed non slip gymnastics mat material (100% polyester), blue. Underside with new extremely non-slip waffle back. The surface will not develop folds thanks to the lamination and this makes the mat safer for gymnastics than standard mats. The adhesive used in the lamination is environmentally friendly and guarantees long lasting adhe-

RG 80

Gymnastics Mats Cover “Classic S” Gymnastics Mats c “Super” made from Gymnastics Mat Material d Cover made from Polygrip Mat Material

Sizes in cm

Blue

Yellow

Green

Red

Dispatch Weight

150x100x6 150x100x8 200x100x6 200x100x8 200x125x6 200x125x8

71 120 3309 71 120 3325 71 120 3312 71 120 3338 71 120 3354 71 120 3341

71 119 2344 71 119 2386 71 119 2461 71 119 2504 71 119 2546 71 119 2588

71 119 2357 71 119 2399 71 119 2474 71 119 2517 71 119 2559 71 119 2591

71 119 2360 71 119 2403 71 119 2487 71 119 2520 71 119 2562 71 119 2605

71 119 2373 71 119 2416 71 119 2490 71 119 2533 71 119 2575 71 119 2618

10 kg 12 kg 13 kg 16 kg 18 kg 22 kg

sion to the foam. This also ensures the squareness and that the mats stack well. Other additions to this gymnastics mat are not possible. The trolley has 4 non-coloured wheels, ø 10cm, two of which can be locked. With lockable protective canvas. • Ideal for children to handle • Can be individually laid out in 12m√ mat surfaces • Does not need much space 100x100x80 cm • mats are made in accordance with EN12503-1 type 3 71 120 4474

Trolley Gymnastics Mat

New

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 215

Kombi Gymnastics Mat Reivo® Kombi Gymnastics Mat, the ideal gymnastics mat

a Reivo® Gymnastics Mats

• Seamless joints lengthways and crossways • Light, non-slip, • accidents and injuries are reduced as there is no slipping or creases in the mat!

Complies with EN 12503-1 Type 3. Core of composite foam 120 kg/m√, coated in fleece. High quality composite foam, which is very elastic due to the coating and very stable for landing on. Cover: made from strong gymnastics mat material with non-tear 100% polyester backing fabric that complies with EN standards. With joining flaps and covered zip. 71 119 1817-1 150x100x8 cm, 17 kg 71 119 1817-2 200x100x6 cm, 18 kg 71 119 1817-3 200x100x8 cm, 23 kg

Gymnastics Mat Accessories

New Handles for Mats b Carrying Tight fitting handles thanks to their special construction therefore no fear of tripping. Their design also means that there is no need to tuck the carrying handles under the mats. Four carrying handles per mat. 71 120 5217 Extra charge: Velcro Fasteners These fasteners can be used to hold several mats together and create a bigger surface. 71 120 5103 Extra price per mat

Safety experts and the BAGUV (German insurance body) state that

100% polyester High quality composite gymnastics mat foam material core material cover

1) “Gymnastic mats that are laid together causing a gap are the cause of many injuries” 2) “Gymnastics mats are only secure for landings from up to 60 cm” Reivo® Kombi gymnastics mats offer the optimal safety BAGUV = Bundesverband der Unfall-Versicherungsträger (German insurance body)

Reivo® Light Gymnastics Mat

Mat Trolley d Gymnastics With solid platform for better transJoining and fixing flaps

e Upper cover, blue 100% smooth gymnastics mat material

Neopolen® Foam Filling

The ideal mats for pre-schools and primary schools Joining and fixing flaps

portation and storage. With 2 each of trestle wheels and castors, ø 125 mm. Will support up to 400 kg. 71 122 1507 for mat size: 100x150 cm 71 122 1510 for mat size: 100x200 cm

Light Gymnastics Mats e Reivo® Complies with EN 12503 type 3 The ideal mat for primary schools. The Neopolen® foam filling makes it light in comparison to standard mats (but much stronger), therefore making it ideal for children to move around. With fixing straps to join many mats at the sides or behind each other. The upper cover is made from smooth blue 100% polyester gymnastics material while the underside is non-slip. Without carrying loops. 71 121 3339 150x100x6 cm, 6 kg 71 121 3342 200x100x6 cm, 7.5 kg 71 121 3355 200x100x8 cm, 8.5 kg

f Reivo® Gymnastics Mat 1. 100% polyester polygrip mat material cover

2. 100% polyester gymnastics mat cover

Reivo® Gymnastics Mats • in new colours • very tear-resistant • both covers 100% polyester

Joining and fixing flaps 1. Cover made from polygrip mat material

Sizes in cm Dispatch Weight Blue Yellow 150x100x6 10 kg 71 119 1833 71 119 1875 150x100x8 12 kg 71 119 1846 71 119 1888 200x100x6 13 kg 71 119 1859 71 119 1891 200x100x8 16 kg 71 119 1862 71 119 1918

216 t

Green 71 119 1921 71 119 1934 71 119 1947 71 119 1950

Red 71 119 1963 71 119 1976 71 119 1989 71 119 1992

2. Cover made from gymnastics mat material Blue 71 119 1804-0 71 119 1804-1 71 119 1804-2 71 119 1804-3

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Complies with EN 12503, type 3. Core in sandwich building method. Super light but strong elastic Neopolen light glued foam core of composite foam 120 kg/m≈. This is how the high elasticity but very high stability is achieved. The mats are much lighter to handle. With joining and fixing flaps and a covered zip. Available in two different covers: 1. Polygrip mat material: 100% polyester in blue, yellow, red or green with grained imprint. Breaking strength 2500N, 600 g/m√. The polygrip mat material has the same non-slip characteristics as normal gymnastics mat material but with a higher breaking strength. 2. Gymnastics mat material: strong 100% polyester, with non-tear backing fabric. Complies with EN standards. Prices available on request. Please contact us.

2 in 1 Kombi Convertible Mats TURN

Skin Friendly Needle Felt Cover, well bonded to the core: no creases!

• The mat with two sides • Duo mat • The ideal all-round mat for schools, clubs and top level sport.

a Landing Mat Flat elastic landing side for stable standing when jumping.

Needle felt cover on upper surface

EN 12503–1 Type 4 and 7 was complied with in making these mats.

Soft Mat Point elastic soft floor side made from high quality polyether foam for uncontrolled landings.

Canvas upper surface 100% polyester

Kombi Convertible Mats a Reivo® Sandwich building method Core

“The ideal mat must have the following characteristics: 1) lt must be soft –like the soft mat 2) It must be strong and surface elastic like the landing mat.” „ The ideal sports mat with these characteristics is the Reivo® Kombi Convertible Mat. * BAGUV = Bundesverband der UnfallVersicherungsträger (German regional association for accident insurers)

Important: a joining and fixing band is only necessary if there is more than one mat. The joining and fixing bands are approx. 3.50 m long and approx 30 cm wide. 71 119 4702

Wrong side for landing

b Variable “Anti slip system”

Joining and fixing bands

INAL ORIG OM

Safety experts and BAGUV* have established that:

and Fixing Bands b Joining For securing 2 Kombi convertible mats.

Very stable landings on the flat elastic landing side

• Landing and soft mats compactly merged into one mat! • 2 mats in one • Lower purchase costs • Takes up less space • Reivo® Velcro safety system • Produced in an environmentally friendly manner • Absolutely non-slip mat cover on both sides • Seamless Velcro connecting strips • High quality needled felt cover which complies with EN 12503-6 • These mats are recommended by accident insurance experts • There are no creases in the cover. The risk of accidents is greatly reduced. In contrast to other mats, the Reivo® Kombi Convertible mat has the safety measure that both EN und the BAGUV consider an indispensable safety prerequisite: the “Anti Slip Base”.

The Advantages of Reivo® Kombi Convertible Mats

The mat that is universally used in school competitions. Flat elastic landing side with light foam centre. Soft mat side is made from high quality polyether foam (RG23). Top and sides are made from coated 100% polyester tear resistant foam(3000 N/5 cm), basis weight 680g/m√, with 10 cm wide fleece band, 6 tear-proof carrying handles and air vents. The “Anti slip band” (width 90 cm) attached to the side in a hinged manner, makes the mat extremely anti slip on the underside if required. Size:300x200x30 cm. 71 119 4601

B I -MAT T E N-SY

Seamless joints one behind the other with the fixing band

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 217

Soft Floor Mats (Landing Mats) EN 12503-1 Type 8

Folds down With practical carrying handles Soft Gymnastics Mats d+e With special high quality elastic foam filling

Accessories Now! Order

d Soft Gymnastics Mat

100% polyester blue canvas cover Underneath, antislip 100% polyester gymnastics material

Slip Underlay for c Anti Gymnastic Mats Playing blocks, soft landing mats or other equipment for a stable stand. Both sides have a waffle surface, 190x95 cm. 71 119 6809 Anti Slip Underlay For super soft landing mat and soft mats. 3x0.96 m. 71 119 7105-1

Soft Mat b Foldable Versatile mats, also ideal for high

Soft Gymnastics a Foldable Mat This type of soft mat is ideal folded down as a large gymnastics mat and can also be used folded as space saving a soft mat. When folded: 150x200x30 cm; opened: 300x200x15 cm. Upper side 100% polyester non-slip gymnastics mat

material. While the other half is covered with 100% polyester canvas. It is a combination of gymnastics mat and soft mat. Core: foam RG 23/35, 4 carrying loops (all through cover) without leather corners, with side air holes. 71 120 5448

jump training. Stores in the smallest areas. Consists of polyether foam core and durable coated 100% polyester fabric cover with 100% polyester anti-slip base, mesh for air circulation, zip and carrying handles. 3x2x0.25 m, folded down: 1.5x2x0.5 m 71 120 5419 3x2x0.3 m, folded: 1.5x2x0.6 m 71 120 5406

Complies with EN 12503-1 Typ 7. For the highest level of safety in gymnastics, especially as fall protection in schools and club tournament when the body comes into contact with the mat. We would recommend also laying a mat on top for controlled landings and a safe stand. Filled with high quality, elastic foam, RG 20 CFCfree. Cover is made of 100% polyester blue canvas with air holes and a non-slip underside. The mat comes with carrying handles. 71 119 8010 1.5x1x0.25 m 71 119 8007 2x1.5x0.3 m 71 119 8023 3x2x0.25 m 71 119 8049 3x2x0.30 m 71 119 8065 3x2x0.40 m 71 119 8036 3.5x2x0.30 m 71 119 8052 4x3x0.60 m Mats e Soft Manufactured to EN 12503-1 type 8. Same features as illustration 1, however the foam core has a net weight of 22 kg/m≈, CFC-free. 300x200x30 cm, not illustrated. 71 120 5901

Find out more about the quality of the mats: see page 212-213

Mat Accessories

Fastening Belt g Wall For soft mats and landing mats. Made of polypropylene band, 5 cm wide, with metal fastening on the top of the mat. Band can be adjusted with metal rings at both ends. With screws and dowels for attaching to wall. 71 120 5305 Length: 4 m 71 120 5321 Length: 5 m

Mat Protection Set

Trolley with Platform f Mat The solid platform provides a better way of transporting and storing mats. With 4 easy moving ballbearing castors,

218 t

ø 50 mm, ca. 300x100 cm. Height with mat 210 cm. Belts band with safety hooks and adjustable 8 hook for tightening the mat. 71 122 1015

The set consists of: • 1 pair of mat protection corners h • 1 x 4m wall fastening belt g 71 120 5510 Set

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

New Protector for h Mat the Wall Fastening Belt Patent number 102004039795. To dramatically extend the lifespan of your mats and landing areas. Nicking or cutting are avoided as the pressure is spread over a large area. Simple to attach to any 5 cm belt. Flexible plastic 20x10x5 cm. 71 120 5507 Pair Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Kombi Soft Mats

The Velcro material is of top quality and guaranteed to fulfil all functions.

Reivo® Kombi Soft Mats • Absolutely non-slip and seamless when joined together • Variable surface combinations

INAL M

ORIG

BI -M AT TE N- SY

a Reivo® Kombi Soft Mats Manufactured in accordance with EN 12503-1 type 7. Core made from high quality RG 20 polyether foam. Cover: blue, very strong 100% polyester canvas. With air holes offering the best ventilation on landing. 4 tear resistant carrying loops. Complete with Reivo® Velcro safety system. Integrated, tear resistant seams, smooth sealed joints and connection bands on both the long and short side of the mat. 4 additional sealing loops for a compact connection between the Reivo® landing support and Reivo® landing mat. Integrated connection loops to ensure a compact joint between the soft mats. 10cm brushed wool band on top. 71 119 2214 2x3x0.25 m 71 119 2201 2x3x0.3 m

• high quality CFC free RG 20 special elastic foam filling • 100% polyester blue canvas cover

“Half” Reivo® Kombi Soft Mats

Seamless joints

The Advantages of Reivo® Kombi Soft Mats • Integrated loops and flaps for compactly joining any number of soft mats together. This means that there is no need for fleece bands and loose flaps. Fixing loops cannot be used as carrying handles. • Kombi soft mats can be used with Reivo® Kombi Landing Mats changing them from a point elastic to a elastic area mat. • With velcro safety system • landing mats prevent “swinging actions” Compact joints

Reivo® b “Half” Kombi-mats Ideal for transport and storage. 2 “half” mats are the size of one standard mat. Blue. 71 119 2230 2x1.5x0.25 m 71 119 2227 2x1.5x0.3 m

Seamless sealing and connection flaps

Loops for fixing Reivo® landing surfaces and Reivo® landing mats

Kombi Soft mats combined with Reivo® Kombi landing mats without any joints for a safe stand

“Super” Kombi Soft Landing Area Kombi Soft Mat c “Super” Core of the mat: high quality polyether foam with air chamber system (therefore super soft). Core of the lock mats.High quality polyether foam (solid). Cover of the mat: 100% polyester canvas underneath 100% polyester gymnastics mat material. Meshed 100% polyester material on the sides ensures the best ventilation when jumping. Comes with “Velcro safety system”: Integrated, tear resistant seams, smooth sealed joints and connection bands on both the long and short side of the mat. With additional fixing straps, the locking mats can be compactly bound together. Upper is encircled in a 20 cm fleeced band. Cover of the locking mats: Cover made from a special 100% polyester mesh material, resistant to studs. Under surface made from 100% polyester non-slip cover. Size: 2x3x0.5 m. 71 119 4803

Locking Mats Locking mats (support for 2 soft mats) 400x300x10 cm. 71 119 4829 In high jump, for safety reasons the landing area should be at least 300x400 cm. Super soft, super safe, many uses

2 individual mats (normal size 200x300x50 cm)

Seamless joints

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Sealing mats, fast and safe

t 219

Kombi Landing Mats ab Strong compact joint using the fixing straps

Can also be used alone as a single mat

b Durable, high quality needle felt cover

Manufactured to DIN EN 12503–1 type 4

• With Velcro safety system • Versatile for area building areas; • non-slip without joints

The BAGUV has established:

Core in the sandwich building method: Optimal pressure distribution and shock absorption because of light layered polyether foam. Cover made from robust high quality needled felt. Comes complete with Reivo® Velcro safety system. Integrated, tear resistant seams, smooth seals and connection bands on both the long and short side of the mat. 4 sealing loops for a compact connection between the Reivo Kombi soft mats. Four carrying loops in the corners to compactly joint up with the Reivo® Kombi soft mats.

a Reivo® Kombi Landing Mats With needled felt cover, 300x200x12 cm. 71 119 4207

Kombi Landing Mats b Half “Half” mats are ideal for use, trans-

Easy to transport

Combination of mats a and b

“the landing on standard soft mats can be dangerous”, therefore please use Reivo® Kombi Landing Mats with the suitable supportc

port and storage. Two “half” mats become one normal needle felt surfaced mat, 200x150x12 cm. 71 119 4223

Kombi Landing Mat Surfaces The economical alternative: Can be used as a landing surface and an individual mat.

With a high quality Solid light foam strong needle felt cover core

Safety experts and BAGUV (Bavarian Insurance Assoc.) established that: Surface c Landing Super Light- more solid, elastic light foam centre with composite foam on top. Cover made from hard-wearing high quality needle felt cover. With needle felt surface 300x200x6 cm. Reivo Kombi landing surfaces in standard sizes. 71 119 3709 “Half” Landing Mats Are ideal for use, transport and storage. Two “half” mats become one normal needle felt surfaced mat. 200x150x6 cm. 71 119 3725 Combined with Reivo® Kombi Gymnastics mats

220 t

Joining and fixing flaps

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Flat elastic landing mats are indispensable for safe gymnastics The Reivo® landing surfaces offer, for the first time, a perfect system for equipping all soft landing mats with the requirements to make them safe landing areas. Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Landing Mats

12 + 15 cm thick: Complies with EN 12503-1 type 4 and 5

20 cm thick: Complies with EN 12503-1 type 6

a+b Includes Velcro band on corners

a Landing Mats Complies with EN12503-1 type 6 (20 cm thick) or type 4 and 5 (12 + 15 cm thick). These mats prevent the user from sinking deep into the mat upon landing, provide great posture support and therefore prevent sprains and twisting. You should not be without this product. A special sandwich design with thick side stabilisation in composite foam, flat elastic effect. Top part with skin friendly plucked velour glued tightly to the core. Sides 100% polyester canvas with air holes and a zip on three sides. Non-slip base and Velcro connections on the edges guarantee that you have the best product.

71 119 2780 71 119 2777 71 119 2810 71 119 2807 71 119 2764 71 119 2751 71 119 2748 71 119 2735 71 119 2793 71 119 2722 71 119 2719 71 119 2706

200x100x12 cm 200x100x15 cm 200x125x8 cm 200x100x8 cm 200x125x12 cm 200x125x15 cm 200x125x20 cm 200x150x12 cm 300x200x8 cm 300x200x12 cm 300x200x15 cm 300x200x20 cm

b Landing Mats

Complies with EN12503-1 type 4 and 5. The economic variation for schools. Upper side bright blue needle fleece, 100% polyester canvas on the sides, underside 100% polyester gymnastics mat material. With Velcro corners for attaching to other mats. Sandwich structure with reinforced edges. Good standing safety, increased shock absorption, flat elastic quality and turning freedom are the characteristics of this mat. There is a 2 year guarantee against tearing. 71 119 2881 200x100x12 cm 71 119 2878 200x100x15 cm 71 119 2865 200x125x15 cm 71 119 2852 200x150x12 cm 71 119 2849 300x200x12 cm 71 119 2836 300x200x15 cm 71 119 2823 300x200x20 cm

Insurance companies recommend landing mats as a way of preventing sports accidents

See also: Convertible and landing mats that comply with EN 12503-1 Type 4+7 on page 217-220

Yellow side made from 100% polyester canvas PU foam core bonded to PE foam

Soft c Super Landing Mat A cost efficient alternative with a special sandwich construction. The yellow side is made of canvas (100% polyester) and filled with 50 mm light foam which is very firm for a good stand. Blue side filled with 25 cm EN standard polyether foam, serving as a soft floor mat. For additional safety we recommend the non slip underlay. Size: 300x200x30 cm. 71 119 7004 Slip Underlay d Anti For super soft landing and soft mats. 300x96 cm. 71 119 7105

c Now! Order

Anti Slip Underlay.

“Happy Landing” e Spieth Low impact joint protecting soft floor mat to be laid on top of landing mat. Cover made of PVC material and 100% polyester gymnastics mat material. Can be used on both sides. Core made from special soft PU foam. Authorised women’s thickness: 5 cm and 10 cm, thickness for men: 10 cm. 71 120 3905 200x200x5 cm 71 120 3918 200x200x10 cm 71 120 3921 400x200x10 cm

e Special soft foam core

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 221

Floor Gymnastics Mats Reivo® Training Mats: • can be used as gymnastics floor area • PE foam with skin-friendly needle felt The gymnastics mats are glued using a heating procedure the bonds skin friendly needle felt to a PE foam.

a Complies with EN standard 12503-1 Type 2

New high quality carpeting

• Easily transported • Stacks well Training Mat a Reivo® The ideal training and exercise partner for beginner training on the balance beam, as well as the training balance beam or gymnastics beam as a floor gymnastics Seamless area, as an additional mat at the end of an joint Now! acro-track and as a cover for soft mats. r e rd O These are just examples of the multiple uses this mat has. These gymnastics mats have skin-friendly needle felt, which is Velcro Band highly abrasion proof and heat sealed with For light floor mats and surfaces. You a PE foam. To join more than one mat can now join together tracks, either lengthtogether we recommend using our velcro ways or sideways, without any seams. bands. Width 5cm, brown. 71 120 6207 200x100x3.5 cm, 4 kg 71 119 6001-1 12 m 71 120 6210 200x150x3.5 cm, 6 kg

Trolley c Transport for Gymnastics Mats

With solid platform, therefore protects during storage and transportation. With 2 trestle wheels and transport castors ø 125 mm. Carries up to 400 kg. For mat size 200x100 cm. 71 122 1510-1 Each

Innovative d The Floor Gymnastics Carpet

d The Innovative Floor Gymnastics Carpet

222 t

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Uses: • Gymnastics • Cheerleading • Tumbling • Acrobatics Advantages: This roll-out mat is characterised by the new technology used in its production, which gives it huge advantages over conventional rolling mats: • rolling up and out are child's play and can be carried out by 1 person • no need to turn the mats over anymore • the carpet is well protected against contaminants • no rolling core necessary • saves space • saves time • innovative • Bernstein yellow, thickness 35 mm 71 119 6447 6x2 m 71 119 6450 12x2 m Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Floor Gymnastics and Accessories Reivo® Floor Mats and “Super” Gymnastics Mats

a • • • •

no burns no grazes needle felt mat thickness 35 mm complies with EN 12503-1: Type 2

Floor Gymnastics a Reivo Mats and 'Super' Floor Mats Amber coloured needle felt cover with a light foam core, resistant PE foam. For school and club sports, floor gymnastics and as a surface on soft mats when using gymnastics equipment. Lightweight Mats Available lengths: 1.5 and 2.00 m wide, 6-14 m long. Soft gymnastics mats 1 m wide or different lengths will be subject to a 5% surcharge.

Also available in blue upon request Width Price per m√ Thickness: 25 mm 71 119 7509 Width: 150 cm 71 119 7512 Width: 200 cm Thickness: 35 mm 71 119 7600 Width: 150 cm 71 119 7613 Width: 200 cm

m√ m√ m√ m√

Reivo Lightweight Floor Gymnastics Mat 12x12 m Set of 6 lengths of 12x2 m or 8 lengths of 12x1.5 m with wooden cores. Delivery includes Velcro straps and fastening straps. 71 119 6418 25 mm 71 119 6421 35 mm

Reivo Light Floor Gymnastics Mat, 14x14 m Consisting of 7 tracks, 14x2 m, thickness 35 mm, including wooden core, velcro band and buckle straps. 71 119 6434

Floor Mat Trolleys and Accessories Vertical Trolley

Now! Order

b e c

We recommend ordering wooden reels e for floor mats

Wooden Core

Fastening Straps

Trolley b Vertical For upright transport of a single,

Trolley 140x190 cm

Transport Trolley

Trolley d Transport Carries 2 or 3 rolled gym mats. Var-

rolled, floor gym mat. The vertical trolley needs less space. With safety belt. Supports up to 150 kg. 71 122 1129

nished frame construction with 4 double castors, ø 75 mm. For mats 1.5 - 2 m wide. 140x190 cm. With MDF plate to protect the mat from pressure points. 71 122 1116

Straps c Fastening For floor gymnastics mats of all

Core e Wooden Necessary for floor gymnastics

types up to 14 m in length, with practical belt closing which prevents the mat rolling out. 71 119 6304 Each

mats. Makes transport and handling easier. 71 119 6102 1.5 m long 71 119 6115 2.0 m long

For floor covering and mats for floor gymnastics. Made from steel tubing, approx. 130x90 cm with 4 double castors, ø 75 mm, for rolled up floor gym-

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

f Trolley 130x90 cm nastics mats. With a MDF plate for protecting the mat against pressure marks. 71 122 1103

t 223

Exercise Mats for Comfort Airex® Gymnastic Mats New “Coronella” with special eyelets

b • latex free • optimal shock absorption • certified CE quality

“Coronella” Gymnastics Mats

185x60x1.5 cm, rounded edges with eyelets. Distance between eyelets is 40 cm. 71 126 9202 Blue 71 126 9215 Green 71 126 9228 Red

a a

Airex® Gymnastic mats

A high quality versatile product with excellent characteristics. Airex® mats are made from special closed cell foam and are therefore very hygienic. These mats have been specially designed for school and club gymnastics and can be used in medical gymnastics as well as in water therapy. Skin friendly, strong, insulating and with optimal shock absorption.

“Coronella” Gymnastics Mat 185x60x1.5 cm, rounded corners. 71 126 9606 Blue 71 126 9619 Green 71 126 9622 Red

“Corona” Gymnastics Mat 185x100x1.5 cm, rounded corners. 71 126 9707 Blue 71 126 9710 Green 71 126 9723 Red

“Hercules” Gymnastics Mat 200x100x2.5 cm, right angled corners. 71 126 9808 Blue 71 126 9811 Green

“Atlas” Gymnastics Mat 200x125x1.5 cm, right angled corners. 71 127 0323 Red 71 127 0310 Green

Airex® “Fitline” Gymnastics Mat

Handy exercise mats with Airex® well proven qualities: strong, warm on the body, skin friendly and hygienic. Ideal for fitness training from time to time. Can be used anywhere. Approx. 10 mm thick, aqua blue. 71 127 0509 approx. 140x58 cm 71 127 0512 approx. 180x58 cm

ArmaSport® Gymnastic Mats 50 cm

Fitness

New • latex free • excellent point elasticity

School- and Club Sports

Rehabilitation and Physiotherapy

ArmaSport® Gymnastic Mats

These mats offer extra safety for sports use: The have a new hanging eyelet, that protects from injuries as it is in a strong rubber cover. The quality foam that holds its weight well is hygienic and sweat and saliva proof. The material does not contain latex. Sanitized and GS approved.

Body 15 Gymnastics Mat (LxWxH): approx. 140x60x1.5 cm, weight approx. 2.1 kg, with eyelets. 71 207 6212 Blue 71 207 6209 Red 71 207 6238 Black

Fit 15 Gymnastics Mat

Star 15 Gymnastics Mat

(LxWxH): approx. 120x60x1.5 cm, weight approx. 1.8 kg, with eyelets. 71 207 6111 Blue 71 207 6108 Red

(LxWxH): approx. 180x60x1.5 cm, weight approx. 2.4 kg, with eyelets. 71 207 6313 Blue 71 207 6300 Red

224 t

Top 15 Gymnastics Mat (LxWxH): approx. 180x80x1.5 cm, weight approx. 3.2 kg with eyelets 71 207 6401 Red 71 207 6414 Blue 71 207 6430 Black

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

..Training as if on a Cloud Movivit® Gymnastics Mats • • • •

a Movivit® Gymnastics Mats Qualitative gymnastics mats for use in therapy, rehabilitation, fitness and leisure. • Close celled special foam, resistant to dirt and water • Skin friendly, sweat and saliva proof • Sanitized: reliable and durable bacteria and mould protection • Can be used on both sides, warm under the body and insulated against the cold floor • Easy to roll up, light and handy • Strong with a long lifespan • Simple to clean with lukewarm water and a mild cleaning agent

anti-bacterial foam long lifespan optimal protection latex free

Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

“Basic” Gymnastics Mat

“Studio” Gymnastics Mat

140x60x1.5 cm. Ideal for children's gymnastics, leisure and camping. Approx. 1.9 kg. 71 207 8061 Blue 71 207 8074 Red

180x100x1.5 cm. Ideal for all gymnastics exercises with a particularly comfortable width of 100 cm. Approx. 4.1 kg. 71 207 8045 Blue 71 207 8058 Red

“Therapy” Gymnastics Mat “Club” Gymnastics Mat 180x60x1.5 cm. Standard format specially designed for fitness and club needs. Approx. 2.4 kg. 71 207 8003 Blue 71 207 8016 Red

200x120x1.5 cm. The largest gymnastics mat: ideal as an individual mat and for laying a larger mat-covered area. Approx. 6.1 kg. 71 207 8087 Blue 71 207 8090 Red

Sport-Thieme® Medica Mats

Medica Mats b Sport-Thieme® Very durable, multi purpose gymnastics mats. Suited for daily use in gymnastics clubs, medical gymnastics, rehabilitation and physiotherapy. Our Medica mats are ready for everything. Product characteristics: • made from closed cell special foam which is gentle on the skin • can be used in water and insulates against the cold • extended lifespan because of special finishing treatment • hygienic, washable surface Suitable for all age groups! 187.5x57.5x1.1 cm 71 126 8502-0 Blue 71 126 8515-0 Green

Key:

Shock absorption: Soft

187.5x57.5x2.8 cm 71 126 8502-1 Blue 71 126 8515-1 Green 187.5x97.5x1.1 cm 71 126 8502-2 Blue 71 126 8515-2 Green 187.5x97.5x2.8 cm 71 126 8502-3 Blue 71 126 8515-3 Green

b Suitable for use in water

Shock absorption: Medium

• high level of foam density • long lasting cell structure • free of pvc

Made from special hygienic foam

t 225

Mats for Sport and Health Exclusive design

Silver grey

Red

Gymnastics Mat b Foldable This folding mat is suitable for floor gymnastics and use in water. The closed cell material will not absorb any water and floats well. Particularly hygienic and skin friendly and can be folded down by 6 to save space. This gymnastics mat comes in green, with 2 stretch bands, 15 mm thick. 71 125 7700 190x60 cm Each 71 125 7713 190x100 cm Each

Exclusive design

Bottom: non-slip natural latex waffle

The handy folding mat and Exercise a Therapy Mat This mat combines functionality and optics in a practical way. Patients like doing their exercises on the micro fibre-optic mat as it combines sureness of balance with perfect shock absorption. Your patients will also appreciate the comfort of the composite foam. It prevents pressure on the knees. Further characteristics of strong gymnastics mats for all age groups are: • surface and sides are made from exclusive synthetic leather • base of non-slip natural latex waffle back

• composite foam core for optimal hold when doing exercises • hygienic, washable, skinfriendly, sweat, saliva and urine proof surface • UV and salt water resistant • free from harmful substances 185x62.5x2.2 cm 71 207 6922 Silver grey 71 207 6935 Red 185x80x2.2 cm 71 207 6906 Silver grey 71 207 6919 Red

Gymnastics c Foldable & Leisure Mat This handy folding mat is made from SPE foam. The material is non-toxic, does not age or crumble and will not absorb dampness. The upper side is made from a skin friendly material (60% polyester/40% rayon) while the underside is non-slip. 8 mm deep available in blue. 140x60 cm, transport and storage size approx. 35x60 cm. 71 127 1300

And there's more: • Gymnastics mats from page 212 • Rocking saucer page 268

Games and d Rollable Gymnastics Mats With special Flockan® material is the ideal floor covering for children. The vinyl mat is very durable and simple to cut. The material insulates against the cold of the floor, is skin friendly and is non-slip. With a structured easy to wipe surface it is extremely resistant and easy to clean.

226 t

Ideal even for people who suffer from allergies. The anti-bacterial Sanitized® finish on this mat means that no unhygienic or smelly germs and bacteria will colonise the foam. Available in approx. 10 mm thickness, LxW: 4x1.25. The roll weighs approx. 12 kg. Colour: sky blue. 71 125 2705

for Holding Gymnastics Mats e Strap To transport rolled up gymnastics mat more easily. Suitable for all gymnastics

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

mats up to 100 cm wide. 100% polypropylene. 71 125 9009 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Gymnastics Mats for Sport and Health a Sport-Thieme® Gymnastics Mats This high quality economical gymnastics mat meets high demands at a low price. Made from 9 mm thick vinyl foam, based on the latest research. • sealed celled special foam • the textile surface is particularly skin friendly • non-slip base will hold firm under many exercises. • very durable and is very hygienic. • simply stored with 2 additional eyelets per mat • fabric in surface: 100% polyester, • washable at 30 °C. 120x60x0.9 cm 71 127 1401-1 Blue-lilac 71 127 1414-1 Mint green 71 127 1430-1 Cardinal blue 180x60x0.9 cm 71 127 1401-2 Blue-lilac 71 127 1414-2 Mint green 71 127 1430-2 Cardinal blue

Gymnastics Mat b “Comfort” An easy care gymnastics mat made from high quality, approx. 8 mm thick, soft foam. Specially developed with schools, clubs, home use and medical gymnastics in mind. The special surface structure prevents the skin sticking upon contact. • particularly hygienic because of the closed cell structure and special foam • non-slip base • rounded edges, good absorption, insulating

With two practical hanging eyelets and rounded edges

New

Special closed cell foam

And there's more: Dis t eye ance let be s 5 tw 3 c een m

• Fitness Bands page • Gymnastics balls page • Thera Band page • Deuser Band page • Supports page

• Phthalate free - free from banned plasticisers • latex free material • with eyelets 180x65x0.8 cm 71 127 0701-1 Blue Each 71 127 0714-1 Green Each 71 127 0727-1 Red Each 180x100x0.8 cm 71 127 0701-2 Blue Each 71 127 0714-2 Green Each 71 127 0727-2 Red Each

163 23 239 164 244

Free from prohibited softening agents

Phthalate-

FREE

Mat Storage

Hanging Console for Gymnastics Mats

Stationary hanging mechanism. Made from metal for easy to see storage of gymnastics mats with . You can also store skipping ropes on the supporting bars. Fixing material for assembly to wall is included. Equipment on console not included. Choose from (LxW): 92x50 cm.: for approx 20 mats up to a maximum width of 70 cm or 120x50 cm: for approx 15 mats up to a maximum width of 100cm. 71 126 8603

Rack For e Hanging Gymnastics Mats

Transport Trolley d Mat Perfect storage for 85 cm wide mats. This practical transport aid takes up to 20 mats and keeps your equipment room tidy. Assembled size: LxWxH: 126x90x120 cm. Mats not included. 71 126 4917 Each

New reinforced design with moveable individual hangers that can be set at any distance up to a maximum of 70 cm eyelet distance. Suitable for all gymnastics mats with eyelets from the Sport-Thieme range. Holds approx. 25x9 mm thick gymnastics mats or approx. 15x15 mm thick mats. Aluminum wall mats, approx. 81 cm long. Stainless steel pins, approx. 25 cm long, ø 1.2 cm. Fixing material for wall assembly included. Mats not included. 71 126 8007 Each

d More security with folding hanging rack

Adjustable and folds away

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Both sides height adjustable

Transport Trolley f Mat The strong design for hanging transport of gymnastics mats. Very stable as made from steel with height adjustable hanging rails on both sides. The hanging bars can be individually adjusted to any level up to a maximum of 70 cm eyelet distance. Suitable for the Sport-Thieme range of gymnastics mats. This trolley will transport up to 50 mats thanks to the large durable castors. Assembled size (DxWxH) approx. 71x71x198 cm. Mats not included. 71 126 4920

t 227

Swinging Movements d

Front

Rear Easily gripped shape

Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

Hoops a Gymnastic Plastic, comply with DIN 7912. With

not splinter. Welded joints. Can also be used in water. Fashionable colours available: red, yellow, blue and green. easy to hold profile, shatterproof and will Sizes approx. ø inside 50 cm ø inside 60 cm ø inside 70 cm ø inside 80 cm blue 71 135 5707-0 71 135 5707-1 71 125 8006-0 71 125 8006-1 71 135 5710-0 71 135 5710-1 71 125 8019-0 71 125 8019-1 yellow 71 135 5723-0 71 135 5723-1 71 125 8022-0 71 125 8022-1 green 71 135 5736-0 71 135 5736-1 71 125 8035-0 71 125 8035-1 red

Trolley d Storage Extra large storage capacity on the three shelves: holds approx. 100 kg. This storage trolley can be easily moved around on 4 castors. The sloping storage shelf takes all small items and makes them

Gymnastics Equipment Set

e Gymnastics Equipment Set

Top Rated

Our recommended collection for the storage trolley for use in gymnastics exercises and games: • 12x 1 m coloured gymnastics bars • 10x 38 cm gymnastics clubs

www.sport-thieme.com

Multiply glued

Hoop b Gymnastic Beech, bonded many times and sanded smooth. Profile 20x10 mm to DIN 7912 standard. ø 90 cm, complies with FIG competition size.

71 125 8208 71 125 8211 71 125 8224 71 125 8237

Cloths g Rythmic Made from 100% cotton, hemmed. For rhythmic dance, exhibitions, gymnastics and colour exercises. Approx. 80x80 cm. 71 127 6103-1 Blue Each 71 127 6116-1 Yellow Each 71 127 6129-1 Green Each 71 127 6132-1 Red Each

Round shape

• 8x 70 cm ø coloured gymnastics hoops • 12x 3 m coloured skipping ropes • 1x 22 cm ø gong tambourine with felt mallet • 6 coloured tennis rings • 12 coloured 120g bean bags • 6 coloured gymnastics balls • 1x 800 g and 1x 1500 g medicine ball • 12 rubber balls • 1x 10 m gymnastic rope • 1x 21 cm ø multi-ball • 1 rainbow ball There is room for more articles as well as this selection. You also receive a free ball pump. 71 126 8805

Cloths f Rhythm (Chiffon Scarves) Made from hard wearing lightweight 100% polyamide. For swinging to a rhythm, shaking and slow movements, 66x66 cm. Edges hemmed. Comes in various colours. Washable up to 30°C. 71 136 0208-1 Price for 3

Outer ø 60 cm Outer ø 70 cm Outer ø 80 cm Outer ø 90 cm

New

easy to see and reach. Strong construction of 18 mm thick plywood with additional storage hangers for hoops, ropes, clubs and bars. Simple to assemble with pre-prepared screw threads. Approx: 82x85x60 cm, without contents. 71 126 8704 Each

Chiffon Cloths, Juggling and Dancing Tissues Perfect for movement games, dancing, rhythm and juggling. Made from 100% polyamide, as light as a feather. 140x140 cm, assorted colours. 71 136 0211-2

Hoop Accessories Tape / Hologram Foil h Metallic For gluing to gymnastics hoops.

Sport-Thieme Competition Gymnastics Hoops

FIG certified. These new hoops have been specially developed to meet the regulations for rhythmic gymnastics. The FIG certificate confirms the hoop's suitability for official competitions. Stable round shape, ø 20 mm. The outer diameter of the hoop is approx. 89.5 cm and they weigh approx. 305 g. Suitable for water gymnastics.

228 t

71 125 8501 71 125 8514 71 125 8527 71 125 8530 71 125 8543

Medium blue Summer yellow Turquoise green Cardinal red White

Length: 20 m, width: 2 cm. One set contains a roll of silver and gold. Approx. 19 metres required for a ø 90 cm hoop. 71 216 7103 Set

New Lockable hanging mechanism

Sport-Thieme Training Gymnastics Hoops Ideal training hoop made from unbreakable plastic. Round tube with ø approx. 20 mm, external diameter 80.5 cm, approx. 311 g. White. Not F.I.G. recognised. 71 125 8400

Order! Now

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

with Lock for Gymnastic i Bracket Hoops Simple and problem-free assembly. You should not be without this useful aid. Hoops can be sorted clearly and according to size. The hinged frame with padlock ensures hoops are protected against unauthorised use. Takes 25 hoops. Without contents. 71 126 8300 Each Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Fit with Skipping Ropes Skipping Rope a Competition This rope complies with international regulations. It is made from 100% woven propylene. Length 3 m. ø 9 mm constant thickness throughout, approx. 95 g. 71 126 0104 Blue Each 71 126 0120 Green Each 71 126 0117 Yellow Each 71 126 0133 Red Each

f d roll

Sport-Thieme Competition Skipping Rope Competition style woven to international rules. Made from 100% polypropylene, length 3 m, ø 9 mm constant strength, approx. 120 g. 71 126 1413 Blue Each 71 126 1426 Yellow Each 71 126 1439 Green Each 71 126 1442 Red Each 71 126 1468 Black Each

Fibre Skipping Rope b Soft With knots at the end and reinforced middle. 71 125 9706 2.50 m 71 125 9504 2.80 m Skipping Rope Strong quality, length: 2.80 m. 71 125 9605

With reel to roll out quickly

Rope d Skipping Comes in a roll. 100%

polypropylene roll of heavier 9 mm quality. By heat sealing the ropes yourself you get Each the ideal lengths for every size. Each in Each 100 m rolls. 71 126 1006 Blue Rolls 71 126 1022 Green Rolls 71 126 1019 Yellow Rolls 71 126 1035 Red Rolls Each

Swing Rope

e Swinging & skipping

Original Magic Cord

Woven rope made from a soft synthetic fibre Ideal for group activities in schools with a particularly strong carabiner hook and clubs. It is extremely flexible, elastic and swivel connection. You only need one and versatile in use. Complete exercise person to swing. Rope with hand loop and instructions included. reinforced middle. Length 5 m. Material: 71 126 0609 8 m Each 100% polypropylene. 71 126 0612 10 m Each 71 126 0902 Each

New

g Rope f Skipping With wooden handles and swivel. Particularly strong quality. 2.80 m long. 71 125 9908 Each

Rope g Swinging Hemp. Centre strengthened with loops for hands and snap hooks. 71 126 0801 5 m 71 126 0814 8 m

Each Each

Cord h Gymnastics Many uses, covered rubber cable for gymnastics and games. Looped at ends. This cord will stretch to approx. 50% longer at maximum stretch, ø 6 mm. 71 125 8602 8 m Each 71 125 8615 10 m Each 71 125 8628 12 m Each

j k

New structure

With counter Boxing Skipping Rope

The professional rope for boxing, fitness, top-level and school sports. Adjustable plastic coated steel rope, unbreakable plastic handles with opening for additional weights. 71 150 1403-1

Skipping Rope k PVC For high speeds during stamina training. The length of the rope can be adjusted. With counter. 71 146 1028-2 With counter

Rope m Skipping Storage Rack

New design of the practical aid for storing over 180 ropes. Strong metal rail for wall mounting with 6 pegs. Approx. 48 cm long, 14 cm pegs. Does not include ropes. 71 126 7903

Rope o Speed Skipping rope for schools and

Pair

clubs, leisure and professional training exercises. It is made from an elastic PVC band and is therefore very fast. This rope will develop fitness, rhythm and balance. Each length has a unique colour with black plastic handles. Rope length individually adjustable. Article no. colour/ length/ height. Red, approx. 2.13 m/1.38 m 71 125 9100 Each Blue, approx. 2.43 m/1.58 m 71 125 9113 Each Yellow, approx. 2.74 m/1.65 m 71 125 9126 Each Green, approx. 3.00 m/over 1.78 m 71 125 9139 Each

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 229

Speed Rope i High A premium quality high speed rope for effective workouts. The rope is made from an elastic PVC band with plastic handles. As the centre of the rope is reinforced, it soon achieves high speeds. The unique waved shape means that the rope is almost silent when it hits the ground. Length can be adjusted to suit skipper. Maximum length: 2.60 m, black. 71 195 0104

Top Rated

Ropes l Beaded The new design rope is made from soft capsules (beads) for a longer lifespan. It is heavier than speed ropes and is perfect for training, doing tricks and “visitor” and “wheel” partner exercises. Length 300 cm. 71 126 0423

Dutch Rope n Double Skipping fun for groups. Rope approx. 4.8 m long. Cotton, approx. 300 g 71 126 2009 Plastic, approx. 257 g 71 126 2100

Pair

Gymnastics Clubs, Gymnastics Bars and Accessories Gymnastics Bars Unbreakable and holds shape well

Gymnastics Clubs e Ash, solid

Beech, solid

b c

Price Tip

Buy now !

Plastic, two colours

Clubs d Gymnastics For sports gymnastics.

Length: Diameter:

80 cm 25 mm

100 cm 25 mm

120 cm 25 mm

Bars a Gymnastics Made from elasticated plastic in red, blue, yellow and green. Quality tested under extreme conditions. Can be used in Length / ø blue yellow green red

80 cm / 25 mm

71 126 4803-1 71 126 4816-1 71 126 4829-1 71 126 4858-1

80/100 cm 100 cm 25 mm 28 mm

temperatures varying from -15°c to +50°C, very durable. Also suitable for water gymnastics. With sealing caps at each end.

100 cm / 25 mm

120 cm / 25 mm

71 126 4500-0 71 126 4513-0 71 126 4526-0 71 126 4555-0

71 126 5705 71 126 5718 71 126 5721 71 126 5734

Made from plastic. Length 44 cm, approx. 160 g 71 126 6203 Blue 71 126 6229 Green 71 126 6216 Yellow 71 126 6232 Red Children, length 35 cm 71 126 5806 Blue 71 126 5822 Green 71 126 5819 Yellow 71 126 5835 Red

New

Gymnastics Clubs e Wooden Regulation shape, wooden with clear varnish and in various different lengths. 71 126 5503 36 cm Each 71 126 5516 38 cm Each 71 126 5529 40 cm Each

Competition Gymnastics Clubs, comply with International Regulations. For sports gymnastics. Made from plastic. Length 44cm, weight approx. 160 g. 71 126 6001 Blue 71 126 6027 Green 71 126 6014 Yellow 71 126 6030 Red Wall Mounted Storage Unit Metal for approx. 40 gymnastics clubs. For wall assembly, with padlock to prevent theft. Length: 84 cm. Without contents. 71 126 9404

Colour Competition f Two Clubs A new design in white/blue. Length: 41 cm, approx. 155 g. 71 126 6056

Wooden Gymnastics Bars Type of wood Length Article no.

b Ash: sanded, clear varnish, ø 25 mm. c

Beech: Sanded smooth, unvarnished, ø 28 mm.

80 cm

100 cm

71 126 4601

71 126 4614

71 126 5008

lockable

New

Transport Trolleys Example for filling

Bars j Weighted These weighted bars are

and i Storage Transporting Bin for Gymnastics Bars for Transporting Bars h Trolley and Hoops Made from wood for open visible storage and transport of hand apparatus. The base is suitable for storing other small items and has 4 castors which move easily. Storage capacity: 12 hoops of sizes 50, 60, 70 and 80 cm in diameter and approximately 32 gymnastic bars. Comes with assembly instructions. Size: (LxWxH: 62x62x120 cm). Without contents. 71 126 1107

230 t

Mobile. With this bin, you can bring your bars directly onto the gym floor. After use, all equipment can be locked up again in the equipment room. Metal ø 250 mm holds approx. 70 gymnastics bars with metal handle and wheels. Without contents. 71 116 9007-1

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

used in aerobics and in therapy. They are particularly suitable for warming up and strength training. Using the 1.05 m long bar will develop shoulder, chest and buttocks muscles. The bar diameter varies from 26 mm (2 kg) to 43 mm (6 kg). Can also be used in water. 71 146 6759-1 1 kg, orange 71 146 6762-1 1.5 kg, grey 71 146 6704-1 2 kg, light blue 71 146 6717-1 3 kg, red 71 146 6720-1 4 kg, green 71 146 6733-1 5 kg, yellow 71 146 6746-1 6 kg, dark blue Transport Trolleys for Weighted Bars This trolley offers enough space for approx. 42 bars. LxWxH: 53x53x85 cm, 15 kg. With wheels and handle. 71 146 6775-1

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Bean Bags, Dance and Gymnastics Bands Gymnastics and Dance Bands See also: • rhythmic cloths on page 228 • rhythmic flags on page 262

Ribbons a Gymnastic Rainbow coloured satin-silk ribbon with fibreglass baton and swivel. To DTB and international standards. 100% nylon. 71 126 3204-2 4 m, training 71 126 3217 5 m, girls 71 126 3204 6 m, competition

violet Complies with DTB

Band Hangers d Gymnastics For hanging gymnastics bands, ø 4mm, stainless steel. 71 126 2302 For 1 band 71 126 2315 For 3 bands 71 126 2328 For 5 bands

cornflower blue

yellow red light pink orange

Replacement Baton for Gymnastics Ribbons Fibreglass with swivel 0.5 m 71 126 4308

green white

f Gymnastics Bands

b Multi-coloured satin-silk band with fibreglass bar and spring, 5 cm wide, complies with German Gymnastics Association and international regulations. 100% nylon. 71 126 2908 2 m Each 71 126 2911 3 m Each 71 126 2924 4 m Each 71 126 2937 5 m Each 71 126 2940 6 m Each

e KiwiDo Unites dynamic, aesthetic elements, a strong visual presence and dance elements. Swinging is the basic rhythmic movement. The colourful lines of the 145cm long tail and the rustling will free and stimulate those who join in. A comprehensive feast for the senses. This version is of particularly high quality. 71 201 2302 Pair

Bands c Dance A simpler version of the Kiwido bands. 71 201 2315 Pair

Competition Gymnastics Bands

Complies with international regulations. 5 cm wide replaceable satin-silk band with fibre glass baton and swivel. 100% nylon. Children, length 2 m 71 127 6507 Yellow 71 127 6523 Cornflower blue 71 127 6536 Red 71 127 6510 Green 71 127 6549 White 71 127 6552 Light pink 71 127 6565 Orange 71 127 6578 Light blue 71 127 6581 Violet Training, length 4 m 71 126 3842 Cornflower blue 71 126 3855 Light pink 71 126 3868 Red 71 126 3813 Yellow 71 126 3800 Orange 71 126 3826 Green 71 126 3839 Light blue 71 126 3972 Violet 71 126 3985 White

bright blue

Girls, length 5 m 71 126 4005 Orange 71 126 4018 Yellow 71 126 4021 Green 71 126 4034 Light blue 71 126 4047 Cornflower blue 71 126 4050 Light pink 71 126 4063 Red 71 126 4076 Violet 71 126 4089 White Competition, length 6 m 71 126 4106 Orange 71 126 4119 Yellow 71 126 4122 Green 71 126 4135 Light blue 71 126 4148 Cornflower blue 71 126 4151 Light pink 71 126 4164 Red 71 126 4177 Violet 71 126 4180 White

Bean Bags

gg Bean Bags g Washable These durable bags are made from 100% cotton, which can be washed at up to 30 °C (with similar colours). The hygienic filling is made from fine balls of plastic granulate and encourages tactile stimulation. Ideal for gripping and throwing exercises. 120 g, approx. 15x10 cm 71 126 6304-2 Blue 71 126 6317-2 Yellow 71 126 6320-2 Green 71 126 6333-2 Red 500 g, approx. 20x15 cm 71 126 6405-2 Blue 71 126 6418-2 Yellow 71 126 6421-2 Green 71 126 6434-2 Red

Foot Baton h Beech For gymnastic foot exercises, 15 cm long, ø approx. 15 mm. 71 126 7509 Price for 10

And there's more: Counting bean bags on page 284

Develop movement and perception. There are many uses for these bags. Grasp them with hands and feet, throw and catch them, balance them on the head. Assorted colours and sizes, displaying shapes and figures.

Bags i Bean The natural filling in the sacks is from dried beans. The soft 100% cotton is pleasant to touch and very durable. 120 g, approx. 15x10 cm 71 126 6708 Blue 71 126 6711 Yellow 71 126 6724 Green 71 126 6737 Red

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

i • 120 g and 500 g • easy to hold • cotton

500 g, approx. 20x15 cm 71 126 6809 Blue 71 126 6812 Yellow 71 126 6825 Green 71 126 6838 Red

t 231

Movement Therapy c

Corrective Foil Mirror b One-piece

a Light Mirror Women's height 2.24m ø 83cm

Fixed mirror 71 129 8912 175x100 cm Tipping mirror surface 71 129 8909 175x100 cm 71 129 8925 200x150 cm

c Corrective Foil Mirror

3-part, folds down. 71 129 8954 175x150/74/74 cm 71 129 8970 200x150/74/74 cm

Mirror d Grid Use the grid to control your body posture and movements. Even experts benefit from documenting their movements exactly e.g. stretching with a Thera Band. Made of crystal glass bound in a steel frame with mobile under-frame 170x 100 cm. 5 x 5 cm grid. 71 129 5913

Gymnastics Stool

Rear view

Corrective Mirror

New Gymnastics Stool Ideal for senior citizens, handicapped and physiotherapy. Can be stacked, approx. ø 35 cm.

High quality crystal glass

Swivelling mirror

e Corrective Mirror Crystal glass with polished edges. Angle can be adjusted from 15 to 35 degrees backwards. The whole surface is double glued to a wooden plate to avoid injuries. Will swivel at any angle, 144x52 cm. Height approx. 180 cm. 71 129 5708

232 t

46 cm

48 cm

• 100% unbreakable • very bright and clear reflection • will not fog up requiring breathing and wiping • easy to attach to walls and ceilings using the support rails 71 122 8410 (not inlcuded in order and must be ordered separately) 71 122 8016-2 150x50 cm 71 122 8016-3 150x75 cm 71 122 8016-4 150x100 cm 71 122 8016-5 150x125 cm 71 122 8003-2 200x75 cm 71 122 8003-3 200x100 cm 71 122 8003-4 200x125 cm 71 122 8029-5 250x100 cm 71 122 8029-6 250x125 cm

57 cm

bilities for you. It can be used anywhere from the wall to the ceiling. There is no glass in this mirror as the mirror foil is prepared using a special high quality patented polyester foil stretched over an aluminium frame. The rear is made of polyeurathane foam plates, which are extremely light. This ensures light and stable mirrors. Thanks to its design, it is really easy to assemble. The invisible aluminium frame can be attached to other mirrors using connecting rails and there are practical hanging rails to attach this super light mirror to the wall. • thickness 20 mm • 2.0 kg/m√ • distortion-free surface

Stacks up

45 cm

Light Mirror a Super This mirror will open up lots of possi-

f–h

Hardly ever fogs up or steams up, no irritating wiping

Stool, Stackable Stool, with Bar f Gymnastics i Gymnastics Plastic beech look seat, chrome Ideal for gymnastics exercises with frame. Height 45 cm. 71 125 7801

Stool, g Gymnastics Solid Birch Can be stacked, height 48 cm, will support up to approx. 120 kg. 71 125 7814

Stool, Padded h Gymnastics Can be stacked, chrome frame, height approx. 46 cm. 71 125 7827

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

bands or for holding on to. Plastic seat, chrome frame. Height 45 cm, height with bar 57 cm. 71 125 7830

Stool j Wooden Very stable with lots of leg room thanks to the open struts. With a hole for a handle. Beech wood natural varnished without metal parts. Seat 35x35 cm. Supports up to 180 kg. 71 125 8107 Height: 45 cm 71 125 8110 Height: 50 cm 71 125 8123 Height: 55 cm Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Ballet & Callanetics Round Ballet Bar System

a a Exact to the millimetre and available Ballet made to measure

New

to suit your needs. Manufactured from low distortion smoothed down raw ash wood, ø 40 mm, without any end finish. Also available for an extra charge with varnish and finish for ends. Available in lengths up to 5 metres. For lengths over 5 metres the bars must be bonded in situ. Each 120 cm must have a wall holder attached to hold the bars. Suitable holders for bars: single e 71 122 4333 and double for two bars on top of each other d 71 122 4346. 71 122 6616 Each

Varnish Double varnished with double component varnish 71 122 6632 Each

Bars k Braig The first transportable yet sturdy

b Ends Both ends are rounded off Each

Made of non-warping wood. Length 300 cm, ø 40 mm, 2x 150 cm long bars. Suitable for brackets d and e. 71 122 6603

28 cm

Ballet Wall Bracket To hold 2 ballet bars, different in height and depth. The upper bar is 28 cm and lower 22 cm and the distance between bars is 22 cm. With two brackets for ø 40 mm ballet bars. The lower bar can be used by children and for handicapped exercises. Comes with assembly material for wall holder and direct wall attachment. Three wall brackets would be required for a 3 metre length of bar. In this way the ends fit snugly together in the holders. d 71 122 4346 double bracket e 71 122 4333 single bracket Base for Ballet Bars To be doweled to the base. With 2 holders for ballet bars ø 40 mm, height upper bar 110 cm, lower bar 87.5 cm, distance 28/22 cm. 71 122 4362

22 cm

height adjustable from 20-130 cm

Ballet Bars c Round Indispensable for any ballet school.

c 22,5 cm

71 122 6629

28 cm

f Rails for Wall Brackets Stable section rails that are firmly attached to the wall. The single and double wall brackets can be height adjusted to any level between 20-130 cm and are simple to remove. Comes with fixing accessories. 71 122 4359

ballet bar for intensive daily use in ballet schools and gymnasiums. Both bars are made of special wood (350 cm long) with a cross section that ensures good grip, tightly mounted to movable stands. Upper bar 110 cm long, lower bar 87.5 cm. Well proven in practical use by all age groups. 71 122 7505

Transporting Unit l Extra Round with 4 integrated wheels for long distance transport. You will need 2 for easier transporting. 71 122 7518 Each

350 cm

100 cm

• without additional anchoring • stands very stable and securely • with wheel mechanism for moving

87,5 cm

New

Set m Ballet Freestanding ballet set for dance studios, ballet schools, clubs and schools. With two ash ballet bars, 350 cm long and 50 mm in diameter. The higher bar is 110 cm and the lower is 87.5 cm. There is metal on both bases ensuring that the

set will stand stable and secure without any additional anchoring. Simple to move around with the double moving mechanism with four castors on each unit. 71 122 4388

Oval Ballet Bar System

g Oval Ballet Bar

The egg shaped (51/41 mm) bar is comfortable to hold. It does not break or change its shape. 350 cm long. Can be shortened to any length. Suitable for brackets h and i 71 120 8304-1 Each

28 cm

Adjustable from 85 to 110 cm

Ballet Bar Wall Holder

Plates j Wall For fitting to and hanging on the

removable wall brackets h and i. 71 122 4320 Each

28 cm

22,5 cm

For professional use. Wall brackets made of sturdy and elegantly designed galvanised steel. Comes as single or double bracket, permanent or removable version. Ballet bars can easily be attached or detached from bracket without using any tools. Double bar holder upper depth 28 cm, lower depth 22 cm, distance between bars 22 cm. Single bar holder depth 28cm. h 71 122 4304 single i 71 122 4317 double

i Ballet Bars n Freestanding Suitable for every dance and ballet 22 cm

school or club. Freestanding without any additional anchoring, it will stand stable and secure. With two height galvanised

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

adjustable metal stands. Can be adjusted at any height between 85 to 110 cm. Bars made from ash wood, ø 4 cm, 200 cm long. 71 122 4375

t 233

Trampolines, Keep Fit …

Trampoline Information

Trimmpolin • joint friendly • with soft edge padding

• a soft trampoline for effective training • simple to change the rubber ring • unsurpassed quality • with rubber caps

e With Folding Legs

Legende

The bounding characteristics generally depend on the jumping sheet and the hanging method. Level of bounce Sports tight: The jumper only sinks down slightly. This allows higher jumps. Stiffer trampolines are mainly used in the area of fitness. Soft: The jumper sinks lower due to the soft hanging. The type of trampoline is useful for therapy and joint friendly movement. Very elastic: The mat stretches when jumping and so continues the stretch in the springs or cable in the sheet. These trampolines are particularly suitable for rebounding exercises. Hanging method Steel springs are relatively stiff and are mostly used in fitness trampolines. They are robust. Rubber bands are elastic and will facilitate joint and back friendly jumping. Rubber rings like rubber bands are suitable for harmonic jumping. They are easy to change. The constant movement on the trampoline means that all parts hanging from the trampoline are liable to wear and tear depending on the intensity of use.

Jumping on the Trampoline

Experience the feeling the weightlessness that makes it easy to forget everyday worries. The trampoline has that affect even on people who do not normally participate in sport. You can train your whole body while having fun without any great effort. The jumping motion (tension /stretchingrelaxing) encourages the development of muscles, even those that are not actually participating in the action (e.g. the bowel muscles). Children are fascinated by trampolines and they develop their motor faculties in a fun way. Body control, balance and self confidence are all improved by using a trampoline.

With Screw-in Legs

a Bellicon® Belli Swing® The soft, dynamic fitness trampoline. Belli Swing successfully combines the super soft Medi Swing with a elastic point Rebounder mat. This makes it much more dynamic. You experience a strong rebound that catapults you up once again. This makes training with Belli Swing even more effective. Patented, soft rope-ring system. ø 112 cm, H: 38 cm. Frame padding not included. With rubber caps also for shiny floors. Instruction booklet and DVD included. Suitable for up to approx. 85 kg body weight 71 204 1908 ø 112 cm, with screw-in legs 71 204 1911 ø 112 cm, with folding legs 71 204 1953 ø 125 cm, with folding legs Suitable for body weights of 85-120kg 71 204 1924 ø 112 cm, with screw-in legs 71 204 1937 ø 112 cm, with folding legs

Extra strong edge protection

Tramp c Fit With springs Ideal for fitness, jumping and balancing exercises such as skipping, squatting, straddling, stretching exercises, running and catching a ball as you jump. Fit Tramp is something the children will enjoy practising on. There are removable feet, making it possible to store

Rebounding

it in the smallest room. Jumping fabric is perlon, while sides are protected by a safety cover. Takes up to approx. 90 kg. Height approx. 20 cm. 71 129 5102 ø 100 cm 71 129 5115 ø 125 cm 71 129 5128 ø 140 cm

Kangaroo Trampoline Trampoline d Kangaroo Can be used in pre-schools, senior

b Trimmpolin With rubber cable therefore particularly good for joints. Fun, sports and games not just for the family. Trimmpolin is also used in rehabilitation centres, gymnasiums, schools, and clubs. Suitable for use outdoors and indoors. Including the safety border. Suitable for body weights of up to 90 kg. 10 corners, ø 135 cm, H: 35 cm. 71 127 3003

Level of bounce:

Firm

234 t

The movement on trampolines is used by therapists to produce positive effects on the circulatory and lymph systems, muscles, bone building, discs, joints, immune system and balance. Rebounding exercises are also used in fitness studios, back training, coronary, rheumatism, and osteoporosis groups. Medi Swing, Trimmpolin and Trimilin trampolines are particularly suited to rebounding.

Feet click in

d Soft

Very elastic

Hanging:

Steel springs

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

sport etc., with many applications as it takes up to 100 kg. The rubber hanging cable makes it particularly joint friendly. Simply fold it together for storage. Low height (70 cm). Strong steel tubing in frame, jumping sheet and cover are solidly joined together. Frame 180x240 cm, jumping sheet 120x180 cm. Size when folded up: 240x180x15 cm. 71 127 6204

Rubber Bands

Rubber Rings

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

… Jump to it! Trimilin® Med Trampoline This all-round trampoline is highly elastic with special soft springs. Pleasantly kind to the back and joints. This makes it very useful in physiotherapy and rehabilitation as well as for stamina training. Blue mat, silver edging, ø 102 cm, height approx. 25 cm. 71 127 9203 Screw-in legs 71 127 9216 Fold-in legs

Trimilin® Trampoline Swing Ideal for bouncing and jumping, for use by adults and children alike. The coated cable and the special highly elastic mat combine a soft spring with great fun. Black jumping mat, silver edging. ø 120 cm, H: 30 cm. 71 127 8806 Screw-in legs 71 127 8819 Fold-in legs

Trimilin® Super Swing Trampoline

Trimilin® with Rubber Cables

Extremely soft rubber cable springs for soft bouncing and easy jumping. Also recommended if there are particular back or joint problems. Black mat, silver edging, ø 120 cm, height: approx. 36 cm. 71 129 0602 Screw-in legs 71 129 0615 Fold-in legs

• Soft • Stretches out slowly therefore: - slower rhythm - soft and gentle bounce

Trimilin® with Steel Springs Trimilin® Sport Trampoline

• very strong • lasts a long time • normal to fast movement ideal for: - joggen, walking, skiing exercises - dynamic cardio-training

Allows a high running rate and quick, dynamic movements. Recommended for stamina training and aerobics. A joint friendly alternative to running and workouts on hard surfaces. Black mat with silver edging ø 102 cm. Height 25 cm. 71 127 9900

Trimilin® Pro Trampoline Trimilin Pro with its special springs has been specially designed for heavier people, over approx 100 kg. Suitable for back and joint friendly training, rehabilitation, stamina and running training. Blue mat, yellow edging, ø 102 cm. 71 127 9229 Screw-in legs 71 127 9232 Fold-in legs

Trimilin® Junior Trampoline

Handle for Trimilin®

Ideal for children and anyone who is travelling a lot. Very little space required and very light at 6kg. Only 22cm high and particularly child friendly. Black mat, red edging, ø 87 cm. 71 127 0802

When beginning this ensures safety. Especially recommended for use in therapy and with senior citizens. Adjustable to fit different heights. Without side pieces 71 129 1924 For Trimilin Med/PRO 71 129 1937 For Trimilin SWING

Trimilins with Steel Springs Softness of the springs sport pro med

Side Piece for Trimilin®

recommended bodyweight* 50 – 125 kg 40 – 180 kg 30 – 110 kg

Trimilins with Rubber Cables junior swing superswing

10 – 65 kg 10 – 100 kg 10 – 85 kg

Addition to handle. 71 129 1940 For Trimilin Med/PRO 71 129 1953 For Trimilin SWING

Each Pair

Training Advice A normal-fast walking the running rhythm is only possible up to a softness of 3 (med). Over level 5 (swing) the swinging frequency is too slow and more suitable to swinging and jumping.

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 235

Movement Therapy, Develop Physical Well-Being …

Balance Pad c Airex® A training product for coordination, reactions and balancing. The “wobble effect” means that the user is constantly stabilising their body. This stimulates the receptors intensively and develops proprioceptive abilities. Made from super soft closed cell special foam and is easy to clean. Blue, LxWxH: 50x41x6 cm. 71 113 0209-1

c Step® XL b AERO AERO Step XL was specially developed Step® by Togu® a AERO AERO Steps are used for coordinative and proprioceptive training in rehabilitation, prevention, medical training therapy (MTT) and fitness. Delivery includes 2 extensive exercise posters for workout fitness and for sport, prevention and therapy. The air pressure can be adapted to suit personal needs using the needle valve. Material: high quality Ruton®. The surface is dappled with medium length nobbles. LxWxH: 46x32x8 cm. Supports up to 150 kg. 71 218 2504 Blue 71 218 2517 Green 71 218 2520 Red

for fitness and aerobics training. The standing and plating areas are larger than AERO Step. This means there is more scope for exercises. Aero Step XL consists of 2 separate air-filled compartments. The non-slip surface with nobbles massages the feet. The principle is based on coordinative (movement controlling) and proprioceptive (movement processing) training methods. Comes in a decorative box including pump and exercise poster. LxWxH: 51x37x8 cm. Supports up to 150 kg. 71 188 0016 Green 71 188 0029 Blue 71 188 0032 Silver grey

More pads can be stacked on top of each other to increase the “wobble effect”.

d Disc Cushion d Intervertebral Ideal for supporting the lumbar vertebra when sitting. The vertical and horizontal velcro band allows the sides to be attached to almost all car seats or chairs with back rests. 100% cotton cover, 32x21x6 cm. 71 212 4201

Air Pad e 3D A dynamic underlay that supports training coordination and stability in every discipline. Air pressure can be regulated. Developed for John McEnroe by Feri Bogdan. 34x15 cm. 71 214 2207 Pair

New

Pads / Vein Trainer f Dynair® Soft and effective balance training for beginners. Low height and therefore more stable and steady under foot. As this trainer is filled with air, you can adapt it to suit the arch of the foot and it has sensory pimples for massage providing measured stimuli for muscles, tendons, ligaments and veins. Training also helps transport sluggish the blood and lymph systems. Can be used standing on both legs, kneeling or sitting. Comes with poster with instructions. Approx. 34x34x6 cm. 71 208 5601

Noppex Mat g Senso® These mats with nobbles will stimulate the sense of touch while facilitating relaxation at the same time. This makes them useful in Yoga, meditation and Pilates. 7000 sensory nobbles will improve circulation and provide a pleasant tingly surface on the massage couch. Can also be used as a track for children to run on. Ruton, 120x60 cm. 71 203 4007

Sitting Ball Recommendation: The best way to discover the size of ball for you: Length from the tip of your middle finger to upper arm shoulder joint = recommended ø of ball Length 46-55: ø 45 cm Length 56-65: ø 55 cm Length 66-80: ø 65 cm

Will not roll away!

and work. Well known in back therapy. More than 60,000 school children regularly sit on these balls in Switzerland. 71 109 6314 ø 45 cm, yellow 71 109 6327 ø 55 cm, red 71 109 6330 ø 65 cm, blue

See also: More large gymnastics balls on page 25

236 t

'n' Gym” Sitting Balls h “Sit For aiding health in school, leisure

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Balancing the Spine ø 30 cm

ø 36 cm Cover for def

f Dynair® Kids

e Dynair® Senso® XL

d Dynair® Senso®

ø 33 cm

Dynair® Ball Cushion from Cushion Cover a Ball This 100% polyester breathable cover makes sitting on the ball cushion more comfortable. Washable. Ball cushion not included. 71 128 6915 For Dynair ø 33 cm 71 128 6931 For Dynair XL ø 36 cm

Gymnastics for the spine by sitting dynamically with the ball cushion, the alternative to the sitting ball. The air cushion transfers the different movements softly to the spinal cord. The cushion optimises the correct posture and trains the back muscles. Also useful for balance training, fine motor reactions, pelvic training, develops coordination and reaction. Made from Ruton®, with valve. Comes with training poster. Exercise poster with therapeutic exercises included.

Dynair® XXL

ø 50 cm

Wedge Ball Cushion® b Dynair® Experience the feeling of sitting with

Dynair® Set

a balancing effect. When you are in an upright position on this cushion, your spinal cord holds you up and strengthens you back muscles. As the pressure is divided evenly, the thighs are supported. Kind to veins. A perfect fit on practically every chair. One side has soft senso blisters. Comes with pump and instruction booklet. 71 204 2510 Kids 33x33x6 cm 71 204 2507 Premium 35x35x7 cm

Senso® d Dynair® ø 33 cm. 2 in 1! The well known ball

All Dynair cushions can also be used as sitting cushions.

cushion with soft round pimples on one side. The other side is in a classical velvety smooth style. The pimples achieve a higher level of air circulation when sitting and the cushion can also be used for back and foot massage. 71 128 4007 Blue 71 128 4010 Black 71 128 4023 Terra

Senso® XL e Dynair® ø 36 cm, red. 71 203 4108

Cover c Comfort For wedge ball cushions up to 40 cm. Special “climate cover” (100% polyester) ensures circulation of air as well as comfort when sitting. Ball cushion not included. 71 204 6408

Extra large diameter

Kids f Dynair® ø 30 cm. Soft surface without pimples. 71 199 9206 Turquoise 71 199 9219 Raspberry

Dynair® Ball Cushion with Cover Complete with 100% polyester cover 71 128 6928 ø 33 cm 71 128 6944 ø 36 cm

XXL Balancing g Dynair® Cushion The wide diameter of the Dynair® XXL Balancing Cushion means that you can now train using the width of your hips. This makes therapy for joint stability, coordination and balancing axially correct. The pleasant soft material is perfect for training the muscles in the torso when lying on the stomach and back. The wobbly base is very challenging to children and is great fun. The cushion has soft pimples on one side for additional stimulation of the foot’s reflex zones and the other side is velvety smooth. ø 50 cm, height 14 cm. 71 203 1907 Level III, blue 71 203 1910 Level IV, black

Now with a thermal cover Comfort h Airgo® Sitting Cushion With breathable cover. You now can sit dynamically and comfortably in the car. Your back will thank you. The cushion causes your spine to move so that the individual discs will be constantly be under pressure and then relieved. This trains the muscles around the spinal cord and optimises upright posture. The Airgo® Active cushion also relieves the pelvic area and prostrate gland. 100% polyester cover. LxWxH: 33x45x7 cm. 71 199 3312

Wedge i Seat Solid, durable and stable shape. Sitting on this wedge will energise you and provide relief. It optimises the correct position and trains the muscles that support the spinal cord. Composite foam core with 100% cotton covering. Removable zip cover, can be washed at up to 30°. Ergonomically optimised size 37x32x7 cm. 71 128 6801

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 237

Muscle Training …

Weight Balls b Thera-Band® Soft Weights from Thera Band® are

New The original

the gentler alternative to weight cuffs or dumbbells. Easy to handle and in a ball shape, they offer a functional and pleasing way to do exercises on one or both sides. ø 11 cm. 71 148 3707 Beige, 0.5 kg 71 148 3710 Yellow, 1 kg 71 148 3723 Red, 1.5 kg 71 148 3736 Green, 2 kg 71 148 3749 Blue 2.5 kg 71 148 3752 Black 3 kg

Thera-Band® Weight Ball Set The set consists of one ball in each colour 71 148 3765

Flexible a Thera-Band® Training Bar A light and flexible exercise aid, strengthens hand and arm muscles. A flexible training bar that facilitates neuro-muscular and coordinative training. For use in ergotherapy, physiotherapy, sport and fitness. Three colour coded resistances. Kg information for 90° bend.

71 218 3002 Red, approx. 1.5 kg 71 218 3015 Green, approx. 2.5 kg 71 218 3028 Blue, approx. 3.5 kg

See also: Reivo® Fitness Bands on page 163 Green = light

c • Improves fine and general motor skills • Improves mobility and ability to grip things

Blue = medium

Black = strong

For improving • • • •

Balance Posture Proprioception Coordination

Hand Trainer c Thera-Band® The unique solution for hand, finger

and underarm training. Four different colours and levels of strength (yellow, red, green and blue). Offers lots of ways of improving fine and crude motor functions, increasing agility and gripping power, stress reduction and finger co-ordination. TheraBand® trainer can be also used for warm or cold therapy. When placed in the microwave (between 8 and 20 seconds depending on power output) or in the freezer (maximum 30 minutes), the hand trainer can be used for approx. 30 minutes for therapy without changing its level of resistance. After training the hand trainer should be washed with soap and Thera-Band® Tubing water or disinfected in boiling water. A further development on the original 71 147 8831 Yellow, extra soft Thera-Band®, there now is Thera-Band® 71 147 8802 Red, soft Tubing (7.5 m long). The thin latex cable 71 147 8815 Green, medium matches the band in colour and strength. 71 147 8828 Blue, hard They are made from 100% natural latex. 71 148 3101 Yellow, light 71 148 3114 Red, medium Wooden Box 71 148 3127 Green, strong For storage and transport of four 71 148 3130 Blue, extra strong hand trainers. Contents not included. 71 148 3143 Black, special strength 71 147 8844

improve balance, posture, proprioception and coordination. Training on this “soft” underlay requires users to maintain balance and stable posture. Uses include senior citizen's sport, in rehabilitation of lower extremities and back and well as in sport and fitness. The stability trainer is available in 3 difficulty levels that are identified by their different colours (green= light, blue = medium, black = strong) and strengths. Green, l x w x h: 37x21x5 cm 71 148 3518 Blue, l x w h: 43x24x5 cm 71 148 3505 Black, l x w x h: 44x26x6 cm 71 148 3521

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Hand Trainer Set Consisting of: • 1 hand trainer of each colour: yellow, red, green, blue • 1 wooden storage and transport box. 71 147 8903

238 t

Stability Trainer f Thera-Band® The stability trainer is used to

…for Fitness, Rehabilitation and Therapy

a Thera-Band® Thera-Band® is health “from a roll”. Anyone who wants to build up their strength, improve movement or develop their coordination would be well advised to get a TheraBand®. There are unlimited applications for its use and it is not just therapists that are highly impressed with it. You can also carry out your own resistance training using TheraBand®. It can be cut into lengths to suit each exercise. Roll length 550 cm, width 13.8 cm.. The length of the Thera-Band® can be cut to suit user.

71 218 3103 71 218 3116 71 218 3132 71 218 3145 71 218 3158 71 218 3129

Beige, extra light Yellow, light Green, strong Blue, extra strong Black, extremely strong Red, medium

Which Thera-Band® do I need? Resistance in kg % stretch

25% 50% 75% 100% 125% 150% 175% 200% 225% 250%

yellow

red

green

blue

0.5 0.8 1.1 1.3 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6

0.7 1.2 1.5 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.2

0.9 1.5 1.9 2.3 2.6 3.0 3.3 3.6 4.0 4.4

1.3 2.1 2.7 3.2 3.7 4.1 4.6 5.0 5.5 6.0

black 1.6 2.9 3.7 4.4 5.0 5.6 6.1 6.7 7.4 8.0

b Thera-Band® 2.50 m, in a practical zipper bag. Exercise instructions included. The ideal trainer for home and away from home, for in the club or fitness studio. 71 148 1509 Yellow, light 71 148 1512 Red, medium 71 148 1525 Green, strong 71 148 1538 Blue, extra strong 71 148 1541 Black, extremely strong

Thera-Band® Set of 5 Consisting of: 1 each of: 550 cm long Thera-Band®, in yellow, red, green, blue and black. 71 148 5006

in 45 m Rolls c Thera-Band® The classic latex band, width 13.8cm. 71 148 1336-2 71 148 1307-2 71 148 1310-2 71 148 1323-2

Yellow, light Red, medium Green, strong Blue, extra strong

Bodytrainer d Thera-Band® Tubing, 1.4 m with handles The tube is light, easy to handle, saves space and is extremely durable. It facilitates joint friendly training and prevents injuries as well as increasing the effectiveness of muscle groups. Bodytrainer is available in 4 strengths. 71 148 3202 Red=light 71 148 3215 Green=medium 71 148 3228 Blue=strong 71 148 3231 Black=extra strong

Thera-Band® Basic Set

Handles e Thera-Band® Increases the applications for Thera-

Band® and Thera-Band® Tubing. 71 148 4003

Thera-Band® Door Anchors

Thera-Band® bands and tubing can be used in a more flexible manner and are individually adjustable using Thera-Band® door anchors. The material and ways of attaching it to items make it easy to tailor your training to suit your demands. Simply slip Thera-Band® or Thera-Band® tubing through the loop, secure and you are ready to start. 71 147 9906

Bodytrainer Tubing Set Consisting of: • 1 each of Bodytrainer tubing in red, green, blue, black, • 1 Bodytraining tubing book (In German). 71 148 3303

Thera-Band® Handles

f Thera-Band® Door Anchor

b Basic Set: g Thera-Band® Progressive Finger Trainer The Progressive Finger Trainer will help strengthen and mobilise hands and wrists after operations. Thera-Band® products all have the same colour coding with resistance levels starting at beige and working up to black. This makes it easier to adapt training to you individual needs for improving hand strength, finger tension, flexion and abduction. Consisting of a

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Including 6 inserts

holding ring and 6 latex inserts (beige, yellow, red, green, blue and black). 71 148 3664

t 239

Hand and Arm Trainers

New

A unique challenge for motor responses!

New b

Arm Trainer a Loopliner The angled three-dimensional

Trainer e Hand Strengths hands, fingers and under-

arms (adductors and abductors). Ball made Loopliner, is hook-and-loop-tied to the arm from coated foam with rubber loops. ø 7 cm. 71 208 1902 leaving the hand free. The arm and hand form a fixed line. This creates a whole new movement pattern. In order to move the red wooden pearl across the wire from one end to the other, the arm is being turned, lifted and dropped into all required directions, and, if necessary, it may be supported by movement of the upper body or the whole body. Develops arm-eye as well as whole body coordination. Playing with Loopliner is an unusual combination of challenging motor functions and exercising. The arm and body often end up in unexpected and unfamiliar positions. Suitable from children over four years of age, youths and adults. 71 217 0103

Ball Hand Trainer b Physio Relax or strengthen your fingers,

New

hands, wrists and under arm. Made from very flexible soft plastics. Easy to clean in soapy water. ø 5cm. 71 214 2409 Blue, soft 71 214 2412 red, solid

Ring Hand Trainer c Sport Staged training for hands in rehabilitation and sport. The strong rubber rings will last a long time especially good for clubs and institutions. ø 9.5 cm. 71 214 2702 Bright blue - 10 kg 71 214 2715 Green - 15 kg 71 214 2728 Red - 20 kg 71 214 2731 Orange - 25 kg 71 214 2744 Blue - 30 kg 71 214 2757 Black - 35 kg

Combo Finger d Power-Web Trainer

d New

240 t

The ultimate training aid for fingers, hand, feet and arms. All movements are intensified (bending, stretching, rotation and opposition). You can train individual fingers or the whole hand at the same time. There are two different strengths in each Power Web. Comes with illustrated instructions for 40 exercises. ø 38 cm. Beige-red / ultra light - medium 71 214 3008 Yellow-green / light-strong 71 214 3011 Red-blue / medium - super strong 71 214 3024 Green-black / strong - ultra strong 71 214 3037

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Extend” Hand Trainer f “Digi Strengthens the muscles in open hands and develops the counter movement to the Digi Flex or Grip Master hand trainers. Comes with 15 rubber bands in different strengths. 71 147 4406

g Dynamed A new fun type of therapy. An excellent coordination and balance training device. It also has a secondary function: it helps when slimming. Dynamed was developed with the help of physiotherapists. It is suitable for rehabilitation centres, hospitals, schools and clubs. Comes with replacement ball. 71 127 2808 Replacement Ball for Dynamed 71 127 7207 Price for 3

h PhysioFlip® with handle PhysioFlip® trains fingers, hands, arms and the shoulder joints. It also mobilises the wrist. The level of resistance can be individually regulated by fixing on the Thera-Band® Tubes, three of which are included in the pack. Suitable for concentric, eccentric, static and dynamic exercises. Made from high quality wood with a skin friendly anti-slip coating. Instructions included. LxWxH: 42x34x8 cm. 71 206 7386

New

Pro Wrist Trainer i Reha Strengthens and mobilises bending and stretching muscles in the wrist and under arm. Adjustable resistance for controlled improvement. The scale means success of treatment can be measured. Length 37 cm. 71 208 0909 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Hand Trainers for Fitness and Rehabilitation New

Price Tip

Buy now !

Modelling Clay c Therapy To exercise and strengthen fingers Trainer Master Hand Trainer a Grip b Hand Made from strong gymnastics mat The hand trainer that allows targeted training for each finger. Ideal exercise aid to develop strength and coordination in the whole underarm area. The perfect hand trainer for fitness, therapy and rehabilitation. 71 147 4507 Yellow, 1.4 kg/finger 71 147 4510 Blue, 2.3 kg/finger 71 147 4523 Red, 3.5 kg/finger 71 147 4536 Black, 4.1 kg/finger

material. With holes for fingers meaning this ergonomically shaped hand trainer sits perfectly in your hand. Useful for strengthening hands, fingers and thumbs as well as for under arm exercises. Very hygienic and has a long lifespan as it is made from high quality sanitised sealed-celled foam material. LxWxH: 11x6.5x2.5 cm. 71 208 1700

and hands after operations, injuries and in cases of rheumatic pain. Therapy modelling clay can be used as a hand-trainer. It is non-toxic, non-oily and anti-microbial. It will therefore remain hygienic even after a lot of use. 85 g can, with instructions. Containers: 85 g 71 188 8241 Beige 71 188 8209 Yellow 71 188 8212 Red 71 188 8225 Green 71 188 8238 Coral Red Containers: 450 g 71 188 8124 Beige 71 188 8137 Yellow 71 188 8140 Red 71 188 8153 Green 71 188 8166 Coral Red

Texture: beige yellow red green blue

= extra soft = soft = medium = normal = hard

c 5 resistance levels

Hand Trainer d “Peanuts” Turn, turn, turn! These flexible “peanuts” train the joints and muscles from the finger to the under arm. Hygienic and durable. Length: 18 cm, ø 6 cm. Three peanuts each of a different difficulty level. 71 208 1801 Set of 3

And there's more: • Thera-Band Hand Trainer page 238 • Weight cuffs page 157 • Thera-Bands page 239 • Weights pages 176

Bean Bags Develop movement and perception. There are many uses for these bags. Grasp them with hands and feet, throw and catch them, balance them on the head. Assorted colours and sizes, displaying shapes and figures.

Balls g Hedgehog Relax anywhere, whether your par-

ef Bags, e Bean washable These durable bags are made from 100% cotton, which can be washed at up to 30 °C (with similar colours). The hygienic filling is made from fine balls of plastic granulate and encourages tactile stimulation. Ideal for gripping and throwing exercises. Available in 2 sizes. 120 g, approx. 15x10 cm 71 126 6304-1 Blue 71 126 6317-1 Yellow 71 126 6320-1 Green 71 126 6333-1 Red

• 120 g and 500 g • Easy to grip • 100% Cotton 120 g, approx. 15x10 cm 71 126 6708-1 Blue 71 126 6711-1 Yellow 71 126 6724-1 Green 71 126 6737-1 Red 500 g, approx. 20x15 cm 71 126 6809-1 Blue 71 126 6812-1 Yellow 71 126 6825-1 Green 71 126 6838-1 Red

taking in sport or in the office. Whenever you feel tension, take it up. For finger massage, gripping exercises 71 109 3735-3 Green, ø 6 cm 71 109 3706-3 Yellow, ø 7 cm 71 109 3719-4 Red, ø 9 cm 71 109 3722-3 Blue, ø 10 cm Hedgehog balls, soft version 71 109 4103-3 Purple, ø 6 cm 71 109 4116-4 Mint, ø 7 cm 71 109 4129-3 Bright blue, ø 9 cm 71 109 4132-3 Pink, ø 10 cm

Walking Trainer Light i Senso® The handy companion. Small, pleasantly soft and easy to hold. Increases the circulation in hands. Can be washed hygienically and are easy to take with you anywhere, be it in the open air or on the treadmill - you can't be without the Walking Trainer. Approx. 7.5x4 cm, 17 g, red. 71 147 2602-3 Each

Ring Walking Trainer Plus h Hedgehog j Senso® Easy to grip, for gymnastics and masThe small muli-tool. Simultaneous sage exercises and for water exercises. Suitable for small hands. Made from soft hygienic plastic, blue, red, yellow. Inner ø 11cm, outer ø 17cm. 71 127 3205-1 Blue Each 71 127 3218-1 Yellow Each 71 127 3221-1 Red Each

training for hands, underarm and upper arm muscles. This increases energy usage, which in turn leads to valuable fat burning. Ergonomic shape, soft, handy, easy to grip and can be hygienically washed. 11x5 cm, each 250 g, blue. 71 147 2615-3 Pair

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 241

Bean Bags f Little This natural material is made from dried beans. The soft 100% cotton material is pleasant to touch and very durable.

Training for Hands and Feet

Hedgehog a Balancing Change balancing exercises into an exciting game, while at the same time having a pleasant foot massage. The balancing hedgehog develops coordination, movement and physical perception. Suitable for different strength exercises and games. Made from of high quality Ruton®, moulded in one piece, ø 16 cm, with needle valve so you can regulate the pressure yourself. In red, blue, yellow, green, pink and lilac. 71 186 5208 Pair

Balancing Hedgehog Set Consists of 12 balancing hedgehogs, assorted colours. 71 186 5211 Price for 12

New

Dani Sand Box Therapy in warm quartz sand

c Original Dani Sandbox

Sandbag b Gymnastics Many uses in gymnastics, therapy and rehabilitation. The Velcro band fixes the sandbag to all limbs. Suitable for stabilising, as the fine grained filling clings well to all body parts. Material: reinforced synthetic leather (73% polychloride, 27% polyester). Can be washed, making it very hygienic. With Velcro band 71 199 7402 0.5 kg, 15x15 cm 71 199 7415 1 kg, 25x15 cm 71 199 7428 2 kg, 30x15 cm 71 199 7431 3 kg, 35x18 cm 71 199 7457 5 kg, 50x18 cm Without Velcro band 71 214 2500 0.25 kg, 10x10 cm 71 214 2513 0.5 kg, 15x15 cm 71 214 2526 1 kg, 25x15 cm 71 214 2539 2 kg, 30x15 cm 71 214 2542 3 kg, 40x20 cm 71 214 2555 4 kg, 35x25 cm 71 214 2568 5 kg, 30x30 cm

Therapy in mild, dry quartz sand Warmth is a great form of therapy and treatment for people with rheumatic problems and joint pain. Massaging grasping movements in the warm sand will stimulate blood circulation and help ease pain. • easy and straight forward to use • harmless materials used • TÜV/CE/EMV approved • the sand is simple to warm in a plastic box • the warmth is adjustable to four temperature levels • delivery includes special sand (approx. 9 kg) • 47x37x13 cm 71 177 7303 Special Sand for Dani Sandbox 9 kg bag with sand specially produced for the Dani Sandbox. 71 180 4818 Cover for Dani Sand Box (not illustrated) Aluminium, powder coated with lifting knob. Keeps the Dani Sandbox warm and keeps sand clean. 71 180 4821

Seesaw / Vein Trainer g Foot Walking while sitting at the same

Adjustable speed

g f

time: the new handy foot seesaw makes it possible. You push one foot downwards on the foot seesaw and the other one goes up. You can therefore train your legs at a level that suits you. As you train you will improve your well being without even noticing, e.g. use it under the desk. Highly recommended to compensate for doing things that require a lot of sitting. Also useful as a foot support. 32x33x11 cm. 71 208 5702

New • treating foot injuries • injury prevention

Pedal Trainer e Motorised Develops mobility and circulation in

Pedal Trainer

d Strengthen your leg or arm muscles and encourage circulation. The practical loops will help develop the weaker side. Pedal resistance can be adjusted to suit the user's ability. Ideal for medical practises as success can be monitored on the computer display (times, speed, distance, calories used). 71 201 2100

242 t

the lower and upper body. The adjustable speed means that the motorised pedal trainer is moving as easily as necessary and can adjust to the individual's needs at all times. As progress is made the speed of the rotations increases therefore strengthening the arms and legs. Ideal for use in rehabilitation and fitness. With clock timer and display showing time, revolutions and calories used. Comes complete with a nonslip mat for training in sitting or lying down, pedals with straps and additional handles for upper body training. 71 201 5109

f PhysioFlip® PhysioFlip® is an innovation in handing foot problems and preventing injuries. The foot and calf muscles are strengthened while doing simple resistance exercises. The level of resistance can be individually regulated by fixing on the Thera-Band® Tubes, three of which are included in the pack. Suitable for concentric, eccentric, static and dynamic exercises. Made from high quality wood with a skin friendly anti-slip coating. LxWxH: 42x34x8 cm. 71 206 7302

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Price Tip

Adjustable resistance

Buy now !

Pedal Trainer h Basic Simple strong arm/leg trainer with manually adjustable resistance. 71 215 1104 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Massage Products Massage Couch Massage and Heat Combined

• Battery operated • Washable cover

a Quivering Cushion If pressure is applied to the cushion, it begins to vibrate. Once the pressure stops, the vibrating also stops. It is fun to investigate and experience this cushion. It is good for the feet, back, legs, stomach and arms. The vibrating unit and foam inlay can be removed to clean the cover. Battery operated (not included), 30x30 cm. Colours depending on stocks. 71 171 7307-01

Plus” c “Sana Massage Mat Neck Cushion b Vibrating A comfortable “neck croissant” with vibrating massage ensuring pressure relief in the neck and shoulders. This foam pearl filled neck support cushion will massage the neck from three sides and is particularly effective when lying on the back. It will remain in the correct position and ensure pleasant relaxation at home or when travelling. Cover: 84% polyamide, 16% elasthane, Battery operated (2x1.5V AA). Battery not included. 35x27x9 cm. 71 172 0105

Sana Plus Thermo combines different types of massage aids: pulsating massage with deep effect and calming vibration massage. You can select the massage for each individual zone of the body making a self programmed body massage possible. Two massage elements work together for local massage of problem areas e.g. shoulders/neck, back/spine, buttocks/upper thigh calf area/legs. There is a heating element in the back/intervertebral disc area, which can aid the release of ten-

sion. The heating enhances the effect of the massage. The massage mat has an easy to use hand control unit which changes the speed and intensity of the massage (6 different programmes). 185x60x8 cm. Cover: 100% vinyl. Comes with a 230 V/12 V mains adaptor. TÜV/GS approved. CE. 3 year durability guarantee. 71 171 8502

More information about this product c

www.sport-thieme.com

New Mat e Massage with Micro Pearl Cushion Compact and comfortable: this massage mat is simply rolled up after use and stored away saving space. It is so versatile that it can be used on the floor, bed or even on a chair. The thousands of micro foam pearls inside will fit the body perfectly and it can be individually adjusted with the sticking system.The

Rolls d Body For massage on reflex zones. The special shape means for example that you can reach the reflex zone points on the outside of the foot. They always feel comfortable as

they are soft but also have a strong effect. The pressure can be individually regulated using the needle valve. High quality Ruton, ø 6 cm, length 13 cm. Comes with comprehensive instructions. 71 125 7902 Pair

New For a thorough and beneficial massage

Tube f Massage This light, easy to carry, flexible tube is approx. 115 cm long and produces a pleasant and penetrating massage. Massage tube can be used for many exercises including in SNOEZELEN® and in basal stimulation. Two speed levels, battery operated (batteries not included). 71 171 7408

Massage Machine with g Mini Light

operation can be controlled by 6 motors in four different massage areas (head, shoulders, lumbar region and thighs) either individually or in intervals. The intensity of the massage can be set at any level. There is a mains adapter for 230 C/12 V. 100% polyester cover. Mat: black. Cushion: red 165x48x5 cm. 71 171 8616

Pro Compact, Proh Sissel® fessional Massage Machine The pulsating effect of the Sissel Pro Compact will ensure a deep massage that is intensive and effective. The pulsating energy lightly penetrates the body. The machine has different massaging tops that vary in thickness and their surface structure and therefore will facilitate an effective massage in all areas of the body. Select by “hardness” or “shape”. Other product characteristics: • adjustable speed control from 1,000 to 3,000 vibrations per minute • extended handle to reach the back better • ventilation for improved cooling as well as automatic heat switch off • easy to use 71 171 0609

New

Handy battery operated massagers promoting circulation through vibrating massage. Ideal for neck, shoulders, back, arms and legs. The three massage buttons light up and vibrate when the buttons are pressed. Ergonomic design for simple handling. Approx. 10x10x9.5 cm. 71 172 2202

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 243

Supports and Parallel Bars, Therapy in Every Position Supports Flockan® High Quality Support Cushions

f c

i l

Half Roll j Flockan® Ideal for rehabilitation of children Wedge h Flockan® Positions the arm or leg at a slight

a Roll 71 175 3006 100x20 cm

Supporting Cushions

71 175 3019 100x30 cm 71 175 3022 120x40 cm 71 175 3035 150x50 cm

All models are made from high quality polyether foam guaranteeing good support. Hygienic, easily cleaned and disinfected. Covered in synthetic leather (73% polychloride, 27% polyester), which is kind to the skin, cream-beige, with zip.

b Hemisphere Roll

71 175 3208 40x12x6 cm 71 175 3211 50x18x9 cm 71 175 3224 60x25x12.5 cm

Support c Head/Stomach 71 175 3309 40x30x9 cm 71 175 3312 50x40x9 cm

f Step Cube/Quadrat

d Wedge 71 175 3400 45x35x12/2 cm

angle to allow a better flow through lymph nodes. Length: 30 cm. 71 208 1306

Flockan® Mobilisation Wedge

i The integrated trough in this wedge makes it perfect for treating the spine using Dr. Kaltenborn's method. Black. 71 208 1511 Approx. 16x10x5 cm 71 208 1508 Approx. 22x10x8 cm

Massage Rolls e Gymnastic 71 175 3107 40x12 cm

Roll k Flockan® Suitable for Bobath method exercises. Blue, 50x14 cm. 71 208 1104

Lordosis Cushion l Flockan® Used as a support in the McKenzie method. Also suitable as a head cushion. Blue, approx. 29x34x7 cm. 71 208 1205

Support Relieve pressure on your neck in a pleasant way with this air cushion. Also suitable for meditation and relaxation exercises. Washable. 23x11x6 cm. 71 187 9807

Support g Leg 45x42x20 cm

71 175 3110 50x18 cm 71 175 3123 60x25 cm

undergoing Bobath therapy. Blue, 50x14x7 cm. 71 208 1003

New m Relax-Nex Neck

71 175 3602 50x40x20 cm 71 175 3615 50x45x40 cm 71 175 3628 60x50x40 cm

71 175 3413 50x40x12/2 cm

Extremely skin friendly and pleasant. As there is a strong rebound effect on this cushion, the weight of the body will not push through. Resistant to sweat and saliva in compliance with DIN standard 53160. With Sanitized material guaranteeing the best protection and optimal hygiene. Very resistant and durable. Developed in cooperation with therapists. Polyurethane throughout.

71 175 3501

o n

o CorpoMed® Health Cushions provide the correct Roll n Multi Support and training roll, change the air pressure to suit your needs. Also suitable for many strengthening, stabilising, relaxing and aqua gymnastic exercises and for Yoga and Pilates. Pleasant velvety surface, strong, easy to clean. Comes with pump and exercise instructions. 71 175 3918

ergonomic support in almost every position. The cushion is filled with EPS relaxing balls that suit everybody perfectly and prevent placing too much strain on the body e.g. on the back. Are also used in nursing, relaxing, support for lying in a certain positions and as a gymnastic aid in case of posture injuries. 100% cotton cover. Can be washed up to 95°, cover and cushion contents can be washed at 60°. 193x36 cm. 71 127 8402

Inflatable Cube p Hagemed® The inflatable cube that can be taken anywhere. Noticeably reduces back discomfort and relaxes the whole body. By placing your feet on the cube, you reduce the pressure on your spinal column enormously, (when in this position the pressure on the spine is reduced from 200 kg to approx.

12 kg). There are 3 choices of cube lengths available (40/45/50 cm) your choice depends on the length of your thigh. Takes up to 200 kg. 71 129 0804

Walking Bars q Parallel Fixed. The aluminium bars can be adjusted by width, length or at a slope and are height adjustable from 78 to 104 cm. Particularly stable. 71 128 4326 Bar length 250 cm 71 128 4339 Bar length 350 cm

75-108 cm

78-104 cm

36-84 cm

r 0-

r Folds down. These parallel bars can Parallel Walking Bars

push together to 18 cm from the side, saving space when stored. Height adjustable from 75-108 cm and the width

244 t

of the track can be adjusted up to 60 cm. 71 128 4300 Bar length 250 cm 71 128 4313 Bar length 350 cm

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Folds down Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Balancing Tops, Improve your Balance Exercises with the Top

cises. Co-ordination, balance and automatic leg, buttocks and arm reactions are developed. Use it to prepare for skiing or playing tennis. Ideal for neuro-physiological therapy. The disc can also be used in water! The holes in the disc allow the water to flow out at a controlled rate, making doing exercises while floating on the surface of the water or at the bottom of the pool possible. ø 40 cm, height, 9 cm, supports up to 120 kg.71 611 444911-7. Comes with instructions for use. 71 127 7702 Slip Underlay b Anti For a safe and non-slip stand on tops.

Easy

and Therapy Disc a Sport Ideal for varied fitness training and balance exer-

With increasing difficulty:

Rocking here and there, top being turned by a carer, twirling and rocking movements on the back or stomach, on knees or standing. More ideas are filling with water, sand or therapy balls.

71 144 4911-7 Disc, blue 71 144 4908-7 Disc, red

Therapy Carousel Set

Will support up to 120 kg.

Therapy top with anti-slip underlay 71 137 3400

See also:

Top c Fitness Same design as the Sport and Therapy Disc 71 127 7702, but with comfortable anti-slip padding. Also suitable for knee exercises. ø 40 cm. 71 127 7731

Proprioceptive training on page 100-101

With padding

Inflated Balancing Disc

d With this disc you set the difficulty level! Lower air Difficulty level can be controlled.

New

e As the disc is large with air padding in the edges, Maxi Trim Top

Maxi Trim is particularly versatile and is suitable for all age groups. Small children love to crawl on it and will get their first experiences of balancing. As there is less swaying in this top, it is suitable for adults to get on easily, for use in therapy and in rehabilitation. When more than one person is using it, this top will develop cooperation and reactions. ø 75 cm. 71 211 1403

Top Balancing Top f Trim Finally it is here: a balance disc for exercises at hip distance apart. Most suitable for fitness, therapy and functional strength training. Very good control of power dispersal in the feet. Rolls evenly under weight. Natural wooden plate, ø 55 cm with solid wooden half ball, height 8 cm. 71 215 0710

Top g Balancing The space saving fitness aid for at home or for

Medium

pressure makes the bottom of the disc soft. Movements become slower and simpler. At higher pressure the disc reacts very easily and therefore movements are quicker and more difficult. Ideal for use in therapy and rehabilitation. ø 38 cm, height: 9.5 cm. Will support up to 75 kg. 71 214 2601

d Extra large: ø 75 cm!

For exercises at hip distance

Disc h Sport Using the Sport Disc you can exercise in a fun but targeted way. It is a universal tool for developing co-ordination and balance. More difficult than a therapy disc. Wooden disc with aluminium hemisphere base. ø 38 cm, height 11 cm. Comes with a comprehensive set of instructions for use. 71 129 5809

Now Even Better!

• non-slip surface • grooved display of middle point • stable aluminium half ball

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

b Top Rated

Difficult

therapy use. It develops coordination and balance in a fun way. As it strengthens the back muscles it prevents damage to the spine. Also very good as a foot seesaw for jobs that involve a lot of sitting. Very elegant shape. Approx. ø 34 cm, height 5.5 cm. 71 129 6105

www.sport-thieme.com

t 245

Develop Coordination Pedalo® System Accessories

Fun Disc a MFT® Action! Improve your mobility, coordination and reactions. Ideal for home fitness, gyms, schools and pre-schools. For children over 4 years of age and beginners. ø 40 cm. With instructions. 71 194 3708

f g Footboard f Roll Suitable for many coordination and stabilisation exercises. If the anti-slip mat is placed under the Balance Board, Spring Board, and the Rotating Balance Board the difficulty of the exercises is increased as the footboard and other board move in two different directions, one over the other. LxWxH: 35x10x5 cm, anti-skid mat included. 71 211 6004 Each

Fit Disc b MFT® Move! Strengthen your stomach

Reach your training target with the right MFT® Disc For increasing performance, health training or simply to improve mobility, each MFT disc is suitable for a purpose. The graded module design, which has been evaluated by scientific institutes, ensures fun and success.

and back muscles and prevent injuries. Train your spine, stabilise joints, mobilise those hips and lower abdomen and relieve muscle tension. Ideal for home fitness, gyms and physiotherapy, “all rounders” and patients. Will support up to 100 kg, ø 40 cm. Comes with instructions on DVD. 71 192 4901

Mat g Anti-Slip Improves stability when training in shoes. Suitable for all training products with 60 cm wide wooden plates. 50x30 cm. 71 128 7501

h i e

rocking boards, rotating rocking boards and Rola Bola more difficult. The Tipping Foot Board consists of two boards on top of each other. They move in different directions independently of each other. Presents a real challenge for motor control as both feet need to work independently of each other. 35x12x10 cm. 71 128 7602 Pair

Trim Disc c MFT® Maintain health: stabilise your musculoskeletal system and improve coordination. Ideal for personal training, gym fitness and physiotherapy. For the fitness conscious, those who enjoy exercises, athletes and patients. ø 40 cm disc with DVD containing exercise instructions). 71 191 2500 Set

Bola Balance i Rola Board Changes in balance start the board rolling and need to be counteracted. The movement is linear. Even the smallest dysbalance requires a quick and measured counter movement. Movement becomes more certain and posture is trained. Plate 60x35 cm with rubber buffers and ø 12 cm solid timber roll. Supports up to 100 kg. 71 134 7917-1

Other uses: • As a stable and unstable rotation plate • As a one leg standing plate • As a rocking board • As a top

Board e Physio This therapy top can just do more! It Sport Disc d MFT® Performance: increase strength and

And there's more: Gymnastics Balls page 25

See product videos b+d

www.sport-thieme.com

246 t

Foot Board h Tipping Makes spring boards, 60x35 cm

stamina, reactions and improve the techniques specific to your sport. Successfully used in physiotherapy, medical training therapy, rehabilitation centres, health gymnastics and top level sport. Disc ø 50 cm, DVD with exercise instructions. 71 191 2526 Set

is easy to get going using the Physio Board as a seesaw moving forwards and backwards or sideways. It gets more difficult when you add the 5 cm high one leg standing plate and train on one leg. When turned over using the push on rubber ball it is a balance top for training coordination. Made from oiled beech wood, ø 46 cm. Will support up to 120 kg. 71 212 5608

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Air Cushion j Vestimed® To adjust the stability of Vestimed to whatever the coordinative abilities of the user are. It also facilitates the use of Vestimed by heavier people up to 150 kg. Vestimed not included. 71 214 2308 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Pedalo® System Coordination Training Pedalo® Coordination Training

With increasing difficulty:

The system for training vestibular motor ability with individual yet complimentary products that has been examined by sports scientists • perfects the ability to balance • strengthens the stomach and back muscles • stabilises the whole postural system • reduces reaction times • and thus prevents injuries

71 128 5808 45x30 cm 71 128 5811 60x35 cm

Springboard b Pedalo® Rectangular 60x 35 cm.

45x30 cm

Trains:

Ideal for:

• balance • body awareness • perception

• beginners • children • rehabilitation

Easy

Rocking Board a Pedalo® Supports up to 100 kg.

60x35 cm

71 128 4209 50-70 kg 71 128 4212 70-90 kg

Springboard c Pedalo® ø 32 cm. 71 128 5202 For body weights: 40 - 70 kg 71 128 5215 For body weights: 70 - 90 kg

Vestimed® Vestibular Trainer The universal whole body training product for targeted fitness training and rehabilitation. It develops coordinative abilities such as balance, rhythm, differentiation, coupling items, orientation and re-adjusting. Vistamed creates many impulses in the brain and nervous system when instable. Legs, arms, stomach, back and trunk with be strengthened.

foot loops with an expander, ø 55 cm, height 15 cm. 71 209 6504 60-90 kg 71 209 6517 80-110 kg

d Trains:

Ideal for:

• • • •

• all-round use • school sport • club sport

balance reactions dexterity body posture

Medium

Vestibular Trainer d Vestimed® Patent pending. Comes with one pair of hand and

Pedalo® Rotating Rocking Board Very volatile. Even the slightest dysbalance will cause a rocking and twisting movement that demands that the user counteracts with the finest of corrective movements. Very demanding training and therapy aid. Successfully used by the German skiing team.

e Ideal for:

Trains: Rotating Rocking Board e Pedalo® Different difficulty levels with the adjusting rotating plate (60 x 35 cm). 71 128 7703

Pedalo® Rotating Rocking Board Set The removable tipping Foot Boards makes the Pedalo rotating rocking board more difficult. 71 128 7787

• Fitness • coordination • Therapy • whole body muscles systems • Parkinson's patients • posture • Rehabilitation • reactions • dexterity • balance • neurological connections

e Stabiliser

f Stabiliser Quick to assemble and ready for coordination training immediately. The standing platform is 60x35 cm, will support up to 150 kg. Comes in a practical carrying bag. 71 214 1406

Trains: • • • • • • • •

Ideal for:

• high performance coordination sport reactions • training therapy ability to stand • physiotherapy proprioceptors dexterity fine motor ability balance speed

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Difficult

The stabiliser is a whole body training aid for improving sensory control of posture and movement. The smallest dysbalance or instability in the musculoskeletal system is displayed on the three dimensional standing platform and therapy can then be carried out on the problem. High performance athletes use the stabiliser for optimising their movement sequences and reducing reaction times. This product has been successfully tested with top athletes and used by: • The German Handball Association with their national junior squad • The German skiing association • Reinerts Olympic physiotherapy practice • Volleyball clubs etc.

t 247

Concentration and Balance New

New New

and Two Legged Balancing Stools c One Moving while sitting for all ages demands more concentration, trains posture and builds up the back muscles. The set of balancing stools comes with two legs so, depending on the needs, either a single leg or both legs can be attached. ø 32 cm. Height adjustable from 43-46 cm. 71 215 1205

New

Air Parcours a TOGU This inflatable balancing set will provide a whole new range of challenges and is guaranteed to bring dynamic movement to a session. The parts have different sensory-motor stimuli and difficulty levels. The difficulty level can also be controlled by changing the air pressure. The best part is the “jumper” which is like a mini trampoline. Extremely strong, durable and easy to clean. 71 215 1915 Each

Exercise Cuboid b Kulequa The variable gymnastics and balancing cuboid that can be quickly changed into many different pieces of equipment. The three individual parts go together with velcro fastenings. There are also four extra sticking bands included. Synthetic leather made from a strong fabric (87% polychloride, 13% polyester) with RG 25/40 foam core. Cuboid LxWxH 150x60x60 cm, total length max. 300 cm. 71 215 2107

Stool d “Appenzeller” Sitting becomes a balancing act as the leg is not connected to the seat! The seat has a double effect: on the pelvis, as it is always active and on the muscles as they are also actively trained. A simple yet ingenious piece of therapy and leisure furniture. Three different leg lengths. ø 32 cm. Height adjustable to 34, 44 or 54 cm. 71 215 1306

Can be used on both sides!

New

Stones e Stepping Jump from stone to stone, but be careful: turning stones are shaky. The use of coloured mini tops make an exciting balancing course suitable for group games and competitions. Without knowing it, the users are also developing bodily coordination and balance. 4 tops in red, green, Balancing Hemisphere Shapes blue and yellow. Extra strong as made from solid plastic. Balancing on the round or flat side of this solid Approx. ø 15 cm. 71 127 6608 Price for 4 wooden ball demands great concentration. Feet muscles are strengthened as well as the whole motor function movement system. Flat side is non-slip due to a carpet Stepping Stones Set covering. Height 7 cm, ø 14 cm. 71 127 3104 Consisting of 3 mini tops in each colour. 71 127 6682 Price for 12

See also:

More balancing equipment on page 249

248 t

g Balancing Fish They can all have a great time hopping and balancing on these funny wobbly fish. The surface is hard and non-slip for good hold and the movement takes place in the inflatable part underneath. This game is good for challenging the motor sensors by constantly forcing the ankles and legs to adjust to the wobbly underground. Includes two fish: 38x22 cm and 34 x 15 cm. 71 214 2803 Set of 4

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Balancing and Fun ... Balancing Route When you put the Sport-Thieme balancing route together, you get a real sensory pad. Balance is just as well developed as the sense of touch on the soles of the feet. The parts are ergonomically rounded and the surface has additional massage nobbles. The patented stacking tenon system means they can be combined any way together.

Easy to grip and non-slip

Simple stacking system

Now Even Better!

Longer version:

1.70 m

Snake c Sand The Sand Snake will motivate people Balancing Path Straight a The ideal addition to the set: LxWxH 44x13x6 cm. 71 128 5055

Path, Curve b Balancing Ideal addition to the set. LxWxH: 44x13x6 cm. Each 71 128 5068

Each

Set Of Balancing Paths The versatile endless balancing path, with knobbles with good grip, is a great success for children. The coloured elements with structured surface also offer tactile and visual stimuli. Total length approx. 7.5 m. Consisting of: • 8 straight • 8 bent elements • 4 free connecting elements 71 128 5101 Set

Now with 20 pieces

to balance on it and it will not roll to one side. This snake can be laid straight, curved or over and inside itself. The elastic 3 D material massages and sensitizes the soles of the feet. Ideal for use in therapy for people with perception difficulties. Cover: 100% polyester, filled with quartz sand. Length: 1.70 m, ø 6 cm. 71 198 5506 Blue 71 198 5519 Orange

Easy to hold and soft, length: 2.60 m

Rope d Balancing Made from natural hemp, 2 metres long ø 6 cm with leather ends. Dr. Anette Bauer, of the German Sport Institute in Cologne, wrote that the balancing rope was also suitable for children with minimal cerebral dysfunction because of its versatility and the challenges it poses as a practise aid. 71 127 6709

Max Sand Snake e Multi Extra long colourful balancing path. Demands balance and tactile awareness. Length: 2.60 m. 71 198 5564

Stackable, space saving

Provides a feeling for heights and distances in a fun way.

Steps f Stool 11 colourful stools make for great fun as an obstacle course and balancing track. They can be combined in many ways: making curves or using as individual stools for group games. Elegant strong Mulitplex wood with fluted standing areas and nonslip rubber covers on the legs. Simply push the stools into one another to store (55x55x70 cm). 71 203 1604

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Steps g Balancing These steps are a fun way to develop a feel for height and distance. In 5 cm steps up to 30 cm high. The four legged stools allow freedom and fun when sitting e.g. in games using circles. 6 stools each ø 35 cm. 71 203 5202

t 249

Training Balance Varussell®

a Varussell® Effect Disc

Effect Discs

Complete set of four discs, printed both sides (mixed colours, spirals, rings, fireworks etc.). 71 174 0631

Enlarging Set

c Seat

New d

Varussell®

Stand

e Varussel® Seat NEW: Now comes with an anti-slip pad! This is a c Varussell® The comfortable seat will make sitting on the VarusEnlarging Set b Varussell® The ideal addition to Varussell® in therapy. It can fit up to two people either sitting or lying down. Lying board 120x60 cm and the enlarging disc, which has a diameter of 60 cm, can be used underneath to prevent tipping over or screwed on as a sitting disc. Varussell® not included. 71 128 1819

sell easier. For patients with coordination problems simply screw on the seat and it is just as easy to remove it later. 71 128 1835

Stand d Varussell® This also makes Varussell exciting for adults. The height of the seat (in total approx. 46 cm) makes it easier to move on the Varussell. Varussell not included. 71 128 1822

real favourite for children undergoing therapy. Holding balance and finding the limits is very motivating. What makes it really exciting, is that you have the chance to steer yourself by controlling your balance and can freely get yourself into “risky” positions. An especially attractive item for pre schools to therpy etc, the Varussel® is a disc that rotates at an angle up to 10º. The Varussel® can be used easily and quickly anywhere ø 40 cm, height 20 cm). Supports up to 120 kg. 71 174 0602

Balanco With Balanco you develop confidence in moving, concentration and reactions while training, in rehabilitation and therapy (psycho, senso and movement co-ordination). Every Balanco set contains different, quickly interchanged exercise units. The different challenges and increasing difficulty levels mean they can be suited to the user. Takes up to 120 kg. LxWxH: 54x40x10 cm. Not suitable for children under 3 years of age.

Balanco Sets Lying 8

Mouse Game

Set with Mouse f Balanco Contains of a Balanco top with 3 inserts: • mouse game • labyrinth • lying eight Includes ball mouse, hard rubber ball and comprehensive instructions. 71 197 1301

f Labyrinth

Set With Net Ball Game g Balanco Contains 3 inserts: • netball game • labyrinth • lying eight Includes 3 hard rubber balls and comprehensive instructions. 71 197 1314

g h

Netball

Zigzag Taurus Labyrinth

250 t

Supplementary Set h Balanco The new challenge for Balanco fans. For existing Balancos: • Taurus Labyrinth • Net ball • Zigzag 71 197 1356

Set of 3

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Duo i Balance A great game for two people. Each guides their own balancing board and passes the ball to the other. On a rubber ball base. 105x56x7 cm. 71 203 5303 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Rollerboard Fun - Now Outdoors Too! Set c Rollerboard Set

Buy now !

Paddle Rollerboard

New

Rollerboard b Paddle Make your rollerboard into an indoor

Board Paddling Oar a Roller With the concentrated power of the two arms small children will easily push along the floor. The padded handles mean

that these oars site well in the hand and the rubber pads provide an ideal grip even on smooth floors. Length: 47 cm. Rollerboard not included. 71 200 2910 Pair

paddle boat. The new way of moving makes children more skilful when using rollerboards. The non-slip rubber balls allow more controlled movement e.g. when using the Sport-Thieme games obstacle course. Length approx. 105 cm. Comes without rollerboard and padding. 71 199 9509

c Rollerboard Set Consisting of: • indoor gliding roller boards • rollerboard paddles • rollerboard padding 71 128 5488

Sausmaus Rollerboards

d Sausmaus Outdoor

The rollerboard for the playground

Outdoor d Sausmaus The rollerboard for outdoors that makes it possible to move around on uneven surfaces, cobble stones when other rollerboards are not up to the job. Perfect for using in schools and playgrounds. Sitting height is 22 cm making it good for pushing off. The wheels are pneumatic and therefore offer protection against bumps. With holding and pulling rope, ø 75 cm, will support up to 150 kg. 71 128 9914

With extra large steerable wheels

e Sausmaus Rollerboard With ball bearinged steerable wheels

Rollerboard e Sausmaus The rollerboard with impact protection and a great push off thanks to the pneumatic tyres. Also very good for holding on to with lots of different exercises possible such as pulling, spinning etc. Easy running, ball bearinged steerable wheels, ø 75 cm. Supports up to 150 kg. 71 128 9901

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 251

The Variable Pedalo® Rollerboard System Pedalo® Rollerboard System

There are a great number of choices for using Pedalo® Rollerboards whether lying down, sitting, kneeling or standing with supports, on your own or with a partner. These choices have made the rollerboards one of the most loved products yet also are the secret to its highly challenging character. They develop motor skills and balance. The Pedalo® trade mark is a sign of the best quality. These rollerboards will last a whole lifetime. Original Pedalo® Rollerboards have particularly high quality light running, ball bearinged castors specially designed for use in gymnasiums. The board is varnished on both sides and carefully rounded off. The rectangular Pedalo® Rollerboards and Sausmaus are also kitted out with a unique line of holes. This makes them really

Pedalo® “Classic” Rollerboard

Pedalo® a “Classic” Roller Board The universal handy rollerboard with many applications. You can put side walls, supports, bar, holding handles etc. in the holes along the sides. Easy moving ball castors with ball bearings. 60x35 cm. 71 207 5408

• shock absorbers in the corners protect the hands, gym walls and other rollerboards from impact • easy moving castors with ball bearings

b Pedalo® “Scooter” Rollerboard

flexible as the supports, bars and holding balls can all be added to the rollerboard to make your own personalised vehicle.

Extra Safe Pedalo Rollerboards are roller boards with extra safety. If you put the ergonomic detaining castors into the holes, your hands are protected.

Pedalo® Rollerboard Accessories

Rollerboard with Side Walls e Pedalo® 71 207 5440 Pedalo® Rollerboard with Holding Balls 71 207 5437 Side Plates 71 127 8617 Detaining Castors 71 127 8604 Pull Rope, length 350 cm 71 127 8620 Rollerboard Padding For 60x35 cm rollerboards. 71 128 5417-1 Supports, height 80 cm 71 129 6639

Basic design: 60x35 cm

Pair Pair Each

Each Pair

c Pedalo® “Scooter” Rollerboard Maxi design: 150x45 cm

New

Steer by balancing

The indestructible rollerboard with shock absorbers to take the hard use when in schools and general sport. The shock absorbers on each corner protect the hands, the hall wall and also protect against crashes with other roller boarders. Scooter Maxi has double castors and will hold up to three people. Basic 60x35 cm 71 207 5509 Maxi 150x45 cm 71 207 5512

b c

Pedalo® Steering Rollerboard Steering Rollerboard d Pedalo® With skate components and holding balls. The sharpness of the bend is also determined by the body movement as the radius of the curve and angle are individually controlled. This board

252 t

Pedalo® “Scooter” Rollerboard

would be a great asset in training balance in therapy. Ideas for use: slalom course, moving in different body postures, ball games in groups, competitions and rollerboard licences. Can also be used outside. LxWxH: 60x35x14 cm. 71 128 9305

And there's more: Pedalo® Starter Set on page 254

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Trolley f Storage DBGM approved. Takes up to 20 roller boards, is space-saving, easy to store and transport. Strong steel tube construction. LxWxH: 80x47x105 cm. Suitable for all sizes and designs. 71 131 0102 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Rollerboards from t ® Sport-Thieme Rollerboard Accessories

Gliding Rollerboards

Rope for Rollerboards a Pulling Polypropylene, length 3 m.

• • • •

71 126 0117-3

New

ball bearinged castors will not tip over easy running extremely silent

b a Pulling Rope Order! Now

Board Flags b Roller Yellow against blue, which team gets through the obstacle course quickest? Or: who will play the fire brigade with the red flag? Four flags in different colours. Length: 100 cm. Can be attached to all existing wooden roller boards. 71 214 2917 Pack of 4

New Single wheels

Double wheels

Protective caps

Rollerboard Information

Roller Board d Gliding This board will be loved by small and

Board Padding c Roller A pleasant non-slip cushion that will protect the hands if the roller board crashes as the padding covers the sides of the board. Suitable for all 60x35x2 cm roller boards (e.g. the gliding roller board or the ergo roller board). Blue. 71 128 5417

71 128 5420

Roller Board e Jumbo The roller board for two. Useful for developing balance, motor function and skilfulness. With rounded edges, moves from all angles on 4 swivel castors. Double steerable castors. 80x35 cm. 71 127 9102

c f • with holding slits • will not tip over

f Ergo Roller Board

The original from Sport-Thieme. More fun for young and old. The rounded edges guarantee easy handling and prevent injuries to hands, especially when playing in groups, competitions and balancing and ball games. Will not tip over thanks to the low centre of gravity. This board Made from

stable ply-wood, natural varnish with very easy moving ball bearinged castors. Abrasion-proof strong solid rubber tyres. LxWxH: 60x35x9 cm. Will support over 120 kg and is almost indestructible. Protected design. 71 128 8504

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 253

Gliding Rollerboard Set Roller Board with cushion

big children. They can sit, lie down, squat, travel in twos, take part in competitions and play ball games on it. Using the board, children learn balance, occupy themselves and work in groups. Holes are drilled in the board to allow it to be pulled along with a rope. It will not tip over as it has a low centre of gravity. Strong multi-layered varnished natural wood with easy moving ballbearing castors. Abrasion-proof strong solid rubber tyres. LxWxH: 60x35x9 cm. Rope not included. Will support over 120 kg and is almost unbreakable. Single wheels 71 128 5404 Double wheels for soft floors 71 128 5446 Single wheels with protective caps 71 128 5459 Single wheels + 4 corner protectors 71 128 5462

Safety considerations for rollerboards: • ball bearinged, small castors • solid rubber tyres for gym halls • low centre of gravity • double wheels for soft floors • finger protectors New: with holes for pulling rollerboards

Pedalo® & Wawago®: Always Moving Pedalos for Therapy and Rehabilitation

Also suitable for adults

with Bars b Pedalo® Now wider! This gives you more room

a See product a video

www.sport-thieme.com Pedalo® a Wawago® European Patent 0 894 515. Wawago® is a versatile training aid but also great fun. Suitable for people up to 100 kg. Approx. 40x40x22 cm. 71 128 8201

Wawago® - More than a Double Pedalo®! New motor exercises and a completely new feeling while moving await you. Just as in walking, the ankle joint is mobilised, the front of the foot (A) or heels (B) move up and down. However, the Wawago offers more: if you fold the standing area down lengthways, then you can move along in stepping motion. Either with the right (C) or left (D) leg leading. When going backwards, it is again a totally new task Examples of use in therapy:

Non-slip standing surface

D Spacer

Axle not connected Concentric module Excentric module

254 t

• Vein training: Ideal for prophylaxis. As a result of the angle and the up and down movement, the pumping action in the veins will be increased and strengthened. • Coordination: Simple to learn, if the person training breaks down the training e.g. in stepping motion right front of foot, left heel-right front of foot. Examples of use in rehabilitation: • mobilising foot joints • developing calf muscles by stretching • developing back muscles through asymmetric stimulation • using the wrists when doing the “bear walk” • using it as a wheelbarrow, you will also develop the muscles in the upper and lower arms Practising tasks: • starting the Wawago • moving with eyes shut • pulling along a rope • moving under a rope with Wawago • experimenting with different types body posture: on the knees, crouching, “bear walk”, wheelbarrow • balancing objects on the head while moving Games ideas: • Pushing the Wawago to a partner standing opposite you • relay teams • moving up to an obstacle, climbing over it and climbing on another Wawago • collecting objects • hopping pushing game • Wawago “drivers” throw balls to one another on the move There are many more ideas in the book: “Pedalo and Wawago”.

to move. Develops leg muscles and coordination while moving. Suitable for everyone who requires a walking aid. By holding onto the bars the pressure is removed from the legs. For use in therapy and rehabilitation, after ligament damage, hip operations, accidents etc. Comes with white tyres. Will support up to 200 kg. Length: 1 m. 71 129 6538

c Reha-Pedalo® You will get quick results as Reha Pedalo® develops leg muscles and trains balance and co-ordination in a fun way. The height adjustable supports made leg work easier and can be attached to the front or side. With white tyres. Length: 1 m. Foot pads not included. 71 129 6512

Pedalo® Starter Set Broschüre

Starter Set e Pedalo® Make using Pedalos easy! Simply hang on to the rope when learning and off you go. After only a little practise you can discard the rope. The set consists of: • 1 Individual Pedalo • 1 pair of holding ropes 71 129 6381

Ropes f Holding Simplifies using Pedalos and Pedesan Bar Roll. Ideal for learning and training. 71 197 4805 Pair

Pedalo® d Family Find your rhythm as a team. The supports give additional hold. It is actually very easy to all move forwards. With 2 strong 80 cm high supports. Standing area LxB: 100x14 cm. 71 198 1706

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Pads g Foot The soft foot pads are made from special foam are non-slip and will increase the training effect. Suitable for Pedalo® Standing Boards. LxWxH: 30x14x2.5 cm. 71 144 056 Each Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Original Pedalo® from Pedalos for Use Outdoors

Original Pedalo® System • • • • •

Made in Germany durable, long life span easy moving non-slip optimal movement amplitude • free from prohibited plasticisers • easy to maintain • very durable

Pedalo® Air Robust with pneumatic tyres these Pedalos will go on any surface, inside or outside. Can be used from the gymnasiums out onto paths, fields or in open country. It goes at a faster speed for the same amount of effort because of the larger wheels (approx. 30 cm).

i Pedalo® Combi For outdoors and indoors

h Pedalo® Classic

Pedalo® “S” Air “Air Combi” b Giant a Pedalo® You can grow with the Pedalo by The Pedalo for two will improve coordination and the ability to adapt. Ideal for schools, pre-schools and events. 71 129 5001

adjusting the standing surface: the higher the surface the easier it is to learn. The air filled tyres make it comfortable and safe to move along. Particularly suitable for active breaks in schools and in therapeutic use. Wheel size: 20”. Will support up to 100 kg. 71 197 6104 Now! Order

“Air Sport” c Pedalo® Balance on Pedalo® Air Sport like on a uni-

d Pump For all products that need to

cycle. A real challenge for playing, pre-schools, primary schools and events. 71 129 4907

be pumped up. Particularly good for pumping up the tyres on Pedalos. 71 197 4850

g Top Rated www.sport-thieme.com

Suitable for use in the school yard and gymnasium Sport g Pedalo® (Single Pedalo) The original. Moves like a unicycle. Will support up to 120 kg. 71 129 6307

Single Aqua Pedalo®

Double Aqua Pedalo®

Classic h Pedalo® (Double Pedalo) Using a Pedalo is great fun and the double wheels with the large step board is easy to learn. Will support up to 200 kg. 71 129 6206

Pedalo® i Combi The Pedalo for two with an extra long

Pedalo® e Aqua DBGM approved. Different water training. Aqua Pedalo® offers opportunities to develop balance and reaction. Use the buoyancy and inertia of the water and have great fun. Aqua Pedalo® can be used in rehabilitation for stabilising and mobilising the legs and the lower back. Made from resistant plastic with stainless steel axles. 71 129 9801 Pedalo® Aqua Sport 71 129 9814 Pedalo® Aqua Classic

Pedalo® f Slalom The “differential” Pedalo®, specially for taking corners. You create the turn by moving your upper body or hips. This makes the Slalom Pedalo also very good as a training aid in sport. 71 129 7108

Pedalo® Sport

standing area (60x14 cm) is safer, demands movement agreed by both parties and develops solical interation. The different positions for partners, back to back, facing each other, both facing the direction the Pedalo is moving, also sets new challenges. Suitable for all age groups. Will support up to 200 kg. 71 129 7300

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

This well known game, sport, exercise and therapy product is loved by young and old, handicapped and able-bodied people. As it is highly challenging, versatile and of a high quality it will win over every user. The Pedalo inventor Erich Hoerz said about his product that it was beneficial for everyone. Pedalo® is particularly loved in preschools, schools, therapy centres and coronary sports groups. This is because Pedalo® trains and develops • balance • coordination • rhythm • social behaviour • security of movement • perception Original Pedalos are: • durable and have a long life • easy moving • non-slip • stable and easy to stand on • washable • easy to maintain Always opt for an original Pedalo® as their price is capped and they have been certified the German “spiel gut”(“good for playing”) recommendation in quality tests.

t 255

Stilts: Great Fun Balancing Walking Stilts

200 cm

140 cm

170 cm

171 cm

Solid hardwood

Stilts a Aluminium The indestructible, strong stilts for children of all ages. Aluminium throughout. Foot rests can fold back, bars are adjustable with additional quick fastening locks. Can be stored away in the smallest areas. With rubber stoppers and grips on the bar ends. Foot rests are adjustable with an Allen key from 22 cm in 10 stages to 72 cm. Total length: 171 cm, bar ø 30 mm. Will support up to 60 kg. 71 135 5244 Pair

Stilts b “Frankfurt” Uprights made from bonded hard wood, consoles secured with Allen keys. Every 5 cm height adjustable by 25-50 cm. Stilts have rubber stoppers for safety and also provide good hold on slopes and hills. Length 170 m. Also can be used in halls. Will support up to 100 kg. 71 135 5202 Pair

256 t

Stilts c Children's Wooden, length 140 cm, 35 x 35 mm, can be easily adjusted to 2 heights: 31 and 41 cm. Come with rubber stoppers. 3.8 kg. For people up to approx. 150 cm. 71 134 2505 Pair

young and old for a very long time. Can be used in: races, obstacle courses, balance training etc. Walking on stilts is also a great pastime that provides lots of fun. Material: solid hardwood, 35 x 35 mm, the consoles are adjustable at 31, 41 and 51 cm, length 2.00 m with rubber stoppers. Supports up to 90 kg. 71 135 6508 Pair

Stilts e Children's We have designed these children’s stilts so that they can have pure fun and joy learning to walk with stilts. They have everything a good pair of children’s stilts should have to make walking with stilts fun. When they use them they will know the difference: • Well designed (“V” shape) • Stand well (12x6 cm) • Child friendly foot part (8.5 cm) • Ergonomic handles • Suitable height, complete: 75 cm, holding height: 50 cm • Child friendly and easy to use • Foot guide pins on the foot stand area stop slipping to the side and makes it easier to control the stilts with the feet • A Holz-Hoerz Eco Product made from mixed hard wood sourced from sustainable forestry, solid and naturally oiled and free from toxins • Anti-slip surface for indoors, reduces noise, protects the floor and stops slipping • Strong design perfect for pre-schools and private use 71 135 5273 Pair

d Stilts Stilts have been a fun challenge for

Maximum Half-Ball weight 70kg h Stilts Cans Stilts f Running g Roll A popular product for balancing and This game, that helps practise balarm-leg coordination. Made from thick walled polyethylene with a reinforced edge and plastic rope. Economical design, very durable. Colours depend on stocks: red, yellow or blue. ø 13 cm, height 12 cm. Will support up to 70 kg. 71 188 5806 Pair

ance and skill, is very popular with children in pre-schools and primary school. A sense of balance is taught in a fun way. The stilts are 10 cm high made from solid blocks of wood with a 90 cm sisal rope. Children in kindergartens also enjoy using these stilts. 71 133 7701 Pair

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Plastic, balance practise on “halfballs”. Naturally compatible with walking movement. Useable in pairs. Height 8 cm, ø 15 cm. 1 set = 3 pairs (in blue, yellow and red). 71 128 4401 3 pairs

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Unicycling - Practise Makes Perfect! Pedasan • develop balance • ideal for use outdoors

New a

d New

c Bright tyre protects indoor floors

20” High Unicycle a Giraffe High unicycle with chain drive, chrome. • 150 cm high • 36 hole steel rims • chrome BSH bottom bracket • 20“x1.75” tyres, black • Saddle with quick release lever • non-slip plastic pedals 71 132 8686

Unicycle c Luxus For indoor use, yellow tyres 1.95”, 36

“Luxus” b Unicycle Not an everyday moving experience. This unicycle develops concentration and balance. An all rounder, very manoeuvrable and particularly good for tricks in a small space. Will support up to 90 kg. • flat chrome forks with two-piece dropout ends • 36 hole aluminium rims on the 16'' and 28 holes on the 18'' • chromed square axle • non-slip plastic pedal • 1.95'' black tyres • aluminium quick release on saddle • 350 mm seat post, ø 25.4 mm, will not twist • additional short (200 mm) seat post included • ergonomic and non-deforming saddle with removable corners and handle on front. 71 132 8615 26'', black 71 132 8602 24'', black 71 132 4307 20”, chrome

spoke-hole aluminium rim, square axle, pedals with anti-slip cover. PU saddle with replaceable protective edges. Aluminium saddle bolt, 35 cm and 20 cm seat post included, stable when turning. 20”, chrome 71 132 4310

Which unicycle will fit your height? The following table shows the recommended sizes of unicycles based on the in-step length. This refers to the minimum in-step length with the shorter seat post! Measuring in-step: You measure your in-step from the ground (including shores) to the crotch. The Standard and Luxus unicycles come with two different seat posts so that you will not need to shorten the post anymore. Unicycle Size 16’’ 18’’ 20’’ 24’’ 26’’

Minimum step length 54 cm 60 cm 62 cm 68 cm 74 cm

Bar Roll d Pedasan Shoes normally support the postural system of our feet and the muscles and ligaments are passive. Training in bare feet on the Pedasan will strengthen foot arches and the reflex zones on the soles of the feet will be optimally activated. This stimulates the metabolism and mobilises and strengthens the ankles. Width 37 cm, ø 22 cm. Will support up to 100 kg. 71 129 6408-1

ropes e Holding Simplifies using Pedalos and Pedesan Bar Roll. Ideal for learning and training. 71 197 4805-1 Each

Ball f Balance Especially attractive to young “artists”. Balance is fostered using this ball. A very stable ball made from PE. Neon colours. Supports up to 100kg. 71 132 5906 ø approx. 60 cm, 12 kg 71 132 5919 ø approx. 75 cm, 20 kg

See also: • Balancing page 249 • Pedalos page 254-255

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 257

Juggling Bags a Bean Juggling balls, easy to grip round

New

bag made from synthetic leather, ø 6.5 cm, approx. 95 g in different colours. Plastic granulate filling. One order contains 12 balls. 71 132 8439 1 set

Large version. Beginners should start with either the medium or large Diablo as they are more stable in the air. This is where you can learn best. Weight 300 g, ø 12 cm. Length 14.2 cm. Colours dependent on stocks. 71 136 0729

j Diabolo Medium kit, plastic with a metal axis.

ø 6.8 cm

Approx. 190 g, ø 10 cm, length 11.7 cm. Includes holding rods. 71 136 0716

Bean Bag b Original Juggling balls, easy to grip round

Sets of 3

Diabolo

c ø 4.5 cm

l Small Version k Diabolo, A very free running plastic diabolo spool with metal axis, in either red or blue. ø 65 mm, 7.7 cm long. 1 item which also includes the two holding rods. 71 136 0703

Ball l Juggling Can also be used as a juggling ball for Down Juggling. Super micro-cellular rubber springball, ø 7 cm, approx. 85 g. Speckled colours yellow/red, yellow/green. 71 136 0918 Price for 3

bag made from stretch nylon with millet filling, ø approx. 6.8 cm, weight approx. 120 g, available in different colours. 71 136 0309 Price for 3

c Kickies Also called naughty ball. Small ball with faces printed on it. Very robust - you can hit the wall with it, kick it with your foot, squeeze it or juggle it. Weight approx. 40 g, ø 4.5 cm. 3 Kickies per order. 71 132 8501 1 set

Juggling Bags d “Try-Its” Fit in every trouser pocket as well as in a handbag and are therefore very versatile. With plastic granulate filling. 9x9x9 cm, approx. 60 g. 71 132 8309 Price for 3

d e ø 5.5 cm

e Rasta Rainbow Bean Bag

Juggling ball in Rasta style. This crochet ball can be used as a footbag, stress or juggling ball. Outer material cotton, filled with plastic granules, 60 g, ø 5.5 cm. 71 132 8426 Price for 3

“Koosh Ball” f Original A lively and fun ball. The Koosh ball is easy to catch, soft and versatile because of its unique strong design. You will find it hard to put the Koosh Ball down. Especially suitable for beginners, throwing, catching, carrying, juggling or tossing on the foot or knee. Material fine, coloured rubber fibres. ø 9 cm ø approx. 9 cm. 71 109 3605-1

Stick n Devil Strong wooden sticks decorated with Pole m Juggling You will be able to perfect some works of art with this 1 metre long, unbreakable plastic pole with two rubber balls. Using the juggling pole is a real challenge to motor functioning, coordination and concentration for adults and children alike. 750 g. Assorted colours. 71 199 9509-1

a textile band and with plastic end caps. Length 60 cm, approx. 280 g with two holding sticks. Using the holding sticks, the devil stick should always be kept moving. It is tossed high in the air and caught with the two sticks, or thrown from left to right between the two sticks. 71 132 6505

Juggling Balance Set

f g

ø 11 cm

Mondo g Koosh ø 11 cm.

In rainbow colours, the largest of the Koosh balls. Soft and irresistible. ø 6.5 cm 71 109 3504-1

Koosh Ball h Mini The smallest of the Koosh balls but a big hit when playing. With the same characteristics as the other Koosh balls. ø 6.5 cm, 50 g. 71 109 3618-3

258 t

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Balancing Set o Juggling A real challenge to your concentration, fine motor skills and hand-eye coordination. You have to try to hold the ball on the bar by compensating with your balance. Can also be used as an egg and spoon race. The set consists of: • 3 aluminium ball carrying bars ø 38 mm, length 30 cm • 3 juggling balls ø 70 mm, 85 g. 71 136 0921 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Supporting Coordination c d

g i e New

Box a Cigar Very stable plywood construction,

contrasting black edges. Felt glued to top, coloured. 180x120x62 mm, 200 g. 71 135 9305 Price for 3

Ball b Jog The ultimate action fun for young and old. A brand new idea for having fun when throwing and catching. Suitable for people from 3 years to 103. Recommended distances 2-20 m. The idea of this skilful game is to catch the juggling ball using the wooden bat and throw it on. 3 part set. 71 132 5821-1

Juggling Beginner's Set

Juggling Set k Beginner's This set contains all the basic materials for schools and clubs for a wide variety of simple juggling tricks. The set contains: • 12x 130 g bean bags • 9x 120 g bean bags • 9x 100% polyamide juggling tissues • 3x juggling rings ø 33 cm • 3x neon juggling clubs • 1x medium diablo • 4x juggling plates • 1x devil stick 71 135 9103 Set

Plates c Juggling Special plastic unbreakable plate.

Ring f Juggling Plastic ring ø 33 cm, weight

Tissues h Juggling Made from light crepe 100%

Easy to handle, very suitable for children's circus. 2 plates, includes wooden handle. Colours: yellow, green, lilac and red, depending upon stocks. ø 23.5 cm, 105 g. 71 136 0602 Price for 2

approx. 100 g, 3 mm thick. 71 136 0400

polyamide material. Especially suitable for beginners, juggling promotions, and group juggling. Comes in different colours. 70x70 cm. Washable at up to 30 °C. 71 136 0208 Price for 3

Juggling Clubs d Neon Inexpensive choice for beginners of

Easy to turn with unbreakable plastic body in white. 49 cm long, approx. 260 g. 71 136 0527 Each

all age groups, very robust, in 5 assorted colours. Length 49 cm. 200 g. 71 136 1605 Each

Ring e Spinning Extra large juggling rings. Comfortably encircles the arm or leg. Can also be used as a juggling ring. PE, ø 40 cm, 4 mm thick, 140 g, assorted colours. 71 136 1113 Price for 2

Large Juggling Set

Price for 3

Style Juggling g European Clubs

Chiffon Tissues, Juggling and Dancing Cloths Are perfect for movement games, dance, rhythm and juggling. Made from airy crepe 100% polyamide material, light as a feather. 140x140 cm, assorted colours. Washable at 30 degrees. 71 136 0211-3

Clubs i Children's Also suitable for beginners as they are easier and shorter (45 cm) than the standard clubs, the soft shaft will remove children's fears, very good rotation. In 3 colours depending on stocks. 71 136 1009 Each

Juggling Ring j Junior Plastic, in 6 colours, flexible and light, very strong ø 24 cm. 71 136 1100

Price for 3

Dabble In Juggling Set

Juggling Set l Large Specially assembled for schools. Suitable for a class of 30 students. Set consists of: • 60x 100% polyamide juggling tissues • 60x bean bags • 12x clubs • 24x juggling rings • 8x large diabolos • 8x devil sticks • 2x 20” unicycles. 71 136 1706 Set

In Juggling Set m Dabble Small set for juggling beginners to gain experience of juggling. The articles are specially selected with beginners in mind. The set contains: • 1x medium diabolo • 1x large diabolo • 2x juggling plates

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

• 1x devil stick • 6x 100% polyamide juggling tissues • 15 bean bags • 3x cigar boxes • 3x children's clubs This set is also suited to children over 6 years of age. 71 135 9204 Set

t 259

Parachutes: Fun for the Group! a

belt bands for better hold

Giant Parachute For groups of more than five people.

a Parachutes with Holding Loops

View of seam • Tunnel pull rope, Sewn in and covered in a hem for a better grip • Double sewn edging

For the development of elementary motor skills and countless activities for children and adults. With very strong bands around the edge for better grip. There is an additional 10 mm thick cord sewn in to allow more people play with the parachute. 100% polyester, very soft and pleasant to hold. Fire retardant. Comes in a packing bag. 71 135 4414 ø 3.5 m, 8 loops 71 135 4427 ø 5 m, 12 loops 71 135 4430 ø 6 m, 12 loops 71 135 4443 ø 7 m, 16 loops

The Many Advantages: • Tear resistant • Includes packing bag • Astol fabric made from 100% polyester • More durable and strong than nylon or cotton • 2 year guarantee • 400 Newton tear resistance • Thickness of 365-380 threads • Light fast, holds its shape • Suitable for use outside • No static build up • Washable up to 30 °C • Fire retardant

Parachute Games Ideal for movement games for groups. As there is no winners or loosers with parachutes, it is good for training social interaction. There are no restrictions on the creativity of an individual while playing with it. Characteristics: • small, easy to transport • co-operative game • attractive colours • for young and old • can be used outside and inside • leisure, club and school uses • can be played without previous knowledge • fosters imagination and creativity • high quality product

New

Group Games

b Parachute c Small 100% polyamide, cut into wedges of Hiding Game

Perception

Small Parachute Set Consisting of one blue, yellow and red parachute, ø 1.5 m. 71 132 4479 Set of 3

260 t

Parachute b Small 100% polyamide in one colour, ø 1.5 m in a packing sack. • a fun way to learn colours • hiding games • perception • recognition games • group games 71 132 4440 Blue 71 132 4453 Yellow 71 132 4466 Red

red, blue, yellow and green. Ideal for group work with every type of group from preschool groups to senior citizens. Many groups can be formed and people can use many parachutes. It can be used to practise throwing and catching objects, tossing at targets, transporting objects, running with the parachute flapping behind and as a wall decoration or a cover. ø 1.5 m. In a packing sack. 71 135 3903

Which size parachute for which group? Round Parachutes ø7m ø5m ø 3.5 m ø 1.5 m ø6m No. of people: l 3-6 l 5-12 l 10-18 l 12-25 l 15-30 The above table is based on work with youths and adults. The number of people can be doubled for pre-school children. You should also take the size (including height) of your room into consideration.

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Everyone Pulling Together • two year durability guarantee • 100% polyamide Astol fabric • more durable and stronger than nylon or cotton • light fast, holds its shape • double sewn edging • pulling rope tunnel for a good hold • cut-out in the middle

Sky a Night This giant parachute speaks for itself. Playing with this parachute demands new movement all the time. Also suitable for decorating halls or for roll play under the “night sky”. Giant parachute made from 100% polyamide, cut in wedge shapes printed with stars. Comes without loops at edges. Delivery includes a pack sack with printed instruction (protected design). 71 132 4828 ø 3 m 71 132 4815 ø 4 m 71 132 4802 ø 5 m

• ø 170 cm • ideal for adults • many uses

sheet b Jumping Hang from it, get tossed high in the air and caught on it, can be used as a sheet to jump into in fire brigade games. It serves as a safety and suspension net in gymnastics. For safety reasons please use mats underneath. Strong tear-resistant

(100% polyester) material with integrated continuous cord, ø 170 cm. Also suitable for adults. 71 127 2505-1

And there's more: Mats from page 212

Parachute c Rainbow A parachute for the next generation. Divided into five bright rainbow colours. For use by up to 10 people. The clever part of this design is the 10 net targets which are marked with letters and numbers. A ball is

supplied to roll on the parachute. This opens up lots of possibilities: team building, cooperation, counting games, spelling games and many more. It will fascinate both young and old. 100% polyamide. ø 3.65 m. 71 187 0901

e Blindfolds Anyone who does not want to see can

The Round Sheet d Rondo, Ideal for movement therapy in groups. There are no winners or losers in this game. Cooperative movement increases the spatial experience and starts creative movement. Children and adults are drawn in to group games. • lean outwards in a the circle • standing, lying, sitting • make the sheet really stretch • wrap oneself in the sheet • turn in a circle • portray figures High quality single elastic fabric with super

elastic rayon. Width 140 cm, circumference approx. 4 m. 91% polyamide, 9% elasthane. 71 129 0048

hear and feel! A whole new way of “seeing” for intensive work in perception, simply relaxing, feeling and learning. The sense of hearing is very important to the success of the game while at the same time all the senses are trained. Soft, padded eyepiece with nose padding and adjustable rubber band. Will not slip down and lets no light through. Outer: 100% cotton, middle PUR foam, inner 100% rayon. Washable up to 30 °C. Games Goal ball/blind ball: Played with a bell ball on the hall floor to the goal of the opposing team. The playing area is rectangular and divided with a mid line. Blind cow: The eyes of the “blind cow” are covered and they must try to catch the other children in the group. 71 204 0006 For children: 18x8.5 cm 71 204 0019 For adults: 21x10 cm

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Balls f Bell Special rubber balls for the blind and visually impaired. These balls are also fun for those with good vision: play with closed eyes, follow the ball with your ears, roll ball (a game with rules), differentiate between noises. Material: rubber. Exercise balls with bells 6” (ø 16 cm) 340 g, for children. 71 109 8903-0 Blue Each 71 109 8916-0 Yellow Each 71 109 8929-0 Red Each

t 261

Creative Moving Games

Tissues b Juggling With airy 100% polyamide crepe. Particularly suitable for beginners, juggling promotions and juggling

groups. Comes in assorted colours. 66x66 cm. Washable up to 30 째C 71 136 0208-2 Price for 3 Touch objects

Cloths, Juggling a Chiffon and Dancing Tissues Perfect for movement games, dancing, rhythm and juggling. Made from soft fly-

away crepe, 100% polyamide, as light as a feather. 140x140 cm, assorted colours. Washable at up to 30째 c. 71 136 0211

Cotton Cloth

Extra large sheet! Fold shapes

Throw up objects

Rhythm Cloths c Mega Great fun can be had with these extra large cloths in movement, dance and group games. Made from feather light chiffon (100% polyamide). 4 cloths in yellow, red, green, blue. 240x140 cm. 71 204 7209 Price for 4

Cloth d Cotton Examples of exercises: touch objects from under the cloth, fold into shapes, transport objects and throw them up in the air. 100% cotton. 80x80 cm.

71 127 6103 71 127 6116 71 127 6129 71 127 6132

Blue Yellow Green Red

Each Each Each Each

6 large flags!

With a smooth running swivel

262 t

Flags e Rhythm Broaden your gymnastics programme

Cooperation Band

with a colourful idea that will impress with it's elegance over large areas. The flags flap behind the arms and the whole body. Easy to get going with the rotating joint. They strengthen the feeling for rhythm, coordination and concentration as well as being enthralling to dancers and onlookers. 6 flags each in different colours. Cover 100% Nylon. 71 204 0309 50x50 cm Price for 6 71 204 0312 70x70 cm Price for 6

5 m long! Band f Cooperation This flexible endless band will help children learn to interact with each other in small groups. It will increase self-confidence as well as social skills. The different options for stretching and movement mean that this band can also be used for people

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

with neurological problems. Latex band, coated in a soft skin friendly material (75% polyacrylic, 25% polyester). Total length 5 m. Washable. Comes with exercise and games instructions. 71 204 7108 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Always Moving Tube Swing Set

Edge sewn so there are no sharp edges.

d b

a c

Swing a Tyre This swing is great you can really hang out. Advantages over standard hard board swings: new swinging feeling as side swinging is not normally possible. Soft material that allows users to wrap around it. Ideal for rehabilitation and therapy. Simply attach it with the belt to an existing ceiling hook or to an

Fixture b Belt For hanging Tube Swing onto an existing ceiling hook (distance 30 cm) tube. Suitable for tubes ø 60 cm and ø 95 cm. 71 174 0905

intermediate rope. The distance between the hook and the upper edge of the tube should be approx. 30 cm. Supports up to 80 kg. The set consists of: • special hose (ø 95 cm) • belt hanging mechanism 71 174 0989

Tube c Special This tube will keep them occupied: rolling, throwing, hopping. The special tube can be used as a swing. With the internally vulcanised valve there is no danger of injury. It can be pumped up with a compressor with a needle valve. 71 112 4213-1 ø 95 cm 71 112 4226-1 ø 165 cm

Hipp Hopp Jumping Cushion

d Caterpillar The caterpillar is ideal for use in groups. It can be moved forwards, backwards as well as in competitions with other groups among other things. Suitable for the schoolyard, pre-school, gymnasium and swimming pool. 100% polyester blue canvas 7 m long approx. 50 cm wide. The side is oversewn, therefore eliminating sharp edges. 71 135 5505 700 cm long, blue 71 135 5534 400 cm long, red

Trampoline e Baby Even the smallest of us love

Baby Trampoline 1-3 years of age

jumping! The baby trampoline is so elastic that even small, light children will experience the effect. Extra safe thanks to the rubber cover on the frame as well as the handles. Non-slip rubber bases, ø 70 cm. Supports up to 25 kg. 71 208 7809

Tramp g Soft Air filled trampoline. A safety trampoline without any frame or edges. Will support up to 100 kg and can be used in water. With a universal connection for easy pumping. Tip: a hand pump (71 110 0105) should be ordered at the same time. Mini ø 100 cm, height 26 cm 71 127 8705 Midi ø 150 cm, height 35 cm 71 127 8718 Maxi ø 200 cm, height 40 cm 71 127 8721

Suitable for use in water

Very springy!

95 cm

116 cm

Hopp Jumping Cushion f Hipp Jump… and then rest. The Hipp Hopp Jumping Cushion has strong padding and has no frame or edges. The special springs are completely integrated and create pressure when jumping and a

surface to relax on. Easy to care for as it is made from a very durable structural material (81% polyester, 19% polyacrylic). The bottom is made from non-slip gymnastics mat material for safety. Will support up to approx. 50 kg. 71 127 8907 95x65x25 cm 71 127 8910 116x76x25 cm

Soft Tramp

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 263

Swinging Movements Dancing Sacks

• with highly elastic seams • light permeable • 2 year guarantee

• 120 g and 500 g • easy to hold • cotton

Now also available: ultra violet dancing bag

Bags a Bean The natural filling in

the sacks is from dried beans. The soft 100% cotton is pleasant to touch and very durable. 120 g, approx. 15x10 cm 71 126 6708 Blue 71 126 6711 Yellow 71 126 6724 Green 71 126 6737 Red 500 g, approx. 20x15 cm 71 126 6809 Blue 71 126 6812 Yellow 71 126 6825 Green 71 126 6838 Red

Sack e Dancing This simple but effective item will

Bean Bags b Washable These durable bags are made from 100% cotton, which can be washed at up to 30 °C (with similar colours). The hygienic filling is made from fine balls of plastic granulate and encourages tactile stimulation. Ideal for gripping and throwing exercises. 120 g, approx. 15x10 cm 71 126 6304 Blue 71 126 6317 Yellow 71 126 6320 Green 71 126 6333 Red 500 g, approx. 20x15 cm 71 126 6405 Blue 71 126 6418 Yellow 71 126 6421 Green 71 126 6434 Red

Foot Baton c Beech For gymnastic foot exercises, 15 cm long, ø approx. 15 mm diameter. 71 126 7509 Price for 10

And there's more: Counting bean bags on page 284

Violet Dancing Bag d Ultra The neon yellow material is luminous and particularly so in ultra violet light. Highly elastic fabric otherwise as e in L and XL sizes. 91% polyamide, 9% elasthane. 71 129 0093-L Size L Each 71 129 0093-XL Size XL Each

encourage both young and old to join in and awakens an interest in experimenting and creativity, creating a totally new level self awareness. Dance and theatre groups will get new ideas because of the various creative methods of expression which will arise with every movement. Highly elastic, hygienic fabric with a practical Velcro fastener. Material: 91% polyamide, 9% elasthane. For children 6-13 years of age, size: large, length 140-160 cm. 71 129 0006-L Yellow 71 129 0019-L Blue 71 129 0022-L Red 71 129 0035-L Green 71 129 0123-L Black For children and adults, XL: length 160190 cm 71 129 0006-XL Yellow 71 129 0019-XL Blue 71 129 0022-XL Red 71 129 0035-XL Green 71 129 0123-XL Black

Tug O' War Rope f Round Made from hard fibre, approx. 20 mm thick, 16 m circumference. 71 126 1804

Polyamide Round Rope

Hard fibres

Very supple and stretchable material. Extremely tough. Can also be used in water, ø 20 mm, length 16 m. Not illustrated. 71 126 1905

Original Magic Cord

Ideal for group activities in schools and clubs. It is extremely flexible, elastic and versatile in use. Complete exercise instructions included. 71 126 0609 8 m Each 71 126 0612 10 m Each

g Soft fibres

Rope i Tug-o-War For sport and leisure

Cord h Gymnastics Many uses, covered rubber cable for gymnastics and games. Looped at ends. This cord will stretch to approx. 50% longer at maximum stretch, ø 6 mm. 71 125 8602-1 8 m Each 71 125 8615-1 10 m Each 71 125 8628-1 12 m Each

264 t

h And there's more: Revio® Fitness Bands page 163

This rope is made from optical hemp, comes with a centre mark and plastic end caps. All outdoor ropes have a high resistance to rotting. The soft fibre in the centre is easily gripped and supple. Sport-Thieme has the suitable rope for your expected use in our range. We will deliver in other lengths or

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

strengths if required. Hard fibre, for outdoor use 71 124 9200 L: 10 m, ø 20 mm 71 124 9213 L: 12 m, ø 25 mm 71 124 9226 L: 14 m, ø 28 mm 71 124 9239 L: 23 m, ø 30 mm Soft fibre, for indoor use 71 124 9604 L: 10 m, ø 20 mm 71 124 9617 L: 12 m, ø 25 mm 71 124 9620 L: 14 m, ø 28 mm 71 124 9633 L: 23 m, ø 30 mm

See product i video

www.sport-thieme.com Prices available on request. Please contact us.

… Massive Jumps Jumping Sacks

• strong canvas • washable

Sack b Hopping Great for fun and movement, whether

Barrel a Play This piece of equipment has many uses, it meets and develops a natural need children have to move around. Examples: you can roll yourself in the barrel, or let yourself be rolled by someone else, crawl through, lie on top, have a barrel rolling competition, have a barrel chasing competition. This barrel is made from weatherproof, impact proof and shockproof plastic material, 5 year durability guarantee. Height 80 cm, ø 56 cm, ø of opening 39 cm. Weight 5.7 kg. Will support up to 100 kg. 71 132 4206

used indoors or outdoors. Made from particularly strong canvass. The base is made of gymnastics mat material, 100% polyester, non-slip with handles made from strapping. Examples: hopping competitions by colour, hopping to targets, backwards, forwards. The games are never boring. Children learn to acquaint themselves with their bodies, coordinate and develop balance. For children, ø 30 cm, length 55 cm. 71 133 8427 Blue 71 133 8430 Yellow 71 133 8456 Red

• Parachutes page 260-261 • Balls and balloons page 26 • Crawling tunnel page 274

d • Stable base • very durable

Jumping Sack Set A smaller design for children ø 30 cm, length 55 cm. Consisting of 2 blue, and one each of yellow and red sacks. 71 133 8818

And there's more:

d “Hüpfsack” Jumping Bag

Sack c Jute Produced from natural and durable 100% jute sacking, hemmed with a patented poly seam and top stitched. ø 50, height 80 cm. Dyed red. Another fun addition to your children's event. 71 133 8805

A robust fun object for children of all ages. Strong 100% polyester canvas base. It is great fun and can be used by many people in obstacle races and sack races. Made from orange washable 100% cotton, with 100% polyester stable canvas base, ø 30 cm. 71 133 8401 approx. 60 cm high 71 133 8414 approx. 80 cm high

Jumping Sack e Double This sack is challenging and demands co-ordination and co-operation. ø 2x 50 cm. Length approx. 80 cm. 100% cotton. 71 132 3405

Summer Skis

New Skis with Hand h Summer Loops Skis f Grass With these 160 cm long wooden

Walker g Team A new variation of the grass or

boards, everyone can get around. You can “ski” alone or with other people. Either way it is great fun and co-operation and coordination are developed. The skis are tied on with 4 belt straps. Made from non-slip plywood varnished brown, 21 mm thick, 12 cm wide. 71 132 5603 Pair

summer skis. Team Walkers can be used in pairs or groups. Made from strong plastic for use inside and outside. The set consists of four pairs of skis: blue, yellow, green and red foot loops. LxWxH: approx. 40x12.5x2.5 cm. Ski bindings are clamps with a total length of 160 cm. 71 132 3519 Each

Using these skis the users hand-foot coordination will be put to the test. The loops can be adjusted for fixing in the feet, belt length 94cm. Made from extremely strong plywood. The skis are non-slip, coated in green, 10 cm wide and 21 mm thick. Length 80 cm, for 2 people 71 132 5616 Pair Length 160 cm, for 4 people 71 132 5632 Pair

ropes to support movement. The summer skis foster concentration and skillfulness, approx. 65 cm long. Suitable for inside and outside, can be used in obstacle courses, competitions, relay races and other games. 71 132 3506 Pair

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 265

Skis i Summer For 2 children with colourful control

On Thin Paths … Washable at 30°

Jumping from Stone to Stone

Set of 6 only

Tiles b Sport Safe for jumping on as these tiles

River Stones

“The world is on fire” so we have to jump from stone to stone. Children improve their co-ordination, learn to guess distances and lose fear of jumping over ditches and other objects. Non-slip with

rubber bases underneath. Set with 3 large and 3 small stones in 6 colours. Supports up to 100 kg. 71 134 3003 Set of 6

Sport Tiles Set Sport Tiles in Box with Flap 24 tiles in green, blue, yellow and red. With free box with flap. 71 199 7200 Each

have a special non-slip coating on the bottom. The top is a pleasant carpet that will impress with its colourfulness: green, blue, yellow and red tiles. When you turn the tiles over there is a non-slip sticking underlay. Can also be used as a sitting underlay. Side edgings prevent fraying, washable at 30°. 100% polyamide, 40x30 cm. 71 199 7255 Blue 71 199 7268 Red 71 199 7271 Green 71 199 7284 Yellow

Can be combined in any way

New Set of 12

Pad Balancing Path c Hilly The new exciting challenge for all balancing fans. The changing “hills” with two different surfaces will develop motor abilities and lead to a pleasant sensorytactile experience. The pieces with sloping

sides are non-slip and mix well together to make curving and straight paths. Comes in a practical storage bag. Suitable for children over three years of age. Total length 4.8 m. 71 217 0406 Each

Wall d Balancing Using the stacking system, build a strong mini wall that will encourage everyone to balance on it. You can create new sections all the time, up to 3.6 metres in length, with the curves. The set consists of 12 curves each 30x15x16 cm. 71 175 2205 12 part

f Tactile Discs The different surfaces will challenge the sense of touch in the hands and feet while at the same time these discs will develop oral skills when children attempt to describe them. The rubber used in their manufacture makes these discs very pleasant to feel. There is one large disc and one small disc for each of the five different structures. The large discs can be laid on the floor while the small discs can be held

266 t

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

by children in their hands. Very useful for basal sensory perception, memory games etc. Contains 5 of each disc ø 27 and 11 cm, eye cover and storage bag. Difficulty level: Easy 71 203 4300 12 part Difficulty level: Medium 71 203 4313 12 part

e f

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Lüne Combinato® Moving Building Site Lüne Combinato®

As a carousel with rollerboards

The Lüneburg Movement Building Set DBGM approved. You can construct children's games, building and moving courses yourself using Lüne Combinato. The elements are particularly soft and can be combined together without being permanently attached, in many different combinations. Examples: Bridges, gangplanks, swinging bridges, slides, steep slopes, seesaws, carousels, or for role-play vehicles, seats and huts Educational value: • children play and move without fixed structures • they gain a wide range of moving experiences • they can experiment and design creatively • they experience material and space and become aware of their own and other peoples restrictions and develop cooperative behaviour Sport-Thieme has supported the university of Lüneburg in Germany in its development of this educational material for games and movement for children. Many years experience gathered in the Braunschweig project work: “moving building site” and research in Lüneburg, was crucial to its development. Material: varnished spruce wood covered with fluted rubber, which has an anti-slip surface. Cubes, boards and rolls have a soft felt coating.

Lüne-Combinato® The Lüneburger Movement Building Set

Board with felt cover

Cube

h j Cylinder

c Half Moon

Carousel

Cuboid

i Half Cube

rubber to k Fluted prevent slipping

Balancing Swing

The individual pieces of Lüne Combinato ® combine very well with the Kombi Gymnastics Stool on page 191.

Supporting Triangle

Board with wooden blocks and ribbed rubber Ideal for hanging to wall bars

Board with wooden blocks and ribbed

g Plank

Lüne Combinato® Sets See table (left) for set components

Individual parts for Lüne-Combinato®

a b c d e f g h i j k l

Size in cm LxWxH: 40x19x13 cm Cuboid 40x19x16 cm Supporting Triangle 52x18x19 cm Half Moon ø 35 cm Carousel 200x27x3 cm Board with Blocks + ribbed Rubber 200x27x3 cm Board with felt Covering 200x10x6 cm Plank 50x50x50 cm Cube 50x50x25 cm Half Cube ø 40x50 cm Cylinder 25x25 cm Fluted rubber Plate to prevent slipping 200x10x30 cm Balancing Swing

Set Components Art. no. 71 128 0500 71 128 2001 71 128 0702 71 128 0803 71 128 2203 71 128 1008 71 128 2102 71 128 1109 71 128 1200 71 127 2000 71 128 1402 71 128 2157

Small Set 4x 2x 2x 1x 2x 2x

Large Set 4x 2x 2x 2x 2x

Swing and Turn Set 1x 1x 1x 1x

Small Set 71 128 1604

Large Set 71 128 1705

2x 2x 1x 8x

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Swing & Turning Set 71 128 1503

t 267

Movement Helps Psychomotor Functioning

ø 170 cm

“Free” swinging, rocking and turning

/ c Jumping Hanging Sheet

Now Even Better!

Hang from it, get tossed high in it, use it as a sheet to jump into in fire brigade games and lots more. When secured with a mat underneath it serves as an aid in gymnastics. Strong tear-resistant (100% poly-

• Ergonomic shape • Lined canvas Swing a Suspended DBGM approved. Swinging, rocking, turning and “free swinging” - great fun. The swing can also be set in motion using the hands on the ground. Games such as picking up bean bags, throwing at targets etc. while swinging are also possible. When used in therapy, even severely handicapped children can built up valuable experience using this swing. Strengthens the muscle tone. Can be used in all body positions such as lying face down, on the back or sitting up. The suspended swing can be hung One Point Hanging Mechanism separately on both sides in existing gymFor suspended swing. Strong hemp nastics rings or via a one point hanging rope with swivel, figure of 8 hook and system (please order separately). This hanging ring. Room heights 2.40 to 4 m. ensures that the swing is completely 71 129 2930 secure. Even nervous children will soon gain confidence when swinging in the susSee product pended swing. Height adjustable. Cover: a video brushed canvas (100% cotton). Supports up to 100 kg. 71 127 1922

ester) material with integrated continuous cord, with games instructions, ø 170 cm. 71 127 2505

And there's more: Mats from page 212

e See also: More rocking tops on page 292

www.sport-thieme.com

Saucer d Rocking An ideal instrument for kinesetic training. Children with limited movement will receive a boost using this saucer, more mobile children have different choices of sitting, standing, kneeling to encourage their vestibular system and many movement experiences. Also ideal for adults as it is very strong and stable. Non-slip varnish on the inside and enamelled exterior.

Cushion not included in the delivery. Approx. 40 cm deep. Supports up to 300 kg. 71 127 3801 ø 160 cm 71 127 3814 ø 180 cm

inner filling e Cushion 100% cotton covers 71 127 3856

Set

Maxi Swing The safe swing for big and small, outdoors and indoors. Children can play on it as if it was a swing boat or relax on it like a hammock. Up to four children will fit comfortably or one adult and two children. Ideal for uses in spas and therapy. Comes with impact protection, 4 ropes with rings. Cover: 100% polypropylene. Will support up to 200 kg. Ceiling height up to 2.8 m Multi-child swing 136x66 cm 71 196 0802 Therapie Plus swing 165x76 cm 71 196 0857

f g

268 t

Swing h Cluster A strong washable bag filled with Styrofoam beans. PU nylon cover (86.4% nylon, 13.6% polyurethane). You can climb

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

onto it and swing. Length 160 cm, plastic splice eyelet for hanging. Will support up to 90 kg. 71 174 1100 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Swinging … Relaxing Therapy c movivit® Hammock

240 cm

You will not just feel good on this hammock. It is also indispensible for therapy e.g. balance reactions, tonal regulation, working with gravity, activating the ability to sit up straight, stimulating the extraocular muscles etc. The weight is evenly distributed as it is made in one piece. Large enough to accommodate the patient and therapist. Also suitable for hanging directly on karabiner hooks. Particularly strong and pleasant design. The sheet is 100% cotton. Useable area: 220x140 cm, up to 120 kg 71 174 7805 Useable area: 260x160 cm, up to 160 kg 71 174 7818

175-235 cm

a Pyramido Hammock frame, climbing tower, stand for rope and net games, tent frame (covered with swing mat), skittle games… Countless uses in ergotherapy, physiotherapy, speech therapy, sensory integration, pre-schools, special schools and home use. Stable thanks to the pyramid shape and cross bars. Non-slip, folds down. Will support up to 120 kg, height 170-240 cm. Comes with rope for hanging. Hammock not included. 71 128 0106

And there's more: Night sky parachute on page 261

b Pyramido Set

Inlay Pad d Therapy To make your hammock into a swing. Essential for therapy. Soft padding, with cover made from strong leather quality material (87% polychloride, 13% polyester). A particularly strong product, exclusive to Sport-Thieme. Black. 60x60x6 cm. 71 174 0123

Wall Fixing Set Pyramido Set The complete set contains: • Pyramido a • Therapy Hammock 220x140 cm c • Therapy Pad 60x60x6 cm d 71 128 0180

To attach your hammock between two walls. Comes with two wall hooks, dowels, an adjustable 3 metre rope and Karabiner hooks. Supports up to 160 kg. 71 174 7717

Attachment e Ceiling Safe, strong ceiling attachment for hanging your hammock. Contains ceiling plates and a pair of 2 metre long ropes. 71 199 5015

XXL Hamf Traumschwinger® mock

c Hammock

The hanging-lying –seat made from pure natural cotton and wood with a natural finish. Using Traumschwinger you will experience the intense feelings of suspension and security. Pure relaxation! Pressure on the spine will be relieved in the soft and haptically stimulating cotton nest. Pressure is evenly distributed which leads to a noticeable relief for Hammock Frame the body and joints. People with high sensitivity or who are touch sensitive can also relax on this hammock. One adult can fully lie in it and there will still be room for at least one child. The height can be changed

Frame g Hammock Save yourself the complications of hanging attachments and use this modern stylish wooden frame for your hammock; indoors and outdoors. Hammock not included. Length: 320-390 cm, up to 100 kg 71 128 6003 Length: 330-420 cm, up to 160 kg 71 128 6016

quickly and simply for small and big people with the height adjustment that can be set at any level and the single handle. Comes with height adjustment for any level, a universal rope bag and rotating swivel. Will support bodyweights of up to 150 kg. 71 215 2253

i j

Seat h Hammock Pure relaxation. This large hammock with the pleasant cotton mat entices you to give it a try. Ideal for therapy and as the hammock is hung from one point, it can be swung in all directions. 100% cotton with holding cord. Total height 170 cm. Sitting surface 160 x 115 cm. Supports up to 130 kg. 71 174 7603

Fixing Set To attach your hammock to the ceiling. Comes with a 3 metre rope, ceiling hooks and Karabiner hooks. Supports up to 160 kg. 71 174 7704

100 cm

Platform Swing

Registered design. Ideal for developing the vestibular system. Extra soft padded, round platform swing without any sharp edges. The edge has additional foam padding with durable synthetic leather (87% polychloride, 13% polyester) cover, ø 100 cm, 8 cm thick. Includes 4x3.5 m height adjustable ropes and snap hooks. Suitable for hanging from 1, 2 or 4 points. Particularly stable, supports up to 120 kg. 71 174 5304

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Platform Swing • Extra large: ø 100 cm • particularly soft edge padding Surround j Tyre Rubber tyre with internal valve, no risk of danger. ø 95 cm. 71 112 4213-3

t 269

Ball Pools Set Special offer!

• Ball pool • Sound protection • 5,000 balls

b Impact Protection 10 cm thick!

Buy now !

Pool a Ball Great fun particularly for small children. Suitable for play therapy in preschools and kindergartens. Four foam sections with washable canvas and non-slip base. The Velcro fasteners that hold it together allow it to be extended. 225x225x50 cm. The interior is 175x175 cm. The pool comes without balls. With floor plate made from non slip gymnastics mat material. Cover 100% polyester. 71 127 7500

Impact Protection b Wall Giddy children cannot injure themselves anymore on hard walls. This makes your ball pool or playing area safer and indeed even more attractive. The mats are simply screwed onto the wall with flaps and eyelets.100% polyester cover. 2 mats: one mat (LxWxH): 235x150x10 cm and the other mat (LxWxH): 225x150x10 cm. 71 199 5204

a Ball Pool

Ball Pool Set The complete set consisting of: • 1 ball pool • 5,000 x ø 6 cm balls • wall impact protection 71 127 7584

EURO-MATIC Long Life Play and Therapy Balls For ball pools. Contains an assortment of red, blue, green, yellow and orange coloured balls. A cleaning net is also included (one net per 500 balls). Euromatic balls are flame retardant and free from toxins. They will withstand the roughest of treatment.

Pool Cleaner c Ball The ball cleaning machine for ball pools. Using vacuum, the balls are sucked into the machine and cleaned in seconds. This machine only takes less tan one hour to clean a pool filled with 10.000 balls. The ball pool cleaner comes with the suction apparatus and brushes. (Please choose between brushes for ø 6 cm or ø 7.5 cm balls) 71 177 0201

Therapy and d “Euro-Matic” Play Balls

Transparent Balls ø 7.5 cm

A special cleaning fluid for washing balls in the ball pool cleaner. Contains 2.5 litres and you will need approx. 100 ml for every 100 litres of water. 71 177 0227

ø 60 mm. Suitable for children and passive users. 500 balls in each bag. 11 bags (5,500 balls) are required to fill a cubic metre. 71 127 7601 Bag

(Not illustrated.) For re-ordering or special orders of glowing ball pools. This delivery contains 500 balls. Approximately 2,500 balls are required to fill one cubic metre. 71 177 0113 Bag

f children. Top quality for professional use, ideal play therapy for pre schools. Strong, robust velcro fastenings guarantee perfect joints between the three individual sections. 200x200x50 cm, wall thickness 20 cm each. With floor mat made from nonslip gymnastics mat material. 71 204 9801

270 t

ø 75 mm. These large balls are particularly suitable for adults and active users. This delivery contains 500 balls per bag. 5 bags (2,500 balls) are required to fill one cubic metre. 71 177 0100 Bag

Cleaning Fluid for the Ball Pool cleaner

Quadrant Ball Pool

f Great fun particularly for smaller

Therapy and e “Euro-Matic” Play Balls

Ball Pool Set The set consists of: • 1 quadrant ball pool • 3,000 play balls, ø 6 cm 71 204 9885

Ball Pool Set The set consists of: • “Massive” Ball Pool • 3,500 play balls ø 6 cm 71 127 8082

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

10 cm thick foam base Ball Pool g “Massive” Very strong, as manufactured in one piece. 10 cm thick foam floor. Cover made from non-rear fabric (100% PVC). 190x190x48 cm, inner 150x150 cm, wall thickness 20 cm. 71 127 8008 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Folding Mats • good shock absorption • can be stacked

• protects against the cold floor • useful as a gymnastic mat • non-slip

Mat Set d Mini Protects against cold floors, impacts or functions as a gymnastics floor covering for schools, pre-schools, playgroups or gymnastics clubs. The skin friendly mats are made from closed cell foam and are there-

fore impervious to water and dirt and will not absorb any bacteria. Non-slip and easily cleaned. 100x50 cm now 9 mm thick in red and blue. 71 119 5529 Price for 10

Mats a Folding There are so many uses for these mats in children's gymnastics, senior sports, physiotherapy etc. Cover made from strong polyester synthetic leather material (87% polychloride, 13% polyester), washable, flame retardant, saliva and urine proof. Holds shape well, light foam centre and excellent absorption. Can be used as a podium. The mats can also be used to make different shapes and can be joined together as a gym floor. 240x120x3.5 cm, folded 60x120x14 cm, 9.8 kg 71 121 3007 300x120x3.5 cm, folded 60x120x18 cm, 12.2 kg 71 121 3010 480x120x3.5 cm, folded 60x120x28 cm, 19.4 kg 71 121 3049

Folding Mat b Rainbow In fresh colours (blue, yellow, green and red) that liven up any room. 240x120x3.5 cm, folded 60x120x14 cm, 9.8 kg 71 121 3052 300x120x3.5 cm, folded 60x120x18 cm, 12.2 kg 71 121 3078

Covering Padding e Floor Comfortable relaxation area for preschools/care centres. When laid along beside each other they make a safe fun and action area. Strong foam core. Upper with strong blue jeans (100% cotton) material, under-

side red synthetic leather (87% polychloride, 13% polyester). 71 121 3209 132x54x8 cm 71 121 3212 160x54x8 cm

Available in four colours!

S” Children's f “Classic Gymnastics Mat Folding Mat c Strong An extra strong variation of the folding mat that is great for protecting against falls from low heights. When folded up it is a great podium or a

comfortable seat or place to lie down. 240x120x5 cm, folded 60x120x20 cm. Cover 87% polychloride, 13% polyester. 71 121 3065

With RG80 composite foam filling. The mat material is 100% polyester pitted Polygrip material, 2500 N tear resistance, 600 g/m√, in strong blue, yellow, green, and red colours. Mat material sewn all around with the same anti slip qualities as normal mat material. It is

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

possible to attach carrying handles or a Velcro band for an extra charge (see Catalogue page 216 or contact the international department at +49 (0) 5357 181 543 for details.) 150x100x4 cm. 71 119 2302 Blue 71 119 2315 Yellow 71 119 2328 Green 71 119 2331 Red

t 271

Building and Playing Blocks, Giants for Small People 30 cm

Small Set: contents 10

120 cm

With washable cover Large Building a Very Blocks

90 cm

Children will have great fun with these blocks: playing creatively or using them for role play. They are 30 cm in size and all blocks combine together in any manner. The core is made from CFC free foam, the cover is strong 100% polyester material in synthetic leather style. Particularly suitable for pre-schools, primary schools and children’s play areas. 71 127 9610 Set of 10 71 127 9607 Set of 21

150 cm

30 cm 150 cm

Large Set: contains 21

30 cm

60 cm

Set of 10 Set of 14

• extra secure • very stable Building Blocks Brick Labyrinth b Giant c Giant Children will easily use the blocks to Build, play, mess around and clear make buildings or fantasy shapes. Perfect for making a boundary around a playing area. Weather proof and therefore can be used both in gyms and swimming centres as well as outdoors. The blocks are extremely hardwearing but also so light that they float. Set consists of 10 blocks in blue, yellow and red. Made from environmentally friendly polyethylene foam. Size 48x16x8 cm. 71 134 3306 Set of 10

off. Children can build a labyrinth or obstacle course with the different giant blocks. These covered blocks are so stable that many children can play and crawl around at the one time. The foam cores and skin friendly 100% polyester synthetic cover make the blocks safe. The sizes of 60/45/30 cm will encourage imaginative constructions. Combines well with other large building blocks. 71 128 6205 Set of 14

f Set of 48

“Elephant skin” Play Blocks

d A set of play blocks, great fun for

New

• washable • very robust

even the smallest children. They can make simple structures with only a few blocks. Made from child friendly Plastazote®, floats, unbreakable. The set consists of 48 blocks, size 18x9x4.5 cm, in yellow, green, red and blue. 71 114 9308-1 Set of 48

Building Set e Mouse Build, throw, mess around ... With these fun, strong foam blocks with the soft skin friendly (100% polyester) synthetic cover you can do almost anything. Washable, 10 colourful cubes 15x15x15 cm, 5 cuboids 30x15x15 cm. 71 128 8100 Set of 15

272 t

Large Building Bricks f Volley These large colourful foam blocks will let children’s imagination run wild. The “elephant skin” will let them stack, throw and play without any problems.

The 9 building bricks have a unique edge length of 25 cm, making a variety of combinations possible. Washable. 71 204 6509 Set of 9

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Crawling, Creeping, Cuddling b

a Rainbow Gymnastics and play barrel, a product also used in therapy and rehabilitation. This brightly coloured barrel is good for playing creatively, balance training and coordination. It can be used for rolling inside of, crawling through, sitting on top of as well as many other things. Foam core covered by skin friendly material no danger of injury. Length 100 cm inner 酶 43 cm. 71 128 3408

Bag b Snuggle Fits every position and is very good for use in therapy. Durable polyester synthetic leather material, washable, flame retardant, saliva and urine proof. Filled with styrofoam balls. 100x80 cm. Cover 87% polychloride, 13% polyester. 71 127 6305

Very durable!

Walzer e Crawling Can be used for many balancing and

Sitting Bag c Giant Strong and comfortable sitting bag that will fit your body perfectly. The cover is made from resistant PES polyester (100% polyester), which is washable and flame resistant to B1 standards. Filled with polystyrene beading. Choice of direct filling or with an additional inlay. Standard colours: white, red, blue, yellow and green. Perfect for filling directly or with an additional inlay. Please state colour required when ordering. We can also deliver other colours or special colour combinations on request. This however would be a special order and is not covered by the standard right of return guarantee. For adults, 70x130 cm 71 171 3608 For children, 60x120 cm 71 171 3611

coordination exercises, e.g. quickly turning children in the walzer around in circles, doing somersaults, crawling forwards in the walzer on the knees, using as a target for balls, or diving through it etc. Covered in strong washable synthetic leather style canvas (87% polychloride, 13% polyester), with Velcro band. Can be used as a mat when folded out. Core made from 10 cm thick foam. Inner circumference approx. 280 cm, width 45 cm. 71 127 1805

For adults, 70x130 cm, including inlay 71 171 3640 For children, 60x120 cm, including inlay 71 171 3653 Replacement Cover for Giant Sitting Bag Made from resistant PES polyester (100% polyester), washable and flame retardant to B1 standards. Standard colours: white, red. blue, yellow and green. Please state colour required when ordering. 71 171 3624 For 70x130 cm sitting bags 71 171 3637 For 60x120 cm sitting bags

d Bouncy Very soft play and tumbling mats with elastic granulated filling. Simply flop down on it, roll, sit, lie down, relax. This mat can be cleaned with water and washing-up liquid and disinfected. 200x200x20 cm. 71 128 4603

Paradise f Snuggling Heavenly! The Styrofoam beads in the insert will fit around all body types. Ideal for support in therapy and developing deep sensitivity. The cover is quality synthetic

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 路 Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 路 www.sport-thieme.com

leather (87% polychloride, 13% polyester). 71 127 5908 150x150x30 cm 71 127 5911 200x200x30 cm

t 273

On “All Fours” Crawling Tunnel

Tunnel a Crawling A well loved sports item. The 100%

The Crawling Tunnel Crawling Tunnels a have no hard objects and therefore there is no risk of injury.

cotton crawling tunnel can be used indoors or outdoors. It is great fun at school events or in competitions. You can crawl through forwards or backwards and objects can also be brought along. The start and end of the tunnel has a facing for better grip. Length 400 cm, ø 65 cm. A game that will not cause injury and in which exercising can be made to be great fun. In uni orange. 71 135 6609

The Worm b Gus A worm with antennae, moving eyes and a tongue that sticks out! Crawl through it, climb on it, balance on it or sit on it. The choices are endless. Can be used outside and inside. The feet also serve as steps. Suitable for children over three years of age. Simple to assemble and dismantle without any tools. Different parts can be assembled together, straight or curving. LxWxH: 223x104x107 cm. 20 kg. 71 134 0280

Now! Order

Modules c Additional for “Gus the Worm” Four additional modultes to extend the length of the worm. Feet and attaching pieces included. LxWxH: 185x104x65 cm. 71 134 0293

Roll e Hamster /Climbing Arc

Crawling Tunnel d Spiral Made from canvas (100% nylon) and very strong. Can also be used outdoors. The in-built spiral means that you can extend the length of the tunnel to

3 m long. ø 60 cm. The tunnel can be tensioned using eyelets. Can be folded down to save space when transporting and storing. 71 135 6612

Just like in a hamster roll, children will spin around having great fun. Made up of a half and quarter circle, this product will develop the child's motor abilities through climbing, balancing and rocking. ø 145 cm, width 51 cm, suitable for children over 3 years of age. Complete circle. 71 207 4418

Climbing paths, arches and seesaws in one! Artist's Wheels and Artist's Capsules

New

A giant space wonder made from special foam. A whole new feeling in space even for the small ones. These products will encourage three to eight year olds to try fun and artistic exercises in the play room, play group or in gymnastics halls. Can also be used outdoors on soft ground (e.g. lawns). Cover made from stable canvas (100% polyester). Supports up to approx. 50 kg. ø 150 cm.

New Octopus f Crawling A great idea for indoors and outdoors. Any number of tunnels can be combined together. A game that develops creativity e.g. make an octopus by using the inner velcro fastenings, which are supplied. The frame can be folded into indi-

274 t

Wheel /Hamster g Artist's Wheel vidual parts making the octopus easy to transport and store. The cover is made from 100% nylon. Tunnel ø approx. 50 cm, octopus ø approx. 2.7 cm. Warning: Do not use on stone floors. 71 180 7208

71 214 4203

Capsule h Artist’s Turn, bend, twist, rotate and all this in three dimensions! A great moving product for all the senses. 71 214 9309

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Sport-Thieme Games Obstacle Course The Construction System from Sport-Thieme

Bar and Hoop Holder

The highly challenging Sport-Thieme play and gymnastic material promotes the development of motor functions and rhythmic abilities. Children learn through play to discover, recognise and respond to signals and impulses in their surroundings. Sport-Thieme games and gymnastic material can be used individually or by groups. It is particularly suitable for building play areas and practise stretches, laying out training and playing courses and developing an obstacle course, helps with balance, motor function and perception training. Suitable for all ages.

Hoops

a Bars

Base Plate

Basic Set

c Individual Parts To build up individual parts, upgrade or develop your own ideas.

d Half Hoops

Bar

Plastic, unbreakable, 1 m, ø 25 mm in fashionable colours. 71 126 4500-1 Blue 71 126 4513-1 Yellow 71 126 4526-1 Green 71 126 4555-1 Red

Bar and Hoop Holder

A universal joint that can turn against itself. As a result, you can assemble the plastic bars and hoops from the Kombi obstacles range in an infinite number of ways. 71 132 9605

Plates c Base The safe, extra flat stand for all Sport-Thieme gymnastics bars. Made from 700 g non-slip rubber, ø approx. 23 cm. 71 135 6104

Hoops f Gymnastics Made from plastic in modern fashionable colours. Easy to grip, welded joints.

Sizes approx. blue yellow green red

e Gymnastics Blocks Half Hoops

The system with which you can build a great game and obstacle course. Many variations are possible for playing and movement: climbing over and crawling under them, sliding through on the stomach or back, as an obstacle in the relay race, outdoors or indoors. Gymnastics equipment such as the bench, vaulting boxes and mats can be integrated when practising and playing. Also suitable for ball games. Can be adjusted to any height up to 1 metre. The set consists of: • 8 base plates, • 12 bars, • 1 half hoop, • 1x 50 cm ø gymnastics hoop, • 12 bar and hoop holders. 71 135 5433

Many different uses in games and movement

d Plastic. Same quality and design as

gymnastic hoops however in round shape like gymnastic bar. There are lots of ways they can be combined with the Kombi Obstacles. ø approx. 75 cm, yellow. 71 186 5921 Each

Gymnastics Blocks

When combined with gymnastics bars and hoops these blocks have innumerable combinations for sport and games. The blocks are made from solid wood with rounded edges and hygienically clear varnished. LxWxH: 30x15x10 cm. 71 127 6901-1 Each

Can also be used in water. Available colours: red, blue, yellow and green

ø inside 50 cm

ø inside 60 cm

71 135 5707-0 71 135 5710-0 71 135 5723-0 71 135 5736-0

71 135 5707-1 71 135 5710-1 71 135 5723-1 71 135 5736-1

ø inside 70 cm ø inside 80 cm

71 125 8006-0 71 125 8019-0 71 125 8022-0 71 125 8035-0

71 125 8006-1 71 125 8019-1 71 125 8022-1 71 125 8035-1

Standard Set With hoops and bars. This set gives you the opportunity to make use of the wide variety of products and to do so inexpensively. • 12 hoops (3 hoops ø 50-80 cm) • 12 bars of assorted colours • 8 base plates • 20 bar and hoop holders 71 135 5417

Exclusive Set With this set you get all the possible variations from planning to building. All parts of the set and all combinations are here. • 12 hoops (3 hoops x ø 50 to 80 cm) • 12 half hoops • 24 gymnastics bars • 24 base plates • 24 bar and hoop holders 71 186 6009

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

And there's more: Parachutes on page 260-261

t 275

Moving Vehicles: Fast Moving and Balancing pivit Board

Skate Bike Bike a Skate You move like on a kick

Rola-Bola

board by shifting your weight and pedal as if you were riding a bike. You will soon have reached a good speed and breaking is no problem, just back pedal. When turning corners you will feel the “lean”, a great feeling. The Skate bike is easy to use and is good training for unicycling. The seat can be adjusted to any level. Will support up to approx. 80 kg 71 196 8428-1

The professional board

Board b Pivit Using Pivit Board, you not only develop a sense of balance but also can learn all snow board and wake board tricks much faster. By tipping the weight forwards or backwards, to the right or to the left, you will rock and turn fast in a new direction. The board is made from high quality fibreglass. All-round roller board for every kind of surface inside or out. 79x22x17 cm. 71 200 2806

Rola-Bola Balance Board c Pedalo® Just a light see-saw movement and you must be fast and skilful to keep control. The board develops your coordination and increases your fitness. Screwing off supports (please order at the same time). Coated ply-wood plate 60x35 cm, rubber buffers and ø 12 cm solid timber roll. Supports up to 100 kg. 71 134 7917

Kick Boards and Scooters Flex Scooter d Micro The new generation of scooters

Puky Scooter with Balloon Tyres

from micro®. With large flexible fibre glass “Flex” wooden deck combined with large 145 mm wheels will get there comfortably and are not hard on the back. Standing area 33x13 cm. Height adjustable handlebars up to 96 cm. Will support up to 100 kg. 71 188 4933

Kickboard

e Kickboard The original

Micro Flex Scooter 145 mm

Pedo® Bike

Micro, making moving great fun. The steering is controlled using the knob to avoid obstacles and create an elegant slalom course. You can easily put an end to excessive speeding using the rear brakes. The steering bar folds back with very little effort, meaning you can take the Kickboard anywhere with you. Aluminium standing board 44x13 cm. The knob is height adjustable up to 101 cm. Takes up to 100 kg. 71 197 9305

Puky Scooter with Balloon Tyres f Scooting fun for children over four years of age. The wheels and steering have ball bearings, safety handlebars, foot and rim brakes, a bell, a non-slip standing board and a stand. Length: 118 cm, adjustable handlebars 78-90 cm. 71 210 0500

Bike® g Pedo Particularly safe thanks to the solid

wheel. Trains balance, coordination, a feeling for space and motor responses. Using this bike, children will reach the same pushing speeds as adults. This makes moving up to a bicycle easier. Stabilisers are not necessary anymore. The sitting height can be fixed at any level from 30-47 cm and the frame can be adjusted to 3 different heights. Suitable for 2-6 year olds. 12” air filled tyres. 71 197 6205

Pedo-Bike® h “Mini” The bike with the lowest sitting height for children over 11/2 years of age or for smaller children. They learn moving, running and balance in a fun way. The bike grows with them as the height can be adjusted from 25-33 cm. Larger wheels can also be added later and then it becomes a normal push bike. Great fun for the little ones. 71 208 8206

Accessories for Rim Brakes Highly recommended once your child has basic competence on the Pedo Bike. 71 211 0211

g+ h j

New

j Soft Saddle

Super comfortable padding for • sealed wheel disc the Pedo Bike. • can be adjusted 71 211 0208 in many ways Stand

k To park the Pedo Bike® safely. 71 211 0224

276 t

Handlebar Basket To park the Pedo Bike safely. l 71 211 0237

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Original Viking Vehicles from Winther Viking Quality Vehicles Children's vehicles awaken fantasy and children develop in a completely new and creative way when they play. Winther children's vehicles have a part to play here. A characteristic of these vehicles is durability, stability, technical finesse and high product safety. • Top Danish quality • Maximum safety • 5 year durability guarantee on the frame and front forks when used appropriately • Shockproof powder coating • Complete replacement part service • Complies with all current safety standards • rubber sockets stop children trapping their fingers • The ball bearings in the front wheel make pedalling easier • Tow-hitch • Flat standing platform with non-slip coating for a stable stand • Nylon non-slip and shockproof pedals as standard • Solid continuous shaft

Bike a High A funny vehicle that develops bal-

Fun Racer® b Viking A speedy vehicle and coordination

Taxi Tricycle c Viking For children from 4-8 years of age.

ance and coordination. It encourages children to take on new challenges. Air filled front wheel and compact rubber rear wheel. Suitable for all age groups (5-12 years) because of the long seat. 101 cm long, 44 cm wide, 91 cm high, 9 kg. 71 191 9703

trainer in one! The large wheels have bearings and air filled tyres and therefore are shock absorbing and can be used on uneven surfaces. Fun Racer is an exciting fast and safe vehicle for children from 4-12 years of age. LxWxH: 98x68x62 cm. 71 191 0302

Well loved and functions well. Especially useful for role-play. Because of the safety bar to hold on to, it is also suitable for mildly handicapped children. Seat height 38 cm, handlebar height 62 cm, total length 98 cm, weight 16 kg. 71 181 9104

New Easy Rider! Double Taxi Tricycle e Viking For children who would like to carry Viking Sulky Cart

d Who would love to relax? It is great fun to be a passenger. Non-slip standing board and the extra supporting wheel make Sulki safe and prevent tipping over. 136x57 cm, sitting height 34 cm. 71 182 5901

two more children. This is the start of a fantasy journey. Seat height 38 cm, handlebar height 62 cm, for three children from 4-8 years of age. It is also suitable for adults sitting on the back bench or pedalling in front. 71 181 8505

Scooter f Viking Stable welded steel tubing frame. Non-slip corrugated metal stand. Plastic wheels with ball bearings. For 4-5 year olds, handlebar height 76 cm, without brakes. 71 181 8404 Over 6 years old, handlebar height 86 cm, with brakes. 71 181 8417

k Swingcart® The original from Viking.

“Ben h Viking Hur” Tricycle Tricycle with room for additional children between the ages of 4 and 8 years. Standing passengers can hold on to the security bar. With tow-hitch, seat height 38 cm, handlebar height 61 cm, total length 100 cm, weight 13 kg. 71 181 9205

Hur” Trailer i “Ben Makes every Viking tricycle into an interesting and attractive vehicle with many creative uses. Easy to attach and detach on/off all Viking tricycles and taxi tricycles. LxW: 84x58 cm. 71 181 9218

Viking Tricycle j Large An attractive variation on the tricycle. The adjustable seat suits children from 4-10 years of age. Seat height 26 cm, handlebar height 70 cm, total length 98 cm, weight 12 kg. 71 181 9003

An exciting toy to develop motor functions and balance. The child learns to co-ordinate movement in a completely different manner to traditional vehicles. The Swingcart® can be turned in all directions and can rotate on the spot. Driven by hand pedals on the wheels. 71 181 9407 For 3-8 year olds 71 181 9410 For 6-12 year olds

Easy Rider g Viking The low sitting height and Chopper handlebars guarantee great fun - just like a motorbike! With the large front wheel, which has a bottom bracket, you will move along easily and fast. A favourite unusual vehicle for children between three and six years of age in many pre-schools. Length: 82 cm. 71 182 6005

•Solid handles • Waterproof rubber saddle • compact, modern wheels with rubber tyres • Solid, oval tubing ensures strength • Well thought through design without sharp edges

Effective rust protection for long lifespan from zinc phosphate powder coating

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 277

A Fleet of Leisure Hoppers Hopping and Jumping

New Moonhopper „Zoom“ Pogo Stick Zoingo Boingo Pogo Stick b “Zoom” This fitness and sport item is great Bungee Jumper

Jumper a Bungee Manufactured from PE foam, the Bungee Jumper is the softest and safest jumping device. It is non-slip and ideal for both outdoors and indoors. PE foam block, non-slip underneath with rubber loops and handle. For users over 5 years of age. 71 132 8253

for leisure use. When children play with Power Pogo for fun, it will lead them on to regular participation in sport. Power Pogo develops coordination, fitness and balance. It has a strong steel casing with integrated elastomer springs, 150 mm spring deflexion. Replaceable rubber base. Suitable for children from 6-16 years and up to 50 kg. 71 132 8208

“Zoom Junior” Pogo Stick Jumping bar made from steel, 1 m long, takes up to 30 kg body weight. 71 132 8240

Hopper d Moon For both in inside and outside. Can Boingo c Zoingo Action fun for high fliers! Zoingo Boingo facilitates the best air jumps and freestyle moves. The rubber ball, standing board and the stretching band with foam handles ensure a safe hold and give the acrobats the best control when learning to “fly”. Suitable for dry, solid underground and lawns. Only use with suitable clothing, head protection and good shoes. Will support up to 65 kg. For children over 8 years of age. Assorted colours. 71 181 7300

be used at festivals, birthday parties, in the schoolyard and for leisure purposes. Can also be used for competitive jumping or on an obstacle course. Fitness, skill, a sense of balance and stronger muscles are the benefits from this play and sports item. With needle valve. 71 132 6202

Adult Moonhopper A particularly strong and safe disc, very robust, takes up to 110 kg. Training aid for the German Snowboard National Team. 71 132 6215

Vehicles

New

Monster Trike GT Kettcar f Street e Safari A great tricycle with the “Chopper” Great fun for children from 5-10 years of age. The soft comfortable seat with wide tyres and hand brakes guarantee safety. The attractive red design will awaken dreams of Formula 1 racing. Strong steel tubing frame with scratchproof polyester coating. Quick to assemble. LxW: 115x60-70 cm. 71 136 5203

278 t

feeling. The strong trike is more demanding on motor skills than standard tricycles. Adjustable ergonomic shell seat. Pneumatic front wheel, ø 40 cm, rear wheels solid rubber. Free wheel and hand brakes. LxWxH: 102x73x55 cm. Suitable for children over 6 years of age and will support up to 60 kg. 71 182 9802

Balance Bike g Bazzic Experience a new feeling in motion: you steer with your body! This is the trike for sport and fun. With back pedalling brakes. Strong powder coated frame and super slick tyres. If you wish to store the bike simply place it vertically. Basic design for 8-15 year olds. The seat can be adjusted at three levels. Length 135 cm. 71 208 7102

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Easy Games Tschouk Ball!

160 cm

game for schools, leisure and competition. • Suitable for young and old, • mixed teams (skill / sex) • No bodily contact- you can't hinder the opposition • No personal attacks • Play changes hands quickly • Can also be used for variety in Olympic handball training • Aim: to throw the ball at the net in such a way that the opposing team does not catch the returning ball within the playing field. Tschouk Ball frames, 105 x105 cm. 71 115 9309 Each

110 cm

Ball a Tchouk Tschouk Ball is a new team Hoops c Hula The time honoured game for indoors

New Goal “Gym” b Mini Made from strong plastic tubes, stackable, ideal for private use as well as in pre-schools, schools and as a training goal on the football field. Includes net 160x110 cm. 71 197 4153 Each

and outdoors, whether playing alone or with friends. Children are always finding new tricks with this classical 20 mm thick toy. Made from plastic, fluted, colour depends on our stocks: yellow, blue or pink. ø 77 cm, 200 g. 71 133 8906 Each

Footballs page 4-7

With balls inside to make a great sound.

Hoop, The Original e Hula WHAM-O - the original product that

New

came from the USA in 1958. High quality durable hula hoop with internal balls that create a sound. Assorted colours. Suitable for children over 5 years of age. 71 133 8980 ø 80 cm, 180 g Each 71 133 8993 ø 90 cm, 200 g Each

Sports” Beach Set d “Fun A three piece set with powder coated steel posts, ø 38 mm. With oiled, waterproof wooden legs. Also included in order: • net, 8.5 m long, mesh width 4 cm, including net edging and tensioning rope • tensioning belt with ratchet brace • 4 galvanised ground anchors • court markings for 8x16 m • carrying and storage bag Adjustable playing heights: 2.43 m Beachvolleyball men 2.24 m Beachvolleyball ladies 2.10 m Tam beach 1.70 m Beach tennis 1.55 m Beach badminton 71 197 2489

As article no. , but ø 60 cm. Specially suitable for smaller people and children. Can also be used a therapy aid for adipose children. 71 133 8919 Each

New

And there's more:

New

Hula Hoops

Basketball Set f Junior The economical set for private use.

d Adjustable for: Beach Volleyball Tam Beach Beach Tennis Beach Badminton

Telescopic square tubing. The board is made of plastic with a weatherproof nylon net. Base (93x61x17 cm), can be filled with water or sand approx. 65 kg, board 91x61x3 cm. Height adjustable from 210260 cm (floor ring), max. height: 308 cm (floor upper edge board), 17 kg. 71 134 1225-1

And there's more: Basketballs page 10-11

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 279

Leisure Games, Messing About Makes Them Clever New

Gymnastics Turtle Suitable for children over 3years

Gymnastic c The Turtle

And there's more: Mats page 212

Wrestler a Sumo Fantastic and fat … great fun for breaking down aggression. Players can sweat, tumble, wrestle or fight to break down their aggression. 2 padded suits made from strong 100% polyester

canvas, shaped like a Sumo wrestler. Head protection and gloves are included. Length approx. 140 cm, circumference approx. 300 cm, 13.5 kg. We recommend using mats as an underlay (not included in the order). 71 132 8947 Pair

4 in Line

An exercise aid in the shape of a turtle for balancing. Made from strong shockproof plastic, Ideal for psychomotor practise among children in pre-schools and primary schools. By shifting one's balance to the left or to the right, the turtle starts to move. Exercises can be undertaken from all positions: standing, crouching, sitting or lying. The fact that it also takes heavy weights (up to a max. of 150 kg) means the turtle can also be used in therapy. Play, learn, and practise. H: 22 cm. 71 134 2909-1

Tube b Howling Funny howling sounds..a real attraction at fun events.. When turned through the air, a howling noise is created. The speed of movement changes the tone. Also useful as a toy “telephone line”. Plastic tube 87 cm long, ø 3.5 cm, in different colours. 71 127 8301

New

Battleships

Battle Ships -Sea Attack f The classic strategy game in an extra

save as much space as possible, the plates and playing board fold together for storage. With two practical stools. Assembled size LxWxH: 84x100x116 cm, 21 kg. 71 134 0310

large size. Ideal for children over three years of age. As well as indoors this game can also be played out in the garden. In order to

4 in Line d Mega Great family fun for the beach, park, playground or garden as well as indoors. This is the classic strategy and mental game for two or more players. The discs are stored by colour on the sides. It is simple to erect and does not need much space. With brilliant colours that are not affected by sunlight or changes in temperature. LxWxH: 122x57x117 cm, 16 kg. 71 134 0222

280 t

e The smaller version

Film Slide • optimal surface • 6 m long, 1.10 m wide • tear-resistant canvas

4 in Line Game e Super The smaller version of Mega 4 in

Film Slide g This film allows you to have great fun

Line. Faster and simpler to assemble. LxWxH: 108x57x117 cm, 7 kg. 71 134 0235

diving on the grass. This slide really comes into its own when it is warm outside. Children plunge with great gusto onto the long

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

water carpet. The slide is made from tearresistant foil and has a sprinkler connection. 6 m long and 1.10 m wide. Connection 1/2”. 71 112 5304-1 Each Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Leisure Games: Don't be Bored Sport Stacking a Flash Cups Set The complete set for schools, clubs and for competitions. The set consists of: • 240 beakers (= 20 sets) • 2 Flash Pads • 2 Timers • 1 DVD with instructions

d Sports bag and DVD with instructions included. b Sportstacks Flash Cups

71 207 5381

Set

The easy to stack beakers mean you will learn the stacking craze in no time. You can stack, re-arrange, pile them up in a tower, stick them into one another, and even in different patterns as quick as a flash. 12 blue beakers in a stylish sports bag. Comes with instructions on a DVD. 71 207 5310 Pack

Pad c Flash The perfect underlay for professional stacking. This special surface structure and non-slip base will absorb sounds and enable quick setting up and removal of the pyramids of beakers. 80 x 33 cm. 71 207 5903

d Timer When you release the starter the time starts and will stop immediately it is touched again. 71 207 5916

Sport Stacking • improves hand-eye coordination • activates both sides of the brain • leads to quicker reaction times • develops ambidexterity Stacking is the perfect addition to other sport types (e.g. basketball, football, tennis etc.) as coordianation, concentration and speed are all required. It helps with music (e.g. piano, guitar, flute) and can be a great change from mundane teaching.

Dice Stacking

f WeyKick® Model 7500

The new skilful game! Use the throwing cup to hold some dice. Then tip the cup over on a table. You have to try to stack the dice like a tower under the cup without your hands touching them. The more dice you use the harder it gets. “Mr. Dice” stacking sets contain specially designed cups and high quality casino dice made from acrylic glass.

New

An exciting way to play football. The basic principle is both ingenious and simple: a magnet is moved under the playing field to move the playing figures across the playing field. The object of the game is to skilfully kick the ball in the opponent's goal. The rules do not have to be explained in detail as the game will unfold for itself. WeyKick Model 7400 for 2-4 players with 4 magnetic playing figures, blue and red, 4 playing balls on a table top model. 72x46x15 cm. 71 132 7928

Model 7700 g Weykick® For 2-6 players with 6 magnetic figures: 3 blue and red and 4 playing balls. Table top model 82x88x22 cm. 71 132 7931

g Mr. Dice Set e Basic Dice Stacking Basic Package with 4 dice and beakers 71 208 0202

Each

j h

New

on Ice Model 8500 i WeyKick® For 2-4 players, bright wooden design.

Soft Dominos

Dominos made from soft PU material and are very strong. There is no risk of injury, safe fun. 28 dominos 15x7.5x2 cm. Suitable for indoor and outdoor use. 71 132 5847

And there's more: Replacement Mini Koosh balls and bean bags on page 285

WeyKick® on Ice

An exciting way to play ice hockey! Playing area 46x71 cm including basic equipment: 2 pairs of ice hockey figures: 2 blue and There is an ice hockey playing surface specially designed for this version. Naturally red and 4 pucks and one flask of powder. the ice hockey players can be used on the 71 132 7944 WeyKick® football field and the footballers WeyKick® on Ice Model 8700 on the ice hockey rink. This game has an For 2-6 players, bright wooden design. ingenious magnetic turning system which allows additional turns while running. The Playing area 82x88x22 cm including basic puck flies along the “ice” surface just like equipment: 6 ice hockey figures: 3 blue and red and 4 pucks and one flask of powder. it is on a pocket of air. 71 132 7957

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

t 281

Leisure Games, Classics not only for Kids! Bossel Game d Indoor Consisting of 6 bossel (curling) sticks and 1 jack. 71 136 8404

New

Bavarian Ice Curling Stick (Bossel stick) complete 71 138 6413 Green 71 138 6439 White Brush Disc Including screw holes for fixing. 71 138 6426

New

Indoor Bavarian Ice Curling (Bossel)

Hurdle a Child's Made from PE foam. As it is so soft, this hurdle will remove children's fear of hurting themselves. Height adjustable at 19, 38 and 50 cm. Width 70 cm. Can also be used as an obstacle on an obstacle or “steeplechase” course. Suitable for both indoors and outdoors. 71 123 4666-1

Hurdle Set b Children's For children and youths. PE foam bases for holding the plastic tubes. There is no danger of injury and it is easy to assemble. The set consists of 4 hurdles, height 29, 32, 38 and 42cm, width 78cm. Can also be used on an obstacle course or for a steeplechase race. 71 123 4679

Two versions, for outdoors and and indoors

Basketball c Floor Floor basketball requires skill and

62 cm

concentration. One or more players aim at the middle of the basket. Your achievements can be quickly seen if the distances from the basket are varied. Also suitable as a group game. With ball. 71 112 7414 Complete

e Bavarian Ice Curling g Summer You can play this well known game at any time of the year. It is great fun for children, adults, senior citizens and handicapped people. It can be played in gymnastics halls, in corridors or also in large rooms - anywhere there are shiny floor surfaces such as hall floors or parquet floors. The felt tipped bottom of the summer ice sticks give them the perfect surface for sliding across the floor. The outdoor version has a high quality plastic covering. The summer ice sticks are wooden, have a black or white rubber rim that acts as an impact protector, ø 22 cm, 0.85 kg. The game consists of: • 2 summer ice sticks with white rubber rims • 2 summer ice sticks with black rubber rims • 1 block 71 128 8719 For indoors Set 71 128 8823 For outdoors Set

Throwing e Horse-Shoe This is a game for small cowboys! Who can catch the target best? The horseshoes are thrown like a lasso around the bar. The winner is the one who encircles the peg in the middle and has thrown the least number of hoops. Game consists of 4 rubber horseshoes, a wooden stick for outside use and rubber base plate for inside use. 71 132 5209

282 t

Suitable for outdoors and indoors

Twist h Rubber A game for both outdoors and

Game f Rings Made from a clear varnished wooden cross with 5 coloured pegs and 4 plastic throwing rings in an attractive box. 43x43x22 cm. 71 133 9202

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

indoors. For lots of interesting hopping and jumping games. Length 5 m. Extremely stretchable band, up to 10 m. 71 191 8700 Price for 6 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

Boccia, Croquet, Bowling, Play the Balls Boccia Game

Game a Boccia With 8x ø 80 mm coloured plastic balls, each 215 g. The balls are filled with water. Jack and measuring tape, included in carrying box. 71 133 7411

c Croquet The grass game that encourages b Boccia Is experiencing great popularity and can be played anywhere: in the garden, on the beach, in the park etc. Players will always manage a game with others. 8 wooden balls, ø 80 mm, in 4 colours with jack in a presentation box. 71 133 7408

b Boccia e Indoor Boccia is played in many different places such as sports clubs, clubs for senior citizens, schools, care homes etc. Boccia is also played at top levels by sports people meeting up at regional championships, world championships and the Paralympics/Special Olympic Games. Boccia balls von Handi Life Sport will meet the highest quality demands and are therefore certified as suitable for international competitions. The Handi Life Boccia Game contains: 13 medium strength leather balls (6 red, 6 blue balls and a white “jack”) in a strong carrying bag. The very durable leather balls are hand sewn and filled with a stable special granulate. The Boccia ball weighs 275 g. ø 8.2 cm. The leather balls can be used outdoors, on tiles, asphalt and shingle. 71 133 7440

movement in the fresh air and is played with great gusto by both young and old. Skill is developed in handling the ball and the mallet. Croquet is ideal for special events in your club or school. Sack with 4x 80 cm long mallets and accessories. 71 133 7600

d Wooden Croquet Game, with Trolley, 4 mallets and equipment. Great game for enjoying fresh air. Length 103 cm. 71 133 0508

New e

f Bowling Game f Foam Consisting of 10 PE foam skittles, 30 cm high. The ball is foam, ø 21 cm with

different gripping holes. Delivery includes carrying bag. 71 179 3619

g Boccia g Indoor Unheard of up to 10 years ago, boccia is now also played indoors quite a lot. 6 red, 6 blue and 1 white balls, made of synthetic leather with plastic granulate filling in a storage bag. Ball ø approx. 8 cm, 270 g. This game can also be played outdoors. 71 133 7424

Game h Bowling Enjoy the fun and excitement of bowling. With 10 light shockproof clubs, 200g when unfilled, 37.5 cm high, can be filled, as well as a 2250 g rubber ball and a positioning frame. 71 179 3606

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

Ball i Bowling Replacement/additional ball for bowling game 71 179 3606. 71 180 6205

t 283

Learning Toys Dice Top Rated

e b

www.sport-thieme.com

d Dice This is great fun: The large highly

Elé® Foam Dice c Volley® With “elephant skin”, a very robust

Foam Dice a Giant Edge length 50 cm. 71 135 8621

Each

Dice, large b Foam Also suitable for use as a children's seat. Edge length 30 cm. 71 135 8618

Each

covering, washable and can be disinfected. For schools, pre-schools, rehabilitation etc., closed celled very strong PU cover. Colour depends on stocks. 71 135 6234 16x16 cm 71 135 6205 30x30 cm 71 135 6218 40x40 cm 71 135 6221 50x50 cm

elastic cube is not played on the table but on the floor. They are great for pre-schools, kindergartens, practise rooms etc. and can be enjoyed by children in many ways. They hold their colour and shape well. Dot numbers 1-6 are etched out. Red, blue, green, edge length 16 cm. 71 135 8605 Price for 3

Dice e 6ThisColour dice uses colours instead of numbers to develop recognition. You will find lots of new ways of play with this dice. Edge lengths: 16 cm. 71 199 4403 Price for 3

Beanies

f Move Cubes

Allocate movement commands in an easy fun way using this creative six coloured cube. Think up tasks, put the cards in clear plastic bags and off you go! Also suitable for other games and ideas. Mix motor ability and communication games with concentration and memory

games. Senior citizens like to use it for putting photos into. Soft foam with a hygienic vinyl cover. 16x16x16 cm. 71 212 3309 Pack of 3

Beanies g Number Set with numbers from 1-20. Each

Beanies h Alphabet A 26 letter range with every letter in

mini-bag has a number sewn on onto one side and written number (in German) on the rear. Uneven numbers are red and even numbers are blue. Ideal for stacking numbers, number and counting games, counting from 1-20. Comes in a practical storage bag. Size per mini-bag: 7x7 cm. 70% polyester; 30% cotton. 71 170 4802

the alphabet sewn on with letters in upper and lower case, one on the front the other on the back. Vowels are in red and consonants are in blue. A lovely set for learning the alphabet and for letter games at home, in pre-schools or in schools. Comes in a practical storage bag. Size per mini-bag 7x7 cm. 70% polyester; 30% cotton. 71 170 4815

New k

Cones i Marking With numbers and letters. Made from break and shock proof polyethylene. The cones have many applications in psychomotor, sport and learning games. Cones: 14x14x23 cm. 71 191 9400 11 cones, numbers 0-10 Set 71 191 9413 26 cones, letters A-Z Set

284 t

j of 15 Bags, j Set with Numbers Ideal for counting. Made from 100% cotton LxW: 15x15 cm, 105 g. Each bag is filled with hygienic plastic granulate. Colours: Blue, yellow, red, green. 71 134 3205 Set of 12

Everything for Schools and Club Sports, Fitness and Therapy!

Target Mat k Darts Darts played slightly differently: throw the five small bean bags at the target. Simply lay the (100% polyester, PVC coated )mat out, then throw the bean bags. Suitable for both inside and outside, 150x150 cm. With 5 colourful bean bags! 71 181 4125 Prices available on request. Please contact us.

All Balls Fly … High! Maxi Zip Play®

New

b c

a Play® a Zip DBGM certified. This new concept, with its flexible target area, is a challenging game with many variations in use. By creating a sweet-point in the 100% cotton cloth, you therefore have an excellent catapulting effect. Exercises: play against an object, play against an object over a piece of rope or cable, pass a ball around in a circle, use as a one person game or as a team game. Consisting of: • 2 Zip Play® racquets • 1 small 45 g bean bag • 1 Mini Koosh ball. Colours depend on stocks. 71 134 5100

Zip Play® d Maxi DBGM approved. The big

Maxi Zip Play® Set Koosh Ball b Mini ø 65 mm, 50 g for

Now! Order

Zip-Play or Trampolino. 71 109 3618-1

Consisting of: • 2 Zip Play® bats/playing sheets • 1x ø 11 cm Koosh ball • 1x 120 g bean bag • 1x 51/2” Playground ball 71 134 5197

Bags c Bean 45 g bags for Zip Play or Trampolino. 100% cotton. 7x7x2 cm. 71 134 5155

brother to Zip Play® that can be played with two or four people or as a team game. Playing it requires coordination and agility and it is of great therapeutic and educational benefit. A strong 100% cotton sheet, LxW: 106x58 cm, with 2 ash bars 80 cm long. Rainbow balls ø 18 cm, Koosh balls, playground balls, throwing balls and 120 g bean bags are all suitable to use with Maxi Zip Play®. 71 134 5171

Price for 5

6 bats with ball

Vortex Mega Howler h Nerf The flying siren… you can hear it as

New g

j Cone Child, cone and rings and the game f Lolli-Pop Bats and Bat Game e Ball This is a kit that has great therapeutic and educational value for both general and handicapped sports. It is also great fun. You can hit the ball over a net, into goals or dribble around posts. It can even be used in water, where you can play with it from either an air mattress or a float. It is also suitable for people in wheelchairs because the equipment is perfectly safe. The PVC bats have foam ends attached to one end but nevertheless are impact-proof. The set contains 6 bats and 1 ball. Length 90 cm, approx. 200 g. 71 133 8300

A new leisure game! Every shot hits the spot with this bat head, ø 24 cm, no risk of injury. Can be used with soft balls, Indiaca, shuttlecocks, rubber balls or light playing balls. Length 62 cm, approx. 260 g. 71 133 9749 Blue Each 71 133 9752 Red Each

Balls g Soft To train for tennis, basketball, volleyball and all other ball sports without any fear. These balls are great for handicapped and older people. In tennis ball design. 71 109 8105-4 ø 70 mm, yellow Each 71 109 8118-2 ø 90 mm, yellow Each

is complete. This game sets no boundaries on the imagination. Different cones (by colour and number) as well as coloured rings make a wide variety of games: throwing at a target, throwing at different coloured cones or with different coloured rings, learning colours, using cones with numbers as a points system. Cone Made from unbreakable polyethylene, easily stacked, strong and fully weather proof. 205x205x380 mm 71 130 0606-5 Yellow Each 71 130 0619-5 Red Each

Tennis Rings k Tournament Micro-cellular rubber. 71 135 3512-2 Blue 71 135 3525-2 Red 71 135 3538-2 White

Each Each Each

Phone: +49 53 57-181 543 · Fax: +49 53 57-181 921 · www.sport-thieme.com

New Game i Throwing The exciting ring throwing game made from a great soft natural rubber makes everyone want more. Develops dexterity and motor skills. Four rings, ø 22 cm, target height: 15 cm. 71 217 4600

Rings Air filled in blue and red. 71 135 3802-3 Blue 71 135 3815-3 Red

Each Each